A320 Displays & Panels

Table of Contents
A320 D ISPLAYS ANd P ANELS

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
T ABLE OF C ONtENtS
1.0 AIRPLANE GENERAL 9.0 FUEL
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS 10.0 HYDRAULICS
3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING 11.0 ICE AND RAIN
4.0 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT 12.0 LANDING GEAR
5.0 ENGINES AND APU 13.0 NAVIGATION - AUTOFLIGHT
6.0 FIRE PROTECTECTION 14.0 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS 15.0 PNEUMATICS
8.0 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS 16.0 WARNING SYSTEMS
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/menu.html[23.01.2021 21:27:21]
Table of Contents
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/menu.html[23.01.2021 21:27:21]
Index | Section 17.0.0
A320 D iSPLAYS AND P ANELS

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 17.0 17.0 INDEX
17.0 I NDEX T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

1.0 AIRPLANE GENERAL
Index A Index N 2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
Index B Index O 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING
4.0 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

Index C Index P
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
Index D Index Q 6.0 FIRE PROTECTECTION
7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

Index E Index R
8.0 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Index F Index S
9.0 FUEL
Index G Index T 10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN

Index H Index U
12.0 LANDING GEAR
Index I Index V 13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
Index J Index W 14.0 FLT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
15.0 PNEUMATICS
Index K Index X
16.0 WARNING SYSTEMS
Index L Index Y 17.0 INDEX
Index M Index Z
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/TOCindex/sys-17.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:24]
Index | Section 17.0.0
A320 Displays and Panels | Panels
A320 D iSpLAYS AND P ANELS

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NStRUMENt P ANEL T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
6.0 FIRE PROTECTECTION
7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS
9.0 FUEL
C ONtROL P EDEStAL O VERHEAD P ANEL 10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
14.0 FLT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
15.0 PNEUMATICS
Tap on the appropriate picture to view any

display, switch, or control panel. This
ebook provides an interactive illustration of
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/panels.html[23.01.2021 21:27:38]
A320 Displays and Panels | Panels
the A-320-200 aircraft systems.
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/panels.html[23.01.2021 21:27:38]
1.0 Airplane General Table of Contents | Section 1.0.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 1.0 1.0 AIRPLANE GENERAL
1.0 A IRPLANE G ENERAL T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

1.1.0 AIRPLANE GENERAL INFORMATION
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
1.2.0 COCKPIT DOOR CONTROLLER PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

1.3.0 COCKPIT DOOR PANEL
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
1.4.0 OPERATING LIMITS
1.5.0 SYSTEM LIMITS 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS
9.0 FUEL
10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/airplane-general/sys-1.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:39]
1.0 Airplane General Table of Contents | Section 1.0.0
2.0 Communications Table of Contents | Section 2.0.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 2.0 2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
2.0 C OMMUNIcAtIONS T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

2.1.0 AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
2.2.0 CALLS PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

2.3.0 EXTERNAL SERVICE INTERPHONE PANEL
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
2.4.0 RADIO MANAGEMENT PANEL
2.5.0 RECORDER PANEL 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS
9.0 FUEL
10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/communications/sys-2.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:41]
2.0 Communications Table of Contents | Section 2.0.0
3.0 Electrical and Lighting Table of Contents | Section 3.0.0
A320 D ISPLAYS AND P ANELS

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 3.0 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LT
3.0 E LEctRIcAL AND L IGHtING T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

3.1.0 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DISPLAYS
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
3.2.0 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

3.3.0 EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
3.4.0 INSTRUMENT LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS
3.5.0 EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

3.6.0 INTEGRAL AND CABIN SIGNS LIGHTING CP
9.0 FUEL
3.7.0 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/electrical/sys-3.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:42]
3.0 Electrical and Lighting Table of Contents | Section 3.0.0
4.0 Emergency Equipment Table of Contents | Section 4.0.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 4.0 4.0 EMERGENCY EQUIP
4.0 E MERGENcY E QUIPMENt T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

4.1.0 EMERGENCY OXYGEN SYSTEMS
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
4.2.0 EMERGENCY EXITS AND SLIDES 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

4.3.0 EMERGENCY EVACUATION PANEL
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
4.4.0 OXYGEN PANEL
7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS
9.0 FUEL
10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/emergency-equipment/sys-4.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:44]
4.0 Emergency Equipment Table of Contents | Section 4.0.0
5.0 Engines and APU Table of Contents | Section 5.0.0
A320 D ISpLAYS AND P ANELS

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 5.0 5.0 ENGINES AND APU
5.0 E NGINES AND APU T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

5.1.0 APU CONTROL PANEL
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
5.2.0 AUTO THRUST SYSTEM FMA 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

5.3.0 ENGINE WARNING AND SYSTEM DISPLAYS
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
5.4.0 ENGINE THRUST LEVERS
5.5.0 ENGINE START AND IGNITION PANEL 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

5.6.0 ENGINE MANUAL START AND N1 MODE PANEL
9.0 FUEL
5.7.0 IAE V2527/22 ENGINES 10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/engines/sys-5.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:45]
5.0 Engines and APU Table of Contents | Section 5.0.0
6.0 Fire Protection Table of Contents | Section 6.0.0
A320 D ISpLAYS ANd P ANELS

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 6.0 6.0 FIRE PROTECTION
6.0 F IRE P ROtEctION T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

6.1.0 A319 CARGO SMOKE PANEL
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
6.2.0 A320 CARGO SMOKE PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

6.3.0 ENGINE AND APU FIRE PANEL
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
6.4.0 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS
9.0 FUEL
10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/fire-protect/sys-6.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:47]
6.0 Fire Protection Table of Contents | Section 6.0.0
7.0 Flight Controls Table of Contents | Section 7.0.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 7.0 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS
7.0 F LIGHt C ONtROLS T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

7.1.0 FLAP LEVER
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
7.2.0 FLIGHT CONTROL DISPLAYS 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

7.3.0 FLIGHT CONTROL LAWS
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
7.4.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS DESCRIPTION
7.5.0 FLIGHT CONTROL COMPUTERS 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

7.6.0 PITCH TRIM WHEELS
9.0 FUEL
7.7.0 RUDDER TRIM PANEL 10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN

7.8.0 SIDE STICK
12.0 LANDING GEAR
7.9.0 SIDE STICK PRIORITY LIGHTS 13.0 AUTO FLIGHT

7.10.0 SPEED BRAKE LEVER
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/flight-controls/sys-7.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:49]
7.0 Flight Controls Table of Contents | Section 7.0.0
8.0 Flight Instruments Table of Contents | Section 8.0.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 8.0 8.0 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
8.0 F LIGHt I NStRUMENtS T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

8.1.0 EFIS CONTROL PANEL
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
8.2.0 NAVIGATION DISPLAY SYMBOLS 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

8.3.0 PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY SYMBOLS
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
8.4.0 SWITCHING PANEL
8.5.0 CLOCKS 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

8.6.0 STANDBY INSTRUMENTS
9.0 FUEL
8.7.0 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT SYSTEM 10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/flight-instruments/sys-8.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:51]
8.0 Flight Instruments Table of Contents | Section 8.0.0
9.0 Fuel System Table of Contents | Section 9.0.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 9.0 9.0 FUEL SYSTEM
9.0 F UEL S YStEM T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

9.1.0 FUEL SYSTEM DISPLAY
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
9.2.0 FUEL CONTROL PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

9.3.0 FUEL SYSTEM
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS
9.0 FUEL
10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/fuel/sys-9.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:52]
9.0 Fuel System Table of Contents | Section 9.0.0
10.0 Hydraulic System Table of Contents | Section 10.0.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 10.0 10.0 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
10.0 H YDRAULIc S YStEM T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

10.1.0 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DISPLAYS
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
10.2.0 HYDRAULIC CONTROL PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

10.3.0 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS
9.0 FUEL
10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/hydraulics/sys-10.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:54]
10.0 Hydraulic System Table of Contents | Section 10.0.0
11.0 Ice and Rain Table of Contents | Section 11.0.0
A320 D iSPLAYS AND P ANELS

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 11.0 11.0 ICE AND RAIN
11.0 I cE AND R AiN T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

11.1.0 ANTI-ICE CONTROL PANEL
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
11.2.0 WINDSHIELD WIPER PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

11.3.0 ANTI-ICE SYSTEM
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS
9.0 FUEL
10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/ice-rain/sys-11.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:56]
11.0 Ice and Rain Table of Contents | Section 11.0.0
12.0 Landing Gear Table of Contents | Section 12.0.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 12.0 12.0 LANDING GEAR
12.0 L ANDING G EAR T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

12.1.0 BRAKES AND ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE INDICATOR
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
12.2.0 LANDING GEAR SYSTEM DISPLAYS 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

12.3.0 EMERGENCY GRAVITY GEAR EXTENSION HANDLE
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
12.4.0 LANDING GEAR LEVER
12.5.0 LANDING GEAR PANEL 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

12.6.0 PARKING BRAKE HANDLE
9.0 FUEL
12.7.0 NOSE WHEEL STEERING TILLER 10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN

12.8.0 BRAKE SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
12.0 LANDING GEAR
12.9.0 LANDING GEAR SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/landing-gear/sys-12.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:57]
12.0 Landing Gear Table of Contents | Section 12.0.0
13.0 Navigation Auto Flight Table of Contents | Section 13.0.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 13.0 13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
13.0 A UtO F LIGHt T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

13.1.0 AUTO FLIGHT DESCRIPTION
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
13.2.0 FLIGHT CONTROL UNIT 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

13.3.0 FLIGHT MODE ANNUNCIATIONS
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
13.4.0 FLIGHT MANEUVERS
7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS
9.0 FUEL
10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/nav-autoflight/sys-13.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:27:59]
13.0 Navigation Auto Flight Table of Contents | Section 13.0.0
14.0 Navigation FMS Table of Contents | Section 14.0.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 14.0 14.0 FLT MGT SYSTEM
14.0 F LIGHt M ANAGEmENt S YStEm T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

14.1.0 AIR DATA INERTIAL REFERENCE SYSTEM
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
14.2.0 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT GUIDANCE COMPUTER 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

14.3.0 DIRECT TO PAGE
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
14.4.0 PROGRESS PAGE
14.5.0 PERFORMANCE PAGE 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

14.6.0 INITIALIZATION PAGE
9.0 FUEL
14.7.0 DATA INDEX PAGE 10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN

14.8.0 FLIGHT PLAN PAGE
12.0 LANDING GEAR
14.9.0 RADIO NAV PAGE 13.0 AUTO FLIGHT

14.10.0 FUEL PREDICT PAGE
15.0 PNEUMATICS
14.11.0 SECONDARY INDEX PAGE
14.12.0 MENU PAGE 17.0 INDEX
14.13.0 AIRPORT PAGE
14.14.0 DIGITAL DISTANCE RMI
14.15.0 AIR DATA INERTIAL REFERENCE SYSTEM
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/nav-flight-management/sys-14.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:28:01]
14.0 Navigation FMS Table of Contents | Section 14.0.0
14.16.0 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT AND GUIDANCE COMPUTER
15.0 Pneumatics Table of Contents | Section 15.0.0
A320 D ISpLAYS ANd P ANELS

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 15.0 15.0 PNEUMATICS
15.0 P NEUMAtIcS T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

15.1.0 PNEUMATIC SYSTEM DISPLAYS
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
15.2.0 AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

15.3.0 CABIN PRESSURIZATION CONTROL PANEL
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
15.4.0 CARGO HEAT CONTROL PANEL
15.5.0 VENTILATION CONTROL PANEL 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

15.6.0 PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
9.0 FUEL
10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/pneumatics/sys-15.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:28:02]
15.0 Pneumatics Table of Contents | Section 15.0.0
16.0 Warning Systems Table of Contents | Section 16.0.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SECTION 16.0 16.0 WARNING SYSTEMS
16.0 W ARNING S YStEMS T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

16.1.0 ECAM CONTROL PANEL
2.0 COMMUNICATIONS
16.2.0 WEATHER RADAR/PWS CONTROL PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

16.3.0 TCAS/ATC TRANSPONDER CONTROL PANEL
5.0 ENGINES AND APU
16.4.0 WARNING LIGHTS, SWITCHES AND BUTTONS
16.5.0 EGPWS CONTROL PANEL 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS
9.0 FUEL
10.0 HYDRAULICS
11.0 ICE AND RAIN
12.0 LANDING GEAR
13.0 AUTO FLIGHT
15.0 PNEUMATICS
17.0 INDEX
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/warning-systems/sys-16.0.0.html[23.01.2021 21:28:04]
16.0 Warning Systems Table of Contents | Section 16.0.0
Index Aa - Ao | Section 17.1.0
A320 D IsPLaYs aND P aNELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX A a - A O S ECTION 17.1.0

A320 Dimensions Alpha Protection Symbol Index A
Abnormal Attitude Law Extreme Limits Alternate Law Index Aa - Ao
Abnormal Attitude Law Normal Limits Altitude Constraint Index Ap - Az
AC 1 Bus Failure SD Altitude Indicator Index B
Acceleration Altitude Altitude Range Switch Index C
AC Essential Feed Switch Altitude Selector Index D
Active Flight Plan Route Analog Chronometer Index E
Actual Airspeed Reference Analog Vertical Speed Pointer Index F
Actual Track Diamond Annunciator Light Switch Index G
ADIRS Control Panel Antenna Locations Index H
ADIRU and Avionics Vent Light Anti-ice Control Panel Index I, J, K
Aft Isolation Valve Switch Anti-skid Switch Index L
Air Conditioning Control Panel Index M
Airplane Dimensions Index N
Airport Page - MCDU Index O
AIR DATA Selector Index P, Q
Alpha Floor Index R
Alpha Max Index S, T
Alpha Maximum Symbol Index U, V, W
Alpha Protection | Normal Law | Section 7.3.15 Index X, Y, Z
Index Aa - Ao | Section 17.1.0
Index B | Section 17.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX B S ECTION 17.2.0

Bank Angle Limit Indicator Index A
Bank Angle Protection Index B
Barometric Selector Index C
Battery Indicator Index D
Battery Switches Index E
Beacon Light Switch Index F
Bearing/Distance MCDU Index G
Blower Fan Switch - Ventilation Index H
Blue Electric Hydraulic Pump Switch Index I, J, K
Brake Fan Switch Index L
Brakes and Accumulator Pres Indicator Index M
Bus Tie Switch Index N
Index O
Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index B | Section 17.2.0
Index C | Section 17.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX C S ECTION 17.3.0

Cabin Pressurization Control Panel Index A
Cabin Oxygen Masks Index B
Calls Panel Index C
Captain and Purser Switch Index D
Cargo Fire Ext Schematic A320 Index E
Cargo Fire Ext Schematic A319 Index F
Cargo Heat Control Panel Index G
Cargo Smoke Panel A319 Index H
Cargo Smoke Panel A320 Index I, J, K
Center Fuel Tank Pump Switch Index L
Check Altimeter Annunciation Index M
Check Take Off Data Page - MCDU Index N
Chronometer ND Switches Index O
Clear ECAM Button Index P, Q
Climb Wind Page - MCDU Index R
Clocks Description Index S, T
Cockpit and Cabin Zone Temp Selectors Index U, V, W
Cruise Page - MCDU Index X, Y, Z
Cruise Wind Page - MCDU
Index C | Section 17.3.0
Index D | Section 17.4.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX D S ECTION 17.4.0

Data Display Buttons Door Slides Index A
Data Index Page - MCDU Dual AC Bus Failure SD Index B
Database Hold Page - MCDU Dual AC Bus Failure Gear Down Index C
Decelerate Point Dual AC Bus Failure Speed 100 Index D
Descent Page - MCDU Index E
Descent Wind Page - MCDU Index F
Decision Height Flags Index G
Digital Chronometer Index H
Digital Vertical Speed Indication Index I, J, K
Direct To Page - MCDU Index L
Direct Law Index M
Digital Distance RMI Index N
Discharge Agent 2 Light Index O
Discharge Light - Cargo Smoke Index P, Q
Discharge Switch - Cargo Smoke Index R
Discharge Toggle Switch Index S, T
Ditching Switch Index U, V, W
DME or TACAN Symbol Index X, Y, Z
Dome Light Switch
Index D | Section 17.4.0
Index Ea - Em | Section 17.5.0
A320 D IsPLAYs AND P ANELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX E A - E M S ECTION 17.5.0

ECAM All Button Emergency Generator Test Switch Index A
ECAM Bleed Page SD Emerg Gravity Gear Ext Handle Index B
ECAM Control Panel Emergency Oxygen Systems Index C
ECAM/ND XFR Selector Index D
Econ Speed Range Index E
EFIS Control Panel Index Ea - Em
EGPWS Control Panel Index En - Ez
EIS DMC Selector Index F
Electrical Control Panel Index G
Electrical System Displays Index H
Electrical System Schematic Index I, J, K
Emergency Call Switch Index L
Emergency Cancel Button Index M
Emergency Electrical Control Panel Index N
Emerg Evac Command Switch Index O
Emerg Evac Horn Shut Off Button Index P, Q
Emergency Evacuation Panel Index R
Emergency Exits and Slides Index S, T
Emergency Exit Light Switch Index U, V, W
Emerg Gen Failure In Flight SD Index X, Y, Z
Index Ea - Em | Section 17.5.0
Index F | Section 17.6.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX F S ECTION 17.6.0

FADEC Signal Schematic Fuel Control Panel Index A
Fail Annunciation - MCDU Fuel Cross Feed Switch Index B
FCU Lighting Control Knobs Fuel Limits Index C
Flap Limits Fuel Tank Pump Switches Index D
Flap Mode Switch GPWS Fuel Mode Select Switch Index E
Flare Mode Fuel Predict Page - MCDU Index F
Flight Control Computers Fuel Recirculation System Index G
Flight Control Laws Fuel System Displays Index H
Flight Controls Fuel Tank Schematic Index I, J, K
Flight Control SD Index L
Flight Control Surfaces Index M
Flight Control Unit Index N
Flight Director Button Index O
Flight Director Symbol Index P, Q
Flight Interphone Jack Index R
Flight Interphone Panel Index S, T
Flight Mode Annunciations Index U, V, W
Flight Path Director Index X, Y, Z
Freq Display and Transfer Button
Frequency Selector
Index F | Section 17.6.0
Index G | Section 17.7.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX G S ECTION 17.7.0

Galley and Cabin Switch Index A
Generator Disconnect SD Index B
Generator Switch Index C
Generator Line 1 SD Index D
Generator 1 Line Switch Index E
Go-Around Procedure Index F
Go Around Page - MCDU Index G
GPWS Index H
GPWS - G/S Button Index I, J, K
GPWS System Switch Index L
GPWS G/S Mode Switch Index M
Green Dot Speed Index N
Ground Control Switch Index O
Ground Mode - Normal Law Index P, Q
Ground Reference Symbol Index R
Ground Roll Guidance Index S, T
Ground Service Locations Index U, V, W
Ground Spoilers System Display Index X, Y, Z
Index G | Section 17.7.0
Index H | Section 17.8.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX H S ECTION 17.8.0

Heading/Track Selector Index A
High AOA Protection Symbol Index B
High Speed Protection Symbol Index C
High Speed Stability Index D
History Wind Page - MCDU Index E
Hold at Waypoint Page - MCDU Index F
Holding Pattern Index G
Hot Air Fault SD Index H
Hot Air Switch - Air Conditioning Index I, J, K
Hot Air Switch - Cargo Heat Index L
Hydraulic Control Panel Index M
Hydraulic Power Transfer Unit Switch Index N
Hydraulic Ram Air Turbine Switch Index O
Hydraulic System Displays Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index H | Section 17.8.0
Index I | Section 17.9.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX I S ECTION 17.9.0

Identification Button Transponder Index A
ILS Autoland Index B
ILS Button Index C
ILS Front Course Pointer Index D
ILS Information Index E
ILS Message Index F
ILS No Autoland Index G
Image Selector Weather Radar Index H
Initialization Pages - MCDU Index I, J, K
Initialization Page A - MCDU Index I
Initialization Page B - MCDU Index J
Instrument Lighting Control Panels Index K
Instrument Panel Index L
Intercept Point Index M
Interior Lighting Control Panel Index N
Interphone/Radio Switch Index O
Ice and Standby Compass Light Switch Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index I | Section 17.9.0
Index J | Section 17.10.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX J S ECTION 17.10.0

THIS PAGE IS BLANK Index A
Index B
Index C
Index D
Index E
Index F
Index G
Index H
Index I, J, K
Index I
Index J
Index K
Index L
Index M
Index N
Index O
Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index J | Section 17.10.0
Index K | Section 17.11.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX K S ECTION 17.11.0

Index B
Index C
Index D
Index E
Index F
Index G
Index H
Index I, J, K
Index I
Index J
Index K
Index L
Index M
Index N
Index O
Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index K | Section 17.11.0
Index L | Section 17.12.0
A320 D IsPlaYs aND P aNEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX L S ECTION 17.12.0

Landing Elevation Low Speed Stability Index A
Landing Flap 3 Switch GPWS Lowest Selectable Speed Index B
Landing Gear Indicator Lights Index C
Landing Gear Lever Index D
Landing Gear Panel Index E
Landing Gear System Displays Index F
Landing Light Switches Index G
Lateral Rev Dept Airport Index H
Lateral Rev Dest Airport Index I, J, K
Lateral Rev at PPOS Index L
Lateral Rev at Waypoint Index M
Leak System Schematic Index N
Level Off Point Index O
Line Select Keys Index P, Q
Load Alleviation Function Index R
Load Factor Demand Mode Index S, T
Load Factor Limitation Index U, V, W
Localizer and Glideslope Index X, Y, Z
Localizer Button
Low Energy Warning
Index L | Section 17.12.0
Index M | Section 17.13.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX M S ECTION 17.13.0

Mach Number Index A
Managed/Managed Approach Index B
Managed/Selected Approach Index C
Manual Cabin Pressurization SD Index D
Manual Vertical Speed Control Switch Index E
Marker Beacon Indication Index F
Master Caution Lights Index G
Master Warning Lights Index H
Max Side Stick Deflection Index I, J, K
Maximum Structural Weights Index L
MCDU Index M
MCDU Menu Annunciator Index N
Mechanical Backup Flight Controls Index O
Metric Altitude Button Index P, Q
Minimum Flap Retraction Speed Index R
Minimum Slat Retract Speed Index S, T
Missed Approach Route Index U, V, W
Mode Select Switch - Cabin Pressure Index X, Y, Z
Mode Selector - EFIS
Index M | Section 17.13.0
Index N | Section 17.14.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX N S ECTION 17.14.0

Nav and Standby Nav Buttons Index A
Navigation and Logo Light Switch Index B
Navigation Display Symbology Index C
NDB Symbol Index D
Next Flap Extend Speed Index E
No Flaps No Slats Approach Index F
Nose Wheel Steering Tiller Index G
No Smoking Light Switch Index H
Normal Law Description Index I, J, K
Normal Operational Configuration SD Index L
Index M
Index N
Index O
Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index N | Section 17.14.0
Index O | Section 17.15.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX O S ECTION 17.15.0

On/Off Switch - RMP Index A
On Voice Button - RMP Index B
Overhead Integral Lighting Knob Index C
Over Speed Protection Index D
Over Wing Slides Index E
Oxygen Crew Supply Switch Index F
Oxygen Mask Manual On Switch Index G
Index H
Index I, J, K
Index L
Index M
Index N
Index O
Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index O | Section 17.15.0
Index P | Section 17.16.0
A320 D IspLaYs aND P aNELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX P S ECTION 17.16.0

PA Reception Knob and Trans Button Predictive Windshear Alert Warning Index A
Pack 1 Overheat SD Predictive Windshear Description Index B
Pack Flow Selector Predictive Windshear Symbol Index C
Parking Brake Handle Primary Flight Display Symbology Index D
Passenger Oxygen System On Light Probe Locations Index E
Pedestal Flood Lighting Control Knob Progress Page - MCDU Index F
Performance Pages - MCDU Index G
PFD and ND Lighting Control Knobs Index H
PFD TCAS Display Index I, J, K
Pitch Attitude Protection Index L
Pitch Control Index M
Pitch Limit Indicator Index N
Pitch Trim Wheel Index O
Plan Mode Index P, Q
Pneumatics Schematic Index P
Pneumatic System Displays Index Q
Power Transfer Unit Switch Index R
Predictive GPS Page Index S, T
Predictive Windshear Alert Advisory Index U, V, W
Predictive Windshear Alert Caution Index X, Y, Z
Index P | Section 17.16.0
Index Q | Section 17.17.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX Q S ECTION 17.17.0

Index B
Index C
Index D
Index E
Index F
Index G
Index H
Index I, J, K
Index L
Index M
Index N
Index O
Index P, Q
Index P
Index Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index Q | Section 17.17.0
Index R | Section 17.18.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX R S ECTION 17.18.0

Radio Altitude Height Index A
Radio Reception Buttons Index B
Radio Management Panel Index C
Radio Navigation Page - MCDU Index D
Rain Repellant Button Index E
RAT and Emer Gen Man on Switch Index F
Ram Air Switch Index G
Ram Air Turbine Switch - Hydraulic Index H
Range Selector Index I, J, K
Recall ECAM Button Index L
Reception Knobs - ACP Index M
Reconfiguration of FCL Diagram Index N
Recorder Panel Index O
Required Accuracy Index P, Q
Reset Button - ACP Index R
Reverse Thrust Detent Index S, T
Rudder Trim Panel Index U, V, W
Rudder Trim Reset Button Index X, Y, Z
Runway Turn Off Light Switch
Roll Control
Index R | Section 17.18.0
Index S | Section 17.19.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX S S ECTION 17.19.0

Schematic Parking Brake On Start of Climb Index A
Seat Belts Light Switch Status ECAM Button Index B
Secondary Flight Plan Route Step Altitude at Waypoint - MCDU Index C
Sec Index Page - MCDU Strobe Light Switch Index D
Sec Pack Controller Channel Failure Switching Panel Index E
Selected Heading FD Off System Display Air Conditioning Page Index F
Selected Target Altitude System Display APU Page Index G
Selected Target Altitude Indicator System Display Bleed Page Index H
Side Slip Beta Target System Display Electrical Page Index I, J, K
Side Stick Priority Lights System Display Engine Page Index L
Single Engine GA System Display Flight Control Page Index M
Slew Keys - MCDU System Display Fuel Page Index N
Smoke Light System Display Hydraulic Page Index O
Smoke and Discharge Lights System Display Pressurization Page Index P, Q
Speed/Mach Selector System Display Wheels Index R
Speed Trend Arrow System ECAM Buttons Index S, T
Stall Warning Speed System Limits Index S
Standby Airspeed Indicator System Switch GPWS Index Ta - Te
Standby Altimeter System Switch Weather Radar Index Tf- Tz
Standby Attitude Indicator Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index S | Section 17.19.0
Index Index Ta - Te | Section 17.20.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX T A - T E S ECTION 17.20.0

TACAN or DME Symbol Temporary Flight Plan Route Index A
Take Off Page - MCDU Terrain on ND Switch Index B
Take Off Procedure Terrain System Switch Index C
Takeoff and Taxi Light Switch Terrain Switch GPWS Index D
Takeoff Configuration Button Test Button A319 Cargo Smoke Panel Index E
Target Airspeed Pointer Test Button A320 Cargo Smoke Panel Index F
TCAS Failure Indication Test Button APU Fire Panel Index G
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel Test Button Engine Fire Panel Index H
TCAS Fail Flag Index I, J, K
TCAS No Bearing Data Index L
TCAS No Bearing and No Alt Data Index M
TCAS Off Indication Index N
TCAS Off Scale Indication Index O
TCAS Other Traffic Symbol Index P, Q
TCAS Proximate Traffic Symbol Index R
TCAS RA Traffic Symbol Index S, T
TCAS Relative Traffic Index S
TCAS TA Only Indication Index Ta - Te
TCAS TA Traffic Symbol Index Tf- Tz
TCAS Vertical Speed Arrows Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index Index Ta - Te | Section 17.20.0
Index U | Section 17.21.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX U S ECTION 17.21.0

Index B
Index C
Index D
Index E
Index F
Index G
Index H
Index I, J, K
Index L
Index M
Index N
Index O
Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index U
Index V
Index W
Index X, Y, Z
Index U | Section 17.21.0
Index V | Section 17.22.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX V S ECTION 17.22.0

V1, VR, and V2 Speeds Index A
Ventilation Control Panel Index B
Vertical Deviation - MCDU Index C
Vertical Deviation Indication Index D
Vertical Deviation Indicator Index E
Vertical Deviation Scale Index F
Vertical Speed Scale Index G
Vertical Speed/Flight Path Angle Selector Index H
Video In Use Light Index I, J, K
VMAX Index L
Index M
VOR Symbol
Index N
VOR/ADF Switches
Index O
VOR/DME Symbol
Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index U
Index V
Index W
Index X, Y, Z
Index V | Section 17.22.0
Index W | Section 17.23.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX W S ECTION 17.23.0

Warning Lights, Switches and Buttons Index A
Waypoints Index B
Weather Radar Control Panel Index C
Weather Radar Image Selector Index D
Weather Radar Returns Index E
Weather Radar Tilt Selector Index F
Wind Limits Index G
Windshear Switch Index H
Windshield Wiper Panel Index I, J, K
Wing Light Switch Index L
Index M
Index N
Index O
Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index U
Index V
Index W
Index X, Y, Z
Index W | Section 17.23.0
Index X | Section 17.24.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX X S ECTION 17.24.0

Index B
Index C
Index D
Index E
Index F
Index G
Index H
Index I, J, K
Index L
Index M
Index N
Index O
Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index X
Index Y
Index Z
Index X | Section 17.24.0
Index Y | Section 17.25.0
A320 D IsPLays aND P aNELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX Y S ECTION 17.25.0

Yaw Control Index A
Yellow Electric Pump Switch Index B
Index C
Index D
Index E
Index F
Index G
Index H
Index I, J, K
Index L
Index M
Index N
Index O
Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index X
Index Y
Index Z
Index Y | Section 17.25.0
Index Z | Section 17.26.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX Z S ECTION 17.26.0

Index B
Index C
Index D
Index E
Index F
Index G
Index H
Index I, J, K
Index L
Index M
Index N
Index O
Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index X
Index Y
Index Z
Index Z | Section 17.26.0
MCDU | Description | Section 14.2.0
A320 D IspLaYs aNd P aNELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
FMGC D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.2.0

The Flight Management Guidance Computer Previous Section
(FMGC) contains a navigation database Description

which provides navaid auto-tuning, position
Page Title
computation, navigational accuracy checks,
and flight planning through the Line Select Keys
Multifunction Control Display Unit (MCDU). Scratch Pad

The MCDU contains a performance
Slew Keys
database that provides predictions of fuel,
time, distance, speed, and altitude. Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Each FMGC is linked to its own onside
MCDU, RMP, and EFIS control panel. After Alphanumeric Keys
entry of the flight plan and other required Top Annunciator Keys
performance data into the MCDU, the FMGS
Additional Page Arrow
generates the climb and descent profiles
for departure and arrival, provides Page Keys
automatic airplane guidance, and computes BRT/DIM Selector

current and predicted progress along the
MCDU MENU Annunciator
flight plan.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | Description | Section 14.2.0
Radio Management Panel | Frequency Displays and Transfer Button | Section 2.4.0
A320 D IsplAys ANd P ANEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
R AdIO M ANAGEmENT P ANEl S ECTION 2.4.0

F rEquENCy D IsplAys ANd T rANsfEr B uTTON Previous Section
STBY/CRS FREQUENCY DISPLAY - The Frequency Display
standby communication frequency is Radio Selection Buttons

normally displayed in this window. This
Frequency Selector
frequency is changed by rotating the
frequency selector knob and is activated by Nav Buttons
pushing the transfer button. The CRS is On/Off Switch

displayed when a navigation radio is
Next Section
remotely tuned. The transfer button when
pushed, exchanges the active and standby L OCATION
frequencies, and tunes the new active
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
frequency.
ACTIVE FREQUENCY DISPLAY - The active

or selected radio frequency is displayed on
this window. The selected radio is identified
by the illuminated green color radio
selection button. A communication radio is
normally displayed in this window;
however, a navigation radio and course can
be remotely tuned.
TRANSFER BUTTON - The transfer

button when pushed, exchanges the
active and standby frequencies, and
tunes the new active frequency.
Radio Management Panel | Frequency Displays and Transfer Button | Section 2.4.0
Audio Control Panel | Transmission Buttons | Section 2.1.0
A320 D IsplAYs AND P ANEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A uDIO C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 2.1.0

T rANsmIssION B uTTONs Previous Section
When a transmission button is Transmission Buttons
pressed, it selects the Reception Knobs

associated radio for
INT/RAD Switch
transmission and at the same time,
deselects the previously selected radio. On Voice Button
Selection is indicated by illumination of Reset Button

three green lights. The transmission keys
Next Section
all have CALL lights that illuminate with
SELCAL on the VHF and HF radios. L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
VHF/HF - When pressed, allows
communication on applicable transceiver. INT - When pressed, allows communication
CALL flashes when a SELCAL is received on on the flight interphone system. MECH
the applicable radio. flashes when a call is received from the
external service interphone panel.
PA - Used for PA transmission via boom,
oxygen mask, or hand mike. The
transmission button must be pressed and
held to use the PA system.
CAB - When pressed, allows communication

on the cabin interphone system. ATT
flashes when a call is received from a flight
attendant station. Light extinguishes after
60 seconds if not reset.
Audio Control Panel | Transmission Buttons | Section 2.1.0
Instrument Lighting Control Panel | Main Flood and Integral Lighting Panel | Section 3.4.3
A320 D IsplAYs ANd P ANEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NsTrUmENT L IgHTINg C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 3.4.3

Previous Section
PFD & ND Lighting
FCU Lighting
ECAM Lighting
Main Flood and Integral Lighting
Pedestal Flood Lighting
Next Section
L OCATION
M AIN F lOOd ANd I NTEgrAl L IgHTINg P ANEl

MAIN FLOOD LT CONTROL KNOB - The flood
light knob controls the intensity of the
forward instrument flood lighting.
INTEG LT CONTROL KNOB - The Integral

lighting knob controls the intensity of the
center instrument panel and control
pedestal integral lighting.
Instrument Lighting Control Panel | Main Flood and Integral Lighting Panel | Section 3.4.3
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | System Switch | Section 16.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W EAThEr R AdAr ANd PWS C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 16.2.0

S ysTEm S wITCh Previous Section
WEATHER RADAR OPERATION - The System Switch
Weather Radar provides normal weather Image Selector

radar operation plus Doppler detection of
Tilt Selector
turbulence by measuring the velocity of
rain droplets moving parallel to the airplane Gain Selector
flight path. Turbulence may be displayed in Windshear

light rain or entirely outside the
Next Section
precipitation area. Although Doppler cannot
detect clear air turbulence, it can detect L OCATION
turbulence in the presence of rain lighter
than that displayed in the weather-only
mode. Turbulence returns and Level 4 and
higher storms are displayed in magenta.
These areas can be very dangerous.
SYSTEM SWITCH - SYS Switch activates the

weather radar for display on the ND in any
mode except PLAN whenever the switch is
selected to ON.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | System Switch | Section 16.2.0
Speed Brake Lever | Speed Brakes | Section 7.10.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S pEEd B rAkE L EvEr S ECTION 7.10.0

S pEEd B rAkEs Previous Section
A green SPD BRK memo appears on ECAM Speed Brakes
whenever the speed brakes are extended. Ground Spoilers TO

The memo flashes amber if the speed
Ground Spoilers Landing
brakes are extended when the thrust is
above idle. Next Section
Speed brake extension is inhibited under L OCATION

the following conditions:
SEC 1 and 3 fault

Elevator (L or R) fault (only spoilers
3 and 4 are inhibited)
Angle of attack protection is active
Flaps configuration full (both in flight
and on the ground)
Either thrust lever is above MCT
(newer A320s and all A319s) < PREVIOUS NEXT >
ALPHA Floor protection is active
(newer A320s and all A319s) NOTE
On the A320, speed brake deflection is

limited to approximately half with an
autopilot engaged and is achieved with
half speed brake lever deflection. At
high altitudes and slow speeds (above
FL 310 and less than Mach .75), speed
brakes should not be extended more
than half to prevent activation of the
Speed Brake Lever | Speed Brakes | Section 7.10.0
high angle of attack protection.
Cockpit Door Panel | Cockpit Door Lights | Section 1.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C OCkpIT D OOr P ANEl S ECTION 1.3.0

C OCkpIT D OOr L IGHTs Previous Section
OPEN - The OPEN light illuminates Cockpit Door Lights
amber when the door is open or Cockpit Door Switch

not locked. Flashes for 30
Next Section
seconds after the emergency
access code is entered. L OCATION
FAULT - The FAULT light illuminates:
When a system failure is detected

Momentarily when the door is
unlocked using the COCKPIT DOOR
switch, or following entry of the
emergency access code
Illumination of the FAULT light does not

trigger the MASTER WARN, CAUTION lights
or ECAM.
Cockpit Door Panel | Cockpit Door Lights | Section 1.3.0
Switching Panel | ATT HDG Selector | Section 8.4.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S wITChINg P ANEl S ECTION 8.4.0

Previous Section
ATT HDG Selector
AIR DATA Selector
EIS DMC Selector
ECAM / ND XFR Selector
ATT HDG S ElECTOr Next Section
When the ATT HDG Selector is selected to: SWITCHING PANEL - Four selectors on the L OCATION
forward control pedestal allows the pilots to
NORM - IR 1 supplies data to PFD 1, reconfigure display unit sources in case of
ND 1, and DDRMI/VOR DME. IR 2 component failure.
supplies data to PFD 2 and ND 2.
CAPT 3 - IR 3 replaces IR 1 and
supplies data to PFD 1, ND 1, and
DDRMI / VOR DME.
F/O 3 - IR 3 replaces IR 2 and
Switching Panel | ATT HDG Selector | Section 8.4.0
Instrument Lighting Control Panel | ECAM Lighting Control Knobs | Section 3.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NsTrumENT L IGHTING C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 3.4.2

Previous Section
PFD & ND Lighting
FCU Lighting
ECAM Lighting
Next Section
L OCATION
ECAM L IGHTING C ONTrOl K NObs

ECAM UPPER DISPLAY KNOB - The ECAM
UPPER DISPLAY knob controls the intensity
of the upper ECAM display lighting.
ECAM LOWER DISPLAY KNOB - The ECAM

LOWER DISPLAY knob controls the intensity
of the lower ECAM display lighting.
Instrument Lighting Control Panel | ECAM Lighting Control Knobs | Section 3.4.2
ECAM Control Panel | Description | Section 16.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
ECAM C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 16.1.0

Previous Section
Description
TO Configuration
Emergency Cancel
System Buttons
All Button
D EsCrIpTION Clear Button
The ECAM System presents airplane engine Status Button
and system data on two identical CRT Recall Button

displays located on the center instrument
Display Control Knobs
panel below the glareshield. The upper
screen is the Engine/Warning Display Next Section
(E/WD) and the lower screen is the System

Display (SD). L OCATION
ENGINE WARNING DISPLAY - The E/WD

provides:
Primary engine instruments

information and fuel quantity
indication
Flap/slat position information
Warning and caution information,
and memo messages concerning < PREVIOUS NEXT >
airplane system status
ECAM CLASSIFICATIONS - ECAM Warnings

ECAM Control Panel | Description | Section 16.1.0
and Cautions are divided into three

classifications:
Level 3: Immediate action required -

Red ECAM, Master Warning light,
and a Continuous Repetitive Chime
(CRC)
Level 2: Crew awareness - Amber
ECAM, Master Caution light, and
single chime
Level 1: Crew monitoring - Amber
ECAM
Pitch Trim Wheels | Section 7.6.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P ITCH T rIm W HEEl S ECTION 7.6.0

The Pitch Trim Wheel provides mechanical
Previous Section
control of horizontal stabilizer trim if green
or yellow hydraulic pressure is available. Pitch Trim Wheels
Next Section
Trim wheels have priority over electrical
control. Use of trim wheels does not
L OCATION
disconnect the ELACs; the override
mechanism ensures the computers remain
synchronized with the manually selected
position.
Trim wheels must be used when pitch direct

law is in effect. Pitch trim is automatically
reset to 0 following touchdown as the pitch
attitude becomes less than 2.5°. The reset
function is inoperative when the green or
yellow system is unpressurized.
CG SCALE - The CG Scale indicates relation

between CG location and pitch trim setting.
TRIM POSITION SCALE - Trim Position Scale

indicates trim position in degrees. Normal
takeoff range is marked by a green band.
Pitch Trim Wheels | Section 7.6.0
Engine Thrust Levers | Thrust Lever Detents | Section 5.4.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NgINE T hrusT L EvErs S ECTION 5.4.0

T hrusT L EvEr D ETENTs Previous Section
THRUST LEVER DESCRIPTION - Two thrust Thrust Lever Detents
levers control engine thrust, or set the ATHR Disconnect

authority of the auto thrust system. The
Rev Thrust Detent
levers can only be moved manually; they
do not move automatically. Next Section
When the thrust levers are moved, they L OCATION

transmit signals to the FADEC, which
computes the thrust rating limit and EPR. If
a thrust lever is set in a detent, the FADEC
selects the rating limit corresponding to
that detent. If the thrust lever is set
between two detents, the FADEC selects
the rating limit corresponding to the higher
detent. This limit is displayed on the upper
ECAM.
There are five positions defined by stops or

detents:
Takeoff / Go-Around (TO/GA)

Flex/Max Continuous Thrust
(FLX/MCT)
Climb (CL)
Forward Idle
Max Reverse
Engine Thrust Levers | Thrust Lever Detents | Section 5.4.0
Engine Start and Ignition Panel | Engine Master Switch | Section 5.5.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NgINE S TArT ANd I gNITION P ANEl S ECTION 5.5.0

E NgINE M AsTEr S wITCh Previous Section
OFF - When OFF is selected, the HP and LP Eng Master Switch
fuel valves close, ignition is turned OFF, Eng Fire/Fault Light

and both channels of the FADEC are reset.
Eng Mode Selector
ON - Selecting ENG MASTER switch to ON: Eng Mode Continued
Opens the LP fuel valve if the ENG FADEC Schematic
FIRE switch is IN Next Section

Initiates an automatic start, if the
ENG MAN START switch is OFF L OCATION
Initiates a manual start if the MAN
START switch is ON
Engine Start and Ignition Panel | Engine Master Switch | Section 5.5.0
Rudder Trim Panel | Rudder Trim Selector | Section 7.7.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
R uDDEr T rIM P ANEl S ECTION 7.7.0

R uDDEr T rIM S ElECTOr Previous Section
The rudder trim selector controls the rudder Rudder Trim Selector
trim actuator which moves the neutral Trim Position Indicator

point of the artificial feel at a rate of 1° per
Trim Reset Button
second of rudder travel.
Next Section
The rudder trim selector is deactivated with
autopilot engaged. L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Rudder Trim Panel | Rudder Trim Selector | Section 7.7.0
Flap Lever | Flap Description | Section 7.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lAp L EvEr S ECTION 7.1.0

D EsCrIpTION Previous Section
FLAP LEVER - The flaps are powered by both the green Flap Description
Commands flaps and yellow hydraulic systems. If one Flap Protections

and slats for hydraulic system fails, the associated
Flap Limits
simultaneous surfaces extend and retract at half speed.
operation to If one SFCC fails, all of the flaps and slats Next Section
selected operate at half speed.

position. Lever
L OCATION
must be pulled out of detent prior to
positioning. Detents are provided at
positions 1 and 3 to avoid excessive
flap/slat travel by a single action.
When the FLAPS lever is in any position

other than 0 in flight, idle RPM is increased
(approach idle) and continuous ignition
activated.
The five slat and two flap panels on each

wing are electrically controlled and
hydraulically actuated via inputs from the
flap lever. Signals from the FLAPS lever
position are transmitted to two slat flap
control computers (SFCCs). The slats are
powered by both the green and blue
hydraulic systems.
Flap Lever | Flap Description | Section 7.1.0
Parking Brake Handle | Description | Section 12.6.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P ArkINg B rAkE H ANdlE S ECTION 12.6.0

SETTING PARKING BRAKE - The parking Parking Brake Handle
brake is set by pulling the handle, and then Schematic Parking Brake On
turning it clockwise. Activation of the
Schematic Parking Brake Off
parking brake deactivates all other braking
modes. PARK BRK is displayed on the ECAM Next Section
memo page when the parking brake is set

to ON.
L OCATION
CAUTION
Setting the PARK BRK handle to ON

does not ensure that the parking
brakes are set. Normal brake and
accumulator pressure must be
confirmed on the BRAKES AND
ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE
INDICATOR, click on link to see
indicator with parking brake on.
Parking Brake Handle | Description | Section 12.6.0
Instrument Lighting Control Panel | Pedestal Flood Lighting Control Knob | Section 3.4.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NsTRUMENT L IGHTING C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 3.4.4

Previous Section
PFD & ND Lighting
FCU Lighting
ECAM Lighting
Next Section
L OCATION
P EdEsTAl F lOOd L IGHTING C ONTROl K NOB

The PED Flood lighting knob controls the
intensity of the pedestal flood lighting.
Instrument Lighting Control Panel | Pedestal Flood Lighting Control Knob | Section 3.4.4
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Altitude Range Switch | Section 16.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TCAS/ATC T rANspONdEr C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 16.3.0

A lTITudE R ANGE S wITCH Previous Section
The Altitude Range Switch (labeled Altitude Range
ABOVE/N/BELOW) sets the altitude range Code Window

for displaying intruders (TCAS traffic) on
Mode Selector
the Navigation Displays.
Code Selector
All intruders are reported as a relative
ATC Fail Light
altitude in hundreds of feet from aircraft's
current altitude. A + symbol indicates Ident Button
traffic is above and a - symbol indicates the Transponder Selector

intruder is below (i.e. +02, indicates traffic
Next Section
is 200 feet above aircraft's altitude). The
ABS/REL switch is deactivated. L OCATION
The altitude range settings are:
ABOVE selection displays relative

altitude reporting traffic from 2700
feet below to 7000 feet above
airplane altitude.
N (Normal) selection displays altitude
reporting traffic from 2700 feet
below to 2700 feet above airplane
altitude.
BELOW selection displays altitude < PREVIOUS NEXT >
reporting traffic from 7000 feet
below to 2700 feet above airplane
altitude.
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Altitude Range Switch | Section 16.3.0
ADIRS Control Panel | Data Display Window | Section 14.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
ADIRS C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 14.1.0

D ATA D IsplAY W INdOw Previous Section
The ADIRS computes airplane position, Data Display Window
speed, altitude, attitude, and air data for Data Selector

the displays, flight management guidance
System Selector
system, flight controls, engine controls,
and other systems. Data Entry Keypad
ON Battery Light
The Data Display Window displays the data
selected by the DATA selector. Keyboard IR Lights
entry overrides the display. IR Mode Selectors
ADR Switch
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
ADIRS Control Panel | Data Display Window | Section 14.1.0
Flight Control Computers | Spoiler Elevator Computers | Section 7.5.2
A320 D IsPlAYs ANd P ANEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGHT C ONTrOl C OMPuTErs S ECTION 7.5.2

S POIlEr E lEVATOr C OMPuTErs Previous Section
Description
ELAC
SEC
FAC
SEC - The Spoiler Elevator Computers 1, 2, RESET - Turning the computer OFF then ON
Reconfiguration of FCL Diagram
and 3 command spoiler operation. resets the computer.
Next Section
ON - When the associated flight control FAULT - The associated FAULT Light
computer switch is ON, it engages the illuminates amber: L OCATION
computer and lights are extinguished. The
When a failure is detected
SECs control the following:
During computer's power-up test (8-
Normal roll by controlling the spoilers second duration). This test occurs for
Speed brakes and ground spoilers each flight control computer upon
Alternate pitch (SEC 1 and SEC 2 electrical power application or after
only) electrical transient/interruption.
Direct pitch (SEC 1 and SEC 2 only)
The FAULT light extinguishes when OFF is
Alternate LAF
selected or at completion of satisfactory
Abnormal attitude
power-up test.
Direct roll
OFF - When selected to OFF, the OFF light

illuminates white and disengages the
associated computer.
Flight Control Computers | Spoiler Elevator Computers | Section 7.5.2
Emergency Evacuation Panel | Evacuation Command Switch | Section 4.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E mErGENCY E vACuATION P ANEl S ECTION 4.3.0

E vACuATION S wITCH Previous Section
The emergency evacuation Evacuation Command Switch
signal system alerts the flight Horn Shut Off

attendants to evacuate the
Evacuation Switch
passenger cabin. An EVAC
COMMAND switch is located in Next Section
the cockpit and a guarded EVAC CMD (or

CMD) button is located at each flight EVAC ON - Activates the evacuation alert. L OCATION
attendant panel. The EVAC light flashes red and the
evacuation horn sounds in the cockpit and
Each flight attendant cabin CMD button cabin. Pushing the EVAC COMMAND switch
activates the evacuation signals in the a second time cancels the evacuation alert
cabin and in the cockpit if the evacuation in cockpit and the cabin.
switch is selected to the CAPT & PURS
position. Pressing the CMD button again
FWD/AFT FA P ANEl
cancels the evacuation alert. The EVAC
lights flash at the forward and aft flight
attendant panels and the evacuation tone
sounds in the cabin when the evacuation
alert is active. Pressing the RESET button
at the FA panel silences the evacuation
tone.
Emergency Evacuation Panel | Evacuation Command Switch | Section 4.3.0
Emergency Electrical Control Panel | Emergency Generator Test Switch | Section 3.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E mErgENCY E lECTrICAl C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 3.3.0

E mErgENCY G ENErATOr T EsT S wITCH Previous Section
When pushed and held with Emer Gen Test
only the battery power Gen 1 Line Switch

supplying electrical power, the
RAT and Emer Gen
AC ESS bus is powered by the
static inverter. Normally the Next Section
EMER GEN TEST switch is used by

maintenance.
L OCATION

When pushed and held with the AC buses
normally powered:
The emergency generator is

hydraulically powered provided the
blue electric pump is operating
The AC ESS and DC ESS buses are
connected to the emergency
generator
The ECAM ELEC page is automatically
displayed on the ground
Emergency Electrical Control Panel | Emergency Generator Test Switch | Section 3.3.0
EGPWS Control Panel | Description | Section 16.5.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
EGPWS C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 16.5.0

EGPWS - The EGPWS uses an onboard Description
world-wide terrain database, FMGC 1 Terrain Switch

position, and airplane altitude and flight
System Switch
path to display the proximity of
surrounding terrain on the ND. The G/S Mode
information is provided in a color scheme < PREVIOUS NEXT > Flap Mode
which references the terrain to airplane
GPWS - Below 2450 feet RA, GPWS Landing Flap 3
altitude. Caution and warning alerts, both
monitors for hazardous flight path
aural and visual, are given if the airplane Next Section
conditions and provides visual and aural
approaches threatening terrain. (This
system does not currently account for man-
warnings, alerts or advisories when such L OCATION
conditions are encountered. The GPWS
made obstructions.) The terrain alerting
does not provide an alert for flight toward
functions of the EGPWS are independent of
vertically sheer terrain or slow descents
the current GPWS functions. Failure of the
into terrain while in the landing
additional terrain features does not affect
configuration. False GPWS warnings may
operation of the basic functions of the
occur due to heavy rain, hail, or system
GPWS.
malfunctions.
EGPWS Control Panel | Description | Section 16.5.0
Recorder Panel | Ground Control Switch | Section 2.5.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
R ECOrdEr P ANEl S ECTION 2.5.0

G rOuNd C ONTrOl S WITCH Previous Section
The recorder (RCDR) panel consist of a Ground Control Switch
cockpit voice recorder (CVR) and digital CVR Erase Button

flight data recorder (DFDR) controls. On
CVR Test Button
the ground, the RCDR automatically
energizes for five minutes after electrical Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
power application or continuously if at least
one engine is running. It operates
L OCATION
The CVR and DFDR are automatically
continuously in flight. The system stops energized during the following:
automatically 5 minutes after the last
engine is shutdown. Selecting the GND CTL On the ground for the first five
switch to ON energizes both the CVR and minutes following electrical power
DFDR. application
On the ground with at least one
ON - The ON function energizes engine running
the cockpit voice recorder Continuously in flight regardless if
(CVR) and digital flight data engines are operating
recorder (DFDR). This function The CVR and DFDR both stop
is used to test the CVR and automatically five minutes after the
DFDR. last engine is shut down.
Recorder Panel | Ground Control Switch | Section 2.5.0
Oxygen Panel | Video In Use Light | Section 4.4.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
O XYgEN P ANEl S ECTION 4.4.0

V IdEO IN U sE L IghT Previous Section
The VIDEO IN USE LIGHT Video in Use
illuminates a blue color when the Mask Manual On

cabin video system is powered.
Passenger Oxygen Sys On
Crew Supply
Next Section
L OCATION
Oxygen Panel | Video In Use Light | Section 4.4.0
Calls Panel | Call Buttons | Section 2.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C Alls P ANEl S ECTION 2.2.0

C All B UTTONs Previous Section
MECH Button - The MECH button initiates a Call Buttons
call to ground personnel. When pushed, the Emergency Call

cockpit call light illuminates on the external
Next Section
service interphone panel, and an external
horn sounds. When released, the external L OCATION
horn is silenced. The cockpit call light
remains illuminated until the reset switch,
located on the external service interphone
panel is pushed.
FWD/AFT - When the FWD or AFT call

button is pushed:
A pink light illuminates at the

corresponding flight attendant area
call panel
A "CAPTAIN CALL" message appears
on the corresponding flight
attendant indication panel
A high/low chime sounds through the
corresponding loudspeaker
Calls Panel | Call Buttons | Section 2.2.0
Windshield Wiper Panel | Wiper Selector | Section 11.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W INdsHIEld W IpEr P ANEl S ECTION 11.2.0

W IpEr S ElECTOr Previous Section
DESCRIPTION - Each Wiper Selector
windshield is provided with Rain Repellant Button

two-speed electric wipers
Next Section
that are controlled by
individual WIPER selectors. L OCATION
A rain repellent system is
installed, but is deactivated by some
airlines.
WIPER SELECTOR - When wiper is selected

to:
OFF - Wiper is stowed out of view at

the base of the window.
SLOW - Wiper operates at low speed.
FAST - Wiper operates at high speed.
Windshield Wiper Panel | Wiper Selector | Section 11.2.0
Engine and APU Fire Panel | Engine Fire Switch | Section 6.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NgINE ANd APU F IrE P ANEl S ECTION 6.3.0

Previous Section
Engine Fire Switch
Engine Agent Switch
Engine Test Button
APU Fire Switch
E NgINE F IrE S wITCh APU Agent Switch
ENGINE FIRE WARNING INDICATIONS - An LOOP FAULTS - Loop faults cautions appear APU Test Button
engine fire is indicated by an aural CRC, on the the E/WD; if one loop has a fault, if Next Section
the illumination of the engine's FIRE light two loops have faults, or if the fire
on the Engine Fire panel, illumination of the detection unit fails. L OCATION
engine's FIRE switch on the Engine Start
ENGINE FIRE SWITCH (guarded) - When
and Ignition Panel, illumination of the
the ENG FIRE Switch is released out, an
MASTER WARNING lights, and by an ECAM
electrical signal:
warning.
Silences the aural warning
ENGINE FIRE WARNING CONDITIONS - An
Arms the squibs (Squib light
engine fire warning appears under the
illuminates)
following conditions:
Deactivates the Integrated Drive
Both loops detect a fire Generator (IDG)
One loop detects a fire when the Cuts off the FADEC power supply
other loop is faulty Closes the fuel LP valve
A break in both loops occurs within 5 Closes the hydraulic fire shutoff valve
seconds of each other Closes the engine bleed valve
A fire test is performed Closes the pack flow control valve
Engine and APU Fire Panel | Engine Fire Switch | Section 6.3.0
Hydraulic Control Panel | Engine Pump Switch | Section 10.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YDrAulIC C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 10.2.0

Previous Section
Engine Pump
RAT Manual On
Blue Electric Pump
Power Transfer Unit
E NgINE P ump S wITCh Yellow Electric Pump
ON - When a ENG PUMP switch is FAULT - The ENG PUMP FAULT light Hydraulic Schematic
selected to ON, selection is illuminates amber when:
Next Section
indicated when all lights are
Reservoir low level
extinguished, enabling the L OCATION
Reservoir overheat
engine-driven pumps to pressurize the
Reservoir low air pressure
hydraulic system when the engine is
Reservoir low pressure (inhibited on
running.
the ground with engine stopped)
OFF - When a ENG PUMP switch is selected
The ENG PUMP FAULT FAULT light
to OFF, the engine-driven pump is
extinguishes when the ENG PUMP switch is
depressurized, and the OFF light
selected OFF (except during an overheat,
illuminates white.
when the light remains illuminated as long
as the overheat is present).
Hydraulic Control Panel | Engine Pump Switch | Section 10.2.0
Fuel Control Panel | Wing Tank Pump Switches | Section 9.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 9.2.0

Previous Section
Wing Tank Pump
Fuel Cross Feed
Center Tank Pump
Fuel Mode Select
W ING T ANK P uMp S wITCHEs Fuel Tank Schematic
ON - ON is indicated when OFF - Selecting OFF deactivates associated Next Section
all lights are extinguished wing tank pump and illuminates the OFF
on associated wing tank light on the associated switch. L OCATION
pump switch. ON
FAULT - FAULT lights illuminate amber when
energizes the associated
wing fuel tank pump pressure is low. Fault
fuel tank pump. Pressure relief sequence
lights are inhibited when OFF is selected.
valves ensure center tank fuel feeds before
wing tank fuel.
Fuel Control Panel | Wing Tank Pump Switches | Section 9.2.0
Electrical Control Panel | Commercial Switch | Section 3.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTRICAl C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 3.2.0

Previous Section
Commercial Switch
Battery Indicator
Battery Switches
AC Essential Feed Switch
Galley and Cabin Switch
IDG Switch
Generator Switch
C OMMERCIAl S wITCH
APU Generator Switch
AUTO - When the commercial OFF - When the commercial switch is

Bus Tie Switch
switch is selected to AUTO all selected to OFF, the OFF light illuminates
External Power Switch
lights are extinguished. The white and removes all commercial electrical
AUTO position enables loads as listed above. Electrical Schematic
operation of the airplane's Next Section

commercial electrical loads (on some
airplanes) that includes: L OCATION
Cabin and cargo lights
Water and toilet systems
Drain mast ice protection
Galleys
Passenger entertainment system,
and
In-seat power supply system
Electrical Control Panel | Commercial Switch | Section 3.2.0
Air Conditioning Panel | Pack Flow Selector | Section 15.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A Ir C ONDITIONINg C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 15.2.0

Previous Section
Pack Flow Selector
Temperature Selectors
Hot Air Switch
Pack Switch
Engine Bleed Switch
Ram Air Switch
APU Bleed Switch
P ACK F lOw S ElECTOr Cross Bleed Selector
Pneumatic Schematic
If the APU is supplying bleed However, at idle power the actual air flow
air or one air conditioning will be LO due to insufficient air pressure Leak Detection
pack fails, high flow is from both the IP and HP. Next Section
delivered regardless of pack
The pack flow selector allows for selecting L OCATION
flow selector's position.
the desired pack flow based on the
LO - If LOW flow is selected and the passenger load:
temperature demand cannot be satisfied,
LO is normally selected if less than
the pack reverts to normal flow.
115 passengers are expected
HI - If HIGH flow is selected on the pack NORM is selected if 115 passengers
flow selector, the engine IP air is normally or more are expected
sufficient to supply the required air flow at HI is selected if abnormally hot and
normal thrust power settings. When IP air humid conditions exist.
is not sufficient, the HP air valve will open
to provide additional air pressure.
Air Conditioning Panel | Pack Flow Selector | Section 15.2.0
Anti-ice Panel | Wing Anti-ice Switch | Section 11.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A NTI -I CE P ANEl S ECTION 11.1.0

Previous Section
Wing Anti-ice
Engine Anti-Ice
Probe Window Heat
Wing Anti-Ice Schematic

W INg A NTI - ICE S wITCH
Engine Anti-Ice Schematic
DESCRIPTION - In flight, the ON - The WING ANTI ICE Switch controls
Anti-Ice Locations
three outboard slats on each the wing anti-ice system simultaneously on
wing are anti-iced with both wings. When selected ON: Next Section
pneumatic bleed air. A single

The ON light illuminates blue L OCATION
WING ANTI ICE switch controls a
WING A. ICE message appears on
pneumatic shutoff valve in each wing. The
ECAM MEMO display
valves are inhibited from opening on the
Wing anti-ice valves open if
ground, except for testing. They close
pneumatic supply is available
automatically when a leak is detected and
On the ground, the valves open for
upon touchdown. When either wing anti-ice
30 seconds only (test sequence)
valve is open: EPR limit is automatically
reduced and minimum idle RPM is FAULT - The WING ANTI ICE FAULT Light
increased. The valves close with a loss of illuminates amber if the wing anti-ice valve
electrical power. position disagrees with selected position or
if low pressure is detected. The FAULT light
OFF - When selected to OFF the ON light
also illuminates momentarily when valves
extinguishes and the wing anti-ice valves
are in transit.
close.
Anti-ice Panel | Wing Anti-ice Switch | Section 11.1.0
Cabin Pressurization Control Panel | Manual Vertical Speed Control Switch | Section 15.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C AbIN P rEssurIZATION C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 15.3.0

M ANuAl V ErTICAl S pEEd C ONTrOl S wITCH Previous Section
DESCRIPTION - The MAN V/S Man V/S Control
CTL switch controls the Mode Select

outflow valve position via a DC
Landing Elevation
motor, when the MODE SEL
switch is positioned to MAN. Ditching
This switch is a toggle switch that is spring- Next Section

loaded to neutral. When moved from
neutral it controls the outflow valve WARNING L OCATION
position.
Automatic depressurization will not
UP - Moving the switch UP moves the occur upon landing when the cabin
outflow valve to open. This switch must be pressurization MODE SEL switch is
held in position until the target vertical selected to MAN. Ensure differential
speed is reached, as the outflow valve pressure is zero before opening any
operation is very slow. exit.
DN - Moving this switch to DN moves the

outflow valve toward close.
The ECAM CAB PRESS page displays the

outflow position, cabin differential, cabin
rate of climb, and cabin altitude. The
landing elevation information is removed
from the ECAM CRUISE and CAB PRESS
page.
Cabin Pressurization Control Panel | Manual Vertical Speed Control Switch | Section 15.3.0
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Strobe Light Switch | Section 3.5.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E XTERIOR L IGHTING C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 3.5.0

Previous Section
Strobe Light
Rotating Beacon
Wing
Nav and Logo
Runway Turn Off
S TROBE L IGHT S WITCH Landing Light
Takeoff and Taxi

ON - The ON position
illuminates the strobe lights. Next Section
OFF - The OFF position L OCATION

extinguishes the strobe lights.
AUTO - The AUTO position causes the

strobe lights to illuminate automatically
when the main gear shock absorbers are
not compressed. The strobe lights are
located on each wing tip and the below the
APU tail cone.
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Strobe Light Switch | Section 3.5.0
APU Control Panel | APU Master Switch | Section 5.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
APU C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 5.1.0

APU M AsTEr S wITCh Previous Section
ON - When the APU MASTER FAULT - The FAULT light Master Switch
switch is selected to ON: illuminates amber when an Start Switch

automatic APU shut down
APU ON light Next Section
occurs.
illuminates blue
Electronic Control Box The APU shuts down automatically for the
L OCATION
(ECB) power-up test is following:
initiated
APU air inlet flap opens APU fire (ground only)
APU air inlet flap not open
APU fuel isolation valve
APU over speed or under speed
opens
Abnormal start (e.g., slow, no flame,
APU fuel pump runs (if
no acceleration)
fuel pressure is low)
ECAM APU page is Over-temperature
Low oil pressure
displayed when AC
High oil temperature
busses are powered
DC power loss (BATs OFF when
OFF - When OFF is selected: airplane on batteries only)
ECB failure
After the APU bleed air switch is
Loss of over speed protection
closed the APU continues to run for
Reverse air flow
120 seconds to cool down the APU
After the APU cool down, the ON light
extinguishes, the APU shuts down,
and the APU air inlet flap closes at
7% N.
APU Control Panel | APU Master Switch | Section 5.1.0
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Overhead Integral Light Knob | Section 3.6.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NTEgRAl ANd C ABIN S IgNs L IghTINg C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 3.6.0

O vERhEAd I NTEgRAl L IghTINg K NOB Previous Section
The OVHD INTEG LT Knob Overhead Integral
controls the intensity of the Ice and Stby Compass

overhead panel integral
Dome
lighting.
Annunciator Light
Seat Belts
No Smoking
Emergency Exit
Next Section
L OCATION
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Overhead Integral Light Knob | Section 3.6.0
Cockpit Door Controller | Strike Lights | Section 1.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C OCkpIT D OOr C ONTrOllEr S ECTION 1.2.0

S TrIkE L IghTs Previous Section
TOP, MID, BOT STRIKE LIGHTS Strike Lights
The STRIKE Lights indicate the Pressure Sensors

status of the door's electrical
Channel Lights
latches. The TOP, MID, and BOT
strike green lights illuminate Next Section
when the respective locking latch is faulty.

L OCATION
NOTE
Intrusion resistance has been

demonstrated to be satisfactory with
any two working latches.
Cockpit Door Controller | Strike Lights | Section 1.2.0
Cargo Heat Control Panel | Hot Air Switch | Section 15.4.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ArgO H EAT C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 15.4.0

H OT A Ir S WITCh Previous Section
AUTO - Auto is the normal Cargo Heat Hot Air
switch position and is indicated Aft Isolation Valve

when all lights are
Cargo Temperature
extinguished on the Hot Air
Switch. The AUTO position Next Section
enables the cargo heat temperature

selector to control the aft cargo
L OCATION
temperature.
FAULT - The fault light on the cargo heat

hot air switch illuminates amber when a
duct overheat is detected.
AFT CARGO HEAT - Aft cargo heat is only

available on A-320 aircraft. A cargo heat
controller provides for operation of the
cargo heat inlet and outlet isolation valves,
and a cargo heat extraction fan. Hot trim
air from the packs is provided to control
the aft cargo compartment temperature,
via the hot air pressure regulating valve.
The temperature is controlled by the cargo
heat temperature selector.
Cargo Heat Control Panel | Hot Air Switch | Section 15.4.0
A320 Cargo Smoke Panel | Smoke Light | Section 6.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A320 C ArgO S mOkE P ANEl S ECTION 6.2.0

S mOkE L IghT Previous Section
CARGO SMOKE LIGHT - Smoke Light
Illuminates red when smoke is Test Button

detected in respective cargo
Discharge Switch
compartment. Activation of the
AFT CARGO SMOKE light also closes the aft Discharge Lights
cargo inlet and outlet isolation valves, and Agent 2 Light

shuts off the aft cargo extraction fan.
Cargo Ext Schematic
CARGO SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM - The Next Section

cargo compartments have a smoke
detection system. Cavities in the cargo SMOKE WARNING - Smoke in one cavity L OCATION
compartment have ceiling panels that each activates the smoke warning if:
hold two smoke detectors. Each smoke
Both smoke detectors detect smoke
detector is linked to one of two of the
One smoke detector detects smoke
detection loops. The forward cargo
and the other is inoperative
compartment has one cavity and the aft
cargo compartment has two cavities. The
Smoke Detection Control Unit (SDCU)
receives signals from the detectors and
transmits them to the E/WD and displays a
warning.
A320 Cargo Smoke Panel | Smoke Light | Section 6.2.0
Ventilation Control Panel | Blower Fan Switch | Section 15.5.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
V ENTIlATION C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 15.5.0

B lOwEr F AN S wITCH Previous Section
AUTO - When both avionic Blower Fan
equipment blower and extract Extract Fan

vent fan switches are in AUTO
Cabin Recirculation Fan
the avionics equipment
ventilation system is Normal Configuration
configured for the normal operational FAULT - The fault light on the blower vent Abnormal Configuration
configuration. fan switch illuminates amber when:
Smoke Configuration
OVRD - When the avionics equipment Blower vent air pressure is low Next Section
blower vent fan switch is selected to OVRD Duct overheat
(override), this action turns the blower fan The avionics ventilation computer L OCATION
off and both the vent air inlet and outlet power supply fails
valves will close, configuring the avionics Smoke warning occurs
equipment ventilation system to the A warning horn will also sound for a
abnormal configuration if the extract switch fault, if on the ground with the
is in AUTO. When both blower and extract engines stopped.
vent fans are in OVRD, then the ventilation
system changes to the smoke
configuration.
Ventilation Control Panel | Blower Fan Switch | Section 15.5.0
Engine Manual Start and Ignition Panel | Engine Manual Start Switches | Section 5.6.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NgINE M ANuAl S TArT ANd I gNITION P ANEl S ECTION 5.6.0

E NgINE M ANuAl S TArT S wITCHEs Previous Section
ON - When an ENG MAN Eng Man Start
START switch is selected Eng N1 Mode / Alternate Control

to ON, the engine start
Eng N1 Mode / Rated / Unrated
valve opens, if the ENG
MODE selector is in Next Section
CRANK or IGN/START and N2 is less than

15%. The ON light illuminates blue to
L OCATION
confirm switch is selected to ON.
OFF - When OFF is selected, the associated

engine start valve is closed unless an
automatic start cycle is in progress. No
illumination indicates the switch is selected
to OFF.
MANUAL STARTS - Manual starts are only

performed on the ground. During start, the
FADEC controls the igniters (A and B), the
high pressure fuel valve, and the closure of
the start valve. The FADEC monitors N1,
N2, and EGT when N2 is below 50%. ECAM
start fault detection is available, however,
automatic abort and crank capabilities are
not available.
Engine Manual Start and Ignition Panel | Engine Manual Start Switches | Section 5.6.0
Warning Lights, Switches and Buttons | Autoland Warning Light | Section 16.4.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W ArNING L IGHTs , S wITCHEs ANd B uTTON S ECTION 16.4.4

A uTOlANd W ArNING L IGHT Previous Section
The AUTO LAND warning light is armed Master Warning
below 200 feet RA in the LAND mode. It Master Caution

illuminates when any one of the following
Terrain on ND Switch
occurs:
GPWS - G/S Button
Both autopilots disengage.
Autoland Warning Light
Localizer deviation excessive (1/4 dot
above 15 feet RA) or glideslope Next Section
deviation (one dot above 100 feet

RA) detected. The localizer and
L OCATION
glideslope scales flash on the PFD.
Loss of localizer signal above 15 feet
RA, or loss of glideslope signal
above 100 feet RA. (The flight
director bars flash on the PFD;
however, the LAND mode does not
disengage.)
The difference between the two radio
altimeters is greater than 15 feet.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Warning Lights, Switches and Buttons | Autoland Warning Light | Section 16.4.4
Warning Lights, Switches and Buttons | Master Warning Light | Section 16.4.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W ArNING L IGHTs , S wITCHEs AND B uTTON S ECTION 16.4.0

M AsTEr W ArNING L IGHT Previous Section
The MASTER WARN Lights flash red for level Master Warning
3 warnings and are accompanied by an Master Caution

aural warning (e.g., CRC, aural voice alert).
The lights extinguish when: GPWS - G/S Button
Either MASTER WARN switch is Autoland Warning Light
pushed (except for certain warnings, Next Section

such as overspeed and stall)
The warning no longer exists L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
The CLR button on the ECAM control
panel is pushed (except for certain
warnings, such as overspeed and
stall)
The EMER CANC button on the ECAM
control panel is pushed
The aural warning stops when:
Either MASTER WARN switch is

pushed (except for certain warnings,
such as overspeed and stall)
The warning no longer exists
Warning Lights, Switches and Buttons | Master Warning Light | Section 16.4.0
Clocks | Chronometer ND Switches | Section 8.5.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lOCKs S ECTION 8.5.5

C hrONOMETEr ND S wITChEs Previous Section
CHRONO SWITCHES - A pilot's chronometer Clocks Description
swtich is located above each ND on the Analog Chronometer

glareshield. The first push of the the
Set Analog Chronometer
chronometer switch displays chronometer
time in boxed format in the lower left Digital Chronometer
corner of onside ND. The second push Set Digital Chronometer

freezes the displayed value. The third push
Chronometer ND Switches
resets the chronometer and removes the
display. The chronometer switch operates Next Section
independently of other clocks.

L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Clocks | Chronometer ND Switches | Section 8.5.5
Side Stick Priority Light | Priority Left | Section 7.9.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S IDE S TICK P rIOrITY L IGHTs S ECTION 7.9.0

P rIOrITY L EFT Previous Section
The Arrow Light illuminates red in front of Priority Left
pilot losing authority. Extinguishes when Priority Right

side stick activation is re-established by:
Next Section
Releasing other priority switch in less

than 40 seconds
L OCATION
Pushing either priority switch
momentarily to cancel a latched
priority condition
Side Stick Priority Light | Priority Left | Section 7.9.0
EFIS Control Panel | Airport Button | Section 8.1.0
A320 D Isplays aNd P aNEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
EFIS C ONTrOl P aNEl S ECTION 8.1.0

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
ARPT Button
NDB Button
VOR.D Button
WPT Button
CST Button
Barometric Window/Selector
A IrpOrT B uTTON
FD Off Button
The Data Display Buttons display optional
FD On Button
data (constraints, waypoints, VORs, NDBs,
and airports). Click on appropriate control ILS Off
or link to view features.
ILS On
AIRPORT SYMBOL - When the Mode/Range Selector

airport button is selected ON,
VOR Switches On
the airport symbols are
VOR Switches Off
displayed as a magenta color. The airport
symbol is displayed white when the runway Next Section
is not specified.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
EFIS Control Panel | Airport Button | Section 8.1.0
Flight Control Unit | Speed/Mach Window | Section 13.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT C ONTROl U NIT S ECTION 13.2.0

Previous Section
Windows
Speed/Mach Window
Heading/Track Window
FD Display Mode
ALT Window
V/S / FPA Window
S pEEd /M ACh W INdOw Selectors
Buttons
The SPD/MACH Window displays the
selected speed/Mach. Next Section
L OCATION
M ANAGE S pEEd L IGhT
When the speed selector is pushed, FMGS
managed speed engages, the managed
speed light illuminates, and dashes appear
in the SPD/MACH window.
Flight Control Unit | Speed/Mach Window | Section 13.2.0
Warning Lights, Switches and Buttons | GPWS - G/S Button | Section 16.4.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W ArNINg L IgHTs , S wITCHEs ANd B uTTON S ECTION 16.4.3

GPWS - G/S B uTTON Previous Section
GPWS - Illuminates red when any GPWS Master Warning
mode is activated. Also illuminates with Master Caution

EGPWS caution or warning. Both are
accompanied by an aural warning.
GPWS - G/S Button
G/S - Illuminates amber when a glideslope
warning is activated and the GLIDESLOPE
aural warning sounds. Next Section

L OCATION
NOTE
If the button is pressed momentarily

while a glideslope warning is active,
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
the G/S light extinguishes and the
GLIDESLOPE aural warning stops. On
the ground, pushing the button
momentarily sounds some aural
warnings and switch lights illuminate.
Pushing the button continuously
sounds all aural warnings.
Warning Lights, Switches and Buttons | GPWS - G/S Button | Section 16.4.3
Instrument Lighting Control Panel | PFD and ND Lighting Control Panel | Section 3.4.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NsTrUMENT L IGhTING C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 3.4.0

Previous Section
PFD & ND Lighting
FCU Lighting
ECAM Lighting
Next Section
L OCATION
PFD ANd ND L IGhTING C ONTrOl P ANEl

PFD LT CONTROL KNOB - The PFD lighting
knob controls the intensity of the primary
flight display lighting.
ND LT CONTROL KNOB - The ND lighting

knob controls the intensity of the
navigation display lighting.
CONSOLE FLOOR LT CONTROL SWITCH -

The console floor lighting switch controls
the flood lighting intensity of the floor
around the pilot seats, side consoles, and
flight bag storage area.
Instrument Lighting Control Panel | PFD and ND Lighting Control Panel | Section 3.4.0
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Flight Mode Annunciations | Section 8.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImarY F LIGHT D IspLaY S YmBOLs S ECTION 8.3.0

F LIGHT M OdE A NNuNCIaTIONs Previous Section
Most FMA indications are green for an PFD Symbols 1
engaged mode, blue for an armed mode, Flight Mode Annunciations

white for a status indication, and amber for
VMAX
an advisory indication. Normally, the first
line indicates engaged/captured modes, Next Flap Extend Speed
and the second line indicates armed Over Speed Protection Symbol
modes, and third line special messages.
Target Airspeed Pointer
Actual Airspeed Reference
Speed Trend Arrow
Min Flap Retraction Speed
Lowest Selectable Speed
Alpha Protection
Alpha Maximum
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 2
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Flight Mode Annunciations | Section 8.3.0
Navigation Display Symbols | Table 1 | Section 8.2.0
A320 D IsPLAYs ANd P ANELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
N AVIGATION D IsPLAY S YMBOLs S ECTION 8.2.0

T ABLE 1 Previous Section
Table 1
SYMBOL NAME MODE DEFINITION
Table 2
NAV The TO waypoint displays white. All other flight plan Table 3
Waypoint
ARC waypoints display green. Waypoints not in the flight plan
(W, G, M) Table 4
PLAN display magenta when WPT button is selected on.
Table 5
Start of NAV The point on the flight plan where the airplane is Table 6
Climb ARC predicted to start the climb. Blue when CLB armed;
(B, W) PLAN white when not armed. Table 7
Table 8
When blue, the point where the airplane will reach the
Level Off NAV Next Section
FCU-selected altitude. When magenta, the point where
Point ARC
the airplane will reach a VNAV altitude constraint if not
(B, M) PLAN
set in the FCU.
Top of NAV The top of descent or continue to descend symbol. Blue

Descent ARC when DES/FINAL armed; white when DES/FINAL not
(B, W) PLAN armed.
Indicates the point where the airplane meets the FMGC-

Intercept NAV computed vertical profile. If the intercept is from above
Point ARC the vertical path, the descent is based upon using 1/2
(B, M) PLAN speed brakes. Blue when DES is engaged; white when
only NAV is engaged.
Indicates the point where the airplane will initiate an

Speed NAV
automatic acceleration or deceleration from current
Change ARC
speed to new computed speed for SPD LIM, SPD CSTR
(M) PLAN
or HOLDING SPEED.

Standby Instruments | Standby Airspeed Indicator | Section 8.6.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S TANDBY I NsTruMENTs S ECTION 8.6.1

S TANDBY A IrspEED I NDICATOr Previous Section
Connected directly to the standby pitot and Standby Attitude Indicator
static sources. (Airspeed bugs are required Standby Airspeed Indicator

equipment but may be deferred if missing.)
Standby Altimeter
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Standby Instruments | Standby Airspeed Indicator | Section 8.6.1
Standby Instruments | Standby Altimeter | Section 8.6.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S TANDBY I NsTruMENTs S ECTION 8.6.2

S TANDBY A lTIMETEr Previous Section
Connected directly to the standby static Standby Attitude Indicator
source. (Altimeter bugs are required Standby Airspeed Indicator

equipment but may be deferred if missing.)
Standby Altimeter
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Standby Instruments | Standby Altimeter | Section 8.6.2
Warning Lights, Switches and Buttons | Terrain on ND Switch | Section 16.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W ArNING L IGHTs , S wITCHEs ANd B uTTON S ECTION 16.4.2

T ErrAIN ON ND S wITCH Previous Section
ON - When the TERR ON ND Master Warning
switch is selected ON, the ON Master Caution

light illuminates green and
displays terrain data on the
respective Navigation Display. GPWS - G/S Button

OFF - When the TERR ON ND switch is
selected OFF, the light extinguishes and the Next Section
weather radar data is displayed on the

respective Navigation Display. In the Airbus
L OCATION
configuration the TERR ON ND switch must
be manually deselected in order to display
weather.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Warning Lights, Switches and Buttons | Terrain on ND Switch | Section 16.4.2
Standby Instruments | Standby Attitude Indicator | Section 8.6.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S TANDbY I NsTruMENTs S ECTION 8.6.0

S TANDbY A TTITuDE I NDICATOr Previous Section
The Standby Attitude Indicator and Flag Standby Attitude Indicator
indication remains available for 5 minutes Standby Airspeed Indicator

after total electrical failure. A red flag
Standby Altimeter
appears with failure of indicator or power
supply. Next Section
CAGING KNOB - When pulled, centers and L OCATION

levels the horizon. (Aircraft should be level
prior to pulling.)
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Standby Instruments | Standby Attitude Indicator | Section 8.6.0
Digital Distance Radio Magnetic Indicator | Description | Section 14.14.0
A320 D IsplaYs aNd P aNEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D IgITal D IsTaNCE R adIO M agNETIC I NdICaTOr S ECTION 14.14.0

VOR DME - Counters Indicate DME distance DDRMI Description
to the tuned VORs. Next Section
HDG FLAG - Appears when the ADIRS

heading signal is invalid, or the RMI fails,
or power supply fails.
BEARING POINTERS - Indicate the magnetic

bearing to VOR 1 or ADF 1 (if installed), to
VOR 2 or ADF 1 (if installed) on non-
overwater airplanes, or ADF 2 on overwater
airplanes.
COMPASS CARD - Displays the bearing

scale. Normally supplied from ADIRU 1
unless CAPT ON 3 is selected on the
SWITCHING panel.
VOR/ADF FLAGS - Appear when the selected

VOR/ADF SELECTORS - Allows either the VOR
VOR or ADF (if installed) receiver fails, or
or ADF (if installed) to be displayed by the
the ADIRS heading signal is invalid, or the
bearing pointers.
RMI fails, or the power supply fails.
Associated pointer remains at the last valid
position.
Digital Distance Radio Magnetic Indicator | Description | Section 14.14.0
Engine Warning and System Displays | EWD After Start | Section 5.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NgINE W ArNINg ANd S YsTEm D IsplAYs S ECTION 5.3.2

EWD A FTEr S TArT Previous Section
1. IDLE INDICATION - Displays green when EWD Prior to Start
engines are at idle thrust. Indication EWD During Start

flashes for 10 seconds, then becomes
EWD After Start
steady.
SD APU Page
2. MAXIMUM EPR - Displays the EPR limit
SD APU Page 2
value corresponding to the full forward
thrust lever position. SD Engine Page
SD Engine Page 2
3. THRUST LEVER INDICATION - Displays
the predicted EPR corresponding to the SD Cruise Page
thrust lever position. Next Section
4. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE EGT - L OCATION

Represented by red line. If 635°C is
exceeded, a red mark appears at maximum
value reached. It will only disappear at the < PREVIOUS NEXT >
next takeoff or by maintenance action.
5. ACTUAL EPR INDICATION - Displays

green.
6. ACTUAL EGT POINTER AND INDICATION

When EGT exceeds 610°C, the analog
needle pulses amber. When EGT exceeds
635°C, the digital display turns steady red
and the analog needle pulses red.
Engine Warning and System Displays | EWD After Start | Section 5.3.2
Engine Warning and System Displays | APU System Display 2 | Section 5.3.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NgINE W ArNINg ANd S YsTEM D IsplAYs S ECTION 5.3.4

APU S YsTEM D IsplAY 2 Previous Section
5. APU EGT INDICATION - Displays green at EWD Prior to Start
normal operating temperatures. Becomes EWD During Start

amber if temperature approaches
EWD After Start
maximum EGT. If temperature exceeds
maxiumum EGT, the indication becomes SD APU Page
red and the APU automatically shuts down. SD APU Page 2
6. APU BLEED VALVE POSITION INDICATOR SD Engine Page
When vertical, valve is not closed (green). SD Engine Page 2

When horizontal, valve is fully closed
SD Cruise Page
(green).
Next Section
7. APU BLEED AIR PRESSURE - Displays
bleed air pressure in green. When the APU L OCATION
is running and the APU BLEED is selected
off, it is normal for bleed pressure to read
0-2 PSI. Amber XXs replace the indication < PREVIOUS NEXT >
when ADIRS 2 is not available or is
selected OFF.
Engine Warning and System Displays | APU System Display 2 | Section 5.3.4
Landing Gear Panel | Landing Gear Indicator Lights | Section 12.5.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANdINg G EAr P ANEl S ECTION 12.5.0

L ANdINg G EAr I NdICATOr L IgHTs Previous Section
LDG The GEAR LG Indicator Lights
indicator lights Brake Fan Switch

display proximity
Auto Brake Switches
detector information
received from LGCIU 1. They illuminate as A/Skid and N/W Steering
long as LGCIU 1 is electrically powered. LG Schematic
LGCIU - The Landing Gear Control Interface Next Section
Units (LGCIU) receive position information

from the landing gear, landing flaps, and
L OCATION
cargo door systems. and monitoring
landing gear position (up or down), shock
absorbers (compressed or extended), and < PREVIOUS NEXT >
gear doors (opened or closed). Each LGCIU

LOCKED DOWN - The Locked Down symbol
controls one complete gear cycle, and
illuminates green when the landing gear is
switches over automatically at each
down and locked.
retraction cycle or in case of a failure. In
the event of a proximity sensor failure or
loss of electrical power, the non-affected
LGCIU automatically assumes control of the
landing gear operation.
UNLK - The unlock light illuminates red if

the gear is not locked in the selected
position.
Landing Gear Panel | Landing Gear Indicator Lights | Section 12.5.0
Clocks | Digital Chronometer | Section 8.5.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

D IgITAl C hrONOMETEr Previous Section
CHR COUNTER - Displays the chronometer Clocks Description
time in minutes and seconds (up to 59:59) Analog Chronometer

and is controlled by the CHR and RST
buttons.
Digital Chronometer
RST BUTTON - Resets the chronometer
Set Digital Chronometer
display.
UTC COUNTER - Displays time in 24-hour
Next Section
format.
DATE/SET BUTTON - Displays date in place

L OCATION
of time.
CHR BUTTON - Starts and stops the

chronometer. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
GPS (UTC Selector) RUN (ET Selector)
GPS - The internal time and date are RUN - The elapsed time counter runs.
synchronized to GPS time. STP - The elapsed time counter
INT - The clock disregards GPS and stops.
displays internal time or date. RST - The elapsed time counter is
blanked.
ET COUNTER - Displays the elapsed time.
Clocks | Digital Chronometer | Section 8.5.3
Landing Gear Lever | Description | Section 12.4.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANdINg G EAr L EVEr S ECTION 12.4.0

The Landing Gear Lever provides electrical Description
signals to the two Landing Gear Control Down Arrow

Interface Units (LGCIUs) which control the
Next Section
green hydraulic supply.
INTERLOCK MECHANISM - An interlock

L OCATION
mechanism prevents anyone from
accidentally retracting the gear while the
airplane is on the ground. It does so by
locking the lever in the down position when
either main gear's shock absorber is
compressed or the nose wheel steering is
not centered.
UP - The UP position retracts landing gear.

When the gear doors open, the main
wheels are automatically braked by the
normal brake system.
DOWN - The DOWN position extends the

landing gear.
Landing Gear Lever | Description | Section 12.4.0
Brakes and Accumulator Indicator | Accumulator Pressure Indication | Section 12.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
B rAkEs ANd A CCumulATOr I NdICATOr S ECTION 12.1.0

A CCumulATOr P rEssurE I NdICATION Previous Section
ACCUMULATOR BRAKE PRESSURE - Accumulator Pressure
Displays the brake accumulator pressure Brake Pressure

for the yellow hydraulic system.
Next Section
If both the green and yellow hydraulic

systems fail, alternate braking is supplied
L OCATION
by the brake accumulator only. The
accumulator supplies pressure for at least
seven full brake applications.
Brakes and Accumulator Indicator | Accumulator Pressure Indication | Section 12.1.0
Flight Mode Annunciations | MAN TOGA | Section 13.3.0
A320 D IsplaYs aND P aNEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT M ODE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.0

A uTO T hrusT - MAN TOGA Previous Section
When the thrust levers are manually set in A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
the TOGA detent and at least one flight MAN FLX

director is set to ON:
MAN MCT
The auto thrust system is armed MAN THR

The engines power is advanced to
THR MCT
TOGA thrust setting, and
"MAN TOGA" annunciation is THR CLB
displayed THR LVR
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | MAN TOGA | Section 13.3.0
Emergency Gravity Gear Extension Handle | Description | Section 12.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E mErgENCY G rAVITY G EAr E xTENsION H ANDlE S ECTION 12.3.0

The Emergency Gravity Gear Extension Description
Handle provides landing gear extension in Next Section

the event of electrical, hydraulic, or
mechanical failure. L OCATION
OPERATION - To put the landing gear down

by gravity, the crew must pull the
emergency gear extension handle out then
turn it clockwise for three turns. When the
flight crew operates the emergency gear
extension handle, the cutoff valve shuts off
hydraulics to the landing gear system and
depressurizes it. This allows the landing
gear to fall free to the down lock position
by gravity.
Takeoff / Go-Around (TO/GA)

Flex/Max Continuous Thrust
(FLX/MCT)
Climb (CL)
Forward Idle
Max Reverse
Emergency Gravity Gear Extension Handle | Description | Section 12.3.0
Airplane General | A320 Dimensions | Section 1.1.0
A320 D IsPLaYs aNd P aNELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A320 D IMENsIONs S ECTION 1.1.0

Previous Section
A320 Dimensions
A320 Turning Radius
Probe Locations
Antenna Locations
Exterior Doors
Ground Service
Next Section
Airplane General | A320 Dimensions | Section 1.1.0
Operating Limits | Airspeed Max | Section 1.1.0
A320 D IsPlAYs AND P ANEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
O PERATING L IMITs S ECTION 1.4.0

Previous Section
Airspeed Max
Pressure Altitude
Max Weights
Wind Limits
Operating Speeds
Oxygen Pressure
Airplane General Limits
Anti-Ice
Autoflight Limits
Next Section
A IRsPEED M AX
VMO/MMO 350 KIAS/.82 Mach
Operating Limits | Airspeed Max | Section 1.1.0
System Limits | Engine Limits | Section 1.5.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S YsTEM L IMITs S ECTION 1.5.0

E NGINE L IMITs Previous Section
Engine Limits
E NGINE EGT AND T HRUsT - M AXIMUM
Engine Parameters
Time Limit1 Instrument APU Limits

EGT N1/N2
(minutes) Marking
APU Parameters
See Engine
Fuel Limits
Start Starter Duty Red 635°C -
Cycle Flight Control Limits
Takeoff/Go around 5 (102) Red 635°C 100% Flight Control Parameters
Maximum Landing Gear Limits

Unlimited Amber 610°C -
Continuous
Warning System Parameters
1 The time limit is maximum operating time at thrust setting. Next Section
2 The time limit is 10 minutes with an engine out.
E NGINE O Il P REssURE
Minimum 60 PSI
E NGINE O Il T EMpERATURE
Maximum continuous operation 155°C
Maximum for up to 15 minutes 165°C
Minimum 60 PSI
System Limits | Engine Limits | Section 1.5.0
E NGINE D UTY C YClE
ON OFF
2 minutes 15 seconds
Consecutive start attempts 2 minutes 15 seconds
1 minutes 30 minutes
Continuous engagement
4 minutes 30 minutes
(cranking)

Start attempt timing is from start valve opening until closing.
If open for more than 2 minutes, the ENG MASTER switch
must be selected OFF for 30 minutes.
Maximum starter reengagement is 10% N2.

External Service Interphone Panel | Flight Interphone Jack | Section 2.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E xTErNAl S ErvICE I NTErpHONE P ANEl S ECTION 2.3.0

F lIGHT I NTErpHONE J ACK Previous Section
The flight interphone jack Flight Interphone Jack
enables communication Ext Power Available Lights

between the cockpit and
Cockpit Call Light
ground personnel.
Additional external external ADIRU and Vent Light
interphone jacks are located on the APU Fire Light

engines and various locations on the
Light Test Button
aircraft.
Cockpit Call Button
LOCATION - The External Service
Reset Button
Interphone Panel is located on the
bottom of the fuselage next to the APU Shut Off Switch
nose gear. Next Section

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
L OCATION
External Service Interphone Panel | Flight Interphone Jack | Section 2.3.0
Electrical System Displays | Normal Power | Section 3.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrICAl S YsTEM D IsplAYs S ECTION 3.1.0

N OrMAl P OWEr Previous Section
The electrical system generates and Normal Power
distributes AC and DC power to airplane APU Power

systems. Three generators provide AC
External Power Available
power, two batteries provide power for APU
start and for emergency power, and an External Power Only
emergency generator provides AC power in AC 1 Bus Failure

the event all three main generators fail.
TR 1 Failure
System operation is normally automatic. Generator Disconnect

The power sources are normally isolated
Generator Line 1
from one another.
Dual AC Bus Failure
Electrical SD example is with engines
Next Section
operating.
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Electrical System Displays | Normal Power | Section 3.1.0
Electrical System | Description | Section 3.7.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTRICal S ysTEM S ECTION 3.7.0

D EsCRIpTION Previous Section
The electrical system generates and The APU or external electrical power is then Description
distributes AC and DC power to aircraft automatically disconnected from that AC AC Power

systems. Three generators provide AC bus, and the AC TIE bus continues to power
Batteries
power, two batteries provide power for APU the AC bus of the IDG that is not running.
start and for emergency power, and an When the second engine is started, the IDG Circuit Breakers
emergency generator provides AC power in automatically powers its AC bus when the DC Power
the event all three main generators fail. voltage and frequency parameters are
Emergency Electrical Config
System operation is normally automatic. satisfied. The APU or external electrical
The power sources are normally isolated power is disconnected automatically from Essential Power
from one another. that AC bus; however, it continues to Smoke Configuration

power the AC TIE bus, and the EXT PWR
Ground Services Busses
O pERaTION ON light remains illuminated. Once the APU
or external power source is removed from Next Section
The electrical system is automatic with all the AC TIE bus, the bus is no longer
switches in AUTO. The only switch on the
powered.
electrical panel that must be used for
placing power on the AC TIE bus is the EXT If an IDG fails to power its own AC bus, the
PWR switch. When running, the APU operating IDG powers both AC busses
automatically powers the AC TIE bus, through the AC TIE bus and sheds the main
unless the EXT PWR switch is ON. When an galley bus. On newer aircraft (those with a
engine is started while the APU or external GALY & CAB switch), the in-seat power and
sources are powering the electrical system, passenger entertainment system are also
the IDG automatically powers its electrical shed. If the APU is started, its generator
channel (AC bus) once the voltage and powers the AC TIE bus and the AC bus no
frequency parameters are satisfied. longer being powered by its own IDG. In
addition, power is restored to all systems.
Electrical System | Description | Section 3.7.0
Emergency Oxygen Systems | Cockpit Oxygen System | Section 4.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E MErgENCy O xygEN S ysTEMs S ECTION 4.1.0

C OCkpIT O xygEN S ysTEM Previous Section
OXYGEN FULL FACE MASK - The full face Cockpit Oxygen
mask is a quick-donning high comfort face Cabin Oxygen

piece that shields the entire face from
Next Section
smoke and fumes. Each mask is equipped
with a mask-mounted regulator and smoke L IMITs
visor (all have a microphone except the
Cockpit Oxygen
second observer position).
Min Pressure - 850 PSI
Cockpit oxygen is supplied from a single
Portable Oxygen Bottle
high pressure bottle that is reduced to a
Min Pressure - 1600 PSI
regulated low pressure. Oxygen bottle
pressure is displayed on the ECAM
DOOR/OXY page. Full bottle pressure is
approximately 1850 PSI. The ECAM REGUL
LO PR indication alerts pilots when oxygen
pressure is low. A green over pressure blow
out disk is located on the lower left side of
the forward fuselage.
Emergency Oxygen Systems | Cockpit Oxygen System | Section 4.1.0
Emergency Exits and Slides | Cabin and Cockpit Exits | Section 4.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E MErGENCY E xITs aND S LIDEs S ECTION 4.2.0

C abIN aND C OCkpIT E xITs Previous Section
CABIN EXITS - The four passenger cabin Cabin and Cockpit Exits
entry/service doors serve as emergency Door Slides

exits and are paired along the airplane
Over Wing Slides
cabin. The doors are identified as 1
(forward) and 2 (aft) left and right. All Next Section
entry/service doors may be opened or

closed manually from inside or outside of
the airplane.
COCKPIT EXITS - The cockpit door and

windows can be used for emergency exit.
Ropes are located in the overhead cockpit
area that allowed for an emergency exit via
the cockpit windows.
Emergency Exits and Slides | Cabin and Cockpit Exits | Section 4.2.0
Auto Thrust FMA | FMA During Taxi | Section 5.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A uTO T hrusT FMA S ECTION 5.2.0

FMA D urING T AxI Previous Section
During taxi the FD bars and A/THR FMAs are FMA During Taxi
not normally displayed until the A/THR FMA During Takeoff

system is armed.
FMA at Rotation
FMA at THR Altitude
A/THR Engaged In Flight
Alpha Floor
TOGA Lock
Thrust Lock
Retard Mode
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
To view all FMA definitions see Section

13.3.0 Flight Mode Annunciations.
Auto Thrust FMA | FMA During Taxi | Section 5.2.0
Engine Warning and System Displays | EWD Prior to Start | Section 5.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

EWD P rIOr TO S TArT Previous Section
The flight management and guidance EWD Prior to Start
computer (FMGC) calculates EPR values for EWD During Start

all engine operating regions when the auto
EWD After Start
thrust system is engaged. The FMGC also
computes maximum EPR limits in the event SD APU Page
of a FADEC failure. SD APU Page 2
Engine indications are displayed by the SD Engine Page
electronic centralized aircraft monitoring SD Engine Page 2

system (ECAM). The upper ECAM provides
SD Cruise Page
engine/warning displays (E/WD) and the
lower ECAM provides system/status Next Section
displays (S/D).
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Engine Warning and System Displays | EWD Prior to Start | Section 5.3.0
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Description | Section 5.7.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
IAE V2527/V2522 E NgINEs S ECTION 5.7.0

The 320 has two IAE V2527 A5 high bypass Description
ratio turbofan engines, each capable of FADEC

producing 26,500 pounds of thrust. The
Engine Power Setting Modes
319 has two IAE V2522-A5 engines, each
capable of producing 22,000 pounds of Idle Control Modes
thrust. Ignition
Each engine is equipped with a full authority Oil System
digital engine control (FADEC) system Start System

which provides complete engine
Next Section
management. The flight management and
guidance computer (FMGC) calculates EPR
values for all engine operating regions
when the autothrust system is engaged.
The FMGC also computes maximum EPR
limits in the event of a FADEC failure.
Engine indications are displayed by the

electronic centralized aircraft monitoring
system (ECAM). The upper ECAM provides
engine/warning displays (E/WD) and the
lower ECAM provides system/status
displays (S/D).
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Description | Section 5.7.0
A319 Cargo Smoke Panel | Cargo Smoke and Discharge Lights | Section 6.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C ArgO S mOkE ANd D IsChArgE L IghTs Previous Section
DISCH - The amber color DISCH Smoke Disch Lights
light indicates low pressure in the Discharge Switch

fire extinguisher bottle. The
Test Button
DISCH light illuminates in
approximately 60 seconds after pressing Cargo Fire Schematic
the Discharge Switch. Next Section

SMOKE - The SMOKE light
CARGO SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM - The illuminates red when smoke is
L OCATION
cargo compartments have a smoke detected in respective cargo
detection system. Cavities in the cargo compartment. Activation of the
compartment have ceiling panels that each AFT CARGO SMOKE light also closes the aft
hold two smoke detectors. Each smoke cargo inlet and outlet isolation valves, and
detector is linked to one of two of the shuts off the aft cargo extraction fan.
detection loops. The forward cargo
SMOKE WARNING - Smoke in one cavity
compartment has one cavity and the aft
activates the smoke warning if:
cargo compartment has two cavities. The
Smoke Detection Control Unit (SDCU) Both smoke detectors detect smoke
receives signals from the detectors and One smoke detector detects smoke
transmits them to the E/WD and displays a and the other is inoperative
warning.
A319 Cargo Smoke Panel | Cargo Smoke and Discharge Lights | Section 6.1.0
Fire Protection System | Engine Fire Switch | Section 6.4.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F IRE P ROTECTION S YsTEM S ECTION 6.4.0

Fire detection and extinguishing systems Aircraft fire protectection systems include: Description
are provided for the engines and APU. Two APU

Fire/overheat detection and
identical loops detect overheat conditions in
extinguishing systems for the: Avionics Compartment
the engine pylon nacelle, core, and fan
Engines
section, as well as the APU compartment. Cargo Compartments
APU
Engines
Smoke detectors are located in the
Smoke detection and extinguishing
lavatories, avionics compartment, and Lavatories
systems for the:
cargo compartments. Each lavatory trash Next Section
Cargo Compartments and
bin is equipped with an automatic fire
Lavatories L OCATION
extinguishing system.
Smoke detection for the:
Avionics compartment
Portable fire extinguishers for the:

Cockpit and
Passenger cabin
Fire Protection System | Engine Fire Switch | Section 6.4.0
Flight Control System Display | F/CTL Page Description | Section 7.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT C ONTrOl S ysTEm D IsplAy S ECTION 7.2.0

F/CTL P AgE D EsCrIpTION Previous Section
1. SPOILERS/SPEED BRAKES INDICATIONS F/CTL Page Description 1
F/CTL Page Description 2

Spoiler deflected
Flaps Indicator Description 1
Spoiler retracted
Spoiler fault deflected
Spoiler fault retracted Next Section
2. AILERONS POSITION IDICATOR - L OCATION

Displays white scale and green index.
Index changes to amber when both
actuators (green and blue) are not
available.
3. ELAC and SEC INDICATIONS - The

number displays green and the box
displays white. Both change to amber in
case of failure of associated computer or < PREVIOUS NEXT >
both flight control data concentrators.

5. ELEVATOR POSITION INDICATION -
4. PITCH TRIM POSITION INDICATION - Displays white scale and green index.
PITCH TRIM displays white; changes to Index changes to amber when both
amber in case of pitch trim jam. G Y associated actuators are not available.
displays green; changes to amber in case
6. RUDDER POSITION INDICATION -
of hydraulic system low pressure.
Displays green. Rudder symbol and scale
change to amber when all three hydraulic
systems indicate low pressure.
Flight Control System Display | F/CTL Page Description | Section 7.2.0
Flight Control Laws | Direct Law - Description | Section 7.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT C ONTrOl L aws S ECTION 7.3.0

D IrECT L aw - D EsCrIpTION Previous Section
In direct law, flight control inputs are like Direct Law
conventional flight controls. No protections Alternate Law

are provided in direct law. Over speed
Normal Law
indications, stall indications and stall aural
warnings are furnished on the PFD. The Abnormal Attitude Law
PFD airspeed scale provides VMAX, VLS, and Mechanical Backup
VSW. The airplane's pitch must be manually Next Section

trimmed.

PITCH DIRECT - The pitch direct law is a
direct side stick-to-elevator position
relationship. An amber USE MAN PITCH
TRIM message appears on the PFD.
ROLL DIRECT - Roll direct law is a direct

side stick-to-aileron and spoiler position
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
relationship. A maximum roll rate of 30
degrees per second can be obtained in roll RECONFIGURATION OF FLT CTL LAWS
direct law. If multiple system failures occur, the flight
control computers will reconfigure to a
YAW MECHANICAL - Yaw is yaw mechanical
degraded flight control law. See
and is a direct relationship with rudder
Reconfiguration of FCL Diagram.
movement. In yaw mechanical law, there is
no turn coordination or yaw damping.
Flight Control Laws | Direct Law - Description | Section 7.3.0
Flight Controls | General Description | Section 7.4.0
A320 D IsPlays aNd P aNEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGHT C ONTrOls S ECTION 7.4.0

G ENEral D EsCrIPTION Previous Section
FLY-BY-WIRE - The A319 and A320 ELECTRICAL FAILURE - In case of complete Flight Controls Description
incorporate a fly-by-wire flight control electrical failure, the pilot can manually Flight Control Inputs
system. Flight control computers interpret control the stabilizer via a mechanical
Pitch Control
the pilot’s commands and move the flight connection (pitch trim wheel) to the
control surfaces as necessary to achieve stabilizer hydraulic jack. Rudder control can Roll Control
the desired response. The flight control also be controlled manually via mechanical Yaw Control
computers also provide flight envelope connections (rudder pedals) to the rudder
Next Section
protection; they do not permit flight hydraulic jack. Loss of all hydraulics results
outside of the safe flight envelope in in complete loss of all flight controls.
normal law.
Flight Controls | General Description | Section 7.4.0
Flight Control Computers | Description | Section 7.5.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIgHT C ONTrOl C OmPuTErs S ECTION 7.5.0

D EsCrIPTION Previous Section
Description
ELAC
SEC
FAC
The A319 and A320 incorporate a fly-by- The flight control computers process
wire flight control system. Flight control sidestick and autopilot inputs according to
Next Section
computers interpret the pilot’s command flight control laws. Other inputs to the
and move the flight control surfaces as Flight Control Computers are from the
L OCATION
necessary to achieve the desired response. FMGC, ADIRU, radio altimeters, LGCIU, and
The flight control computers provide flight accelerometers.
envelope protection.
RECONFIGURATION OF FLT CTL LAWS
The flight control computers consists of two If multiple system failures occur, the flight
Elevator Aileron Computers (ELACs), three control computers will reconfigure to a
Spoiler Elevator Computers (SECs), and degraded flight control law. See
two Flight Augmentation Computers Reconfiguration of FCL Diagram.
(FACs).
Flight Control Computers | Description | Section 7.5.0
Side Stick | Description | Section 7.8.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S IDE S TICK S ECTION 7.8.0

The Side Stick controls pitch and roll Description
manually. Both side sticks lock to neutral Priority Button

when autopilot is engaged. Applying a force
Transmit Switch
above a given threshold disengages the
autopilot and frees the stick for manual Next Section
control. When only one side stick is

operated, that demand is sent to the
computers.
The handgrip has two switches:
Autopilot disconnect and takeover

push button (Priority button)
Push to talk switch (Transmit)
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Side Stick | Description | Section 7.8.0
Clocks | Description | Section 8.5.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

One of two different clocks is installed on Clocks Description
the right side of the center instrument Analog Chronometer

panel. The clock provides the time and date
to all aircraft systems that require time,
including the FMGCs and ACARS. (ACARS Digital Chronometer
receives time from the clock; there is no Set Digital Chronometer

provision to update the clock from ACARS.)
One clock is fully self-contained. It has an Next Section

analog chronometer needle that sweeps
around the clock face. The time and date L OCATION
must be manually set if the clock is not
correct.
The other clock is fully digital. It normally < PREVIOUS NEXT >
synchronizes to and displays GPS time, but
can be set to disregard the GPS and display
its own internal time and date, which can
be manually set.
Clocks | Description | Section 8.5.0
Electronic Intrument System | Description | Section 8.7.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrONIC I NsTrumENT S YsTEm S ECTION 8.7.0

The EIS uses six identical CRTs, also The EIS includes: Description
referred to as display units (DUs), to EFIS Control Panel

Two primary flight displays (PFDs)
replace most conventional flight
Two navigation displays (NDs) Displays
instruments and engine instruments. Three
An Electronic Centralized Aircraft
identical display management computers Next Section
Monitoring (ECAM) system
(DMCs) acquire and process all input from
aircraft sensors and computers to generate
consisting of an Engine/Warning L OCATION
Display (E/WD) and a system
the display images. If a DU fails, automatic
display (SD)
and manual switching allows the displays to
be transferred to an operable DU.
I NsTrumENT P ANEl
Electronic Intrument System | Description | Section 8.7.0
Fuel System Display | Normal Fuel Indications | Section 9.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl S YsTEm D IsplAYs S ECTION 9.1.0

N OrmAl F uEl I NdICATIONs Previous Section
1. F. USED INDICATION - Displays green Normal Fuel Indications
and automatically resets upon engine start SD During Preflight

on ground. Engine identification number
Unusable Fuel
displays amber below idle; white at or
above idle. Displays amber XXs if fuel-used Automatic Fuel Transfer
information is not valid. Next Section
2. ENGINE AND APU LOW PRESSURE VALVE L OCATION

INDICATIONS
Valve open -
with ENG (APU) MASTER switch OFF
or FIRE switch released out
APU valve closed -
Engine valve closed -
or APU valve closed with MASTER
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
switch ON
Valve in transit - This fuel system display page illustrates the
normal inflight fuel indications.
3. WING TANK PUMP INDICATIONS
Pump pressure normal with pump

switch ON -
Pump pressure low with pump switch
ON -
Pump switch OFF -
Fuel System Display | Normal Fuel Indications | Section 9.1.0
Fuel System | Description | Section 9.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl S YsTEm S ECTION 9.3.0

Fuel is contained in left and right wing tanks AUTOMATIC FUEL FEED SEQUENCING - Description
and a center tank. The center tank is Normal fuel feed sequencing is fully Fuel Tanks
located in the fuselage. The wing tanks automatic. During normal fuel sequencing
Quanity Indication System
have inner and outer fuel compartments. with fuel in all tanks, the center tank
Expanding fuel is directed to vent surge pumps feed the engines. The wing tank Recirculation System
tanks that are located outboard of the wing pumps operate continuously and are fitted Refueling/Defueling
tank outer fuel compartments. Fuel from with pressure relief sequence valvesto
Fuel Tank Inerting System
the surge tanks drains into the respective ensure that the center tank pumps, when
outer wing tank compartment. running, have preferential priority. Next Section
Except during normal fueling operations, TRANSFER VALVES - When either wing inner L OCATION
fuel cannot be transferred from one tank to compartment fuel quantity decreases to
another. The aircraft is not equipped with a 1650 pounds, at least one transfer valve in
fuel jettison system. each wing opens and both outer fuel
compartments simultaneously drain into
APU FUEL FEED - An APU fuel pump is their respective inner compartments. The
provided to start the APU when the main transfer valves remain open until the
tank pumps are off or normal AC power is aircraft is refueled. During steep descents,
unavailable accelerations or decelerations, the transfer
valves may open with more than 1650
CROSSFEED - All tanks share a common
crossfeed manifold. The crossfeed valve is pounds of fuel in each inner tank and the
normally closed unless crossfeed is low level warning may be triggered.
required. The valve is controlled by a
double electric motor.
Fuel System | Description | Section 9.3.0
Hydraulic System Display | Prior to Engine Start | Section 10.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H ydrAulIC S ysTEm D IsplAy S ECTION 10.1.0

P rIOr TO E NGINE S TArT Previous Section
1. SYSTEM LABEL - Displays white when Prior to Engine Start
hydraulic pressure is normal (3000 psi) and After Engine Start

displayed as an amber color when the
Cargo Door Operation
pressure is low (below 1450 psi).
PTU Operation
2. SYSTEM PRESSURE - Displays green
Next Section
when hydraulic system pressure is normal
and displayed as an amber color when the L OCATION
pressure is low.
3. FIRE VALVE INDICATION - Displays green

when the fire valve is open and amber
when the fire valve is closed.
4. RESERVOIR QUANTITY INDICATION -

Reservoir quantity indication displays
hydraulic quantity in green. Indication < PREVIOUS NEXT >
becomes amber when the fluid level is
below the low level warning on the right In this example, the hydraulic system
side of the quantity indicator. pressure is zero for all three systems prior
to engine start with normal hydraulic
quantity.
Hydraulic System Display | Prior to Engine Start | Section 10.1.0
Hydraulic System | Description | Section 10.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YDrAulIC S YsTEM S ECTION 10.3.0

There are three independently operating Description
hydraulic systems identified as green, blue, Engine Driven Pumps

and yellow. Each system is supplied from
Electric Pumps
its own pneumatically pressurized hydraulic
reservoir. Normal hydraulic system System Accumulators
operating pressure is 3000 PSI. It is not Power Transfer Unit

possible to transfer hydraulic fluid from one
Priority Valves
system to another.
Ram Air Turbine
Hydraulic power is provided for operation of
Reservoirs
the following:
Schematic
Flight controls
Next Section
Flaps, Spoilers, Slats
Wing tip brakes
Horizontal stabilizer trim
Landing gear < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Nose wheel steering
Brakes
Thrust reversers
Emergency generator
Cargo doors
Hydraulic System | Description | Section 10.3.0
Anti-Ice System | Description | Section 11.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A NTI -I CE S YsTEm S ECTION 11.3.0

The anti-ice and rain protection system DRAIN MASTS - The drain masts are Description
allows for operation in icing and heavy rain. electrically heated whenever the electrical Anti-Ice
Hot bleed air is used for engine nacelle and system is powered. On the ground, the
Next Section
outboard wing anti icing. Electrical heating heat is reduced to prevent injury to ground
is used for the windshields, sensors, pitot personnel. L OCATION
probes, static ports, and waste water drain
masts. Windshield wipers are also installed. ENGINE ANTI ICE - Each engine nacelle is
anti iced by pneumatic bleed air. The
FLIGHT DECK WINDOW HEAT - Electrical engine anti ice ducting is independent of
heating is provided for windshield the pneumatic system ducting. Each engine
anti icing and flight deck side window anti ice valve is electrically controlled by
defogging. The system is automatically the respective ENG ANTI ICE switch and is
regulated and provides overheat protection pneumatically operated. The engine must
and fault indications. The windows are be running for the valve to open.
automatically heated in flight and on the
ground when at least one engine is When either engine anti ice valve is open:
running. The system can be operated Maximum N1 is limited.
manually prior to engine start by placing Continuous ignition is provided
the PROBE/WINDOW HEAT switch ON. The Minimum idle RPM is increased
windshield heat operates at low power on
the ground and automatically switches to The valves open with a loss of electrical
high power in flight. power.
Anti-Ice System | Description | Section 11.3.0
Landing Gear System Displays | ECAM Wheel Page Indications | Section 12.2.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANdINg G EAr S ysTEm D IsplAys S ECTION 12.2.0

ECAM W HEEl P AgE I NdICATIONs Previous Section
1. AMBER LG DOOR SYMBOL - Indicates the ECAM Wheel Page Indications
landing gear door is fully open Brake Temperature
2. AMBER LG DOOR SYMBOL - Indicates the LG and Brake Legends
landing gear door is in transit. LG Up Indication
3. GREEN LG DOOR SYMBOL - Indicates the Anti-Skid Indications
landing gear door is locked up. Alternate Brake Mode
The landing gear positions are indicated by Auto Brakes Armed
two triangles for each gear. The left Next Section

triangle is controlled by LGCIU 1; the right
by LGCIU 2. L OCATION
A missing landing gear triangle indicates

that one LGCIU detects that a landing gear
is uplocked.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
4. GREEN TRIANGLE - One LGCIU detects a
7. UPLOCK ANNUNCIATION - Annunciation
landing gear is downlocked.
appears if the landing gear uplock is
5. RED TRIANGLE - Indicates one LGCIU engaged when the landing gear is
detects a landing gear is in transit. downlocked.
6. AMBER XXXs IN TRIANGLE - Indicates

that one LGCIU has failed.
Landing Gear System Displays | ECAM Wheel Page Indications | Section 12.2.0
Nose Wheel Steering | Description | Section 12.7.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
N OsE W hEEL S TEErINg S ECTION 12.7.0

D EsCrIPTION Previous Section
Nose wheel steering is electrically controlled Description
by the BSCU and hydraulically operated by Next Section

the green hydraulic system. Hydraulic
pressure is applied to the steering system
when all of the following conditions are
satisfied:
Nose landing gear doors are closed

A/SKID & N/W STRG switch is
selected ON
A lever on the towing electrical box (located
Towing control lever is in the normal
on the nose gear) deactivates the steering
position
system for towing. When this occurs, the
At least one engine is running
nose gear can be turned at ± 95°. When
Main landing gear are compressed
the lever is in the towing position, a NW
The BSCU receives inputs from the STRG DISC ECAM message displays. The
Captain's and First Officer's nose wheel message is green, and becomes amber
steering tillers (which are algebraically after the first engine start.
summed), rudder pedals, or autopilot.
When using the tillers, the nose wheel
steering angle is ± 75° until approximately
20 knots groundspeed. As speed increases,
the angle decreases progressively to 0° at
70 knots.
Nose Wheel Steering | Description | Section 12.7.0
Brake System | Description | Section 12.8.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
B RAKE S YsTEm S ECTION 12.8.0

G ENERAl D EsCRIPTION Previous Section
The aircraft is equipped with carbon brakes. General Description
Normal braking functions (green hydraulic Normal Braking

system) along with antiskid, autobrakes,
Antiskid System
and brake temperature indications are
controlled by a dual-channel brake and Autobrake System
steering control unit (BSCU). When using Alternate Brake System

alternate brakes (yellow hydraulic system),
Parking Brake
the autobrakes are inoperative and the
antiskid may or may not be available. If Next Section
both the green and yellow hydraulic

by the brake accumulator only.
B RAKE O PERATION
There are four modes of brake operation:
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Normal brake operation with antiskid
The main gear wheels are fitted with fusible
and autobrakes
plugs which melt in the event of an
Alternate brake operation with
overheat to protect the tires from bursting.
antiskid
A brake temperature monitoring system
Alternate brake operation without
provides a display of each wheel’s brake
antiskid
temperature on the ECAM WHEEL page.
Parking brake operation
Brake System | Description | Section 12.8.0
Landing Gear System | Description | Section 12.9.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L aNdINg G Ear S YsTEm S ECTION 12.9.0

OPERATION - The landing gear and door extended), and gear doors (opened or Description
system is electrically controlled and closed). Gear Operation

hydraulically operated. During normal
operation the hydraulically-operated doors Each LGCIU controls one complete gear Nose Wheel Steering
open prior to landing gear transit and close cycle and switches over automatically at Next Section
at the end of gear extension and retraction. each retraction cycle or in case of a failure.
In addition, mechanically linked doors are In the event of a proximity sensor failure or
mounted to the landing gear struts. loss of electrical power, the non affected
LGCIU automatically assumes control of the
LANDING GEAR CONTROL AND INTERFACE landing gear operation.
UNITS (LGCIUS) - Electrical signals are
provided for gear and door actuation by CARGO DOORS - The cargo doors also have
two LGCIUs. The LGCIUs receive position proximity switches that provide position
information from the landing gear, cargo information to the LGCIUs. The switches
doors, and landing flap systems and detect the position of the manual selector
process gear and door position, valves, locking shaft, locking handle, safety
sequencing, control, and gear lever shaft, and door sills. If an electrical failure
selection. They also provide landing gear of the locking shaft, locking handle, or
information to the ECAM display and send safety shaft is detected, a non locked
signals to other aircraft systems for ground condition is signaled and displays on the
ECAM.
or flight mode operations. LGCIU 1
provides landing gear position indications FLAPS - The flaps have four proximity
on the landing gear indicator panel and switches. The LGCIUs process the signals
ECAM. LGCIU 2 provides ECAM landing received from the switches prior to sending
gear position indications only. them to the slat flap control computers
Landing gear proximity sensors provide (SFCCs). The LGCIUs do not monitor SFCC
system failures.
Landing Gear System | Description | Section 12.9.0
signals to the LGCIUs for computing and
monitoring landing gear position (up or
down), shock absorbers (compressed or
Auto Flight | Description | Section 13.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A uTO F lIgHT S ECTION 13.1.0

The navigation system is a fully integrated The flight guidance portion of the FMGS Description
digital avionics system. Microcomputer uses the autopilot, flight director, and auto Description 2
technology and electronic displays provide thrust systems. The MCDU is considered
Next Section
pilots with performance, navigation, and the long-term interface between the pilot
advisory information for all phases of flight. and the FMGC. Functions of the MCDU L OCATION
A flight management and guidance system include selection of specific pages for
(FMGS) provides automatic navigation and insertion and display of navigation and
flight guidance, map displays, auto thrust performance information.
management and thrust targets, and
performance optimization. Full auto flight is The FCU is the short-term interface between
accomplished when at least one autopilot the pilot and the FMGC. It is used to modify
and the auto thrust system are engaged. any flight parameter on a short-term basis,
and is also used to select operational
The FMGS includes: modes for the autopilots, flight directors,
and auto thrust system. Autopilot guidance
Two flight management and guidance
modes are selected on the FCU and MCDU.
computers (FMGCs)
Engagement is confirmed by the flight
Two multifunction control display
mode annunciation (FMA) on the PFD.
units (MCDUs)
One flight control unit (FCU) The FACs control rudder, rudder trim, and
Two flight augmentation computers yaw damping inputs. It also computes data
(FACs) for the flight envelope and speed functions
and provides warning for windshear
FMGC detection.
The Flight Management Guidance CONTINUE

Computers provide flight guidance and
flight management.
Auto Flight | Description | Section 13.1.0
Flight Maneuvers | ILS Approach Autoland | Section 13.4.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGHT M ANEUVERs S ECTION 13.4.0

ILS A PPROACH P ROfILE - A UTOLAND Previous Section
ILS Autoland
ILS - No Autoland
Managed/Managed App
Managed/Selected App
Takeoff
Eng Failure After V1
Go Around/Missed App
Single Engine Go Around
No Flaps Approach
Next Section
Autoland approaches may be made to CAT I, II, or III runways with CAT 3 SINGLE or CAT 3
DUAL FMAs displayed.
Flight Maneuvers | ILS Approach Autoland | Section 13.4.0
MCDU | Direct To Page - Description | Section 14.3.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D IrECT T O P agE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.3.0

The DIR TO PAGE enables the pilot to Previous Section
proceed directly from the present position Direct To Page Description

to a designated waypoint. The designated
Waypoint
waypoint may be line-selected from the
primary flight plan, or manually entered via Waypoint Inserted
the scratchpad. When the DIR TO function Direct To Erase

is activated, the present position becomes
Direct To
the FROM waypoint and is displayed as T-P
(turn point) in the active flight plan. Abeam Pts
Radial In
For example to go direct to MLB LS 2L.
Radial Out
Direct To Insert
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Direct To Page - Description | Section 14.3.0
MCDU | Progress Page - Description | Section 14.4.0
A320 D IspLAYs ANd P ANELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOgrEss P AgE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.4.0

The Progress page displays flight data for Previous Section
the current phase of flight. It allows pilots Description

to update FMGS position in flight, and
Phase of Flight
provides FMGS computed bearing/distance
information to any waypoint. CRZ
OPT
REC MAX
Report
Report Page
Update At
Predictive GPS
Predictive GPS Page
Required Accuracy
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Bearing and Distance
Next Section
MCDU | Progress Page - Description | Section 14.4.0
MCDU | Performance Page - Description | Section 14.5.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P ErfOrmaNCE P agEs - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.5.0

Performance pages display the performance Previous Section
parameters for the current phase of flight. Description

They are automatically sequenced after the
TO Page - Preflight
takeoff phase.
Check TO Data
The NEXT PHASE prompt provides access to
Climb Page - Preflight
subsequent flight phase pages.
Climb Page - Active
The PREV PHASE prompt is available if the
Cruise Page - Preflight
phase displayed is not active. The title line
displays white when phase is not active; Cruise Page - Active
green when phase is active. Descent Page - Preflight
Pilots can manually sequence the FMGC into Descent Page - Active
the approach phase by first selecting the Approach Page - Preflight

ACTIVATE APPR PHASE prompt and then
Approach Page - Active
the CONFIRM APPR PHASE prompt which
displays only on the current phase of flight Go Around Page
performance page. Next Section

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Performance Page - Description | Section 14.5.0
MCDU | Initialization Pages - Description | Section 14.6.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NITIalIZaTION P aGEs - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.6.0

The INIT pages consist of two pages, an Previous Section
INIT A page and INIT B page. The INIT A Description

page is selected by pressing the INIT key.
Init A Page
The INIT B page page is accessed by Init B Page

selecting the horizontal slew key when the
Climb Wind Page
INIT A page is displayed (depicted
illustration). History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page

The Flight Plan is normally loaded by the
datalink function via the ACARS. If an Descent Wind Page
ACARS AUTO INIT* has been Next Section

accomplished, the Flight Plan will
automatically be loaded. The runways,
departure and arrival are not loaded
automatically.
If the ACARS AUTO INIT* was not used, the

INIT REQUEST* prompt on the INIT A page
can be used to uplink the Flight Plan. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
If the datalink function fails, a manual entry

is required. Load the city pair on the INIT A
page and then load the Flight Plan.
MCDU | Initialization Pages - Description | Section 14.6.0
MCDU | Data Index Pages | Section 14.7.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D aTa I NdEx P agEs - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.7.0

When the DATA key is selected; INDEX Previous Section
page 1 is displayed. The INDEX page Data Index Pages

number is displayed to the right of the title.
Data Index Page 1
INDEX page 1 provides access to:
Data Index Page 2
Position Monitor Page
Next Section
IRS Monitor Page
GPS Monitor Page
A/C Status
Closest Airports Page
Equitime Point Page
The slew key ← or → cycles the MCDU

between INDEX page 1 and 2. INDEX page
2 provides access to:
Waypoint Pages
NavAid Pages
Runway Pages
Route Pages < PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Data Index Pages | Section 14.7.0
MCDU | Flight Plan Pages - Description | Section 14.8.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGHT P LAN P AGEs - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.8.0

Flight Plan Pages enables pilots to construct, Previous Section
view, or modify the active primary flight Description

plan from the departure to the destination,
Flight Plan A Page
and the alternate flight plan from the
destination to the alternate. Flight Plan A Prior to TO
Lateral Rev Dept Airport
Lateral Rev at PPOS
Lateral Rev at Waypoint
Lateral Rev Dest Airport
Airways Page
Departure Page B
Flight Plan B Page
Arrival Page A
Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Vertical Rev At Departure
Vertical Rev At Waypoint
Step Altitude at Waypoint
Database Hold Page
Computed Hold at Waypoint
Next Section
MCDU | Flight Plan Pages - Description | Section 14.8.0
MCDU | Radio Nav Page - Description | Section 14.9.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
R adIO N av P aGE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.9.0

RAD NAV KEY - Enables navaid display and Previous Section
tuning of ILS, VOR, and ADF radioes. If any Description

RMP is selected to NAV, the fields on this
Description Page 2
page are blank on both MCDUs.
Next Section
VOR/FREQ - Displays identifiers and
frequencies of VOR 1 and VOR 2; either
auto-tuned or manually tuned. When
manually tuned, identifier or frequency is
inserted. Localizer frequency may be
entered for DME information associated
with the localizer to be displayed on ND. If
the identifier is not in the database, the
NEW NAVAID page appears. Using CLR
reverts the selection to the auto-tuned
navaid.
CRS - Displays the VOR course associated

with the selected VOR navaid. The course
must be manually entered. If the radio is < PREVIOUS NEXT >
retuned to another station, the CRS is

cleared. If no course is entered, CDI
information does not appear on ND ROSE
VOR.
MCDU | Radio Nav Page - Description | Section 14.9.0
MCDU | Fuel Pred Page - Description Page 1 | Section 14.10.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl P rEd P agE - D EsCrIpTION P agE 1 S ECTION 14.10.0

FUEL PRED KEY Displays fuel predictions. All Previous Section
fields except 4R show dashes until the first Description Page 1

engine is started.
Description Page 2
AT / UTC / EFOB - Line 1 displays Description Page 3

predictions for time and fuel at the
Next Section
destination. Line 2 displays predictions for
time and fuel at the alternate (displays
NONE if no alternate has been entered).
Before takeoff, time predictions represent
estimated time enroute. When takeoff
thrust is set, the center column label
changes to UTC, and time predictions
represent estimated time of arrival.
RTE RSV/‰ - Carried over from INIT page

A after the first engine is started. Displays
the pilot’s desired fuel that is reserved for a
specific purpose and is not included in
EXTRA. The pilot can enter a value in < PREVIOUS NEXT >
pounds or as a percent of the trip. If the

pilot enters a value in pounds, dashes will
be displayed for percent. If the percent
value is used, the FMGC will compute the
corresponding pounds.
ALTN TIME - The estimated fuel and time

needed to fly from the primary destination
to the alternate.
MCDU | SEC Index Page - Description Page 1 | Section 14.11.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SEC I NdEx P agE - D EsCrIpTION P agE 1 S ECTION 14.11.0

The secondary flight plan pages are similar Previous Section
to the active flight plan pages except for Description Page 1

the following:
Description Page 2
Secondary lateral revision pages: Next Section
TMPY F-PLN and TMPY INSERT

prompts do not display.
OFFSET is not available. Secondary
INIT page (A and B):
Blue brackets appear instead of
amber boxes.
ALIGN prompt does not appear.
Slewing or entry in the airport
LAT/LONG field (4L/R) is not
available.
WIND/HISTORY WIND page is not
available.
TMPY F-PLN is not available.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
On the secondary PERF page, the descent
forecast page is not available.
MCDU | Menu Page- Description | Section 14.12.0
A320 D IspLays aNd P aNELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
M ENu P agE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.12.0

MCDU MENU KEY - Accesses the MCDU Previous Section
MENU. The active system is indicated in Description

green. All other information is white.
Next Section
ATC COMM KEY - Accesses the MCDU MENU.

The active system is indicated in green. All
other information is white.
FMGC - Provides MCDU interface with the

FMGC.
ATSU or ACARS - Provides MCDU interface

with ACARS or ATSU.
AIDS - Provides MCDU interface with the

aircraft integrated data system (AIDS).
Normally used by Maintenance.
CFDS - Provides MCDU interface with the

centralized fault display system(CFDS).
Normally used by Maintenance. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
REQ - Displays when the associated system

requests to be accessed.
RETURN - Returns the MCDU to the active

system.
MCDU | Menu Page- Description | Section 14.12.0
MCDU | Airport Page - Description | Section 14.13.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A IrpOrT P aGE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.13.0

The AIRPORT key cycles the Flight Plan Previous Section
page between departure, destination, and Description

alternate airports.
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Airport Page - Description | Section 14.13.0
Air Data Inertial Reference System | Description | Section 14.15.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A Ir D aTa I NErTIal R EfErENCE S YsTEm S ECTION 14.15.0

The ADIRS computes aircraft position, Inertial Reference - The IR provides Description
speed, altitude, attitude, and air data for attitude, flight path vector, heading, track, Next Section
the displays, flight management guidance acceleration (speed trend), VSI,
system, flight controls, engine controls, groundspeed, and aircraft position. The IR
and other systems. does not navigate; rather, it provides an
inertial position input to the FMGCs for
ADIRU - Three identical air data/inertial navigation computations. If either IR 1 or 2
reference units (ADIRUs) are installed in fails, IR 3 can be manually selected.
the aircraft. Each ADIRU combines an air
data reference (ADR) system with a laser VOR/ADF FLAGS - Appear when the selected
gyro inertial reference (IR) system in a VOR or ADF (if installed) receiver fails, or
single unit. The ADR and IR systems of the ADIRS heading signal is invalid, or the
each ADIRU operate independently, and RMI fails, or the power supply fails.
failure of one system does not cause a Associated pointer remains at the last valid
failure of the other system. position.
Air Data Reference - The ADR provides ADIRS CONTROL PANEL - An ADIRS control
barometric altitude, airspeed, Mach, angle panel is located on the overhead panel and
of attack, temperature, and overspeed provides a backup
interface to the IRs. The
warnings. If either ADR 1 or 2 fails, ADR 3 normal pilot interface is through the
can be manually selected. MCDUs.
Air Data Inertial Reference System | Description | Section 14.15.0
Flight Management Guidance Computer | Description | Section 14.16.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIghT M aNagEmENT G uIdaNCE C OmpuTEr S ECTION 14.16.0

The flight management portion of the FMGC Description
contains a navigation database which Modes of Operation

provides navaid auto tuning, position
Position Computation
computation, navigational accuracy checks,
and flight planning through the MCDU. It Navigation Accuracy
also contains a performance database Next Section

which provides predictions of fuel, time,
distance, speed, and altitude. Additionally,
the performance database determines the
optimum flight profile in relation to speed,
flight level, and top of descent.
Each FMGC is linked to its own onside

MCDU, RMP, and EFIS control panel. After
entry of the flight plan and other required
performance data into the MCDU, the FMGS
generates the climb and descent profiles
for departure and arrival, provides
automatic aircraft guidance, and computes
current and predicted progress along the
flight plan.
Pilots can modify any flight parameter (e.g.,

SPD, V/S, HDG) on a short-term basis and
the FMGS will guide the aircraft to the
manually selected target.
Flight Management Guidance Computer | Description | Section 14.16.0
Pneumatic System Displays | Cond SD - Description | Section 15.1.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P NEumATIC S YsTEm D IsplAY S ECTION 15.1.0

C ONd SD - D EsCrIpTION Previous Section
1. ZONE CONTROLLER FAULT INDICATION Cond SD
No fault indication means normal zone Description

controller operation.
Hot Air Fault
ALTN MODE - displays green when primary SDCU Channel Failure

zone controller fault detected.
Bleed SD
PACK REG - Displays green when zone Cruise SD

controller fault detected (basic regulation
Cab Press SD
by packs only).
Next Section
2. CABIN FAN FAULT INDICATION
Displays amber if fault in cabin fan L OCATION
detected.
3. ZONE TEMEPERATURE - Displays green.
4. ZONE DUCT TEMPERATURE - Normal < PREVIOUS NEXT >

condition temperature displays green.
Becomes amber at high temperature.
5. ZONE HOT AIR PRESSURE REGULATING

VALVE - Valve is closed with HOT AIR
switch OFF, or disagrees with switch
position.
Pneumatic System Displays | Cond SD - Description | Section 15.1.0
Pneumatic System | Description | Section 15.6.0

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P NEumATIC S ysTEm S ECTION 15.6.0

The sources of pneumatic system air include The BMCs provide indications and warnings Description
the engines, APU, and ground external high to the ECAM and centralized fault display APU Bleed Air
pressure (HP) air (cart). The pneumatic system. If BMC 1 fails, BMC 2 takes over
Engine Bleed Air
system supplies high pressure air for the monitoring functions except for engine 1
following: and APU leak detection. If BMC 2 fails, BMC External Air
1 takes over monitoring functions except Leak Detection

Air conditioning packs
engine 2 leak detection.
Aft cargo heat on the A320. Cargo Next Section

heat and ventilation are not
L OCATION
available on the A319
Engine starting
Hydraulic reservoir pressurization
Potable water system pressurization
Cabin pressurization
Wing anti icing
The engine bleed, APU, and external air are

all connected to a crossbleed manifold. A
crossbleed valve enables the left side
(engine 1) and right side (engine 2) to be
interconnected, see Pneumatic Schematic
page 15.2.8.
LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM - A leak

detection system is provided to detect
overheat in the vicinity of the hot air ducts.
Pneumatic system operation is controlled
and monitored by two bleed monitoring
Pneumatic System | Description | Section 15.6.0
computers (BMCs).
Index Ap - Az | Section 17.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX A P - A Z S ECTION 17.1.1

AP Button Auto Brake Switches Index A
Approach Page - MCDU Autoland Warning Light Index Aa - Ao
APU Agent Switch Auto Thrust Disconnect Buttons Index Ap - Az
APU Control Panel Auto Thrust System FMAs Index B
APU Fire Light - Flight Interphone Panel Index C
APU Fire Panel Index D
APU Fire Switch Index E
APU Generator Switch Index F
APU Master Switch Index G
APU Power SD Index H
APU Shut Off Switch Index I, J, K
APU Start Switch Index L
APU Test Button Index M
Audio Control Panel Index N
Auto Flight Description Index O
ATC Fail Light Transponder Index P, Q
A/THR Button Index R
ATT HDG Selector Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index Ap - Az | Section 17.1.1
Flight Control Laws | Abnormal Attitude Law - Description | Section 7.3.20

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIgHT C ONTrOl L aws S ECTION 7.3.20

A bNOrmal A TTITudE L aw - D EsCrIpTION Previous Section
The abnormal attitude law activates when Direct Law
any one of the following parameters is Alternate Law

exceeded:
Normal Law
Pitch attitude is greater than 50° Abnormal Attitude Law

nose-up or 30° nose-down
Description
Angle of attack is greater than 30° or
less than -10° (A319: -15°) Attitude Law Normal Limits
Airspeed is greater than 440 knots or Mechanical Backup

less than 60 knots or Mach is
Next Section
greater than .91 or less than .1
Bank angle is greater than 125°
When the abnormal attitude law is

activated, the following laws are incurred
until the airplane returns to normal limits:
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pitch alternate with load factor
protection and without automatic RECONFIGURATION OF FLT CTL LAWS
trim nor any other protections If multiple system failures occur, the flight
Roll direct control computers will reconfigure to a
Yaw mechanical degraded flight control law. See
Flight Control Laws | Abnormal Attitude Law - Description | Section 7.3.20
Flight Control Laws | Abnormal Attitude Law - Normal Limits | Section 7.3.21
A320 D IspLAys AND P ANELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGHT C ONTrOL L Aws S ECTION 7.3.21

A BNOrMAL A TTITuDE L Aw - N OrMAL L IMITs Previous Section
When the airplane returns to normal Direct Law
attitude limits from an extreme attitude Alternate Law

limit, the following laws are active for the
Normal Law
remainder of the flight:
Abnormal Attitude Law
Pitch alternate with load factor
Description
protection and automatic trim (load
factor demand mode). No high nor Attitude Law Normal Limits
low speed stability protections are Mechanical Backup

available.
Next Section
Roll direct
Yaw alternate
When the airplane returns to normal limits

and pitch alternate law becomes active, it
remains in alternate law until landing.
There is no reversion to direct law when < PREVIOUS NEXT >
the landing gear extends.
Flight Control Laws | Abnormal Attitude Law - Normal Limits | Section 7.3.21
Electrical System Displays | AC 1 Bus Failure | Section 3.1.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

AC 1 B us F AIlurE Previous Section
Loss of AC 1 bus will result in loss of TR 1, Normal Power
AC Essential Bus, Essential TR, and APU Power

numerous systems, including the Captain's
PFD, ND, VHF 1, and NAV 1 radios.
External Power Only
To get the AC Essential Bus back on line on
AC 1 Bus Failure
some aircraft requires manually selecting
the AC ESS FEED switch on the electrical AC 1 Bus Normal
control panel to ALTN. This results in AC AC 1 Bus Failure Fault

Bus 2 powering AC Essential Bus, the
AC 1 Bus Failure Essential Power
Essential TR and the DC ESS Bus.
TR 1 Failure
On some airplanes the AC ESS Bus is
Generator Disconnect
connected via automatic switching.
Generator Line 1
The illustration to the right depicts normal
Dual AC Bus Failure
power. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCATION
Electrical System Displays | AC 1 Bus Failure | Section 3.1.4
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Acceleration Altitude | Section 14.5.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P aGE P rEflIGhT - A CCElEraTION A lTITudE S ECTION 14.5.4

Displays the acceleration altitude (altitude Previous Section
at which CLB phase is activated). Target Description

speed increases to initial climb speed.
TO Page - Preflight
Altitudes are MSL. The minimum value is
400 feet above runway elevation. It is V1, VR, V2
always higher than or equal to THR RED Trans Alt

and can be modified by the pilots. The
Thr Red
default value is 800 feet above runway
elevation. It must be entered as a four- Acc
digit number (i.e., 900’ as 0900). Uplink TO Data
When the FCU altitude selection is lower F, S, Clean Speeds
than THR RED altitude, THR RED and ACC Rwy

are activated at the FCU altitude or ALT*,
TO Shift
whichever occurs first.
Flaps/THS
Flex TO Temp
Eng Out ACC

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Cruise Page - Active
Descent Page - Preflight
Descent Page - Active
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Acceleration Altitude | Section 14.5.4
Approach Page - Preflight
Go Around Page
Next Section
Electrical Control Panel | AC Essential Feed Switch | Section 3.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Commercial Switch
Battery Indicator
Battery Switches
IDG Switch
Generator Switch
AC E ssENTIAl F EEd S WITCH
ALTN - Pushing the AC ESS Bus Tie Switch

FEED switch enables the AC
ESS Bus to be powered via AC
Bus 2 instead of AC Bus 1. A Electrical Schematic
white boxed ALTN light will Next Section

illuminate on the switch. Normally AC ESS
Bus is supplied from AC Bus 1. L OCATION
FAULT - An amber FAULT light indicates the
AC ESS Bus is not electrically powered.
Electrical Control Panel | AC Essential Feed Switch | Section 3.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Table 1
Table 2
Decelerate NAV/ARC Indicates where the airplane will start an automatic Table 3
Point (M) PLAN deceleration toward VAPP (switches into the APP phase).
Table 4
Indicates an altitude constraint. Magenta if constraint is Table 5

Altitude NAV
predicted to be met, amber if predicted to be missed,
Constraint ARC
and white if guidance is not taken into account and NAV Table 6
(M, A, W) PLAN
mode is engaged.
Table 7
Indicates the radius corresponding to the required Table 8

Energy NAV
distance to land from present position. Only displayed in
Circle ARC
descent and approach phase when in HDG or TRK Next Section
(G) PLAN
modes.
FLIGHT PLAN LINES
Active
NAV Displays the primary flight plan actually being followed
Flight
ARC when NAV mode is engaged. Dashed when the NAV
Plan Route
PLAN mode is not engaged.
(G)
Missed NAV Displays when a missed approach waypoint is displayed

Approach ARC on the onside MCDU and the go-around phase is not
(B,M) PLAN active.
Secondary NAV Displays the secondary flight plan when any SEC F-PLN
Flight Plan ARC page is displayed on the onside MCDU. Active flight plan
(W) PLAN remains displayed.
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Actual Airspeed Reference Line | Section 8.3.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMarY F lIGHT D IsplaY S YMBOls S ECTION 8.3.5

A CTual A IrspEEd R EfErENCE L INE Previous Section
The Actual Airspeed Reference Line PFD Symbols 1
indicates the actual airspeed. The airspeed Flight Mode Annunciations

scale moves behind the fixed yellow line.
VMAX
Airspeed indication starts from 30 knots.
Next Flap Extend Speed
Over Speed Protection Symbol
Speed Trend Arrow
Alpha Protection
Alpha Maximum
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 2
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Actual Airspeed Reference Line | Section 8.3.5
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Actual Track Diamond | Section 8.3.28

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMarY F LIGHT D IspLaY S YMBOLs S ECTION 8.3.28

A CTuaL T raCK D IaMONd Previous Section
The Actual Track Diamond indicates actual PFD Symbols 1
track on the heading scale in green. If PFD Symbols 2

displayed, the FPV appears directly above
PFD Symbols 3
the diamond.
Vertical Deviation Indication
Vertical Deviation Scale
Max Side Stick Deflection
Ground Roll Guidance
Actual Track Diamond
Selected Heading FD Off
Selected Heading FD On
True Heading
DH Flags
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Selected Target Altitude Indicator
Selected Target Altitude
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Actual Track Diamond | Section 8.3.28
External Service Interphone Panel | ADIRU and Avionics Vent Light | Section 2.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

ADIRU ANd A vIONICs V ENT L IGHT Previous Section
The ADIRU and Vent light Flight Interphone Jack
illuminates red when the Ext Power Available Lights

avionics and ventilation
Cockpit Call Light
fans fail with the engines
stopped. An external horn is also ADIRU and Vent Light
triggered. APU Fire Light
Light Test Button
Cockpit Call Button
Reset Button
APU Shut Off Switch
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
L OCATION
External Service Interphone Panel | ADIRU and Avionics Vent Light | Section 2.3.3
Cargo Heat Control Panel | Aft Isolation Valve Switch | Section 15.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ArGO H EAT C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 15.4.1

A fT I sOlATION V AlvE S wITCh Previous Section
AUTO - Auto is the normal Cargo Heat Hot Air
switch position and is indicated Aft Isolation Valve

when all lights are
Cargo Temperature
extinguished on this switch. In
auto the cargo ventilation Next Section
controller opens the cargo compartment

ventilation inlet and outlet isolation valves,
L OCATION
and turns ON the aft cargo compartment
ventilation extraction fan. If smoke is
detected in the aft cargo compartment then
SMOKE DETECTION CONTROL UNIT - If
the cargo ventilation controller
smoke is detected in the aft cargo
automatically closes both the inlet and
compartment then the cargo ventilation
outlet isolation valves, and turns off the
controller automatically closes both the
extraction fan.
inlet and outlet isolation valves, and turns
FAULT - The FAULT light illuminates amber off the extraction fan. A Smoke Detection
when either inlet or outlet valve is in Controller Unit (SDCU) detects smoke in
disagreement with the selected position. the lavatories and cargo compartments.
OFF - Selecting OFF closes the cargo

ventilation inlet and outlet isolation valves,
and turns OFF the aft cargo compartment
extraction fan. When these isolation valves
are closed ventilation for the aft cargo
compartment is lost.
Cargo Heat Control Panel | Aft Isolation Valve Switch | Section 15.4.1
Switching Panel | AIR DATA Selector | Section 8.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
ATT HDG Selector
AIR DATA Selector
EIS DMC Selector
AIR DATA S ElECTOr Next Section
When the AIR DATA Selector is selected to: SWITCHING PANEL - Four selectors on the L OCATION
NORM - ADR 1 supplies data to PFD 1 reconfigure display unit sources in case of
and ND 1. ADR 2 supplies data to component failure.
PFD 2 and ND 2.
CAPT 3 - ADR 3 replaces ADR 1 and
supplies data to PFD 1, and ND 1.
F/O 3 - ADR 3 replaces ADR 2 and
Switching Panel | AIR DATA Selector | Section 8.4.1
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Alpha Floor | Section 7.3.17

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIgHT C ONTrOL L aWs S ECTION 7.3.17

N OrmaL L aW - A LpHa F LOOr Previous Section
The Va Floor function, which normally Direct Law
occurs at a predetermined angle of attack Alternate Law

between Alpha Protection and Alpha Max,
Normal Law
engages the auto thrust system. TO/GA
thrust is provided regardless of thrust lever Description
position. Alpha Floor is also triggered if the Ground Mode

pilot applies a large aft stick input while
Flare Mode
either pitch attitude or angle of attack
protection is active. Load Factor Demand Mode
Load Factor Limitation

The Alpha Floor function is not available
below 100 feet RA or during single engine High Speed Protection
operation with flaps at CONF 1 or greater. Pitch Attitude Protection
If high angle of attack protection is active, High AOA Protection
the bank angle is limited to 45°. Alpha Protection

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Alpha Max
Alpha Floor
Bank Angle Protection
Load Alleviation Function
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Alpha Floor | Section 7.3.17
Next Section
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Alpha Max | Section 7.3.16

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIgHT C ONTrOl L aWs S ECTION 7.3.16

N Ormal L aW - A lpHa M aX Previous Section
Alpha Max protection (top of red band on Direct Law
airspeed scale) is only available in normal Alternate Law

law above 100 feet AGL. It cannot be
Normal Law
exceeded (if above 100 feet radio altitude)
even if the side stick is pulled and held fully Description
back against the mechanical stop. If the Ground Mode

side stick is released, the angle of attack
Flare Mode
returns to and maintains Alpha Prot. This
function provides protection against stall Load Factor Demand Mode
and wind shear and has priority over all Load Factor Limitation
other protections.
High Speed Protection
On takeoff, Alpha Prot is equal to Alpha Max Pitch Attitude Protection

for 5 seconds. If angle of attack protection
High AOA Protection
is active, the side stick must be pushed
forward to return to the normal mode. Alpha Protection
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Alpha Max
If high angle of attack protection is active,
the bank angle is limited to 45°. NOTE
Alpha Floor

VLS, Alpha Protection, and Alpha
A lpHa M aXImUm D EFINITION Maximum do not appear on the Load Alleviation Function
Alpha Maximum Speed is defined by the top ground. They appear in flight shortly Lowest Selectable Speed
of a red strip along the speed scale. after liftoff.
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Alpha Max | Section 7.3.16
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Alpha Maximum | Section 8.3.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImarY F lIGHT D IsplaY S YmBOls S ECTION 8.3.10

A lpHa M axImum Previous Section
Alpha Maximum Speed is defined by the top PFD Symbols 1
of a red strip along the speed scale. It Flight Mode Annunciations

represents the speed corresponding to the
VMAX
maximum angle of attack, as computed by
the FACs. Next Flap Extend Speed
NOTE Target Airspeed Pointer
VLS, alpha protection, and alpha Actual Airspeed Reference

maximum do not appear on the
Speed Trend Arrow
ground. They appear in flight shortly
after liftoff. Min Flap Retraction Speed
Alpha Protection
Alpha Maximum
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 2
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Alpha Maximum | Section 8.3.10
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Alpha Protection | Section 7.3.15

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGHT C ONTrOL L aws S ECTION 7.3.15

N OrmaL L aw - A LpHa P rOTECTION Previous Section
When the angle of attack is greater than Direct Law
Alpha Protection (black and amber band on Alternate Law

airspeed scale) Alpha Protection is
Normal Law
activated and:
Description
The autopilot disconnects
Ground Mode
The speed brakes retract
The angle of attack is proportional to Flare Mode
side stick deflection Load Factor Demand Mode

Nose-up pitch trim is inhibited
Bank angle limit is reduced from 67°
to 45° High Speed Protection
Pitch Attitude Protection

When airspeed is in the Alpha Protection
range to Alpha Max, the side stick High AOA Protection
commands angle of attack directly. Alpha Protection

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
To change the AOA Protection to flight Alpha Max
mode, the pilot must: Alpha Floor
Push the side stick more than 8° Bank Angle Protection
forward or Load Alleviation Function

Increase IAS beyond Alpha Prot for
at least 0.5 seconds a < aMax
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Alpha Protection | Section 7.3.15
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Alpha Protection | Section 8.3.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A LpHa P rOTECTION Previous Section
Alpha Protection is defined by the top of a PFD Symbols 1
black and amber strip along the speed Flight Mode Annunciations
scale. It represents the speed
VMAX
corresponding to the angle of attack at
which alpha protection activates, as Next Flap Extend Speed
computed by the FACs. Over Speed Protection Symbol
Speed Trend Arrow
Alpha Protection
Alpha Maximum
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 2
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Alpha Protection | Section 8.3.9
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Description | Section 7.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A lTErNaTE L aw - D EsCrIpTION Previous Section
The first level of flight control law Direct Law
degradation is pitch alternate law, roll Alternate Law

direct law, and yaw alternate law. The
Description
autopilot may be available, depending on
the specific failures. Alternate law reduces Load Factor Demand Mode
Vmo to 320 KIAS. The ECAM message Load Factor Limitation

F/CTL ALTN LAW (PROT LOST) is displayed.
Low Speed Stability
In alternate law when the landing gear is
extended the flight control system High Speed Stability
reconfigures to direct law. Load Alleviation Function
PITCH ALTERNATE - The pitch alternate law Stall Warning Speed
provides load factor demand mode, load Normal Law

factor limitation, high speed stability, low
speed stability protections, and load
alleviation function (on some A320s). Mechanical Backup
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
ROLL DIRECT - Roll direct law is a direct
In yaw mechanical law, there is no turn
side stick-to-aileron and spoiler position
coordination or yaw damping.
relationship. A maximum roll rate of 30
degrees per second can be obtained in roll RECONFIGURATION OF FLT CTL LAWS
direct law. If multiple system failures occur, the flight
control computers will reconfigure to a
YAW ALTERNATE - Yaw is yaw alternate or
yaw mechanical, depending on malfunction.
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Description | Section 7.3.1
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Altitude Indicator | Section 8.3.44

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImarY F LIgHT D IspLaY S YmBOLs S ECTION 8.3.44

A LTITudE I NdICaTOr Previous Section
The Altitude Indicator displays altitude in PFD Symbols 1
green on a white moving scale. NEG PFD Symbols 2

appears in window to indicate negative
PFD Symbols 3
altitude.
PFD Symbols 4
Window flashes yellow when approaching
Vertical Deviation Indicator
within 750 feet of the FCU-selected altitude
or flight level and stops flashing within 250 Vertical Speed Scale
feet. Window flashes amber if the airplane Digital Vertical Speed Indicator
deviates from the selected altitude or flight
Analog Vertical Speed Pointer
level by 250 feet.
Stall Warning Speed
Numerical value changes from green to
V1, VR, and V2 Speeds
amber when the airplane is at or below the
MDA entered in the MCDU. Minimum Slat Retract Speed
Green Dot Speed

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Econ Speed Range
Altitude Indicator
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Altitude Indicator | Section 8.3.44
Flight Control Unit | Altitude Selector | Section 13.2.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Speed/Mach Selector
Altitude Selector
Heading/Track Selector
VS/FPA Selector
A lTITudE S ElECTOR Buttons
Next Section
The Altitude Selector changes the altitude
displayed in the ALT window. The Inner L OCATION
Selector rotates to change altitude value.
The Outer Selector provides selection of
100 or 1000 foot increments.
When the Altitude Selector is pulled, OP CLB

or OP DES mode engages. When pushed,
CLB or DES mode engages, and the LVL/CH
light illuminates.
Flight Control Unit | Altitude Selector | Section 13.2.6
Clocks | Analog Chronometer | Section 8.5.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A NAlOG C hrONOmETEr Previous Section
CHR BUTTON - The first push starts sweep Clocks Description
second hand and minutes display in the Analog Chronometer

ET/CHR counter. The second push stops
second hand and freezes minutes display.
The third push resets second hand to the Digital Chronometer
12 o’clock position and clears ET/CHR Set Digital Chronometer

counter.
UTC COUNTER - Displays present time in a Next Section

24-hour format. Also used to view/update
the day, month, and year as set using the L OCATION
DATE button and UTC selector.
ET SELECTOR - RUN - The elapsed time

counter runs. HLD - Freezes counter time. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
RESET - Resets counter to zero.
ET/CHR COUNTER - Displays elapsed time
DATE BUTTON - Puts the chronometer in and chronograph time. Chronograph time
the date mode. The day, month, and year display has priority over elapsed time. If
replaces the UTC time display. elapsed time is in operation and the
chronograph time is selected, the ET/CHR
UTC SELECTOR - A dual function selector
display changes to zero and starts to count
that sets the time and date as follows: HSD
chronograph time on the ET/CHR display.
- Hours/Days MSM Minutes/Months, HLDY -
Elapsed time continues to accumulate.
Hold/Year, RUN - Begins normal operation.
Clocks | Analog Chronometer | Section 8.5.1
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Analog Vertical Speed Pointer | Section 8.3.38

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImarY F LIGHT D IspLaY S YmbOLs S ECTION 8.3.38

A NaLOG V ErTICaL S pEEd P OINTEr Previous Section
The Analog Vertical Speed Pointer displays PFD Symbols 1
green if 2000 FPM or less. It disappears PFD Symbols 2

when vertical speed is less than 200 FPM.
PFD Symbols 3
If vertical speed exceeds 2000 FPM, the
pointer moves to end of scale and vertical PFD Symbols 4
speed indicators (digital and analog) Vertical Deviation Indicator

become amber. Below 1000 feet RA, this
Vertical Speed Scale
occurs if vertical speed is in excess of 1200
FPM. Digital Vertical Speed Indicator
Stall Warning Speed
Minimum Slat Retract Speed
Green Dot Speed

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Econ Speed Range
Altitude Indicator
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Analog Vertical Speed Pointer | Section 8.3.38
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Annunciator Light Switch | Section 3.6.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NTEGrAl ANd C AbIN S IGNs L IGHTING C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 3.6.3

A NNUNCIATOr L IGHT S WITCH Previous Section
TEST - The TEST position Overhead Integral
causes all cockpit annunciator Ice and Stby Compass

lights to illuminate and all
Dome
liquid crystal displays (LCDs)
to indicate 8s. Annunciator Light
Seat Belts
DIM - The DIM position reduces illumination
of the annunciator lights. No Smoking
Emergency Exit
BRT - The BRT position increases
illumination of the annunciator lights. Next Section
L OCATION
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Annunciator Light Switch | Section 3.6.3
Airplane General | Antenna Locations | Section 1.1.3
A320 D IsPlaYs aNd P aNEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A320 A NTENNa L OCaTIONs S ECTION 1.1.3

Previous Section
A320 Dimensions
A320 Turning Radius
Probe Locations
Antenna Locations
Exterior Doors
Ground Service
Next Section
Airplane General | Antenna Locations | Section 1.1.3
Landing Gear Panel | Anti-Skid & Nose Wheel Steering Switch | Section 12.5.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANdINg G EAr P ANEl S ECTION 12.5.3

A uTO B rAkE S wITCHEs Previous Section
ON - When the anti-skid and LG Indicator Lights
nose wheel steering switch is Brake Fan Switch

selected to ON and the green
Auto Brake Switches
hydraulic pressure is available,
then; the green hydraulic A/Skid and N/W Steering
system supplies the brakes, anti-skid is LG Schematic

available, and nose wheel steering is
Next Section
available.
ON AND GREEN SYTEM FAILS - When the

L OCATION
anti-skid and nose wheel steering switch is
selected to ON and the green hydraulic
pressure is NOT available, then; < PREVIOUS NEXT >
The yellow hydraulic pressure takes OFF - When OFF is selected:

over automatically to supply the
Yellow hydraulic pressure supplies
brakes
the brakes
Antiskid remains available, and
Brake pressure must be limited to
Nose wheel steering is lost.
avoid wheel locking. Click on link to
If both the green and yellow hydraulic see BRAKE PRESSURE INDICATOR
systems fail, alternate braking is supplied Differential braking remains available
by the brake accumulator only. The via the pedals
accumulator supplies pressure for at least Antiskid is deactivated
seven full brake applications. Nose wheel steering is lost
Landing Gear Panel | Anti-Skid & Nose Wheel Steering Switch | Section 12.5.3
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Bank Angle Limit Indicator | Section 8.3.12

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMarY F lIGHT D IsplaY S YMbOls S ECTION 8.3.12

B aNK A NGlE L IMIT I NdICaTOr Previous Section
The Bank Angle Limit Indicator indicates PFD Symbols 1
bank angle limitation in green at 67° (left PFD Symbols 2

or right) on roll scale. With loss of normal
Side Slip Index Beta Target
law the Bank Angle Limit Indicator is
replaced with an amber colored X. Bank Angle Limit Indicator
Flight Director Command Bars
Flight Director Command Bars 2
Airplane Symbol
Flight Path Vector
Flight Path Vector 2
Flight Path Director
Pitch Scale
Pitch Limit Indicator

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Radio Altitude Height
Loc and GS Scales and Indices
Marker Beacon Indication
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Bank Angle Limit Indicator | Section 8.3.12
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Bank Angle Protection | Section 7.3.18

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGHT C ONTrOL L aWs S ECTION 7.3.18

N OrMaL L aW - B aNK A NGLE P rOTECTION Previous Section
In normal law the roll attitude is held Direct Law
constant with the side stick at neutral (up Alternate Law

to 33° of bank). If full stick deflection is
Normal Law
held, the bank angle is limited to a
maximum of 67°. If the side stick is Description
released to neutral with a bank angle Ground Mode

greater than 33°, the bank angle decreases
Flare Mode
automatically to approximately 33°. Above
33°, the automatic pitch trim is Load Factor Demand Mode
inoperative. Load Factor Limitation
If high angle of attack protection is active, High Speed Protection
the bank angle is limited to 45°. If high Pitch Attitude Protection

speed protection is active, the bank angle
High AOA Protection
is limited to 45° and a 0° bank angle is
commanded with the side stick neutral. Alpha Protection
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Alpha Max
If the bank angle exceeds 45°, the autopilot
automatically disconnects and the flight Alpha Floor
director bars disappear. Bank Angle Protection
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Bank Angle Protection | Section 7.3.18
Next Section
EFIS Control Panel | Barometric Selector in Hg | Section 8.1.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
EFIS C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 8.1.7

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
Barometric Window in HG
Barometric Window STD
Barometric Selector in Hg
Barometric Selector hPA
Barometric Selector STD

B ArOMETrIC S ElECTOr IN HG
FD Off Button
The Barometric Selector selects barometric
FD On Button
reference. When the selector is pulled, the
associated altimeter is set to the standard ILS Off
barometric reference setting (29.92 In Hg
ILS On
or 1013 hPa), and STD is displayed in the
Mode/Range Selector
barometric window and on the PFD.
Pushing the selector enables selection of a VOR Switches On
new barometric reference.
VOR Switches Off
OUTER SELECTOR - The Outer Selector Next Section

selects units of reference in inches of
mercury (In Hg) or hectopascals (hPa).
INNER SELECTOR - The Inner Selector

provides selection of the reference value
displayed in the barometric window and on
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
the PFD.
EFIS Control Panel | Barometric Selector in Hg | Section 8.1.7
Electrical Control Panel | Battery Indicator | Section 3.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Commercial Switch
Battery Indicator
Battery Switches
IDG Switch
Generator Switch
B ATTERY I NDICATOR
Two battery indicators labeled Bus Tie Switch

BAT 1 and BAT 2 provide
battery voltage readings for
each battery. The normal Electrical Schematic
voltage is from 25 to 31 volts and Next Section

discharge current from 0 to 5 amps.
L OCATION
On the ECAM ELEC page the battery voltage
normally appears as a green color in the
normal range, and becomes amber if the
voltage is less than 25 V or greater than
31V. Battery current normally appears
green and becomes amber if discharge
current becomes greater than 5A.
Electrical Control Panel | Battery Indicator | Section 3.2.1
Electrical Control Panel | Battery Switches | Section 3.2.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Commercial Switch
Battery Indicator
Battery Switches
IDG Switch
Generator Switch
B ATTERY S wITChEs
AUTO - When the battery switches are FAULT - The battery FAULT Bus Tie Switch
selected to the AUTO all lights are light illuminates amber when
extinguished. The AUTO selection enables the charging current for the
the batteries to connect to the DC BAT bus corresponding battery is Electrical Schematic
during the following: outside normal limits causing the battery Next Section
contactor to open.
APU starting
L OCATION
Battery charging, and OFF - When the battery switches are
Below 100 knots on the ground with selected to OFF, the battery charge limiter
AC busses 1 and 2 not powered. is not operating and the battery line
contactor is open. The OFF light illuminates
Two batteries, BAT 1 and BAT 2, are
white if the DC BAT bus is powered. The
installed and each is connected directly to
HOT BAT busses remain powered
its respective HOT BAT bus. Each battery
regardless of battery switch selection.
has its own battery charge limiter that
monitors battery charging and controls it's
battery contactor.
Electrical Control Panel | Battery Switches | Section 3.2.2
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Rotating Beacon Light Switch | Section 3.5.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Strobe Light
Rotating Beacon
Wing
Nav and Logo
Runway Turn Off
R OTATING B EACON L IGHT S WITCH Landing Light
Takeoff and Taxi

OFF - The OFF position
extinguishes the rotating Next Section
beacon lights.
L OCATION
illuminates the rotating anti-
collision beacon lights. The red beacon
lights are mounted on the top and bottom
of the fuselage.
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Rotating Beacon Light Switch | Section 3.5.1
MCDU | Progress Page - Bearing and Distance | Section 14.4.11

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOgrEss P agE - B EarINg aNd D IsTaNCE S ECTION 14.4.11

Displays the FMGS computed bearing and Previous Section
distance from the present position to any Description

waypoint, including airports (KIAD),
Phase of Flight
runways (KIAD01R), VORs, etc. The
BRG/DIST calculation is updated every 2 CRZ
seconds. OPT
REC MAX
Report
Report Page
Update At
Predictive GPS
Predictive GPS Page
Required Accuracy
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Progress Page - Bearing and Distance | Section 14.4.11
Hydraulic Control Panel | Blue Electric Pump Switch | Section 10.2.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Engine Pump
RAT Manual On
Blue Electric Pump
Power Transfer Unit
B luE E lECTrIC P ump S wITCh Yellow Electric Pump
AUTO - The ELEC PUMP FAULT - The BLUE ELEC PUMP FAULT light Hydraulic Schematic
operates, if AC power is illuminates amber for a Blue hydraulic
Next Section
available when in flight or on system:
the ground, if one engine is L OCATION
Reservoir low level
running
Reservoir overheat
OFF - When the BLUE ELEC PUMP switch is Reservoir low air pressure
selected to OFF, the electric-driven pump is Pump low pressure (inhibited on the
de-energize and the OFF light illuminates ground when engines are stopped)
white. Pump overheat
The BLUE ELEC PUMP FAULT light

extinguishes when the BLUE ELEC PUMP
switch is selected OFF (except during an
overheat, when the light remains
illuminated as long as the overheat is
present).
Hydraulic Control Panel | Blue Electric Pump Switch | Section 10.2.2
Landing Gear Panel | Brake Fan Switch | Section 12.5.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANDING G EAr P ANEl S ECTION 12.5.1

B rAKE F AN S wITCh Previous Section
HOT - The HOT light illuminates LG Indicator Lights
amber to indicate that the brake Brake Fan Switch

temperature is above the
Auto Brake Switches
maximum brake temperature
(300°C) for takeoff. An ECAM caution A/Skid and N/W Steering
message also appears. LG Schematic
Maintenance action is required when: Next Section
The difference between the average L OCATION

temperature of the left gear brakes
and the average temperature of the
right gear brakes is 200°C or more. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
The temperature difference between
two brakes on the same gear is ON - The brake fans run when the brake fan
greater than 150°C and the switch is selected to ON and the left main
temperature of one of those brakes gear is down and locked.
is at or above 600°C or at or below
60°C after landing.
Any brake’s temperature exceeds
900°C
OFF - When the brake fan switch is selected

to OFF (no lights are illuminated), then; the
brake fans stop.
Landing Gear Panel | Brake Fan Switch | Section 12.5.1
Electrical Control Panel | Bus Tie Switch | Section 3.2.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Commercial Switch
Battery Indicator
Battery Switches
IDG Switch
Generator Switch
B us T IE S wITCH
ON - When selected to AUTO all Bus Tie Switch

lights are extinguished on the
switch, and the bus tie
contactors open or close Electrical Schematic
automatically to maintain Next Section

power supply to AC buses 1 and 2. One
contactor is closed when one engine-driven L OCATION
generator supplies the associated AC bus
and the APU generator or external power
supplies the other side. Both contactors are
closed in case of one engine-driven
generator, APU generator, or external
power supply is connected.
OFF - The bus tie switch OFF light

illuminates white when selected to OFF.
Both bus tie contactors are open when In this example, generator 1 has failed and
Electrical Control Panel | Bus Tie Switch | Section 3.2.8
selected to OFF isolating the other AC the bus tie switch is off that prevents AC
power. bus 1 from being powered by Gen 2.
Emergency Oxygen Systems | Cabin Oxygen System | Section 4.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E mERGENCY O XYGEN S YsTEms S ECTION 4.1.1

C aBIN O XYGEN S YsTEm Previous Section
Oxygen is supplied by chemical oxygen Cockpit Oxygen
generators. The oxygen masks and Cabin Oxygen

chemical oxygen generators are located in
Next Section
overhead compartments above each
passenger and flight attendant seat and in
the lavatories.
All oxygen mask doors open automatically if

the cabin altitude exceeds 14,000 feet.
Passenger masks can be manually deployed

from the cockpit by pressing the MASK
MAN ON pushbutton on the overhead panel
for at least 2 seconds. If the pushbutton is
not pressed and held for at least 2 seconds,
some of the masks may not deploy.
The chemical generators are activated when

the oxygen masks are pulled. The mask
receives pure oxygen under positive
pressure (approximately 13 minutes).
Emergency Oxygen Systems | Cabin Oxygen System | Section 4.1.1
Emergency Evacuation Panel | Evacuation Switch | Section 4.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E MErGENCY E VACuATION P ANEl S ECTION 4.3.2

E VACuATION S wITCH Previous Section
This switch allows activation of an Evacuation Command Switch
evacuation alert from the cockpit or cabin. Horn Shut Off
CAPT & PURS - When the evacuation switch Evacuation Switch
is selected to CAPT & PURS the evacuation Next Section

alert may be activated from the cabin or
cockpit. L OCATION
CAPT - When evacuation switch is selected

to CAPT the evacuation alert may be
activated only from the cockpit.
Emergency Evacuation Panel | Evacuation Switch | Section 4.3.2
A320 Cargo Smoke Panel | Cargo Fire Extinguishing System Schematic | Section 6.2.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A320 C ARGO S MOKE P ANEl S ECTION 6.2.5

C ARGO F IRE E XTINGUIsHING S YsTEM S CHEMATIC Previous Section
Smoke Light
Test Button
Discharge Switch
Discharge Lights
Agent 2 Light
Cargo Ext Schematic
Next Section
L OCATION
A320 Cargo Smoke Panel | Cargo Fire Extinguishing System Schematic | Section 6.2.5
A319 Cargo Smoke Panel | Cargo Fire Extinguisher System Schematic | Section 6.1.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C ARGO F IRE E XTINGUIsHING S YsTEM S CHEMATIC Previous Section
Smoke Disch Lights
Discharge Switch
Test Button
Cargo Fire Schematic
Next Section
L OCATION
A319 Cargo Smoke Panel | Cargo Fire Extinguisher System Schematic | Section 6.1.3
Fuel Control Panel | Center Fuel Tank Pump Switches | Section 9.2.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 9.2.2

Previous Section
Wing Tank Pump
Fuel Cross Feed
Center Tank Pump
Fuel Mode Select
C ENTER F uEl T ANK P ump S wITCHEs Fuel Tank Schematic
ON - ON is indicated when all If MODE SEL switch is selected to AUTO this Next Section
lights are extinguished on the allows automatic operation of the center

center fuel tank pump switches. fuel tank pumps. L OCATION
FAULT - The amber FAULT light If the center tank is supplying fuel, the wing
comes on when the associated center tank tanks tend to overfill; therefore, the center
pump is in operation and the delivery tank pump is automatically selected off
pressure drops to less than normal. when the inner WING tank is full. The wing
tank supplies the engine fuel until
If MODE SEL switch is selected to MAN, the
approximately 1100 pounds of fuel is used,
associated center tank pump is activated
and then the center tank pump resumes
regardless of flap position or fuel quantity.
operation.
Fuel Control Panel | Center Fuel Tank Pump Switches | Section 9.2.2
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Check Altimeter Annunciation | Section 8.3.51

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImarY F lIGhT D IsplaY S YmBOls S ECTION 8.3.51

C hECk A lTImETEr A NNuNCIaTION Previous Section
The CHECK ALT annunciation appears in PFD Symbols 1
amber to indicate the difference between PFD Symbols 2

both PFDs altitude indications is greater
PFD Symbols 3
than 250 feet (QNH), or 500 feet (STD).
PFD Symbols 4
In RVSM airspace, both primary altimeters
PFD Symbols 5
must agree within 200 feet at all times. At
intervals of approximately one hour, or ILS Information
when passing oceanic waypoints, confirm Mach Number

the primary altimeters are within the 200-
ILS Message
foot tolerance.
ILS Front Course Pointer
Landing Elevation
Ground Reference
Check Altimeter Annunciation

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS Fail Flag
PFD TCAS Display
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Check Altimeter Annunciation | Section 8.3.51
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Check TO Data | Section 14.5.12

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P aGE P rEFLIGHT - C HECK TO D aTa M EssaGE S ECTION 14.5.12

Alerts pilots that the V-speeds and flex Previous Section
temperature have been removed from the Description

fill-in fields. This occurs when a change to
TO Page - Preflight
runway is made on the flight plan page.
Check TO Data
Check TO Data Message
V-speed Box Prompts
Flex Temp Brackets
Confirm TO Data
Climb Page - Active

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Check TO Data | Section 14.5.12
ECAM Control Panel | Clear Button | Section 16.1.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Description
TO Configuration
Emergency Cancel
System Buttons
All Button
C lEAr B uTTON Clear Button
The CLR buttons illuminate when an ECAM Status Button
warning, caution, or status message is Recall Button

displayed. When an illuminated CLR button
is pushed, the ECAM display changes and
clears the ECAM warning, caution, or status Next Section
from the SD.

L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
ECAM Control Panel | Clear Button | Section 16.1.5
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - Description | Section 14.6.24

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lIMB W INd P aGE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.6.24

Climb winds are accessed in flight via the Previous Section
VERT REV page at a waypoint prior to the Description

T/C waypoint, or via INIT page A during
Init A Page
preflight.
Init B Page
During preflight the forecast enroute winds
Climb Wind Page
are uplinked (by LS 3R - WIND REQUEST)
for the points that are loaded for departure Description
and arrival airports. A temperature forecast Tru Wind/Alt

is also uploaded for a default altitude near
Return
the Tropopause.
History Wind
Winds can be manually entered too.
Wind Request
Next Phase
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - Description | Section 14.6.24
Air Conditioning Panel | Cockpit and Cabin Zone Temperature Selectors | Section 15.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A Ir C ONdITIONINg C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 15.2.1

Previous Section
Pack Flow Selector
Hot Air Switch
Pack Switch
Engine Bleed Switch
Ram Air Switch
APU Bleed Switch
C OCkpIT ANd C ABIN Z ONE T EmpErATUrE S ElECTOrs Cross Bleed Selector
Pneumatic Schematic
The zone controller regulates the If the primary zone controller channel fails
temperature of the cockpit and two cabin the secondary zone controller channel Leak Detection
zones. The zone controller modulates the takes over, then the hot air pressure Next Section
airflow through the trim air valves to regulating valve and trim air valves close,
optimize cockpit and cabin temperature and the flow control and temperature L OCATION
regulation. The temperature is regulated optimization are lost. The cockpit
between 64°F and 86°F. There is no temperature is controlled to 76°F by pack
manual means of regulating hot air 1. The forward and aft cabins are controlled
pressure or trim air valves. The zone to 76°F by pack 2.
controller has a primary and redundant
If both zone controller channels fail, then
secondary channel for automatically
the packs produce a fixed temperature of
regulating zone temperature optimization.
68°F from pack 1 and 50°F from pack 2. In
If the primary zone controller channel is this situation a message PACK REG appears
operating normally and the secondary zone on the Engine Warning Display and all
controller channel fails, then temperature information is removed from the ECAM
Air Conditioning Panel | Cockpit and Cabin Zone Temperature Selectors | Section 15.2.1
control remains normal. COND page.
MCDU | Cruise Page Preflight - Next/Previous Phase | Section 14.5.27

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE P agE P rEFlIghT - N ExT /P rEvIOus P hasE S ECTION 14.5.27

TO, Climb, Cruise, Descent, Approach, and Previous Section
Go Around pages can be accessed using Description

the NEXT or PREVIOUS PHASE prompt.
TO Page - Preflight
Page title is a green color when flight phase
is active. Check TO Data

PREV PHASE - Provides access to Climb
page - LS 6L. Climb Page - Active

NEXT PHASE - Provides access to Descent
page - LS 6R. Previous/Next Phase
Managed Speed
Presel
Des Cabin Rate

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Page Preflight - Next/Previous Phase | Section 14.5.27
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Description | Section 14.6.30

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE W INd P agE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.6.30

Accessed in flight via the VERT REV page at Previous Section
a waypoint between the T/C and T/D Description

waypoints, or via INIT A page. Use vertical
Init A Page
slew keys, ↑ or ↓ to cycle through the cruise
waypoints. Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
NOTE History Wind Page
The FMGS maintains the winds entered Cruise Wind Page

at a waypoint to down-path waypoints
Description
if no other winds are entered.
Tru Wind/Alt
Sat/Alt
Return
Wind Request
UpLink Request
UpLink Insert
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Prev Phase
Next Phase
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Description | Section 14.6.30
MCDU | Database Hold Page | Section 14.8.16

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D aTaBasE H Old P aGE S ECTION 14.8.16

Accessed by performing a lateral revision at Previous Section
a desired hold fix that has a published Description

holding pattern. Displays holding pattern
Flight Plan A Page
contained in the database. Allows
modification to the published holding Flight Plan A Prior to TO
parameters. Lateral Rev Dept Airport
Lateral Rev at PPOS

CAUTION
Ensure the database hold complies with
the current published hold as depicted
Airways Page
on the appropriate charts.
Departure Page B
Flight Plan B Page
COMPUTED - Displays and inserts the Arrival Page A

computed hold data. The data may also be
Arrival Page B
modified to build a manual holding pattern
to pilot parameters. Approach Vias Page
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TMPY INSERT - Inserts hold data into F-PLN
page. Vertical Rev At Waypoint
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Database Hold Page | Section 14.8.16
MCDU | Descent Page Preflight - Description | Section 14.5.34

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT P agE P rEflIghT - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.5.34

ACTIVE MODE - Indicates the active mode Previous Section
speed target in green (managed or Description

selected). Cannot be modified through this
TO Page - Preflight
field.
Check TO Data
TIME, UTC and DEST EFOB - Before takeoff,
displays the flight time (time) to
destination and the predicted landing fuel. Climb Page - Active
After takeoff, it displays the predicted Cruise Page - Preflight

arrival time at destination (UTC) and the
predicted landing fuel. If the pilots enter an
estimated takeoff time, the predicted Descent Page - Preflight
arrival time (UTC) at destination displays Descent Page - Active

automatically.
MANAGAED - Indicates the speed/mach Approach Page - Active

around which the FMGC-computed descent
Go Around Page
profile is built. The default values are based
on cost index. If modified, the value will Next Section
display in large font. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
PREV PHASE - Provides access to Cruise

page - LS 6L.
NEXT PHASE - Provides access to Approach

Page page - LS 6R.
MCDU | Descent Page Preflight - Description | Section 14.5.34
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Description | Section 14.6.36

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT W INd P AGE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.6.36

The Descent Wind page is accessed via the Previous Section
VERT REV page at a waypoint after the T/D Description

waypoint, or via INIT page.
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Return
Altn Wind
Wind Request
Prev Phase
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Description | Section 14.6.36
Primary Flight Display Symbols | DH Flag | Section 8.3.32

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMArY F LIGhT D IspLAY S YMBOLs S ECTION 8.3.32

DH F LAG Previous Section
The DH Flag displays in amber to indicate PFD Symbols 1
that decision height has been reached. The PFD Symbols 2

DH symbol flashes for 3 seconds when
PFD Symbols 3
decision height is reached, then remains
steady until touch down. Vertical Deviation Indication
True Heading
DH Flags
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | DH Flag | Section 8.3.32
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Digital Vertical Speed Indication | Section 8.3.37

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImarY F LIGHT D IspLaY S YmbOLs S ECTION 8.3.37

D IGITaL V ErTICaL S pEEd I NdICaTION Previous Section
The Digital Vertical Speed Indication PFD Symbols 1
displays green if 2000 FPM or less. It PFD Symbols 2

disappears when vertical speed is less than
PFD Symbols 3
200 FPM. If vertical speed exceeds 2000
FPM, the pointer moves to end of scale and PFD Symbols 4
vertical speed indicators (digital and Vertical Deviation Indicator

analog) become amber. Below 1000 feet
RA, this occurs if vertical speed is in excess
of 1200 FPM. Digital Vertical Speed Indicator
Stall Warning Speed
Green Dot Speed

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Econ Speed Range
Altitude Indicator
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Digital Vertical Speed Indication | Section 8.3.37
A320 Cargo Smoke Panel | Discharge Agent 2 Light | Section 6.2.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A320 C ARgO S MOKE P ANEl S ECTION 6.2.4

D IsChARgE A gENT 2 L IghT Previous Section
DISCH AGENT 2 - This light Smoke Light
illuminates amber 60 minutes Test Button

after agent 1 is discharged in the
Discharge Switch
FWD or AFT cargo compartment.
The DISC AGENT 2 light extinguishes when Discharge Lights
agent 2 has discharged. Agent 2 Light
When bottle one is discharged, DISCH 1 Cargo Ext Schematic
light (amber color) comes on in Next Section

approximately 60 seconds. Sixty minutes
after the discharge of the first bottle, When bottle 2 is discharged, a flow L OCATION
DISCH AGENT 2 light appears. metering system controls bottle 2's agent
discharge rate. It takes approximately 40
This message or light alerts the crew to minutes for the DISCH 2 light to illuminate
discharge AGENT 2 (fire extinguisher bottle an amber color. This ensures sufficient
2) to maintain the required agent agent concentration for 180 minutes.
concentration.
A320 Cargo Smoke Panel | Discharge Agent 2 Light | Section 6.2.4
A320 Cargo Smoke Panel | Discharge Lights | Section 6.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

D IsChARGE L IGhTs Previous Section
DISCH 1 - The associated DISCH 1 Smoke Light
or 2 light illuminates amber when Test Button

extinguishing agent has been
Discharge Switch
discharged. When bottle one is
discharged, DISCH 1 light (amber color) Discharge Lights
comes on in approximately 60 seconds. Agent 2 Light
DISCH 2 - When bottle 2 is discharged, a Cargo Ext Schematic
flow metering system controls bottle 2's Next Section

agent discharge rate. It takes
approximately 40 minutes for DISCH 2 light L OCATION
to illuminate an amber color. This ensures
sufficient agent concentration for 180
minutes.
A320 Cargo Smoke Panel | Discharge Lights | Section 6.2.3
A319 Cargo Smoke Panel | Discharge Switch | Section 6.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

D IsChArgE S wITCh Previous Section
The DISCH Switch (guarded) Smoke Disch Lights
discharges associated agent in the Discharge Switch

respective cargo compartment
Test Button
(FWD or AFT). There is only one
bottle to fight fires in the A319 Cargo Fire Schematic
cargo compartment. Next Section

CARGO FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM - L OCATION
The fire extinguishing system protects the
forward and aft cargo compartments. One
fire bottle supplies three nozzles in the
A319 aircraft. One in the forward cargo
compartment and two in the aft cargo
compartment. The fire extinguisher bottle
has two discharge heads, in each
compartment. When a SMOKE light
illuminates, the crew presses the AGENT
switch to discharge the agent. This action
ignites the squib on the fire bottle, and
then discharges the extinguishing agent
into respective cargo compartment.
A319 Cargo Smoke Panel | Discharge Switch | Section 6.1.1
A320 Cargo Smoke Panel | Discharge Toggle Switch | Section 6.2.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

D IsChArgE T OgglE S wITCh Previous Section
The
Discharge Toggle Smoke Light
Switch discharges Test Button

associated agent (1 or 2)
Discharge Switch
in the respective cargo
compartment (FWD or AFT). Discharge Lights
Agent 2 Light
When the FWD (AFT) SMOKE light comes
on, the crew selects AGENT 1 with the Cargo Ext Schematic
Discharge Toggle Switch. This action ignites Next Section

the corresponding squib on the fire bottle,
and then discharges the extinguishing It takes approximately 40 minutes for the L OCATION
agent into that cargo compartment. When DISCH 2 light to illuminate an amber color.
bottle one is discharged, DISCH 1 light This ensures sufficient agent concentration
(amber color) comes on in approximately for 180 minutes.
60 seconds.
CARGO FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM -
Sixty minutes after the discharge of the first The fire extinguishing system protects the
bottle, DISCH AGENT 2 light appears. This forward and aft cargo compartments. Two
message or light alerts the crew to fire bottles supply three nozzles. One in the
discharge AGENT 2 (fire extinguisher bottle forward cargo compartment and two in the
2) to maintain the required agent aft cargo compartment. Each bottle has
concentration. When bottle 2 is discharged, two discharge heads, in each compartment.
a flow metering system controls bottle 2's
agent discharge rate.
A320 Cargo Smoke Panel | Discharge Toggle Switch | Section 6.2.2
Cabin Pressurization Control Panel | Ditching Switch | Section 15.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ABIN P rEssUrIZATION C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 15.3.3

D ITCHING S wITCH Previous Section
The ditching switch is a Man V/S Control
guarded switch that is Mode Select

designed to close all cabin
Landing Elevation
pressurization valves in an
emergency ditching situation Ditching
and for de-icing operations. Next Section
OFF - Normally the ditching switch is L OCATION

deactivated by selecting the switch to OFF
and is indicated when no lights are
illuminated on the switch.
ON - When the ditching switch is selected to

ON, the ON light is illuminated a white
color and it commands:
The avionics equipment vent inlet

and outlet valves to close
Ram air inlet valve to close
Out flow valve to close prior to
touchdown
Closes pack flow control valves (turns
the packs OFF automatically).
Cabin Pressurization Control Panel | Ditching Switch | Section 15.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Table 1
FLIGHT PLAN LINES
Table 2

Table 3
Temporary Table 4
NAV/ARC
Flight Plan Displays TMPY flight plan prior to INSERT.
PLAN Table 5
(Y)
Table 6
Engine Out NAV
Displays in green when EO flight plan is active; yellow Table 7
Flight Plan ARC
when EO flight plan is not active.
(G, Y) PLAN
Table 8
PATH SYMBOLS Next Section
Procedure
Turn or NAV
Displayed on the 160 NM and 320 NM scales or when the
Holding ARC
turn is beyond the next leg.
Pattern PLAN
(W)
Holding
NAV/ARC Displayed when range is 80 NM or less and the turn is in
Pattern
PLAN the active or next leg.
(W)
Displays selected runway as oriented runway symbol.

Runway NAV/ARC
Drawn to scale (paved length) if 10, 20, or 40 NM range
(W) PLAN
is selected.
NAVAIDS
Displays green if a current waypoint, white if the TO

DME or
NAV waypoint, blue when tuned for display (automatically or

TACAN
ARC manually), and magenta when not part of the flight plan
(G,W, B,
PLAN but displayed when the VOR.D and/or NDB buttons are
M)
selected on.
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Dome Light Switch | Section 3.6.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

D OmE L IGHT S WITCH Previous Section
OFF - The OFF position Overhead Integral
extinguishes both dome lights. Ice and Stby Compass
DIM - The DIM position Dome
reduces both dome lights to Annunciator Light

low intensity.
Seat Belts
BRT - The BRT position increases both dome No Smoking

lights' intensity to high.
Emergency Exit
Next Section
L OCATION
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Dome Light Switch | Section 3.6.2
Emergency Exits and Slides | Door Slides | Section 4.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E mErGENCY E XITs aNd S lIdEs S ECTION 4.2.1

D OOr S lIdEs Previous Section
DOOR SLIDES - A slide or slide/raft is Cabin and Cockpit Exits
installed at each entry/service door. Slides Door Slides

are single-lane width; slide/rafts, dual-lane
Over Wing Slides
width. In a ditching situation, the inflated
slide/raft can be detached from the door sill Next Section
by pulling the slide/raft disconnect handle

located in the area where the girt bar
attaches to the airplane. The slide/raft
remains attached to the airplane by a
mooring line.
ARMED DOORS - When the slide arming

lever is in the ARMED position, the
slide/raft is connected to the floor brackets
on both sides of the door. If the door is
opened from the inside with the slide
armed, the slide automatically inflates and
the door is pneumatically-assisted open.
The slides contain a manual inflation handle
for use in case the slide does not
automatically inflate. Opening a door from
the outside disarms the door and escape
slide.
Electrical System Displays | Dual AC Bus Failure Gear Up | Section 3.1.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

D uAl AC B us F AIlurE G EAr U p Previous Section
A ram air turbine (RAT) automatically Normal Power
extends if both AC busses 1 and 2 lose APU Power

electrical power above 100 knots; however,
a minimum airspeed of 140 knots (on
earlier A320s) is required to provide External Power Only
sufficient blue hydraulic pressure to AC 1 Bus Failure

operate the emergency generator.
TR 1 Failure
On later A320s and all A319s, the Generator Disconnect

emergency generator operates until
Generator Line 1
touchdown (greater than 125 knots),
regardless of landing gear position. Dual AC Bus Failure
Dual AC Bus Failure GU

In this example a dual generator failure has
occurred, the RAT is extended, the gear is Dual AC Bus Failure GD
up, and the emergency generator is Dual AC Bus Failure Spd 100
operating. Electrical power is provided to < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Dual AC Bus Failure Spd 50
the:
Next Section
AC ESS BUS
AC ESS SHED BUS L OCATION
DC ESS and DC ESS SHED busses
through the ESS TR
Electrical System Displays | Dual AC Bus Failure Gear Up | Section 3.1.8
Electrical System Displays | Dual AC Bus Failure Gear Down | Section 3.1.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

D uAl AC B us F AIlurE G EAr D OwN Previous Section
When the landing gear is down on (earlier Normal Power
A320s); the emergency generator no APU Power

longer powers the essential busses.
In this example a dual generator failure has External Power Only

occurred, the RAT is extended, the landing
AC 1 Bus Failure
gear is down, and the static inverter is
operating. Electrical power configuration TR 1 Failure
consist of: Generator Disconnect
BAT 1 powers the AC ESS bus Generator Line 1
through the static inverter Dual AC Bus Failure

BAT 2 powers the DC ESS bus
The AC and DC ESS SHED busses are
not powered Dual AC Bus Failure GD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCATION
Electrical System Displays | Dual AC Bus Failure Gear Down | Section 3.1.9
Electrical System Displays | Dual AC Bus Failure Speed 100 | Section 3.1.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrICAl S YsTEm D IsplAYs S ECTION 3.1.10

D uAl AC B us F AIlurE S pEEd 100 Previous Section
When the speed is below 100 knots IAS, the Normal Power
DC bus connects to the batteries providing APU Power

power for:
APU fire detection External Power Only

APU fire protection
AC 1 Bus Failure
Manual pressurization
TR 1 Failure
Generator Line 1
Dual AC Bus Failure
Dual AC Bus Failure GD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCATION
Index En - Ez | Section 17.5.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX E N - E Z S ECTION 17.5.1

Energy Circle Index A
Engine 2 Bleed Overheat SD Index B
Engine Failure After V1 Index C
Engine Failure After V2 Index D
Engine Hydraulic Pump Switch Index E
Engine Agent Switch Index Ea - Em
Engine Bleed Switch Index En - Ez
Engine Fire/Fault Light Index F
Engine Fire Panel Index G
Engine Fire Switch Index H
Eng Manual Start and N1 Mode Panel Index I, J, K
Engine Manual Start Switches Index L
Engine Master Switch Index M
Engine Mode Selector Index N
Engine N1 Mode Switches Index O
Engine Out ACC Index P, Q
Engine Out Plan Route Index R
Engine Start and Ignition Panel Index S, T
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index En - Ez | Section 17.5.1
ECAM Control Panel | All Button | Section 16.1.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Description
TO Configuration
Emergency Cancel
System Buttons
All Button
A ll B uTTON Clear Button
The ALL button when pushed and held, Status Button
displays all system pages in succession at 1 Recall Button

second intervals.
If the ECAM control panel fails, push and Next Section

hold the ALL button until the desired
system page appears, and then release the L OCATION
button to maintain the display.
If only one ECAM screen is available,

repeatedly pressing the ALL button cycles
to the desired page.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
ECAM Control Panel | All Button | Section 16.1.4
Pneumatic System Displays | Cond SD - SDCU Channel Failures | Section 15.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C ONd SD - SDCU C HANNEl F AIlurEs Previous Section
A Smoke Detection Controller Unit (SDCU) Cond SD
detects smoke in the lavatories and cargo Description

compartments. The SCDU has two
Hot Air Fault
channels.
SDCU Channel Failure
If both SDCU channels fail the aft cargo and
Bleed SD
lavatory smoke detection is lost.
Cruise SD
In addition, an ECAM SMOKE LAV + CRG
Cab Press SD
DET FAULT will be generated that requires
the pilot to turn the AFT ISOL VALVE switch Next Section
to OFF.
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pneumatic System Displays | Cond SD - SDCU Channel Failures | Section 15.1.2
Switching Panel | ECAM/ND XFR Selector | Section 8.4.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
ATT HDG Selector
AIR DATA Selector
EIS DMC Selector
ECAM/ND XFR S ElECTOr Next Section
When the ECAM/ND XFR Selector is selected SWITCHING PANEL - Four selectors on the L OCATION
to: forward control pedestal allows the pilots to
reconfigure display unit sources in case of
NORM - The System Display (SD)
component failure.
appears on lower ECAM.
CAPT - Transfers the System Display
to Captain's ND.
F/O - Transfers the System Display
to First Officer's ND.
Note: In case of engine/warning display

(E/WD) and SD failure, the selector allows
the E/WD to transfer to either ND.
Switching Panel | ECAM/ND XFR Selector | Section 8.4.3
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Econ Speed Range | Section 8.3.43

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E CON S pEEd R aNGE Previous Section
The Econ Speed Range appears in magenta PFD Symbols 1
when: in the DES phase of flight, speed is PFD Symbols 2

managed, and the DES FMA is annunciated
PFD Symbols 3
(NAV required).
PFD Symbols 4
Provides a range of up to ± 20 knots of
target speed, limited by VMAX as an upper
limit and the greater of green dot, S, F, or
VLS as the lower speed limit. Digital Vertical Speed Indicator

If a speed limit or constraint exists, the
Stall Warning Speed
range is +5/-20 knots of target speed.
Minimizes thrust variations while V1, VR, and V2 Speeds
maintaining the VNAV descent profile.
Target speed is either the auto speed
entered in the PERF DES page or ECON < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Green Dot Speed
descent speed. Econ Speed Range
Altitude Indicator
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Econ Speed Range | Section 8.3.43
Switching Panel | EIS DMC Selector | Section 8.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
ATT HDG Selector
AIR DATA Selector
EIS DMC Selector
EIS DMC S ElECTOr Next Section
When the EIS DMC Selector is selected to: SWITCHING PANEL - Four selectors on the L OCATION
NORM - DMC 1 supplies data to PFD reconfigure display unit sources in case of
1, ND 1, and upper ECAM display. component failure.
DMC 2 supplies data to PFD 2, ND 2,
and lower ECAM display.
CAPT 3 - DMC 3 replaces DMC 1 and
upper ECAM display.
F/O 3 - DMC 3 replaces DMC 2 and
lower ECAM display.
Switching Panel | EIS DMC Selector | Section 8.4.2
Electrical Control Panel | Electrical Schematic | Section 3.2.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E lECTRICAl S CHEMATIC Previous Section
Commercial Switch
Battery Indicator
Battery Switches
IDG Switch
Generator Switch
Bus Tie Switch
Electrical Schematic
Next Section
L OCATION
Electrical Control Panel | Electrical Schematic | Section 3.2.10
Calls Panel | Emergency Call Switch | Section 2.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C Alls P ANEl S ECTION 2.2.1

E mErgENCy C All S wITCH Previous Section
The calls panel allows the cockpit Call Buttons
to initiate calls to the flight Emergency Call

attendants via the cabin
Next Section
interphone system and the
mechanic via the flight L OCATION
interphone system. The flight interphone ON - When the EMER Call Switch is selected
system provides communication between ON:
the cockpit and the external service
interphone panel located at the nose gear. The ON light flashes
The cabin interphone system provides The CALL light flashes
communication between the cockpit, flight A pink light flashes at all flight
attendant stations, and various external attendant area call panels
locations on the aircraft. An "EMERGENCY CALL" message
appears on all flight attendant
RESET - Reset is achieved when the flight indication panels
attendant hangs up the handset or by A high/low chime sounds through all
cycling the emergency call switch from ON loudspeakers.
to OFF.
Calls Panel | Emergency Call Switch | Section 2.2.1
ECAM Control Panel | Emergency Cancel Button | Section 16.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Description
TO Configuration
Emergency Cancel
System Buttons
All Button
E mErGENCY C ANCEl B uTTON Clear Button
The EMER CANC button when pushed: Status Button
Recall Button
Present aural warning is cancelled
The MASTER WARN light switches Display Control Knobs
extinguish Next Section

The message displayed on the ECAM
is not affected L OCATION
Present caution (single chime,
MASTER CAUT lights, ECAM
message) is cancelled for remainder
of flight
The STATUS page is automatically
displayed
The CANCELLED CAUTION message
and the title of the inhibited failure
appear on the status page. The
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
cancelled caution inhibition is
suppressed after AC power
application until first engine start, NOTE
ECAM Control Panel | Emergency Cancel Button | Section 16.1.2
but can be manually recalled by Only spurious MASTER cautions should be

pushing RCL button for more than 3 cancelled.
sec
Emergency Evacuation Panel | Horn Shutoff Button | Section 4.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E MERGENCY E VACUATION P ANEl S ECTION 4.3.1

H ORN S hUT O FF B UTTON Previous Section
When pushed, silences the evacuation horn Evacuation Command Switch
in the cockpit. Horn Shut Off
Evacuation Switch
Next Section
L OCATION
Emergency Evacuation Panel | Horn Shutoff Button | Section 4.3.1
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Emergency Exit Light Switch | Section 3.6.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NTEgrAl ANd C ABIN S IgNs L IghTINg C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 3.6.6

E mErgENCY E xIT L IghT S wITCh Previous Section
turns off the escape Ice and Stby Compass

path lighting,
Dome
overhead emergency
lights, and EXIT Annunciator Light
signs. Seat Belts
ON - The ON position causes escape path No Smoking
lighting, overhead emergency lights, and Emergency Exit

EXIT signs to illuminate.
Next Section
ARM - The ARM position causes the

overhead emergency lights and escape
L OCATION
path lighting to automatically illuminate if
normal electrical power fails. Escape path
lighting illuminates when the emergency
generator drops of line on later A320s and
all A319s. EXIT signs automatically
illuminate if DC ESS SHED bus or normal
electrical power fails without the
emergency generator operating.
A NO SMOKING message will appear on the

Engine Warning Display (upper ECAM
display) when the signs are displayed.
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Emergency Exit Light Switch | Section 3.6.6
Engine Start and Ignition Panel | FADEC Signal Schematic | Section 5.5.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NGINE S TART AND I GNITION P ANEl S ECTION 5.5.4

FADEC S IGNAl S CHEMATIC Previous Section
Eng Master Switch
Eng Fire/Fault Light
Eng Mode Selector
Eng Mode Continued
FADEC Schematic
Next Section
L OCATION
Engine Start and Ignition Panel | FADEC Signal Schematic | Section 5.5.4
MCDU | Fail Annunciator | Section 14.2.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F aIl A NNuNCIaTOr S ECTION 14.2.5

The FAIL Annunciator illuminates when the Previous Section
MCDU has failed. Description
Page Title
Line Select Keys
Scratch Pad
Slew Keys
Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Alphanumeric Keys
Top Annunciator Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | Fail Annunciator | Section 14.2.5
Instrument Lighting Control Panel | FCU Lighting Control Knobs | Section 3.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NsTruMENT L IghTINg C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 3.4.1

Previous Section
PFD & ND Lighting
FCU Lighting
ECAM Lighting
Next Section
L OCATION
FCU L IghTINg C ONTrOl K NObs

LEFT FCU CONTROL KNOB - The left FCU
knob controls the integral panel lighting of
FCU labels, knobs, and switches.
RIGHT FCU LT CONTROL KNOB - The right

FCU knob controls the integral panel
lighting adjustment of FCU numerical
displays.
Instrument Lighting Control Panel | FCU Lighting Control Knobs | Section 3.4.1
System Limits | Flight Control Limits | Section 1.5.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

F lIGHT C ONTROl L IMITs Previous Section
Engine Limits
F lAPs /S lATs E XTENDED A lTITUDE
Engine Parameters
Maximum Flaps or Slats 20,000 feet MSL APU Limits
APU Parameters
F lAP /S lAT S PEEDs - P lACARDED
Fuel Limits
Flaps 1 1+F 2 3 4
Flight Control Limits
VFE1 230 215 200 185 177

Flight Control Parameters
1 Use VFE - 10 KIAS for any flap setting except as directed by Landing Gear Limits
a procedure, or during flap retraction, if necessary to comply
with minimum flap or slat retraction speeds.
Next Section
F lIGHT M ANEUvERING L OAD A CCElERATION
Clean configuration 1.0g to +2.5gL
Flaps retracted and slats

1.0g to +2.5g
extended
Flaps and slats extended 0.0g to +2.0g
System Limits | Flight Control Limits | Section 1.5.5
EGPWS Control Panel | Flap Mode Switch | Section 16.5.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

F lAp M OdE S wITCH Previous Section
FLAP MODE Switch inhibits the GPWS flap Description
mode (“TOO LOW, FLAPS”) to prevent Terrain Switch

nuisance warnings when landing with other
System Switch
than landing flaps.
G/S Mode
< PREVIOUS NEXT > Flap Mode
Landing Flap 3
Next Section
L OCATION
EGPWS Control Panel | Flap Mode Switch | Section 16.5.4
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Flare Mode | Section 7.3.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT C ONTrOl L aWs S ECTION 7.3.9

N Ormal L aW - F larE M OdE Previous Section
In normal law, the stabilizer (pitch trim) Direct Law
stops trimming at 50 feet radio altitude Alternate Law

during landing. If autopilot is engaged the
Normal Law
stabilizer stops trimming at 100 feet radio
altitude. Description
Ground Mode
Flight controls are in direct law in the flare
mode. However during a normal approach Flare Mode
to landing; Alpha Max, Alpha Prot, and Load Factor Demand Mode
Minimum Line Selectable Speed are all
displayed until touch down. Pitch trim is
automatically set to zero after landing. High Speed Protection

Illustration depicts PFD in flare mode.
High AOA Protection
Alpha Protection
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Alpha Max
Alpha Floor
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Flare Mode | Section 7.3.9
Next Section
EFIS Control Panel | Flight Director Off | Section 8.1.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
EFIS C ONTrOL P aNEL S ECTION 8.1.10

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
F LIgHT D IrECTOr O ff
VOR Switches On
The FD Button when pushed cycles the
VOR Switches Off
flight director command bars ON or OFF.
The FD Button illuminates green when Next Section
selected ON.
-FD2 - Annunciation indicates that the the

Captain's FD is selected OFF and the FO's
flight director is selected ON.
2FD2 - Annunciation indicates that both

flight directors are selected ON, but one FD
has failed or one FMGC data is not valid.

flight directors are ON.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
EFIS Control Panel | Flight Director Off | Section 8.1.10
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Flight Director Command Bars | Section 8.3.13

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMarY F lIghT D IsplaY S YMbOls S ECTION 8.3.13

F lIghT D IrECTOr C OMMaNd B ars Previous Section
The FD Command Bars are displayed when PFD Symbols 1
a flight director button is selected ON. On PFD Symbols 2

the ground, the flight director may be
selected ON, but will not appear on the PFD
until the thrust levers are moved to FLX or Bank Angle Limit Indicator
TO/GA. Flight Director Command Bars
If selected in flight, the flight director will Flight Director Command Bars 2
engage in the current autopilot mode. If no Airplane Symbol

autopilot is engaged, it will engage in the
Flight Path Vector
HDG-V/S or TRK-FPA mode, depending on
the FCU selection. Flight Path Vector 2

CONTINUE
Pitch Scale

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Flight Path Director | Section 8.3.18

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImarY F lIghT D IsplaY S YmBOls S ECTION 8.3.18

F lIghT P aTh D IrECTOr Previous Section
The FPD symbol appears when a flight PFD Symbols 1
director button is selected on and the HDG- PFD Symbols 2

V/S/TRK-FPA button is selected to TRKFPA.
The FPD is a fully functioning flight director Bank Angle Limit Indicator
system which uses a single command bar
to indicate desired FPA and bank. The FPD
is designed specifically for use with the Flight Director Command Bars 2
FPV. Airplane Symbol
FPD VERTICAL MODE - To comply with FPD Flight Path Vector
commands, the pilot always flies the FPV to Flight Path Vector 2
the FPD. Pitch up or down to fly the FPV
circle over the FPD circle, and roll to put
the FPV wings on top of (same bank angle Pitch Scale
as) the FPD wings. The FPD commands all Pitch Limit Indicator
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
vertical modes the conventional flight
director can except vertical speed. Instead
of vertical speed, it commands flight path Loc and GS Scales and Indices
angle. Marker Beacon Indication
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Flight Path Director | Section 8.3.18
Fuel Control Panel | Fuel Cross Feed Switch | Section 9.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F UEl C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 9.2.1

Previous Section
Wing Tank Pump
Fuel Cross Feed
Center Tank Pump
Fuel Mode Select
F UEl C ROss F EED S wITCH Fuel Tank Schematic
ON - Selecting ON opens the cross OFF - Selecting OFF closes the cross feed Next Section
feed valve and the ON light valve and no lights are illuminated.
illuminates white. L OCATION
OPEN - When the cross feed valve is fully

open the OPEN light illuminates green.
Fuel Control Panel | Fuel Cross Feed Switch | Section 9.2.1
Operating Limits | Fuel Limits | Section 1.5.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

F UEl L IMITs Previous Section
Engine Limits
F UEl C APACITY
Engine Parameters
Two Wing Tanks 27,525 pounds APU Limits
One Center Tank 14,547 pounds APU Parameters
Total 42,078 pounds Fuel Limits

Weights are based on the total volume capacity and an
average of 6.676 (pounds/US gallon). Flight Control Parameters
Landing Gear Limits

M AX I MBAlANCE I NNER T ANKs - (AFM L IMIT )
Fuel Quantity (Heavier Tank) Maximum Difference
Next Section
Full 3,300 pounds
5,000 pounds 5,000 pounds
M AX I MBAlANCE O UTER T ANKs - (AFM L IMIT )
Maximum Difference 1,520 pounds
O PERATIONAl F UEl V AlUEs
Threshold no-option fuel 850 pounds
Taxi Fuel Two Engines 1,500 pounds/hour
Taxi Fuel One Engines 900 pounds/hour
Operating Limits | Fuel Limits | Section 1.5.4
APU electrical power only 200 pounds/hour
APU electrical and pneumatic

290 pounds/hour
power
Threshold no-option fuel: The amount of fuel required to

execute a go-around at runway threshold to 1000 feet AGL, fly a
VFR pattern, intercept a 3° glideslope at approximately 2.5 miles
from the runway, and continue to a landing (with no fuel
remaining). Crossing the threshold below this value removes the
go-around option; the pilots have no alternative but to land.
T AKEOff wITh C ENTER T ANK F UEl
WARNING
Takeoff with center tank fuel supplying the engines is

prohibited.
Fuel Control Panel | Fuel Mode Select Switch | Section 9.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 9.2.3

Previous Section
Wing Tank Pump
Fuel Cross Feed
Center Tank Pump
Fuel Mode Select
F uEl M OdE S ElECT S wITCH Fuel Tank Schematic
AUTO - When the Mode SEL MAN - Allows manual control of center tank Next Section
switch's lights are extinguished, pumps using the CTR TK PUMP switches.
the switch is selected to The MAN light illuminates white color when L OCATION
automatic. If there is fuel in the selected to MAN.
center tank, the center tank pumps run
FAULT - The MODE SEL FAULT Light
except when the slats are extended. The
illuminates amber when the center fuel
pumps automatically turn off 5 minutes
tank contains more than 550 pounds of fuel
after center tank low level is reached.
and the left or right wing fuel tank contains
Regardless of slat position, both center
less than 11,000 pounds.
tank pumps run (if there is fuel in the tank)
for 2 minutes after each engine reaches
idle to verify operation.
Fuel Control Panel | Fuel Mode Select Switch | Section 9.2.3
Fuel System | Recirculation System | Section 9.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F UEl S YsTEM S ECTION 9.3.3

R ECIrCUlATION S YsTEM Previous Section
The fuel recirculation system uses fuel Description
supplied to each engine for IDG cooling. Fuel Tanks

The fuel is directed through the IDG heat
exchanger to the fuel return valve, and
then to the wing tank outer fuel Recirculation System
compartments. The fuel return valve is Refueling/Defueling

controlled by the full authority digital
engine control (FADEC). If the outer
compartment is already full, the fuel that Next Section
has circulated overflows to the inner

compartment through a spill pipe.
L OCATION
If the center tank is supplying fuel, the wing

tank tends to overfill; therefore, the center
tank pump is automatically selected off
when the inner tank is full. The wing tank
supplies the engine until approximately
1100 pounds of fuel is used, and then the
center tank pump resumes operation.
Some of the fuel flowing out of the hydro-

mechanical unit goes to cool the oil system
of the Integrated Drive Generators (IDGs).
It then returns fuel to the fuel pump unit or
to the tank.
Fuel System | Recirculation System | Section 9.3.3
Fuel Control Panel | Fuel Schematic | Section 9.2.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F UEl C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 9.2.4

Previous Section
Wing Tank Pump
Fuel Cross Feed
Center Tank Pump
Fuel Mode Select
F UEl S CHEMATIC Fuel Tank Schematic
Next Section
L OCATION
Fuel Control Panel | Fuel Schematic | Section 9.2.4
Electrical Control Panel | Galley and Cabin Switch | Section 3.2.4
A320 D IsplAys AND P ANEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Commercial Switch
Battery Indicator
Battery Switches
IDG Switch
Generator Switch
G AllEy AND C AbIN S wITCH
AUTO - When selected to AUTO OFF - When the switch is selected to OFF, it
Bus Tie Switch
all lights are extinguished on turns off the power to:
the GALY & CAB switch and
The main galley bus
arms the electrical system for Electrical Schematic
In-seat power supply system to the
automatically shedding Next Section
passenger entertainment system.
electrical systems for a one generator
operation. When the electrical system loses FAULT - An amber FAULT light indicates a L OCATION
one generator it automatically sheds: generator load is above 100‰ of its rated
output.
The main galley bus
In-seat power supply system, and to
the passenger entertainment system
Electrical Control Panel | Galley and Cabin Switch | Section 3.2.4
Electrical System Displays | Generator Disconnect | Section 3.1.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

G ENErATOr D IsCONNECT Previous Section
One generator operation results in Normal Power
automatically shedding: APU Power
The main galley bus External Power Available
In-seat power supply and External Power Only

Pax entertainment system
AC 1 Bus Failure
TR 1 Failure
Generator Line 1
Dual AC Bus Failure
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Electrical System Displays | Generator Disconnect | Section 3.1.6
Electrical Control Panel | Generator Switch | Section 3.2.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Commercial Switch
Battery Indicator
Battery Switches
IDG Switch
Generator Switch
G ENERATOR S wITCH
ON - On is indicated when all lights are Bus Tie Switch

extinguished on the switch. Selecting the
switch to ON energizes the generator field
and the line contactor closes provided Electrical Schematic
electrical parameters are normal. Next Section
OFF - When the OFF light

L OCATION
illuminates white, the
generator field is de-energized
and the line contactor opens.
The fault circuit is reset.
FAULT - When the FAULT light illuminates

amber, a protection trip is initiated by the
generator control unit (GCU), or the line
contactor opens without selecting the GEN
switch to OFF. In this example, GEN 1 is selected OFF with
Electrical Control Panel | Generator Switch | Section 3.2.6
engine 1 running and engine 2 has not

started.
Electrical System Displays | Generator Line 1 | Section 3.1.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrICAl S YsTEm D IsplAYs S ECTION 3.1.7

G ENErATOr L INE 1 Previous Section
If avionics smoke is detected, the ECAM Normal Power
directs the airplane to be placed in the APU Power

smoke configuration. This requires placing
the GEN 1 LINE switch on the EMER ELEC
PWR panel to OFF. When this occurs; External Power Only
AC 1 Bus Failure
the GEN 1 line contactor opens
GEN 2 powers AC buses 1 and 2 TR 1 Failure
(main galley bus is shed) through Generator Disconnect

the tie bus,
Generator Line 1
and GEN 1 powers a fuel pump in
each wing. Dual AC Bus Failure
Next Section
This permits removing AC power from all
buses during the AVIONICS SMOKE ECAM L OCATION
procedure without removing power from
the fuel pumps. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Electrical System Displays | Generator Line 1 | Section 3.1.7
Emergency Electrical Control Panel | Generator 1 Line Switch | Section 3.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

G ENErATOr 1 L INE S wITCH Previous Section
SMOKE - The smoke light Emer Gen Test
illuminates amber when smoke Gen 1 Line Switch

is detected in the avionics
RAT and Emer Gen
ventilation system, with
associated ECAM warning. Next Section
If avionics smoke is detected, ECAM directs L OCATION

the airplane to be placed in the smoke
configuration. This requires placing the
GEN 1 LINE switch on the EMER ELEC PWR
panel to OFF. When this occurs:
The GEN 1 line contactor opens

GEN 2 powers AC buses 1 and 2
(main galley bus is shed) through
the tie bus,
and GEN 1 powers a fuel pump in
each wing.
This permits removing AC power from all

buses during the AVIONICS SMOKE ECAM
procedure without removing power from
the fuel pumps.
OFF - Causes generator 1 line contactor to

open. AC bus 1 is supplied from generator
2 through the tie bus. In addition,
generator 1 powers a fuel pump in each
Emergency Electrical Control Panel | Generator 1 Line Switch | Section 3.3.1
wing tank.
Flight Maneuvers | Go-Around/Missed Approach | Section 13.4.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

G O A ROUND /M IssED A PPROACH P ROfILE Previous Section
ILS Autoland
ILS - No Autoland
Managed/Managed App
Takeoff
No Flaps Approach
Next Section
Flight Maneuvers | Go-Around/Missed Approach | Section 13.4.7
MCDU | Go Around Page - Description | Section 14.5.52

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
G O A rOuND P agE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.5.52

This is an example of the Go Around Page Previous Section
not active (preflight). The title line displays Description

white when phase is not active and green
TO Page - Preflight
when the phase is active.
Check TO Data
When the go-around phase is active, the
climb/cruise phase can be activated by
manually changing the destination on the Climb Page - Active
flight plan page and inserting a new cruise Cruise Page - Preflight
altitude on the PROG page. Until the new
altitude is entered, managed speed
remains at green dot (clean speed). Descent Page - Preflight

It can also be activated by enabling the
alternate, which automatically changes the Approach Page - Preflight
destination and inserts a new cruise Approach Page - Active

altitude. If the airplane is below the new
Go Around Page
cruise altitude, the climb phase activates.
Otherwise, the cruise phase activates. Description
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
F, S, Clean Speeds
PREV PHASE - Provides access to Approach
page - LS 6L. Thr Red
ACC
Engine Out ACC
Next Section
MCDU | Go Around Page - Description | Section 14.5.52
EGPWS Control Panel | System Switch | Section 16.5.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S ysTEM S wITCH Previous Section
FAULT - SYS FAULT light illuminates amber Description
when a GPWS malfunction is detected. All Terrain Switch

GPWS warnings are inhibited. Terrain
System Switch
functions are not affected.
G/S Mode
ON - When the SYS Switch is selected ON < PREVIOUS NEXT > Flap Mode
all lights are extinguished and activates all
modes of GPWS for operation. Landing Flap 3
Next Section
OFF - The OFF light illuminates white when
selected OFF and all GPWS warnings are L OCATION
inhibited. EGPWS functions are not
affected.
EGPWS Control Panel | System Switch | Section 16.5.2
EGPWS Control Panel | G/S Mode Switch | Section 16.5.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

G/S M ODE S wITCH Previous Section
ON - When the G/S Mode switch is selected Description
ON all lights are extinguished and activates Terrain Switch

the GPWS glideslope mode for operation.
System Switch
OFF - The OFF light illuminates white when G/S Mode

selected OFF and inhibits the GPWS < PREVIOUS NEXT > Flap Mode
glideslope mode.
Landing Flap 3
Next Section
L OCATION
EGPWS Control Panel | G/S Mode Switch | Section 16.5.3
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Green Dot Speed - Best Lift/Drag Speed | Section 8.3.42

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMArY F LIgHT D IspLAY S YMBOLs S ECTION 8.3.42

G rEEN D OT S pEEd - B EsT L IfT /D rAg S pEEd Previous Section
The Green Dot Speed is displayed when the PFD Symbols 1
flap handle is in position 0, clean PFD Symbols 2

configuration and represents the best
PFD Symbols 3
lift/drag speed.
PFD Symbols 4
It also represents the best angle of climb
speed, max endurance speed, and single
engine drift down speed. The airplane flies Vertical Speed Scale
green dot speed in the approach phase of Digital Vertical Speed Indicator
flight when speed is managed and flaps are
at 0.
Stall Warning Speed
Green Dot Speed

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Econ Speed Range
Altitude Indicator
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Green Dot Speed - Best Lift/Drag Speed | Section 8.3.42
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Ground Mode | Section 7.3.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIgHT C ONTrOL L AWs S ECTION 7.3.8

N OrmAL L AW - G rOuNd M OdE Previous Section
The ground mode is active when the aircraft Direct Law
is on the ground and until 50 feet radio Alternate Law

altitude. Flight controls are in direct law.
Normal Law
Bank angle protection is displayed after
engine start. Trim can be manually set Description
prior to takeoff when in the ground mode. Ground Mode
Illustration depicts typical PFD in Ground Flare Mode
Mode. Load Factor Demand Mode
High AOA Protection
Alpha Protection
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Alpha Max
Alpha Floor
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Ground Mode | Section 7.3.8
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Ground Reference | Section 8.3.50

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMarY F lIgHT D IsplaY S YMBOls S ECTION 8.3.50

G rOuNd R EfErENCE Previous Section
The Ground Reference symbol displays PFD Symbols 1
ground reference as a red ribbon along the PFD Symbols 2

altitude scale when below 570 feet AGL
PFD Symbols 3
(based on radio altitude). The top of ribbon
is at the center of altitude window at PFD Symbols 4
touchdown. PFD Symbols 5
ILS Information
Mach Number
ILS Message
Landing Elevation
Ground Reference

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS Fail Flag
PFD TCAS Display
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Ground Reference | Section 8.3.50
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Ground Roll Guidance | Section 8.3.27

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImary F lIgHT D Isplay S ymbOls S ECTION 8.3.27

G rOuNd R Oll G uIdaNCE Previous Section
The Ground Roll Guidance Command Bar PFD Symbols 1
provides flight director yaw commands PFD Symbols 2

below 30 feet RA if localizer signal is
PFD Symbols 3
available during takeoff with the RWY FMA
displayed, or landing with the ROLLOUT Vertical Deviation Indication
FMA displayed. If the localizer signal is lost Vertical Deviation Scale

when RWY or ROLLOUT is engaged, the
command bar provides lateral guidance
based upon the runway track memorized Ground Roll Guidance
prior to the failure. The command bar Actual Track Diamond

centers when the airplane is correcting
toward the centerline at the commanded
rate (e.g., used as steering bar to capture Selected Heading FD On
and maintain course). True Heading
DH Flags
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Ground Roll Guidance | Section 8.3.27
Airplane General | Ground Service Locations | Section 1.1.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A320 G ROUND S ERVICE L OCaTIONs S ECTION 1.1.5

Ground Service Locations: Previous Section
1. Toilet Servicing A320 Dimensions
2. Water Filling and/or A320 Turning Radius

Draining
Probe Locations
3. Electrical Ground Power
4. Receptacle LP Ground Antenna Locations
Air Supply Exterior Doors

5. Connector HP Ground
Ground Service
Air Supply
6. Connector Hydraulic Next Section
Servicing
7. IDG Oil Filling
8. Engine Oil Filling
9. Refueling / Defueling
10. Gravity Fuel Filling
Panels
11. Refueling/defueling
Panel
12. APU oil filling
Airplane General | Ground Service Locations | Section 1.1.5
Speed Brake Lever | Ground Spoilers Landing | Section 7.10.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S pEEd B rAKE L EvEr S ECTION 7.10.2

G rOuNd S pOIlErs L ANdINg Previous Section
LANDING - Ground spoiler extension occurs Speed Brakes
automatically upon landing at touchdown of Ground Spoilers TO

both main gear when:
Both thrust levers are at forward idle Next Section

if the ground spoilers are armed, or
Reverse thrust is selected on at least L OCATION
one engine with the other thrust
lever at idle if the ground spoilers
are not armed
PARTIAL EXTENSION - Partial ground spoiler

extension (10°) occurs when:
Reverse thrust is selected on at least

lever at idle, and < PREVIOUS NEXT >
One main landing gear strut is
compressed.
NOTE
RETRACTION - The ground spoilers retract
During an autoland, the ground spoilers
when the thrust levers are at idle and the
extend at half speed 1 second after
speed brake lever is disarmed, or when at
both main landing gear touch down.
least one thrust lever is above idle.
Speed Brake Lever | Ground Spoilers Landing | Section 7.10.2
Flight Control Unit | Heading/Track Selector | Section 13.2.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT C ONTrOl U NIT S ECTION 13.2.7

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Speed/Mach Selector
Altitude Selector
VS/FPA Selector
H EAdINg /T rACk S ElECTOr Buttons
Next Section
The Heading/Track Selector when rotated,
changes the value displayed in the L OCATION
HDG/TRK window. When pushed, NAV arms
or engages and the LAT light illuminates.
When pulled, the selected heading/track

displayed in the HDG/TRK window engages.
If a heading is selected prior to pulling the

selector, the airplane turns in the shortest
direction to the selected heading. If a
heading is selected after pulling the
selector, the airplane turns to the new
heading in the direction the selector is
turned. If the selector is pulled during a
turn, the airplane rolls out on the existing
heading.
Flight Control Unit | Heading/Track Selector | Section 13.2.7
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - High Angle of Attack Protection | Section 7.3.14

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT C ONTrOl L aWs S ECTION 7.3.14

N Ormal L aW - H IGh A NGlE Of A TTaCK P rOTECTION Previous Section
High Angle of Attack Protection is provided Direct Law
by normal law and includes three angle of Alternate Law

attack functions:
Normal Law
Alpha Protection (Va PROT), top of Description

black and amber color band
Ground Mode
Alpha Floor (Va FLOOR)
Alpha Maximum (a MAX), top of red Flare Mode
color band Load Factor Demand Mode
The associated V-speeds; Alpha Protection, Load Factor Limitation
Alpha Floor, and Alpha Max vary with High Speed Protection
airplane weight and configuration.
High AOA Protection
Alpha Protection
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Alpha Max
Alpha Floor
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - High Angle of Attack Protection | Section 7.3.14
Next Section
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - High Speed Protection | Section 7.3.12

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGhT C ONTrOL L aws S ECTION 7.3.12

N OrmaL L aw - H IGh S pEED P rOTECTION Previous Section
When high speed protection is active: Direct Law
Alternate Law
The autopilot disconnects
High speed aural warning is heard Normal Law
Automatic pitch trimming stops Description

Ground Mode
to 45°
Positive spiral static stability is Flare Mode
introduced to 0° bank angle (instead Load Factor Demand Mode

of 33° bank angle in normal law), so
that when the side stick is release it
always returns to 0° bank angle High Speed Protection
instead of 33° bank angle Pitch Attitude Protection

High speed protection can be
High AOA Protection
overridden, but side stick nose-down
authority is reduced and a positive Alpha Protection
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
pitch-up command is introduced Alpha Max
If the stick is released, the airplane In normal law, high speed protection is Alpha Floor
continues to pitch-up until the activated when airspeed exceeds VMO + 6
airspeed slows to VMO/MMO at Bank Angle Protection
knots or MMO + M.01 (at the green =
which point the high speed Load Alleviation Function
symbol on airspeed scale).
protection is deactivated and normal
control laws are restored
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - High Speed Protection | Section 7.3.12
Next Section
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - High Speed Stability | Section 7.3.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGhT C ONTrOL L aws S ECTION 7.3.5

A LTErNaTE L aw - H IGh S pEED S TaBILITY Previous Section
Automatic pitch trim stops trimming nose Direct Law
down momentarily at VMO or MMO. This Alternate Law
provides a momentary pitch up when high Description

speed stability is active, but automatic
Load Factor Demand Mode
trimming will continue if over speed is
continued by pilot. An aural "crickets" Load Factor Limitation
warning will be heard at VMO plus 4 knots Low Speed Stability

or / MMO plus .006M.
High Speed Stability
High Speed Stability may or may not be Load Alleviation Function
available in alternate law depending on the Stall Warning Speed

type of flight control failure. Without high
Normal Law
speed stability the momentary pitch up will
not occur at VMO or MMO. Abnormal Attitude Law
Mechanical Backup
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - High Speed Stability | Section 7.3.5
MCDU | History Wind Page - Description | Section 14.6.28

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H IsTOry W INd P AGE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.6.28

History winds are accessed via the HISTORY Previous Section
WIND prompt on the CLIMB WIND page. Description

This page cannot be modified by the pilots.
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Description
Climb Wind
Select
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | History Wind Page - Description | Section 14.6.28
MCDU | Computed Hold AT Waypoint | Section 14.8.17

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C OmpuTEd H Old AT W aypOINT S ECTION 14.8.17

Accessed by performing a lateral revision at Previous Section
a desired hold fix that has no published Description

hold. Allows modification to the default
Flight Plan A Page
holding parameters. Parameters are
defined by pilot entry. Flight Plan A Prior to TO

INB CRS - Defaults to the airplane's current
inbound course to the fix. Can be modified Lateral Rev at PPOS
by the pilots. Lateral Rev at Waypoint
TURN - Displays direction of turn in the hold Lateral Rev Dest Airport
(L or R). Defaults to a right pattern, but Airways Page

can be modified by the pilots.
Departure Page B
TIME/DIST - Time and distance of the Flight Plan B Page

outbound leg. Defaults to 1.5 minutes
Arrival Page A
above 14,000 feet, and 1.0 minute at and
below 14,000 feet. Can be modified by the Arrival Page B
pilots. Approach Vias Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TMPY F-PLN - Erases the holding pattern or Vertical Rev At Departure
returns to the LAT REV if the hold is Vertical Rev At Waypoint

already inserted in the flight plan.
LAST EXIT, UTC FUEL - With a HOLD Database Hold Page

inserted, displays the time at which the
holding pattern must be exited to land at
destination with RSV fuel. Displays the Next Section
EFOB in pounds at that time. TIME TO EXIT

message appears in scratchpad when LAST
MCDU | Computed Hold AT Waypoint | Section 14.8.17
EXIT UTC is reached or EXTRA FUEL

reaches 0.
Pneumatic System Displays | Cond SD - Hot Air Fault | Section 15.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P NEuMATIC S YsTEM D IsplAY S ECTION 15.1.1

C ONd SD - H OT A Ir F AulT Previous Section
When the hot air pressure regulating valve Cond SD
fails closed, trim air is not available. In this Description

case;
Hot Air Fault
The cockpit temperature selector SDCU Channel Failure

controls the output temperature of
Bleed SD
pack 1
The mean value of the forward and Cruise SD
aft cabin temperature selector Cab Press SD

controls the output temperature of
Next Section
pack 2
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pneumatic System Displays | Cond SD - Hot Air Fault | Section 15.1.1
Air Conditioning Panel | Hot Air Switch | Section 15.2.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A Ir C ONdITIONING C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 15.2.2

Previous Section
Pack Flow Selector
Hot Air Switch
Pack Switch
Engine Bleed Switch
Ram Air Switch
APU Bleed Switch
H OT A Ir S wITCh Cross Bleed Selector
Pneumatic Schematic
ON - When all lights on the Hot Air HOT AIR VALVLE FAILS OPEN - If the hot air
switch are extinguished indicates pressure regulating valve fails open, the Leak Detection
the switch is ON. Cycling the trim air system is not affected. Next Section
switch to ON allows the hot air
FAULT - An amber FAULT light indicates a L OCATION
pressure regulating valve to supply hot air
duct overheat is detected. The hot air
to the trim air valves.
pressure regulating valve and trim air
OFF - When the OFF light illuminates white valves automatically close. The fault light
the hot air pressure regulating valve and remains illuminated until a lower
trim air valves are closed and resets the temperature is sensed with the switch off.
fault circuit.
The hot air pressure pressure regulating
HOT AIR VALVE FAILS CLOSED - The hot air valve closes automatically if:
pressure regulating valve controls the
The duct overheats or
supply of hot air to the trim air valves. If
The cockpit trim air valve fails or
the hot air pressure regulating valve fails
Both trim air valves fail
Air Conditioning Panel | Hot Air Switch | Section 15.2.2
closed, trim air is not available. In this case

the cockpit temperature selector controls
the output temperature from pack 1. The
mean value of the forward and aft cabin
temperature selectors control the output
temperature of pack 2.
Hydraulic Control Panel | Power Transfer Unit Switch | Section 10.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Engine Pump
RAT Manual On
Blue Electric Pump
Power Transfer Unit
P OwEr T rANsfEr U NIT S wITCh Yellow Electric Pump
AUTO - The reversible motor FAULT - The PTU FAULT light illuminates Hydraulic Schematic
pump is armed when both amber when the green or yellow reservoir
Next Section
yellow and green electro- is:
hydraulic valves are open. The L OCATION
Low level
PTU runs automatically when the
Overheat
differential pressure between the green and
Low air pressure
yellow systems is more than 500 PSI
(except when inhibited). The PTU is The PTU FAULT light extinguishes when the
inhibited when: PTU switch switch is selected OFF (except
during an overheat, when the light remains
The PARK BRK is ON and only one
ENG MASTER switch is ON
present).
The nose wheel steering disconnect
pin is installed and only one ENG OFF - When OFF is selected, then both
MASTER switch is ON green and yellow PTU electro-hydraulic
The PTU switch is OFF valves are energized and closed, and
The cargo doors are being operated hydraulic power transfer stops.
(inhibition continues for
approximately 40 sec)
Hydraulic Control Panel | Power Transfer Unit Switch | Section 10.2.3
Hydraulic Control Panel | Ram Air Turbine Manual On Switch | Section 10.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YDrAUlIC C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 10.2.1

Previous Section
Engine Pump
RAT Manual On
Blue Electric Pump
Power Transfer Unit
R Am A Ir T UrBINE M ANUAl O N S wITCh Yellow Electric Pump
RAT MAN ON Switch - When The RAT will also extend by depressing the Hydraulic Schematic
pushed, the ram air turbine RAT MAN ON switch, located on the
Next Section
extends. The RAT is located on hydraulic control panel: however, this
the left bottom side of the switch is dedicated to pressurizing the blue L OCATION
fuselage. hydraulic system only and does not provide
emergency electrical power.
The RAT can be deployed for emergency use
to pressurize the blue hydraulic system.
The RAT can only be stowed on the ground.
Hydraulic Control Panel | Ram Air Turbine Manual On Switch | Section 10.2.1
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Ident Button | Section 16.3.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

I dENT B uTTON Previous Section
The IDENT Button causes the airplane Altitude Range
target symbol in the data block on the ATC Code Window

display to double in size.
Mode Selector
Code Selector
ATC Fail Light
Ident Button
Transponder Selector
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Ident Button | Section 16.3.5
EFIS Control Panel | ILS/LS Off | Section 8.1.12

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
ILS/LS O ff
VOR Switches On
The ILS/LS Button when pushed cycles the
VOR Switches Off
localizer and glideslope scales ON or OFF. It
also displays: Next Section
The ILS identifier & frequency

ILS DME on the associated PFD if a
DME is collocated
The ILS course bar on the heading
scale
Deviation symbols are displayed
when a valid ILS signal is received
The LS label may replace the ILS label on

some aircraft. The ILS/LS Button
illuminates green when selected ON.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
EFIS Control Panel | ILS/LS Off | Section 8.1.12
Primary Flight Display Symbols | ILS Front Course Pointer | Section 8.3.48

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMArY F lIGHT D IsplAY S YMBOls S ECTION 8.3.48

ILS F rONT C OursE P OINTEr Previous Section
The ILS Front Course Pointer is a magenta PFD Symbols 1
color and cross shaped symbol that PFD Symbols 2

appears when an ILS frequency and course
PFD Symbols 3
are tuned and the ILS/LS button is selected
ON. PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
The ILS Front Course Pointer is replaced by
the ILS course digital value in magenta and ILS Information
appears on either side of the scale when Mach Number

outside of the displayed heading range.
ILS Message
Landing Elevation
Ground Reference

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS Fail Flag
PFD TCAS Display
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | ILS Front Course Pointer | Section 8.3.48
Primary Flight Display Symbols | ILS Information | Section 8.3.45

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImArY F lIGHT D IsplAY S YmBOls S ECTION 8.3.45

ILS I NfOrmATION Previous Section
The following appears when an ILS PFD Symbols 1
frequency and course are tuned and the PFD Symbols 2

ILS/LS button is selected on:
PFD Symbols 3
ILS identification as decoded from PFD Symbols 4

the ILS receiver
PFD Symbols 5
ILS frequency
ILS/DME distance if a DME is ILS Information
collocated Mach Number
ILS Message
Landing Elevation
Ground Reference

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS Fail Flag
PFD TCAS Display
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | ILS Information | Section 8.3.45
Primary Flight Display Symbols | ILS Message | Section 8.3.47

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

ILS M EssaGE Previous Section
The ILS Message flashes amber when APPR PFD Symbols 1
or LOC button has been selected ON for an PFD Symbols 2

ILS approach, and the ILS/LS button has
PFD Symbols 3
not been selected to display the ILS data.
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
ILS Information
Mach Number
ILS Message
Landing Elevation
Ground Reference

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS Fail Flag
PFD TCAS Display
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | ILS Message | Section 8.3.47
Flight Maneuvers | ILS No Autoland | Section 13.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

ILS A PPROACH P ROfILE - N O A UTOLAND Previous Section
ILS Autoland
ILS - No Autoland
Managed/Managed App
Takeoff
No Flaps Approach
Next Section
The DA for a CAT I autoland is based upon the barometric altimeter and should be entered
in the MDA field on the PERF APPR page.
Flight Maneuvers | ILS No Autoland | Section 13.4.1
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | Image Selector | Section 16.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W EATHEr R AdAr ANd PWS C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 16.2.1

I mAgE S ElECTOr Previous Section
WX - The WX selection provides 180° System Switch
display of continuously updated weather Image Selector

radar information on the Navigation
Tilt Selector
Display.
Gain Selector
MAP - The MAP selection operates the radar
Windshear
in ground mapping mode:
Next Section
Black color indicates water
Green color, ground; and L OCATION
Amber color, cities and mountains
WX/TURB - The WX/TURB selection provides

180° display of turbulence and weather to
40 NM, and weather only beyond 40 NM.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | Image Selector | Section 16.2.1
MCDU | Init A Page - Description | Section 14.6.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT A P aGE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.6.1

The INIT A page enables initialization of the Previous Section
flight plan and the alignment of the IRSs Description

and is available only on the ground. Before
Init A Page
the FROM/TO waypoints are defined, the
flight plan page contains only present Description
position (PPOS). When a FROM/TO pair is Co Rte

entered, the flight plan page displays the
Altn/Co Rte
origin and destination airports in green
separated by a F-PLN DISCONTINUITY Flt Nbr
message. Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | Init A Page - Description | Section 14.6.1
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Init B Page - Description | Section 14.6.11

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT B P agE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.6.11

The INIT B page / INIT FUEL PREDICTION Previous Section
page allows for entering planned ZFW, Description

BLOCK fuel, and ZFWCG.
Init A Page
The INIT A page page can be accessed by Init B Page

selecting the horizontal slew key when the
Description
INIT B page (depicted illustration) or by
selecting the INIT key. Init Fuel Prediction Page
Taxi
Trip Time
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init B Page - Description | Section 14.6.11
Next Section
Audio Control Panel | Interphone Radio Switch | Section 2.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A udIO C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 2.1.2

I NTErpHONE R AdIO S wITCH Previous Section
The INT/RAD switch operates Transmission Buttons
as a press-to-talk switch for Reception Knobs

boom or oxygen mask
INT/RAD Switch
microphones.
On Voice Button
INT - The interphone is hot
Reset Button
between pilots, regardless of transmission
button selection. The INT knob must be Next Section
selected for reception.

L OCATION
Neutral - When the switch is selected to < PREVIOUS NEXT >
neutral it disconnects microphones from

transmission. Reception is normal.
RAD - When the switch is selected to RAD.
Audio Control Panel | Interphone Radio Switch | Section 2.1.2
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Ice Indicator and Standby Compass | Section 3.6.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NTEGRAl AND C ABIN S IGNs L IGHTING C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 3.6.1

I CE I NDICATOR AND S TANDBY C OMpAss Previous Section
extinguishes the ice indicator Ice and Stby Compass

and standby compass integral
Dome
lighting.
Annunciator Light
Seat Belts
illuminates the ice indicator and standby
compass integral lighting. No Smoking
Emergency Exit
Next Section
L OCATION
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Ice Indicator and Standby Compass | Section 3.6.1
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Landing Elevation | Section 8.3.49

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L ANdING E lEvATION Previous Section
The Landing Elevation symbol indicates the PFD Symbols 1
barometric landing elevation of the PFD Symbols 2

destination airport in cyan.
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
ILS Information
Mach Number
ILS Message
Landing Elevation
Ground Reference

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS Fail Flag
PFD TCAS Display
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Landing Elevation | Section 8.3.49
EGPWS Control Panel | Landing Flap 3 Switch | Section 16.5.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L ANdINg F lAp 3 S wITCH Previous Section
ON - When the LDG FLAP 3 switch is Description
selected ON, the ON light illuminates and Terrain Switch

inhibits the GPWS flap mode (“TOO LOW,
System Switch
FLAPS”) when flaps 3 is selected as the
final flap setting. GPWS FLAP 3 is displayed G/S Mode
on the landing memo. < PREVIOUS NEXT > Flap Mode
Landing Flap 3
Next Section
L OCATION
EGPWS Control Panel | Landing Flap 3 Switch | Section 16.5.5
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Landing Light Switch | Section 3.5.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E XTErIOr L IGHTING C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 3.5.5

Previous Section
Strobe Light
Rotating Beacon
Wing
Nav and Logo
Runway Turn Off
L ANDING L IGHT S WITCH Landing Light
Takeoff and Taxi

causes the respective Next Section
landing light to
L OCATION
remained extended
and illuminates the
light when fully extended.
OFF - The OFF position causes the

respective landing light to extend and
extinguish the light.
RETRACT - The RETRACT position causes

the respective landing light to retract and
extinguish.
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Landing Light Switch | Section 3.5.5
MCDU | Lateral Revision Dept Airport | Section 14.8.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L aTEral R EvIsION D EpT A IrpOrT S ECTION 14.8.3

Accessed from flight plan page A or B by Previous Section
line selecting the key adjacent to the Description

departure airport.
Flight Plan A Page
DEPARTURE - Accesses the DEPARTURES Flight Plan A Prior to TO

pages for selection of runways and SIDS -
LS 1L.
Lateral Rev at PPOS
RADIAL FIX INFO - Allows the display of
radial information on the Navigation
Display. Lateral Rev Dest Airport
Airways Page
RETURN - Returns display to the previous
flight plan page - LS 6L. Departure Page B
Flight Plan B Page
Arrival Page A
Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Lateral Revision Dept Airport | Section 14.8.3
MCDU | Lateral Rev Dest Airport | Section 14.8.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L aTEral R Ev D EsT A IrpOrT S ECTION 14.8.6


destination airport.
Flight Plan A Page
ALTN - Accesses the alternate airport page Flight Plan A Prior to TO

to add, change, assess, or delete alternate
airports.
Lateral Rev at PPOS
ARRIVAL - Accesses the ARRIVAL page A.
RADIAL FIX INFO - Allows the display of Lateral Rev Dest Airport
radial information on the Navigation
Airways Page
Display.
Departure Page B
RETURN - Returns display to the previous
Flight Plan B Page
flight plan page - LS 6L.
Arrival Page A
Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Lateral Rev Dest Airport | Section 14.8.6
MCDU | Lateral Revision at PPOS | Section 14.8.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L aTEral R EvIsION aT PPOS S ECTION 14.8.4

line selecting the key adjacent to the PPOS. Description
OFFSET - Selects the lateral offset feature. Flight Plan A Page
Insert offset as a L/R and a NM value (e.g., Flight Plan A Prior to TO

L05).
Lateral Rev at PPOS

NOTE
If offset is entered when the airplane is
close to the TO waypoint, it may not
be accepted and an ENTRY OUT OF Airways Page
RANGE message will appear on the
Departure Page B
MCDU.
Flight Plan B Page
Arrival Page A

HOLD - Accesses the PPOS HOLD page. Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

LL XING / INCR / NO - Allows pilots to build
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
waypoints along the route of flight at Vertical Rev At Departure
latitude and longitude intervals. Insert the Vertical Rev At Waypoint

beginning lat/long in degrees, the
increment, and the number of points.
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Lateral Revision at PPOS | Section 14.8.4
MCDU | Lateral Revision at Waypoint | Section 14.8.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L aTEral R EvIsION aT W aypOINT S ECTION 14.8.5


waypoint.
Flight Plan A Page
HOLD - Selects the hold page to build a Flight Plan A Prior to TO

holding pattern at the FROM waypoint.
NEXT WPT - Allows entering the next Lateral Rev at PPOS

waypoint. Automatically creates a
temporary flight plan.
NEW DEST - Allows entering a new
Airways Page
destination. Automatically creates a
temporary flight plan. Available only on Departure Page B
lateral revision pages for waypoints in the Flight Plan B Page

active flight plan.
Arrival Page A
AIRWAYS - Selects the airway enter page to Arrival Page B

build a route using airways from the FROM
Approach Vias Page
waypoint.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Lateral Revision at Waypoint | Section 14.8.5
Air Conditioning Panel | Leak Detection System Schematic | Section 15.2.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Pack Flow Selector
Hot Air Switch
Pack Switch
Engine Bleed Switch
Ram Air Switch
APU Bleed Switch
L EAk D ETECTION S YsTEm S CHEmATIC Cross Bleed Selector
Pneumatic Schematic
The leak detection system senses overheat
conditions in the vicinity of the hot air Leak Detection
ducts located in the fuselage, pylons, and Next Section

wings.
L OCATION
When a leak signal is activated:
The BMC closes the engine bleed

valve on the related side
The ENG BLEED switch FAULT light
illuminates
The ECAM AIR L(R) WING or ENG
1(2) BLEED LEAK page is displayed
The cross-bleed valve closes, if open,
the APU bleed valve closes (except
during engine start) if the leak
Air Conditioning Panel | Leak Detection System Schematic | Section 15.2.9
involves the left wing.
MCDU | Line Select Keys | Section 14.2.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P AGE T ITlE S ECTION 14.2.2

The Line Select Keys identified as 1L - 6L Previous Section
and 1R - 6R and provide access to data in Description

the left and right data fields respectively.
Page Title
Keys enable data entered into the
scratchpad to be line-selected (moved) to Line Select Keys
the appropriate data entry field. If a caret Scratch Pad

(< or >) appears next to the key, selecting
Slew Keys
the key accesses another MCDU page. If an
asterisk (*) appears next to the key, Fail Annunciator
selecting the key activates a specific FM Annunciator

function.
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | Line Select Keys | Section 14.2.2
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Load Alleviation Function | Section 7.3.19

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGHT C ONTrOl L aws S ECTION 7.3.19

N Ormal L aw - L OaD A llEvIaTION F uNCTION Previous Section
A Load Alleviation Function (LAF) is Direct Law
available on some A320s and relieves wing Alternate Law

structural loads in turbulent conditions. The
Normal Law
ELACs and SECs monitor the airplane's load
factor and pilot demanded load factor to Description
determine LAF activation. When activated, Ground Mode

the ailerons and spoilers 4 and 5 on each
Flare Mode
wing are deflected symmetrically upward.
Pilot control authority is not changed when Load Factor Demand Mode
this function is active. Load Factor Limitation
The LAF is inhibited under the following High Speed Protection
conditions: Pitch Attitude Protection
FLAPS lever not in the 0 position High AOA Protection
Airspeed below 200 KIAS or above Alpha Protection

VMO + 10 knots < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Alpha Max
Slats/flaps wing tip brakes engaged
Alpha Floor
Pitch alternate law without stability
protection Bank Angle Protection
Pitch direct law Load Alleviation Function
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Load Alleviation Function | Section 7.3.19
Next Section
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Load Factor Demand Mode | Section 7.3.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

N Ormal L aw - L Oad F aCTOr D EmaNd M OdE Previous Section
The load factor demand mode is only Direct Law
available while in flight, above 50 feet radio Alternate Law

altitude.
Normal Law
AUTOMATIC PITCH TRIM - Load Factor Description

Demand Mode is automatic pitch trim with
Ground Mode
built-in protections. This automatic pitch
trim is engaged when the side stick is Flare Mode
displaced from neutral and the G-load is Load Factor Demand Mode
between .5Gs to 1.25Gs. When the G load
demand exceeds the automatic pitch trim
G-limits (less than 0.5Gs or more than High Speed Protection
1.25Gs or 33° of bank angle), then the Pitch Attitude Protection

stabilizer stops trimming and the G-load is
High AOA Protection
displayed on the lower ECAM display.
Alpha Protection
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Alpha Max
Alpha Floor
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Load Factor Demand Mode | Section 7.3.10
Next Section
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Load Factor Limitation | Section 7.3.11
A320 D IspLAYs AND P ANELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGHT C ONTrOL L AWs S ECTION 7.3.11

N OrMAL L AW - L OAD F ACTOr L IMITATION Previous Section
In normal law the load factor is Direct Law
automatically limited to: Alternate Law
Trailing edge flaps retracted: +2.5g Normal Law
to -1.0g Description
Trailing edge flaps extended: +2.0g
Ground Mode
to 0.0g
Flare Mode
High AOA Protection
Alpha Protection
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Alpha Max
Alpha Floor
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Load Factor Limitation | Section 7.3.11
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Localizer and Glideslope Scales | Section 8.3.22

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMarY F lIghT D IsplaY S YMBOls S ECTION 8.3.22

L OCalIZEr aNd G lIdEslOpE S CalEs aNd I NdICEs Previous Section
The Localizer and Glideslope Scales and PFD Symbols 1
Indices Scales appear when ILS/LS button PFD Symbols 2

is selected ON. Indices appear when
localizer and glideslope signals are valid if
scales are displayed. Half index displayed Bank Angle Limit Indicator
at the end of scale when the signal is Flight Director Command Bars
received but the index is out of the
displayed range.
Airplane Symbol
Localizer scale and index flash continuously
Flight Path Vector
when LOC is engaged and the deviation
exceeds 1/4 dot above 15 feet RA. Flight Path Vector 2

Glideslope scale and index flash
continuously when G/S is engaged and the Pitch Scale
deviation exceeds 1 dot above 100 feet RA. Pitch Limit Indicator
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Localizer and Glideslope Scales | Section 8.3.22
Flight Control Unit | LOC Button | Section 13.2.13

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Buttons
SPD/MACH Button
HDG-V/S / TRK-FPA Button
Metric ALT Button
LOC B uTTON AP Button
LOC Button
The LOC Button arms, engages, or
disengages the localizer mode. It A/THR Button
illuminates the managed lateral light. EXPED Button

Dashes appear in the HDG/TRK window
APPR Button
when LOC* or LOC engages. It takes a
minimum of 3 seconds after arming for the APPR Button 2
LOC to arm. Next Section
L OCATION
Flight Control Unit | LOC Button | Section 13.2.13
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Low Energy Warning | Section 7.3.19B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIgHT C ONTrOl L aws S ECTION 7.3.19B

N OrMal L aw - L Ow E NErgY W arNINg Previous Section
A low energy warning alerts pilots when Direct Law
airplane energy is insufficient to achieve a Alternate Law

climbing flight path through pitch control
Normal Law
alone. The “SPEED, SPEED, SPEED” voice
alert repeats every 5 seconds while the Description
condition exists. Thrust must be increased Ground Mode

to achieve a climbing flight path.
Flare Mode
The low energy warning is computed by the Load Factor Demand Mode
FACs and available in Normal Law. It is
available in configurations 2, 3, and FULL
and is based on airplane configuration, High Speed Protection
airspeed deceleration rate, and flight path Pitch Attitude Protection

angle.
High AOA Protection
The low energy warning is inhibited: Alpha Protection

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
When TO/GA is selected Alpha Max
Below 100 feet RA or above 2000 Alpha Floor

feet RA
When alpha floor or a GPWS alert is
triggered Load Alleviation Function
In alternate or direct law Lowest Selectable Speed

If both RAs are failed
Low Energy Warning
At flaps 1 or UP
Mechanical Backup
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/flight-controls/sys-7.3.19B.html[23.01.2021 22:11:51]
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Low Energy Warning | Section 7.3.19B
Next Section
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/flight-controls/sys-7.3.19B.html[23.01.2021 22:11:51]
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Low Speed Stability | Section 7.3.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A lTErNaTE L aw - L Ow S pEED S TaBIlITY Previous Section
Automatic pitch trim stops trimming nose Direct Law
up momentarily at approximately 5 to 10 Alternate Law

knots above stall speed. This provides a
Description
momentary pitch down when low speed
stability is active, but automatic trimming Load Factor Demand Mode
will continue if speed reduction is continued Load Factor Limitation

by pilot. An aural "Stall, Stall ..." will be
Low Speed Stability
heard 5 to 10 knots prior to stall.
Low Speed Stability may or may not be
available in alternate law depending on the
type of flight control failure. Without low Stall Warning Speed
speed stability the momentary pitch down Normal Law

will not occur at approximately 5 to 10
knots above stall speed.
Mechanical Backup
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Low Speed Stability | Section 7.3.4
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Lowest Selectable Speed | Section 7.3.19A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIgHT C ONTrOl L aWs S ECTION 7.3.19A

N Ormal L aW - L OWEsT S ElECTaBlE S pEEd Previous Section
VLS is defined by the top of the amber strip Direct Law
along the speed scale. VLS is the minimum Alternate Law
speed that provides an adequate margin Normal Law

above stall. It is the slowest speed the auto
Description
flight and auto thrust system will fly, if
engaged. It provides a 1.2 G low speed Ground Mode
buffet margin when above FL 200. During Flare Mode

approach or below FL 200 provides a 1.23
VSTALL margin for landing. VLS on the PFD
is a dynamic number computed by the
FACs based on airplane configuration and High Speed Protection
load factor. Pitch Attitude Protection
VLS is displayed in normal, alternate, and High AOA Protection
direct law. Alpha Protection

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Alpha Max
VLS in the MCDU is a static number
generated by the FMGC based on predicted Alpha Floor
landing weight and selected landing flap Bank Angle Protection

configuration on the PERF APPR page (e.g.,
FLAPS 3 or FULL).
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/flight-controls/sys-7.3.19A.html[23.01.2021 22:11:55]
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Lowest Selectable Speed | Section 7.3.19A
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Mach Number | Section 8.3.46

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

M ACH N uMBEr Previous Section
When the mach number is .5 or greater and PFD Symbols 1
the ILS/LS button is not selected then the PFD Symbols 2

mach number is displayed.
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
ILS Information
Mach Number
ILS Message
Landing Elevation
Ground Reference

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS Fail Flag
PFD TCAS Display
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Mach Number | Section 8.3.46
Flight Maneuvers | Managed/Managed Approach | Section 13.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

M ANAGED /M ANAGED A PPROACH P ROfILE Previous Section
ILS Autoland
ILS - No Autoland
Managed/Managed App
Takeoff
No Flaps Approach
Next Section
Managed/managed nonprecision procedure is always the preferred method for both RNAV
(GPS) and VOR approaches. It has several additional requirements:
OAT must be within the limits on the approach plate

If no limits are charted, the OAT must be above -15°C
A local altimeter must be available
A published descent path must appear on the approach plate and in the database
If the additional criteria are not met, use the managed/selected procedure. Add +50 feet to
Flight Maneuvers | Managed/Managed Approach | Section 13.4.2
the lowest minimum and use this as a derived decision altitude (DDA) for all nonprecision
approaches.
Flight Maneuvers | Managed/Selected Approach | Section 13.4.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

M ANAGED /S ELECTED A PPROACH P ROfILE Previous Section
ILS Autoland
ILS - No Autoland
Managed/Managed App
Takeoff
No Flaps Approach
Next Section
Managed/Selected nonprecision approaches are authorized for:
RNAV (GPS) / RNAV (GNSS)

VOR
LOC/LDA
Circling approaches
Add +50 feet to the lowest minimum and use this as a derived decision altitude (DDA) for
all nonprecision approaches.
Flight Maneuvers | Managed/Selected Approach | Section 13.4.3
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Cabin Pressurization with Manual Mode | Section 15.1.17

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C Ab P rEss SD - C AbIN P rEssurIZATION wITH M ANuAl M OdE Previous Section
When the MODE SEL switch is set to MAN, Cond SD
then the landing elevation data is removed Bleed SD

from the ECAM CAB PRES and CRUISE
Cruise SD
pages. The outflow valve is controlled by
the MAN V/S CTL switch. The current cabin Cab Press SD
altitude is 4,200 feet in this example. Description 1
Description 2
Normal Operational Config
Abnormal Operational Config
Smoke Config
Cabin Pres SYS 2 Fault
Cabin Press w/Man Mode
Man Setting Ldg Elev

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCATION
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Cabin Pressurization with Manual Mode | Section 15.1.17
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Marker Beacon Indication | Section 8.3.23

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImary F LIGHT D IspLay S ymBOLs S ECTION 8.3.23

M arKEr B EaCON I NdICaTION Previous Section
The OM symbol displays in blue when the PFD Symbols 1
outer marker is over flown. PFD Symbols 2
The MM symbol displays in amber when the Side Slip Index Beta Target
middle marker is over flown. Bank Angle Limit Indicator
The AWY symbol displays in white when the Flight Director Command Bars
inner marker is overflown. Flight Director Command Bars 2
Airplane Symbol
Flight Path Vector
Pitch Scale

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Marker Beacon Indication | Section 8.3.23
Warning Lights, Switches and Buttons | Master Caution Light | Section 16.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W ArNING L IGHTs , S wITCHEs AND B uTTON S ECTION 16.4.1

M AsTEr C AuTION L IGHT Previous Section
The MASTER CAUT Lights illuminate amber Master Warning
for level 2 cautions and are accompanied Master Caution

by a single chime.
The lights extinguish when: GPWS - G/S Button
Either MASTER CAUT switch is Autoland Warning Light
pushed Next Section

The caution no longer exists
The CLR button on the ECAM control L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
panel is pushed
Warning Lights, Switches and Buttons | Master Caution Light | Section 16.4.1
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Max Side Stick Deflection | Section 8.3.26

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImarY F LIGHT D IspLaY S YmBOLs S ECTION 8.3.26

M ax S IdE S TICK D EfLECTION Previous Section
Max Side Stick Deflection is indicated as a PFD Symbols 1
partial white box after engine start and PFD Symbols 2

displays the maximum side stick deflection.
PFD Symbols 3
It is only displayed on the ground.
The Side Stick Order Indication displays in
white after first engine start. Indicates
combined displacement of Captain's and Max Side Stick Deflection
First Officer's side sticks (e.g., left bank, Ground Roll Guidance
pitch up). Allows pilots to observe
commanded side stick deflection during
takeoff and landing roll. Only displayed on Selected Heading FD Off
the ground. Selected Heading FD On
True Heading
DH Flags
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Max Side Stick Deflection | Section 8.3.26
Operating Limits | Max Weights | Section 1.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A IRCRAFT S TRUCTURAl W EIGHT Previous Section
Airspeed Max
Aircraft Model A320 A319
Pressure Altitude
Pax Capacity 12F/132C 8F/112C
Max Weights
Max TO Weight 169,700 lbs. 166,400 lbs.

Wind Limits
Max Landing Operating Speeds

142,200 lbs. 137,700 lbs.
Weight
Oxygen Pressure
Max Zero Fuel
134,400 lbs. 128,900 lbs. Airplane General Limits
Weight
Anti-Ice
Autoflight Limits
Next Section
Operating Limits | Max Weights | Section 1.4.2
MCDU | MCDU MENU Annunciator | Section 14.2.12

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
MCDU MENU A NNuNCIaTOr S ECTION 14.2.12

The MCDU MENU Annunciator illuminates Previous Section
when a system linked to the MCDU Description

requests the display. The system can be
Page Title
changed using the MCDU MENU key.
Line Select Keys
Scratch Pad
Slew Keys
Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | MCDU MENU Annunciator | Section 14.2.12
Flight Control Laws | Mechanical Backup - Description | Section 7.3.22

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

M EChaNICal B aCKup - D EsCrIpTION Previous Section
In the event of a complete loss of electrical Direct Law
flight control computer signals, the airplane Alternate Law

reverts to a mechanical mode. The side
Normal Law
stick is inoperative, pitch is controlled via
pitch trim wheel, roll and yaw are Abnormal Attitude Law
controlled through the rudder pedals. Mechanical Backup
PITCH CONTROL - Pitch control is achieved Next Section
through the horizontal stabilizer by use of

the manual trim wheel if hydraulic (green
or yellow) power is available. A red MAN
PITCH TRIM ONLY warning appears on the
PFD.
ROLL CONTROL - A combination of engine

thrust and rudder may provide roll, yaw,
and pitch control. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
YAW MECHANICAL - Lateral control is RECONFIGURATION OF FLT CTL LAWS

accomplished using the rudder pedals if If multiple system failures occur, the flight
hydraulic power is available. control computers will reconfigure to a
Flight Control Laws | Mechanical Backup - Description | Section 7.3.22
Flight Control Unit | Metric Altitude Button | Section 13.2.11

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGHT C ONTrOl U NIT S ECTION 13.2.11

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Buttons
SPD/MACH Button
Metric ALT Button
M ETrIC A lTITuDE B uTTON AP Button
LOC Button
The METRIC ALT Button displays the FCU
altitude in meters on bottom of lower A/THR Button
ECAM. EXPED Button
APPR Button
APPR Button 2
Next Section
L OCATION
Flight Control Unit | Metric Altitude Button | Section 13.2.11
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Minimum Flap Retraction Speed | Section 8.3.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

M INIMuM F Lap R ETraCTION S pEEd Previous Section
Selection of managed speed while in the PFD Symbols 1
APPR phase moves the magenta speed bug Flight Mode Annunciations
to VAPP, and allows the auto flight system
VMAX
to fly the higher of managed approach
speed or the speed associated with the flap Next Flap Extend Speed
configuration until final flaps are selected. Over Speed Protection Symbol
Speed Trend Arrow
Alpha Protection
Alpha Maximum
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 2
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Minimum Flap Retraction Speed | Section 8.3.7
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Minimum Slat Retract Speed | Section 8.3.41

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMArY F LIGHT D IspLAY S YMBOLs S ECTION 8.3.41

M INIMuM S LAT R ETrACT S pEEd Previous Section
The S speed (minimum slat retract speed) is PFD Symbols 1
displayed in green when the flap handle is PFD Symbols 2

in position 1. The S speed is the minimum
PFD Symbols 3
speed required to retract the flaps to
position 0. The airplane flies S speed in the PFD Symbols 4
approach phase of flight when speed is Vertical Deviation Indicator

managed and flaps are at 1.
Digital Vertical Speed Indicator
Stall Warning Speed
Green Dot Speed

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Econ Speed Range
Altitude Indicator
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Minimum Slat Retract Speed | Section 8.3.41
Cabin Pressurization Control Panel | Mode Select Switch | Section 15.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

M OdE S ElECT S wITCH Previous Section
AUTO - When all lights on the Man V/S Control
mode select switch are Mode Select

extinguished then the
Landing Elevation
automatic pressurization mode
is active. A green color SYS1 Ditching
or SYS2 annunciation is displayed on the Next Section

ECAM CAB PRESS page indicating which
FAULT - The fault light on the mode select
Cabin Pressure Controller (CPC) is active. L OCATION
switch illuminates amber when faults are
MAN - If both automatic CPC fail, cabin detected on both cabin pressure
pressurization can be manually controlled controllers. In addition, an amber color
by selecting the MODE SEL switch to MAN. SYS1 or SYS2 annunciation is displayed on
the ECAM CAB PRESS page indicating a
When the switch is selected to MAN a white fault on the associated CPC.
color MAN light is illuminated on the switch
and:
The MAN V/S CTL switch is energized

that allows the MAN V/S CTL switch
to control the outflow valve position
The LDG ELEV information is
removed from the ECAM CRUISE
and CAB PRESS pages
The active system indication changes
from SYS to MAN
Cabin Pressurization Control Panel | Mode Select Switch | Section 15.3.1
EFIS Control Panel | Mode Selector - ARC Mode | Section 8.1.14
A320 D Isplays aND P aNEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
M ODE S ElECTOr - ARC M ODE
ARC Mode
ACTIVE WAYPOINT - The Active (the TO)
NAV Mode
waypoint is represented as a white color
waypoint. VOR Mode
ILS Mode
FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS - The flight plan
waypoints are represented as a green color PLAN Mode
waypoint.
Range Selector 20 NM
WPT BUTTON - When the WPT button is Range Selector 40 NM

active all other waypoints are presented as
VOR Switches On
a magenta color waypoint.
VOR Switches Off
RANGE MARKS - Range Marks are
Next Section
represented as four equal distance range
marks from the the aircraft. The compass
card represents the maximum range. In
this example, the maximum range is 40 NM < PREVIOUS NEXT >
with three additional range marks every 10
EFIS Control Panel | Mode Selector - ARC Mode | Section 8.1.14
NM. The range or distance (blue color
number) is indicated on the outer edge of
two range marks.
Radio Management Panel | Navigation and Standby Navigation Button | Section 2.4.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
R AdIO M ANAgEmENT P ANEl S ECTION 2.4.3

N AvIgATION ANd S TANdby N AvIgATION B uTTON Previous Section
When the STBY NAV button is Frequency Display
selected it enables remotely Radio Selection Buttons

tuning the respected navaid and
Frequency Selector
desired course. Each RMP tunes
it's respective navaid. Tuning and ILS on Nav Buttons
either RMP tunes both ILS receivers if both On/Off Switch

RMPs have their NAV button pressed.
Next Section
REMOTE TUNING A RADIO - To remotely

tune a radio frequency and course:
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
1. Select NAV using the NAV button.
2. Dial in the desired radio frequency When a navaid is remotely tuned, the letter
using the frequency selector knob. "R" is displayed next the navaid identifier
3. Then push the transfer button to on the Navigation Display. When an ILS has
transfer the standby frequency to been remotely tuned the PFDs do not
the active window and display the display DME.
selected course in the STBY/CRS
window. NOTE
4. Select the desired course by rotating
When a radio is remotely tuned,
the frequency selector knob.
automatic radio tuning is deactivated
and the RAD/NAV page on both
MCDUs are deactivated.
Radio Management Panel | Navigation and Standby Navigation Button | Section 2.4.3
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Navigation and Logo Light Switch | Section 3.5.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Strobe Light
Rotating Beacon
Wing
Nav and Logo
Runway Turn Off
N AVIGATION AND L OGO L IGHT S WITCH Landing Light
Takeoff and Taxi

OFF - The OFF position POSITION 2 - The 2 position illuminates the
extinguishes the navigation second set of navigation lights (aft Next Section
and logo lights. position). On the A319, it also illuminates

L OCATION
the logo lights when the airplane is on the
POSITION 1 - The 1 position ground or in flight when slats are extended.
illuminates the first set of
navigation lights (forward position).
On the A319, it also illuminates the logo

lights when the airplane is on the ground or
in flight when slats are extended.
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Navigation and Logo Light Switch | Section 3.5.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Table 1
NAVAIDS
Table 2

Table 3
Displays green if a current waypoint, white if the TO Table 4
VOR NAV waypoint, blue when tuned for display (automatically or

Table 5
(G,W, B, ARC manually), and magenta when not part of the flight plan
M) PLAN but displayed when the VOR.D and/or NDB buttons are Table 6
selected on.
Table 7
Displays green if a current waypoint, white if the TO Table 8

VOR / waypoint, blue when tuned for display (automatically or
NAV
DME manually), and magenta when not part of the flight plan Next Section
ARC
(G,W, B, but displayed when the VOR.D and/or NDB buttons are
PLAN
M) selected on.
Displays green if a current waypoint, white if the TO

NDB NAV waypoint, blue when tuned for display (automatically or
(G,W, B, ARC manually), and magenta when not part of the flight plan
M) PLAN but displayed when the VOR.D and/or NDB buttons are
selected on.
MISCELLANEOUS
Displays white when the runway is not specified. Displays

NAV
Airport magenta for airports that are not part of the flight plan
ARC
(M, W) (regular, refueling, alternate, and emergency) when
PLAN
ARPT button is selected on.
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Next Flap Extend Speed | Section 8.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

N ExT F Lap E xTENd S pEEd Previous Section
The VFE Next symbol appears in amber and PFD Symbols 1
is: Flight Mode Annunciations
VMAX
The placarded maximum speed for
selecting next greater flap setting Next Flap Extend Speed
Only displays below 15,000 feet or
20,000 feet, depending on FAC
standard
Speed Trend Arrow
Alpha Protection
Alpha Maximum
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 2
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Next Flap Extend Speed | Section 8.3.2
Flight Maneuvers | No Flaps and No Slats | Section 13.4.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

N O F LAPs AND N O S LATs P ROfILE Previous Section
ILS Autoland
ILS - No Autoland
Managed/Managed App
Takeoff
No Flaps Approach
Next Section
Note: Use of autopilot is not authorized below 500 feet.

Note: If in normal law, be prepared to cancel alpha floor as the airplane slows.
Note: If in direct law anticipate aural stall warning.
Flight Maneuvers | No Flaps and No Slats | Section 13.4.9
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | No Smoking Light Switch | Section 3.6.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NTEgRAl ANd C ABIN S IgNs L IgHTINg C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 3.6.5

N O S mOkINg L IgHT S wITCH Previous Section
extinguishes the NO SMOKING Ice and Stby Compass

and EXIT signs and the
Dome
associated chime sounds.
Annunciator Light
ON - The ON position causes the NO
Seat Belts
SMOKING signs to illuminate and the
associated chime to sound. The EXIT signs No Smoking
may or may not illuminate depending on Emergency Exit

which cabin attendant module (CAM) is AUTO - The AUTO position causes the NO Next Section
installed. The NO SMOKING and EXIT SMOKING and EXIT signs to illuminate
automatically illuminate when the cabin when the landing gear is extended, and to L OCATION
altitude exceeds 11,300 feet, regardless of extinguish when the gear is retracted.
the NO SMOKING light switch position. A Associated chime sounds when the signs
NO SMOKING message will appear on the illuminate and extinguish.
Engine Warning Display (upper ECAM
display) when the signs are displayed.
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | No Smoking Light Switch | Section 3.6.5
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Description | Section 7.3.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

N Ormal L aw - D EsCrIpTION Previous Section
Normal Law consist of three modes of Direct Law
operation that includes; Alternate Law
Ground Mode Normal Law
Flight Mode, and Description

Flare Mode
Ground Mode
The ground mode and flare mode are direct Flare Mode
law with no active protections and no
automatic trimming. The flight mode
provides flight envelope protection that Load Factor Limitation
includes: High Speed Protection
Load factor demand mode Pitch Attitude Protection
Load factor limitation High AOA Protection

Pitch attitude protection
Alpha Protection
High speed protection < PREVIOUS NEXT >
High AOA protection (Alpha Prot, Alpha Max
Alpha Floor, and Alpha Max) The rudder pedals directly command rudder Alpha Floor
Bank angle protection, and surface movement via cables.
Load Alleviation Function (on earlier
RECONFIGURATION OF FLT CTL LAWS
aircraft) Load Alleviation Function
If multiple system failures occur, the flight
YAW NORMAL LAW - Yaw in normal law control computers will reconfigure to a
uses the rudder for turn coordination and degraded flight control law. See Low Energy Warning
yaw damping. Reconfiguration of FCL Diagram. Abnormal Attitude Law
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Description | Section 7.3.7
Next Section
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Normal Operational Configuration | Section 15.1.13

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C AB P rEss SD - N OrMAl O pErATIONAl C ONFIGurATION Previous Section
When both the blower and extract switches Cond SD
are selected to AUTO, the ventilation Bleed SD

system is configured to the normal
Cruise SD
operational configuration.
Cab Press SD
Refer to Section 15.5.3 to view Normal
Description 1
Operational Configuration Schematic.
Description 2
Smoke Config

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCATION
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Normal Operational Configuration | Section 15.1.13
Radio Management Panel | On/Off Switch | Section 2.4.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
R ADIO M ANAGEmENT P ANEl S ECTION 2.4.4

O N /O FF S wITCH Previous Section
The On/Off switch controls the power Frequency Display
supply to the RMP. When a Radio Radio Selection Buttons

Management Panel (RMP) has failed
Frequency Selector
or is turned off, RMP 3 passes through the
failed/off panel and is connected directly to Nav Buttons
the selected transceiver. On/Off Switch
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Radio Management Panel | On/Off Switch | Section 2.4.4
Audio Control Panel | On Voice Button | Section 2.1.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

O N V OICE B uTTON Previous Section
When the ON VOICE button is Transmission Buttons
selected it inhibits ADF and Reception Knobs

VOR IDENT signals, and
INT/RAD Switch
illuminates the ON label a
green color when pressed. On Voice Button
Reset Button
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Audio Control Panel | On Voice Button | Section 2.1.3
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Over or High Speed Protection | Section 8.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImarY F LIGhT D IspLaY S YmbOLs S ECTION 8.3.3

O vEr Or H IGh S pEEd P rOTECTION Previous Section
Over Speed or High Speed Protection is PFD Symbols 1
activated when airspeed exceeds VMO + 6 Flight Mode Annunciations
knots or MMO + M.01. When it is active: VMAX
The autopilot disconnects Next Flap Extend Speed
High speed aural warning is heard Over Speed Protection Symbol

Automatic pitch trimming stops
to 45° Actual Airspeed Reference
High speed protection can be Speed Trend Arrow

overridden, but side stick nose-down
authority is reduced and a positive
pitch-up command is introduced Lowest Selectable Speed
Positive spiral static stability is Alpha Protection

introduced to 0° bank angle (instead
Alpha Maximum
of 33° bank angle in normal law), so < PREVIOUS NEXT >
that when the side stick is released PFD Symbols 2
it always returns to 0° bank angle PFD Symbols 3

instead of 33° bank angle
PFD Symbols 4
If the stick is released, the airplane
continues to pitch-up until the PFD Symbols 5
airspeed slows to VMO/MMO at Next Section

which point the high speed
protection is deactivated and normal
control laws are restored
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Over or High Speed Protection | Section 8.3.3
A320 D IsPLays aND P aNELs

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E mErgENCy E xITs aND S LIDEs S ECTION 4.2.2

O vEr W INg S LIDEs Previous Section
OVER WING EMERGENCY EXITS - A slide is Cabin and Cockpit Exits
mounted in the fuselage at the trailing Door Slides

edge of each wing and is always armed.
Over Wing Slides
If an over wing emergency exit is opened Next Section

from either the inside or outside, the slide
deploys.
The slides also contain a manual inflation

handle for use in case the slide does not
automatically inflate.
Oxygen Panel | Oxygen Crew Supply Switch | Section 4.4.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
O xygEN P ANEl S ECTION 4.4.3

O xygEN C rEw S upply S wITCH Previous Section
OFF - When the OXYGEN CREW Video in Use
SUPPLY switch is selected OFF, Mask Manual On

the OFF light illuminates white,
and the oxygen supply valve is
closed. Crew Supply
Next Section
ON - When the OXYGEN CREW SUPPLY
switch is selected ON, the OFF light L OCATION
extinguishes, and the cockpit oxygen
supply valve is open. Low pressure oxygen
is supplied to the masks.
Oxygen Panel | Oxygen Crew Supply Switch | Section 4.4.3
Oxygen Panel | Oxygen Mask Manual On Switch | Section 4.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
O XYGEN P ANEl S ECTION 4.4.1

O XYGEN M AsK M ANuAl O N S WITCH Previous Section
AUTO - The Oxygen Mask Video in Use
Manual ON switch is normally Mask Manual On

set to AUTO. This allows the
cabin oxygen mask doors to
open automatically when the Crew Supply
cabin altitude exceeds 14,000 feet. Next Section
ON - The cabin oxygen mask doors open L OCATION

regardless of cabin altitude when the
Oxygen Mask Manual ON switch is selected
to ON.
Oxygen Panel | Oxygen Mask Manual On Switch | Section 4.4.1
Pneumatic System Displays | Bleed Air SD - Pack 1 Overheat | Section 15.1.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

B lEEd A Ir SD - P ACK 1 O vErHEAT Previous Section
This illustration shows an air conditioning Cond SD
pack compressor outlet overheat. Bleed SD
Description 1
Description 2
Pack 1 Overheat
Pack Channel Failure
Engine Bleed Overheat
APU Bleed Air
Cruise SD
Cab Press SD
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT > L OCATION
Pneumatic System Displays | Bleed Air SD - Pack 1 Overheat | Section 15.1.5
Oxygen Panel | Passenger Oxygen System On Light | Section 4.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
O xygEN P ANEl S ECTION 4.4.2

P AssENgEr O xygEN S ysTEm O N L IgHT Previous Section
SYS ON - The PASSENGER SYS Video in Use
ON Light illuminates white when Mask Manual On

the oxygen mask doors are
actuated. It remains ON until the
OXYGEN TIMER RESET switch is pushed on Crew Supply
the overhead maintenance panel. Next Section
L OCATION
Oxygen Panel | Passenger Oxygen System On Light | Section 4.4.2
Primary Flight Display Symbols | PFD TCAS Display | Section 8.3.53

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

PFD TCAS D IspLaY Previous Section
When an RA is detected, the VSI displays a PFD Symbols 1
Fly To Area that indicates in green the area PFD Symbols 2

of the scale to target in order to avoid
PFD Symbols 3
conflict.
PFD Symbols 4
When an RA is detected, the pilot must
PFD Symbols 5
maintain the vertical speed just outside the
red area to minimize altitude deviations ILS Information
during an RA. Mach Number
ILS Message
Landing Elevation
Ground Reference

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS Fail Flag
PFD TCAS Display
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | PFD TCAS Display | Section 8.3.53
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Pitch Attitude Protection | Section 7.3.13

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGHT C ONTrOl L AWs S ECTION 7.3.13

N OrMAl L AW - P ITCH A TTITudE P rOTECTION Previous Section
In normal law the airplane's pitch attitude is Direct Law
limited as follows and is indicated by the Alternate Law

pitch limit indicator (green = symbols) on
Normal Law
the PFD attitude scale:
Description
30° nose-up with flaps 0 to 3
Ground Mode
(progressively reduced to 25° at low
speed) Flare Mode
25° nose-up with flaps FULL Load Factor Demand Mode

(progressively reduced to 20° at low
speed)
15° nose-down High Speed Protection

The flight director bars are removed when
pitch exceeds 25° up or 13° down. High AOA Protection
Alpha Protection
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Alpha Max
Alpha Floor
Low Energy Warning
Mechanical Backup
Flight Control Laws | Normal Law - Pitch Attitude Protection | Section 7.3.13
Next Section
Flight Controls | Pitch Control | Section 7.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT C ONTrOls S ECTION 7.4.2

P ITCh C ONTrOl Previous Section
PITCH CONTROL - Pitch is controlled by the FLIGHT CONTROL COMPUTERS - Normally, Flight Controls Description
elevators and horizontal stabilizer. They are the elevators and stabilizer are electrically Flight Control Inputs
electrically controlled by the ELACs or controlled by the ELACs. If both ELACs fail,
Pitch Control
SECs, and are hydraulically actuated. pitch control is transferred to the SECs.
Roll Control
PITCH ACTIVATION - A screw jack drives MECHANICAL CONTROL - The stabilizer can
Yaw Control
the horizontal stabilizer (THS). The screw also be mechanically controlled (via a
jack is driven by two hydraulic motors that cable) using the pitch trim wheels, Next Section
are controlled by one of three electric provided hydraulic power is available.

motors or by the mechanical trim wheel. Mechanical pitch trim control overrides
Two electrically controlled servo-jacks drive electrical control.
each elevator.
Flight Controls | Pitch Control | Section 7.4.2
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Pitch Limit Indicator | Section 8.3.20

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

P ITCH L IMIT I NdICATOr Previous Section
The Pitch Limit Indicator indicates pitch PFD Symbols 1
angle limitation in green at 30° nose up or PFD Symbols 2

15° nose-down on pitch scale. Symbols are
replaced by amber Xs with loss of normal
law. Bank Angle Limit Indicator
Airplane Symbol
Flight Path Vector
Pitch Scale

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Pitch Limit Indicator | Section 8.3.20
EFIS Control Panel | Mode Selector - Plan Mode | Section 8.1.18

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
M OdE S ElECTOr - P laN M OdE
ARC Mode
PLAN MODE - The PLAN Mode displays the
NAV Mode
flight plan legs oriented to true north within
the selected range scale. The overall flight VOR Mode
plan may be slewed via the MCDU buttons.
ILS Mode
Navaid data, bearing pointer, weather
PLAN Mode
radar, GPWS, EGPWS, PWS icons, and
TCAS are not available in the PLAN mode. Range Selector 20 NM
AIRPLANE ORIENTATION - The airplane
symbol represents the airplane's VOR Switches On
orientation if within the selected range, and
VOR Switches Off
true track as provided by the FMGS.
Next Section
MAP REFERENCE POINT - The Map
Reference Point provides a point chosen by
the pilot on the onside MCDU. The
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
reference point is centered on the display
(ie CEDOX is the current map reference
EFIS Control Panel | Mode Selector - Plan Mode | Section 8.1.18
point). The map reference point is the

waypoint displayed on the second line of
Air Conditioning Panel | Pneumatic Schematic | Section 15.2.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A IR C ONDITIONING C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 15.2.8

Previous Section
P NEUMATIC S CHEMATIC
Pack Flow Selector
Hot Air Switch
Pack Switch
Engine Bleed Switch
Ram Air Switch
APU Bleed Switch
Cross Bleed Selector
Pneumatic Schematic
Leak Detection
Next Section
L OCATION
Air Conditioning Panel | Pneumatic Schematic | Section 15.2.8
MCDU | Progress Page - Predictive GPS Page | Section 14.4.7A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOgrEss P agE - P rEdICTIvE GPS P agE S ECTION 14.4.7A

DEST - Displays current destination. Previous Section
Description
Predictive GPS - Predicts availability of the
GPS within ±15 minutes of ETA at Phase of Flight
destination or any waypoint entered by the CRZ

pilots. Predictions display for time intervals
OPT
of 5 minutes.
REC MAX
WPT - Allows entry of a waypoint that is not
Report
the destination. Once entered, an ETA must
be manually entered in the UTC data field. Report Page
The FMGC will provide predictive GPS Update At

status for the designated waypoint based
Predictive GPS
on the entered time.
Predictive GPS Page
Time to Destination - Displays current
Required Accuracy
predicted time to destination.
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/nav-flight-management/sys-14.4.7A.html[23.01.2021 22:17:33]
MCDU | Progress Page - Predictive GPS Page | Section 14.4.7A
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | PWS Alert Advisory | Section 16.2.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

PWS A lErT A dvIsOrY Previous Section
PWS Alert Advisory is active below 1500 System Switch
feet RA. The alert zone ahead of the Image Selector

airplane is +/-40°, and extends out to 5
Tilt Selector
NM. Provides a PWS symbol on both NDs
with no aural message. Gain Selector
Windshear
Windshear Switch
Reactive Windshear Alert
PWS Alert Warning
PWS Alert Caution
PWS Alert Advisory
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | PWS Alert Advisory | Section 16.2.7
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | PWS Alert Caution | Section 16.2.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

PWS A lErT C AuTION Previous Section
PWS Alert Caution is active below 1200 feet System Switch
RA. The alert zone ahead of the airplane is Image Selector

+/-25°, and extends out to 3 NM. Provides
Tilt Selector
“MONITOR RADAR DISPLAY” voice alert, an
amber W/S AHEAD message on both PFDs, Gain Selector
and a PWS symbol on both NDs. Windshear
Windshear Switch
PWS Alert Warning
PWS Alert Caution
PWS Alert Advisory
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | PWS Alert Caution | Section 16.2.6
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | PWS Alert Warning | Section 16.2.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

PWS A lErT W ArNING Previous Section
PWS Alert Warning Takeoff and Landing is System Switch
active below 1200 feet RA. The alert zone Image Selector
ahead of the airplane is 1/4 NM, and
Tilt Selector
extends out to 3 NM while the airplane is
on the ground, then reverts to 1.5 NM once Gain Selector
airborne. Windshear
Windshear Switch
PWS Alert Warning
PWS Alert Caution
PWS Alert Advisory
Next Section
L OCATION
During takeoff PWS alert provides < PREVIOUS NEXT >

“WINDSHEAR AHEAD, WINDSHEAR AHEAD”
voice alert, a red W/S AHEAD message on
both PFDs, and a PWS symbol on both NDs.
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | PWS Alert Warning | Section 16.2.5
During landing PWS alert provides “GO

AROUND, WINDSHEAR AHEAD” voice alert,
a red W/S AHEAD message on both PFDs,
and a PWS symbol on both NDs.
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | Predictive Windshear Switch | Section 16.2.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

P rEdICTIvE W INdsHEAr S wITCH Previous Section
OFF - The OFF selection deactivates PWS. System Switch
Image Selector
AUTO - The AUTO selection activates the
PWS provided: Tilt Selector
Gain Selector
One engine is operating
The airplane is below 2300 feet RA Windshear
The TCAS/XPDR switch is in any Windshear Switch

position other than STBY (if the
weather radar SYS switch is selected
ON, the PWS operates regardless of PWS Alert Warning
transponder switch position) PWS Alert Caution
Predictive Windshear Alerts - Operates only PWS Alert Advisory
below 2300 feet RA and provides alerts Next Section

from approximately 10 seconds in front of
the airplane out to a distance of 5 NM L OCATION
within 40° of airplane heading. The type of
alert provided depends on the location of
the windshear relative to aircraft position,
aircraft altitude, and phase of flight (takeoff
or landing). During takeoff, new alerts are
inhibited from 100 knots until 50 feet RA.
During approach, new alerts are inhibited < PREVIOUS NEXT >
from 50 feet RA until 60 knots. Existing
PWS uses Doppler capability of the weather
alerts will not be removed.
radar to detect the presence of low altitude
PWS increases alerting time over that horizontal wind flow and to predict the
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | Predictive Windshear Switch | Section 16.2.4
provided by the reactive windshear system. presence of one or more windshear

This provides pilots the opportunity to occurrences.
either avoid a windshear, or take action to
increase the energy state of the aircraft
prior to encountering windshear.

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Table 1
MISCELLANEOUS
Table 2

Table 3
Cross NAV Displays left or right lateral deviation from the active leg Table 4
Track ARC of the flight plan in NM. Not present when PPOS is the
Table 5
Error (G) PLAN FROM waypoint.
Table 6
Weather ILS/VOR Areas of the highest intensity display in red, lesser
Table 7
Radar NAV intensity in amber, and lowest intensity green.
Returns ARC Turbulence is displayed in magenta. Table 8
Next Section
Predictive
ILS/VOR
Windshear Indicates windshear area as a black and red icon and two
NAV
(Black, R, amber radial lines.
ARC
A)
Indicates threatening terrain, with red being the most

ILS
EGPWS threatening, followed by yellow then green. Black
VOR
(R, Y, G, indicates terrain is 2000 feet below airplane and/or
NAV
Black, M) within 400 feet of the runway elevation of the nearest
ARC
airport. Magenta indicates terrain data is unavailable.
TCAS
With TA/RA or TFC selected, displays RA intruder within

ILS
TCAS 15 to 35 seconds of closest point of approach (CPA).
VOR
RA Traffic Inhibited below 1100 feet AGL on climb and 900 feet on
NAV
(R) descent. Range must be 40 NM or less on some
ARC
airplanes.
Airplane General | Probe Locations | Section 1.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A320 P ROBE L OCaTIONs S ECTION 1.1.2

Previous Section
A320 Dimensions
A320 Turning Radius
Probe Locations
Antenna Locations
Exterior Doors
Ground Service
Next Section
Airplane General | Probe Locations | Section 1.1.2
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Radio Altitude Height | Section 8.3.21

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImarY F LIghT D IspLaY S YmBOLs S ECTION 8.3.21

R adIO A LTITudE H EIghT Previous Section
The Radio Height displays RA below 2500 PFD Symbols 1
feet. Changes every 10 feet down to 50 PFD Symbols 2

feet, then every 5 feet down to 10 feet,
then every foot.
Bank Angle Limit Indicator
If a DH has been entered, the Radio Altitude
appears:
Green when RA is greater than DH
Airplane Symbol
plus 100 feet
Amber when RA is less than DH plus Flight Path Vector
100 feet Flight Path Vector 2
If NO is entered as the DH on the PERF Flight Path Director
APPR page, zero is taken as the default Pitch Scale

value.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
If a DH has not been entered, or an MDA Radio Altitude Height
has been entered, the RA value appears:
Green when RA is greater than 400 Marker Beacon Indication

feet
PFD Symbols 3
Amber when RA is less than or equal
to 400 feet PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Radio Altitude Height | Section 8.3.21
Radio Management Panel | Radio Selection Buttons | Section 2.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

R ADIO S ElECTION B uTTONs Previous Section
When a radio Frequency Display
selection button Radio Selection Buttons

is pushed, the
Frequency Selector
ACTIVE window
displays the tuned frequency and the Nav Buttons
STBY/CRS window displays the standby On/Off Switch

frequency. The selected radio button
Next Section
displays a green color light that identifies
the selected radio. L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Radio Management Panel | Radio Selection Buttons | Section 2.4.1
Windshield Wiper Panel | Rain Repellent Push Button | Section 11.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W INdshIEld W IpEr P ANEl S ECTION 11.2.1

R AIN R EpEllENT P ush B uTTON Previous Section
DESCRIPTION - Each button controls the Wiper Selector
application of rain repellent fluid to the Rain Repellant Button

corresponding side of the front windshield.
Next Section
A rain repellent system is installed, but is
deactivated by some airlines. L OCATION
INHIBITED - This function is inhibited when
the aircraft is on the ground and the
engines are stopped.
BUTTON - When the button is pushed, the

timer applies a measured quantity of rain
repellent to the applicable windshield. To
repeat the cycle, the push button must be
pushed again.
OFF - Wiper is stowed out of view at

the base of the window.
SLOW - Wiper operates at low speed.
FAST - Wiper operates at high speed.
Windshield Wiper Panel | Rain Repellent Push Button | Section 11.2.1
Emergency Electrical Control Panel | RAT and Emergency Generator Manual On Switch | Section 3.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

RAT AND E mErgENCY G ENErATOr M ANuAl O N S wITCH Previous Section
AUTO - The Ram Air Emer Gen Test
Turbine extends Gen 1 Line Switch

automatically, provided AC
RAT and Emer Gen
bus 1 and 2 are not
electrically powered and Next Section
speed is above 100 knots. On earlier

aircraft, the emergency generator is only
L OCATION
powered when the landing gear is up. On MAN ON - The RAT extends and couples the
newer aircraft the emergency generator is emergency generator.
powered above 125 KIAS with the gear up
or down. The emergency generator is
WARNING
hydraulically powered by the blue hydraulic
system and is connected to the electrical Ram Air Turbine extension occurs any
system when electrical parameters are time the Ram Air Turbine Manual ON
normal. On older aircraft a minimum of 140 switch is selected, since the switch is
knots is required to provide sufficient blue always powered.
hyrualic pressure to operate the emergency
generator.
FAULT - The RAT and Emergency Generator

Fault light illuminates red with a loss of AC
buses 1 and 2 if: the emergency generator
is not supplying electrical power and the
nose gear is up.
Emergency Electrical Control Panel | RAT and Emergency Generator Manual On Switch | Section 3.3.2
Air Conditioning Panel | Ram Air Switch | Section 15.2.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A IR C ONdITIONINg C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 15.2.5

Previous Section
Pack Flow Selector
Hot Air Switch
Pack Switch
Engine Bleed Switch
Ram Air Switch
APU Bleed Switch
R Am A IR S WITCh Cross Bleed Selector
Pneumatic Schematic
OFF - Selecting the guarded ram ON - The ram air switch ON light illuminates
air switch to OFF (no white when selected ON. The ram air inlet Leak Detection
annunciation) closes the ram air opens if differential pressure is less than 1 Next Section
inlet. The normal selected PSI, if the DITCHING switch is in its normal
position. guarded position and the cabin L OCATION
pressurization MODE SEL switch is selected
In the event of a dual pack failure or for
to AUTO. If the differential pressure is
smoke removal, ventilation can be obtained
greater than 1 PSI, then the ram air inlet
by the ram air inlet.
remains closed.
Air Conditioning Panel | Ram Air Switch | Section 15.2.5
EFIS Control Panel | Range Selector - 20 NM | Section 8.1.19

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
R aNgE S ELECTOr - 20 NM
ARC Mode
The Range Selector provides selection of
NAV Mode
desired range on the respective ND. In the
event of a mode or range data failure, the VOR Mode
ND defaults to the ROSE NAV mode with an
ILS Mode
80-NM range. The range must be 80 NM or
PLAN Mode
less to display SID or STAR waypoints.
marks from the the aircraft. The compass VOR Switches On
VOR Switches Off
this example, the maximum range is 20 NM
Next Section
two range marks. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
ECAM Control Panel | Recall Button | Section 16.1.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Description
TO Configuration
Emergency Cancel
System Buttons
All Button
R ECAll B uTTON Clear Button
The RCL button when pushed: Status Button
Recall Button
Recalls warning and caution
messages that have been Display Control Knobs
suppressed with the CLR button or Next Section

automatic flight phase inhibition
NORMAL appears for 5 seconds with L OCATION
no current warnings or cautions
For more than 3 seconds, caution
messages suppressed by the EMER
CANC button are recalled
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
ECAM Control Panel | Recall Button | Section 16.1.7
Audio Control Panel | Reception Knobs | Section 2.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

R ECEpTION K NOBs Previous Section
The reception knobs allow for Transmission Buttons
receiving associated channels Reception Knobs

and adjust audio levels. When
INT/RAD Switch
the knob is released out, the
respective channel is selected and the knob On Voice Button
illuminates. Reset Button
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL LOCATION - The Next Section
ACPs are located on the control pedestal.

The Captain, First Officer and jump seat
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
positions all have audio control panels
numbered 1 through 3. The ACPs provide
the transmission and reception of all
communication, standby navigation,
interphone (flight and cabin), and
passenger address (PA) systems.
Audio Control Panel | Reception Knobs | Section 2.1.1
Flight Control Computers | Reconfiguration of Flight Control Laws Diagram | Section 7.5.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGHT C ONTROl C OMPUTERs S ECTION 7.5.4

R ECONfIGURATION Of F lIGHT C ONTROl L AWs D IAGRAM Previous Section
Description
ELAC
SEC
FAC
Next Section
L OCATION
Flight Control Computers | Reconfiguration of Flight Control Laws Diagram | Section 7.5.4
MCDU | Progress Page - Required Accuracy | Section 14.4.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOGrEss P AGE - R EQuIrEd A CCurACY S ECTION 14.4.8

Displays the accuracy required in the Previous Section
current area of flight (enroute, terminal, or Description

approach). This value normally changes
Phase of Flight
automatically, but may be inserted by the
pilot. CRZ
OPT
REC MAX
Report
Report Page
Update At
Predictive GPS
Predictive GPS Page
Required Accuracy
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Progress Page - Required Accuracy | Section 14.4.8
Audio Control Panel | Reset Button | Section 2.1.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A uDIO C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 2.1.4

R EsET B uTTON Previous Section
When the RESET Button is Transmission Buttons
selected, it resets CALL, Reception Knobs

MECH, and ATT lights on the
INT/RAD Switch
transmission buttons.
On Voice Button
Reset Button
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Audio Control Panel | Reset Button | Section 2.1.4
Engine Thrust Levers | Reverse Thrust Detent | Section 5.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NgINE T hRusT L EVERs S ECTION 5.4.2

R EVERsE T hRusT D ETENT Previous Section
Select reverse thrust by clearing the stop at Thrust Lever Detents
the forward idle position. The stop is reset ATHR Disconnect

when the thrust lever is selected back to
Rev Thrust Detent
forward thrust. When the idle stop is
cleared by pulling the reverse levers up, Next Section
reverse idle is monitored and controlled by

the FADEC.
L OCATION
Each engine is equipped with a hydraulically

operated fan air reverser. The thrust
reversers can only be operated on the
ground with a signal from the main landing
gear control interface unit (LGCIU).
Hydraulic pressure for the operation of the
thrust reversers is provided by the
associated hydraulic system.
Actuation of the reverse levers causes aft

movement of the reverser sleeve, exposing
fixed cascade vanes, and closes fan blocker
doors to redirect the flow of fan air forward
through the vanes to produce reverse
thrust.
Engine Thrust Levers | Reverse Thrust Detent | Section 5.4.2
Rudder Trim Panel | Rudder Trim Position Indicator | Section 7.7.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

R uDDEr T rIM P OsITION I NDICATOr Previous Section
The position indicator displays rudder trim Rudder Trim Selector
direction (L or R) and value (0° to 20°) Trim Position Indicator

(A319: 0° to 25°).
Trim Reset Button
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Rudder Trim Panel | Rudder Trim Position Indicator | Section 7.7.1
Rudder Trim Panel | Rudder Trim Reset Button | Section 7.7.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

R uDDEr T rIM R EsET B uTTON Previous Section
When pushed momentarily, the FAC Rudder Trim Selector
commands the rudder trim actuator to the Trim Position Indicator

zero trim position.
Trim Reset Button
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Rudder Trim Panel | Rudder Trim Reset Button | Section 7.7.2
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Runway Turn Off Light Switch | Section 3.5.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Strobe Light
Rotating Beacon
Wing
Nav and Logo
Runway Turn Off
R UNWAY T URN O ff L IGHT S WITCH Landing Light
Takeoff and Taxi

extinguishes the runway turn Next Section
off lights.
L OCATION
illuminates the runway turn off lights. The
runway turn off lights are mounted on the
nose gear strut and extinguish
automatically when the landing gear is
retracted.
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Runway Turn Off Light Switch | Section 3.5.4
Flight Controls | Roll Control | Section 7.4.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGHT C ONTrOls S ECTION 7.4.3

R Oll C ONTrOl Previous Section
ROLL CONTROL - Roll is controlled by the AILERON COMPUTERS - The ailerons are Flight Controls Description
ailerons and spoilers. They are electrically normally controlled by ELAC 1. If ELAC 1 Flight Control Inputs
controlled by the ELACs or SECs, and are fails, control is automatically transferred to
Pitch Control
hydraulically actuated. ELAC 2. In the event of dual ELAC failure
roll control and LAF are provided by the Roll Control
ROLL ACTIVATION - Each aileron has two spoilers only. Yaw Control
electrically controlled hydraulic servo-jacks.
One of these hydraulic servo-jacks per SPOILER COMPUTERS - Five hydraulically Next Section
aileron operates at a time. A servo-jack powered spoiler panels located on the

positions each spoiler. Each servo-jack upper surface of each wing are controlled
receives hydraulic power from either the by the three SECs. Each spoiler panel is
green, blue, or yellow hydraulic system, powered by a single hydraulic system;
and controlled by SEC 1, 2, or 3. either green, blue, or yellow.
Flight Controls | Roll Control | Section 7.4.3
Index Tf- Tz | Section 17.20.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NDEX T F - T Z S ECTION 17.20.1

Thrust Lever Detents Index A
Tilt Selector Weather Radar Index B
Top of Descent Index C
TR 1 Failure SD Index D
Transmission Buttons - ACP Index E
Transponder Altitude Range Switch Index F
Transponder ATC Fail Light Index G
Transponder Code Selector Index H
Transponder Code Window Index I, J, K
Transponder Identification Button Index L
Transponder Mode Selector Index M
Transponder Selector Index N
True Heading Index O
Turning Radius Index P, Q
Index R
Index S, T
Index S
Index Ta - Te
Index Tf- Tz
Index U, V, W
Index X, Y, Z
Index Tf- Tz | Section 17.20.1
Parking Brake Handle | Braking Schematic Parking Brake On | Section 12.6.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P ARKING B RAKE H ANDlE S ECTION 12.6.1

B RAKING S ChEMATIC P ARKING B RAKE O N Previous Section
Parking Brake Handle
Schematic Parking Brake On
Next Section
L OCATION
Parking Brake Handle | Braking Schematic Parking Brake On | Section 12.6.1
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Seat Belts Light Switch | Section 3.6.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S EAT B ElTs L IGHT S wITCH Previous Section
extinguishes the seat belt signs Ice and Stby Compass

and an associated chime
Dome
sounds.
Annunciator Light
ON - The ON position illuminates the
Seat Belts
FASTEN SEAT BELT and RETURN TO YOUR
SEAT signs and an associated chime to No Smoking
sound. These signs will also automatically Emergency Exit

illuminate when the cabin altitude exceeds
Next Section
11,300 feet, regardless of the SEAT BELTS
light switch position. A SEAT BELTS L OCATION
message will appear on the Engine Warning
Display (upper ECAM display) when the
signs are displayed.
Integral and Cabin Signs Lighting Control Panel | Seat Belts Light Switch | Section 3.6.4
Pneumatic System Displays | Bleed Air SD - Pack Controller Channel Failure | Section 15.1.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

B lEEd A Ir SD - P ACK C ONTrOllEr C HANNEl F AIlurE Previous Section
If the secondary pack controller channel Cond SD
fails, with the primary pack controller Bleed SD

channel operating, pack regulation is not
Description 1
affected; however, related ECAM pack
information is not displayed. Description 2
Pack 1 Overheat
The XXs indicate a channel failure. The pack
is still operating, but lacks pack Pack Channel Failure
temperature and valve indications. Pack Engine Bleed Overheat

zone temperatures are still controllable.
APU Bleed Air
Cruise SD
Cab Press SD
Next Section
Pneumatic System Displays | Bleed Air SD - Pack Controller Channel Failure | Section 15.1.6
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Selected Heading or Track Index - FD Off | Section 8.3.29

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMArY F LIGhT D IspLAY S YMBOLs S ECTION 8.3.29

S ELECTEd H EAdING Or T rACK I NdEx - FD O ff Previous Section
Selected Heading or Track Index indicates PFD Symbols 1
the selected heading or track in blue on the PFD Symbols 2

attitude horizon when the FD is OFF. This
PFD Symbols 3
symbol corresponds with heading select
symbol on the heading scale. Vertical Deviation Indication
True Heading
DH Flags
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Selected Heading or Track Index - FD Off | Section 8.3.29
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Selected Target Altitude | Section 8.3.34

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S ElECTEd T argET A lTITudE Previous Section
Selected Target Altitude indicates the target PFD Symbols 1
altitude in feet if selected QNH altitude is PFD Symbols 2

the barometric reference. Selected FL is
PFD Symbols 3
displayed if STD is the barometric
reference. Vertical Deviation Indication

When the FMGC operates in the vertical
manage mode the symbol is a magenta Max Side Stick Deflection
color if it represents an altitude constraint Ground Roll Guidance

that the FMGC will follow. If it represents
the FCU altitude constraint, then the target
altitude is a blue color. Selected Heading FD Off
True Heading
DH Flags
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Selected Target Altitude | Section 8.3.34
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Selected Target Altitude Indicator | Section 8.3.33

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMarY F lIGHT D IsplaY S YMBOls S ECTION 8.3.33

S ElECTEd T arGET A lTITudE I NdICaTOr Previous Section
The Selected Target Altitude or FL Indicator PFD Symbols 1
(Target Altitude Value Not on Scale) PFD Symbols 2

displays the selected target altitude or
PFD Symbols 3
flight level above or below the altitude
scale, as appropriate. Vertical Deviation Indication
True Heading
DH Flags
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Selected Target Altitude Indicator | Section 8.3.33
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Side Slip Index Beta Target | Section 8.3.11

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMarY F LIGHT D IspLaY S YMbOLs S ECTION 8.3.11

S IdE S LIp I NdEx B ETa T arGET Previous Section
Side Slip Index/Beta Target indicates lateral PFD Symbols 1
acceleration on the ground. PFD Symbols 2
In flight, when beta target is centered, a Side Slip Index Beta Target
small side slip is present for optimum Bank Angle Limit Indicator
airplane performance.
If one engine fails, the FAC modifies the Flight Director Command Bars 2
sideslip indication to show the pilot how
Airplane Symbol
much rudder to use to get the best climb
performance. In takeoff configuration when Flight Path Vector
the FAC detects asymmectric thrust (35% Flight Path Vector 2

N1) and at least one engine is 80% N1, the
sideslip indication changes from yellow to
blue. Zero the indication to get the best Pitch Scale
climb performance. Pitch Limit Indicator

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Side slip index changes to beta target Radio Altitude Height
when: Loc and GS Scales and Indices
CONF 1, 2, or 3 is selected, and Marker Beacon Indication
Any engine EPR exceeds 1.25, and PFD Symbols 3

There is a difference between EPRs
PFD Symbols 4
exceeding .25
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Side Slip Index Beta Target | Section 8.3.11
Flight Maneuvers | Go-Around/Missed Approach Single Engine | Section 13.4.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

G O A ROUND /M IssED A PPROACH S INGLE E NGINE P ROfILE Previous Section
ILS Autoland
ILS - No Autoland
Managed/Managed App
Takeoff
No Flaps Approach
Next Section
Flight Maneuvers | Go-Around/Missed Approach Single Engine | Section 13.4.8
MCDU | Slew Keys | Section 14.2.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S LEW K EYs S ECTION 14.2.4

The vertical slew keys can be used to slew a Previous Section
page up and down if a page contains more Description

data than fits on the screen as indicated by
Page Title
arrow(s) in the lower right hand corner of
the screen. The vertical slew keys can also Line Select Keys
be used to change latitude and longitude as Scratch Pad

indicated by the vertical arrows next to the
Slew Keys
associated data field.
Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | Slew Keys | Section 14.2.4
Flight Control Unit | Speed/Mach Selector | Section 13.2.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT C ONTROl U NIT S ECTION 13.2.5

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Speed/Mach Selector
Altitude Selector
VS/FPA Selector
S pEEd /M ACh S ElECTOR Buttons
Next Section
The Speed/Mach Selector when rotated,
changes the value displayed in the L OCATION
SPD/MACH window.
When pulled, the selected speed displayed

in the SPD/MACH window engages. If the
selector is pulled when the SPD/MACH
window contains dashes, the window
displays the current airspeed.
When pushed, FMGS managed speed

engages, the managed speed light
illuminates, and dashes appear in the
SPD/MACH window.
Flight Control Unit | Speed/Mach Selector | Section 13.2.5
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Speed Trend Arrow | Section 8.3.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S pEEd T rENd A rrOW Previous Section
The tip of the Speed Trend Arrow points to PFD Symbols 1
the speed value which is attained in 10 Flight Mode Annunciations

seconds if the acceleration remains
VMAX
constant. It appears when speed difference
is greater than 2 knots. The Speed Trend Next Flap Extend Speed
Arrow disappears when speed difference is Over Speed Protection Symbol

less than 1 knot.
Speed Trend Arrow
Alpha Protection
Alpha Maximum
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 2
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Speed Trend Arrow | Section 8.3.6
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Stall Warning Speed | Section 7.3.6A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGHT C ONTrOL L aws S ECTION 7.3.6A

A LTErNaTE L aw - S TaLL W arNING S pEEd Previous Section
It is important to recognize that you can Direct Law
stall and overspeed the aircraft in alternate Alternate Law

law.
Description
The VSW is defined by the top of a red and Load Factor Demand Mode
black strip along the speed scale. It Load Factor Limitation

represents the speed corresponding to the
Low Speed Stability
stall warning, as computed by the FACs.
The VSW symbol is displayed on the PFD in
alternate and direct law.
Stall Warning Speed
Normal Law
Mechanical Backup
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Stall Warning Speed | Section 7.3.6A
ECAM Control Panel | Status Button | Section 16.1.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Description
TO Configuration
Emergency Cancel
System Buttons
All Button
S TATus B uTTON Clear Button
The STS button illuminates when the ECAM Status Button
STATUS page is displayed. When pushed, Recall Button

the STATUS page is displayed on the ECAM
lower display. When pushed with no
present status messages NORMAL appears Next Section
for 5 seconds. The STATUS page may be

cleared by pushing the STS button a L OCATION
second time, or by pushing the CLR button.
When only one ECAM display is available;

push and hold the STATUS button to
display the STATUS page. To display the
next STATUS page, release the STS button
and push it again before 2 seconds have
elapsed. The new page will then appear
after a short delay.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
ECAM Control Panel | Status Button | Section 16.1.6
MCDU | Step Altitude at Waypoint | Section 14.8.15

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S TEp A lTITudE aT W aypOINT S ECTION 14.8.15

ALT / WPT - Step altitudes can be entered Previous Section
along the route of flight in two ways: Description
The FMGC can calculate an optimum Flight Plan A Page
climb point based on an altitude Flight Plan A Prior to TO

entered by the pilots. To allow the
FMGC to figure the optimum step
climb, enter the step altitude only Lateral Rev at PPOS
without a positional waypoint. Lateral Rev at Waypoint

Several step altitudes may be
entered and the FMGC will figure
multiple step locations. After the Airways Page
altitudes are entered, select TMPY Departure Page B

INSERT to insert the climbs and
Flight Plan B Page
show the optimum step climb
position. The STEP ALTS page can Arrival Page A
be referenced to review the Arrival Page B

calculated DIST and TIME to the
Approach Vias Page
step climb point.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
A step climb may be entered at a Vertical Rev At Departure
flight plan waypoint to designate a Vertical Rev At Waypoint

planned step at a given waypoint.
Enter both the altitude and the
waypoint. If airplane flies past the Database Hold Page
step without climbing or descending, Computed Hold at Waypoint

the step is deleted and the MCDU
Next Section
displays STEP DELETED.
DIST / TIME - Calculated distance and time

MCDU | Step Altitude at Waypoint | Section 14.8.15
to the climb point.
Engine Warning and System Displays | APU System Display | Section 5.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

APU S YsTEm D IsplAY Previous Section
1. AVAIL INDICATION - Displays green EWD Prior to Start
when APU N is above 95%. EWD During Start
2. APU GEN LINE CONTACTOR - Displays EWD After Start
green when the APU GEN line contactor is SD APU Page

closed.
SD APU Page 2
3. APU GEN PARAMETERS - APU generator SD Engine Page

load normally appears green. Becomes
SD Engine Page 2
amber if load exceeds 100%. APU
generator voltage normally appears green. SD Cruise Page
Becomes amber if voltage is less than 110V Next Section

or greater than 120V. APU generator
frequency normally appears green. L OCATION
Becomes amber if the frequency is less
than 390 Hz or greater than 410 Hz.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
4. APU N INDICATION - Displays green
when APU speed is normal. Becomes
amber when N is 102% or greater. If N
exceeds 107%, the display becomes red.
Engine Warning and System Displays | APU System Display | Section 5.3.3
Pneumatic System Displays | Bleed Air SD - Description 1 | Section 15.1.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

B lEEd A Ir SD - D EsCrIpTION 1 Previous Section
1. USER INDICATION normal indications are Cond SD
a white color. If an amber color and on the Bleed SD

ground then both pack flow control valves
Description 1
are closed. If an amber color and in flight,
ram air flap is not fully open and both pack Description 2
flow control valves are closed. Pack 1 Overheat
2. PACK OUTLET TEMPERATURE - Displays Pack Channel Failure
green. Becomes amber if temperature is Engine Bleed Overheat

high.
APU Bleed Air
3. PACK COMPRESSOR OUTLET TEMP Cruise SD

Displays green for normal conditions,
Cab Press SD
becomes amber if temperature is high.
Next Section
4. PACK FLOW CONTROL VALVE - Indicates
valve is fully closed and agrees with < PREVIOUS NEXT > L OCATION
commanded switch position (green color).
Amber color indicates disagreement with
valve commanded position.
5. ENGINE BLEED VALVE - Amber color

indicates disagreement with valve
commanded position.
Engine Warning and System Displays | Engine System Display | Section 5.3.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NGINE W ArNING ANd S ysTEM D IsplAys S ECTION 5.3.5

E NGINE S ysTEM D IsplAy Previous Section
1. FUEL USED INDICATION - Displays fuel EWD Prior to Start
used as computed by the FADEC. The value EWD During Start

is frozen at engine shutdown, and is reset
EWD After Start
at engine start on the ground. The last two
digits are dashed if the fuel used indication SD APU Page
is inaccurate due to loss of fuel flow for SD APU Page 2

more than 1 minute.
SD Engine Page
2. OIL QUANTITY INDICATION - Displays oil SD Engine Page 2

quantity in quarts. Represented by pointer
SD Cruise Page
and digital display. Indication pulses below
5 quarts (decreasing) or 7 quarts Next Section
(increasing).
L OCATION
3. OIL PRESSURE INDICATION
Represented by pointer and digital display.
The digital indication pulses if oil pressure < PREVIOUS NEXT >
increases above 390 PSI and stops pulsing
when oil pressure decreases below 385
PSI. Both indications become amber below
80 PSI, and red below 60 PSI. Note: The
indicated oil pressure can be different
between engines by as much as 80 PSI
without being an indication of oil system
malfunction.
Engine Warning and System Displays | Engine System Display | Section 5.3.5
Hydraulic System Display | After Engine Start | Section 10.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YdrAulIC S YsTEm D IsplAY S ECTION 10.1.1

A fTEr E NgINE S TArT Previous Section
1. RAT CONTROL INDICATION - Displays Prior to Engine Start
white when the RAT is stowed, green when After Engine Start
operating, and amber when extended, but
not operating.
PTU Operation
2. ENGINE PUMP INDICATION
Next Section
Displays green when associated ENG

PUMP switch is on and hydraulic
L OCATION
pressure is normal -
Displays amber when associated ENG
PUMP switch is OFF -
Displays amber when associated ENG
PUMP switch is on and hydraulic
pressure is low -
3. ELECTRIC PUMP INDICATION - Displays < PREVIOUS NEXT >
white. Indication becomes amber if

In this example, this page illustrates the
associated power supply fails.
normal indications for the hydraulic
4. PUMP IDENTIFICATION - Displays white. systems after engines are started.
Indication becomes amber when N2 is
below idle.
Hydraulic System Display | After Engine Start | Section 10.1.1
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Description 1 | Section 15.1.11

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P NEumATIC S ysTEm D IsplAy S ECTION 15.1.11

C Ab P rEss SD - D EsCrIpTION 1 Previous Section
1. CABIN DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE - Cond SD
Displays green when in normal range. Bleed SD

Displays amber when out of normal range
Cruise SD
(normal range is between -0.4 PSI and 8.5
PSI). Pulses green if differential pressure Cab Press SD
exceeds 1.5 PSI during landing and stops Description 1

pulsing when less than 1 PSI.
Description 2
2. ACTIVE SYSTEM INDICATION - SYS 1 or Normal Operational Config

SYS 2 displays green when active and
becomes amber when a fault is detected.
MAN displays green when the MODE SEL Smoke Config
switch is at MAN. Cabin Pres SYS 2 Fault
3. INLET/EXTRACT VALVE POSITION - Cabin Press w/Man Mode
Displays green for normal operations. Man Setting Ldg Elev

Displays amber if disagreement. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
4. PACK INDICATION - Displays green when

associated pack flow control valve is open
L OCATION
and amber if pack flow control valve is
closed and the associated engine is
running.
5. INLET/EXTRACT INDICATIONS - Displays

white. Changes to amber when blower or
extract fault detected.
ECAM Control Panel | System Page Buttons | Section 16.1.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Description
TO Configuration
Emergency Cancel
System Buttons
All Button
S YsTEm P AGE B uTTONs Clear Button
The SD has 12 different system pages that Status Button
can be displayed automatically when Recall Button

signaled by the flight phase (provided no
other system page is manually selected
using the ECAM control panel), or by a Next Section
system failure or automatic advisory.

Permanent data is displayed at the bottom L OCATION
of the SD, including TAT, SAT, UTC, load
factor or metric altitude, and airplane gross
weight.
The SD also displays a STATUS page that

provides an operational summary of the
airplane’s system status. The STATUS page
contains limitations (e.g., speed and flight
level), approach procedures, landing
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
corrections, and general information. It
also lists cancelled cautions, inoperative The associated system button illuminates
systems, and maintenance messages. after manual selection or when an advisory
ECAM Control Panel | System Page Buttons | Section 16.1.3
is detected. If pushed a second time while

SYSTEM PAGE BUTTONS - The System Page
illuminated, the system page for the
buttons when pushed display the related
present phase of flight or current warning
system page on the lower ECAM display.
appears.
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - V1, VR, V2 | Section 14.5.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P aGE P rEFlIGhT - V1, VR, V2 S ECTION 14.5.1

Allows entry of V-speeds. Amber boxes Previous Section
display until V-speeds are entered. In this Description

example the V speeds have been entered.
TO Page - Preflight
NEXT PHASE - Provides access to Climb V1, VR, V2

page - LS 6R.
Trans Alt
Thr Red
Acc
Uplink TO Data
F, S, Clean Speeds
Rwy
TO Shift
Flaps/THS
Flex TO Temp
Eng Out ACC

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - V1, VR, V2 | Section 14.5.1
Go Around Page
Next Section
Flight Maneuvers | Normal Takeoff | Section 13.4.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

N ORmAL T AKEOff P ROfILE Previous Section
ILS Autoland
ILS - No Autoland
Managed/Managed App
Takeoff
No Flaps Approach
Next Section
Flight Maneuvers | Normal Takeoff | Section 13.4.4
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Nose Selector Taxi and Takeoff Light Switch | Section 3.5.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E xTERIOR L IGHTING C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 3.5.6

Previous Section
Strobe Light
Rotating Beacon
Wing
Nav and Logo
Runway Turn Off
N OsE S ElECTOR T AxI AND T AkEOff L IGHT S WITCH Landing Light
Takeoff and Taxi

TAKE OFF - The TAKE OFF
position illuminates both the Next Section
taxi and takeoff lights. Both

L OCATION
lights extinguish automatically
when the landing gear is
retracted.
TAXI - The TAXI position illuminates the taxi

light.
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Nose Selector Taxi and Takeoff Light Switch | Section 3.5.6
ECAM Control Panel | TO Configuration Button | Section 16.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Description
TO Configuration
Emergency Cancel
System Buttons
All Button
TO C ONfIgurATION B uTTON Clear Button
The TAKEOFF CONFIGURATION button when Status Button
pushed, simulates takeoff power Recall Button

application to trigger a warning if the
airplane is not properly configured for
takeoff. If the airplane is properly Next Section
configured, the T.O. CONFIG NORMAL

message in the takeoff memo displays L OCATION
green.
TAKEOFF CONFIGURATION CHECK - When

the TAKEOFF CONFIGURATION button is
pushed, or takeoff power is applied, the
following warnings are generated to signify
the associated item is not configured
properly for takeoff:
CONFIG SLATS (FLAPS) NOT IN T.O. < PREVIOUS NEXT >

RANGE
CONFIG PITCH NOT IN T.O. RANGE
ECAM Control Panel | TO Configuration Button | Section 16.1.1
CONFIG SPD BRK NOT RETRACTED

CONFIG RUD TRIM NOT IN T.O.
RANGE
CONFIG L(R) SIDESTICK FAULT
BRAKES HOT
DOORS (tested only if engines
running)
CONFIG PARK BRAKE ON
ENG FLEX TEMP NOT SET
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Target Airspeed Pointer | Section 8.3.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

T argET A IrspEEd P OINTEr Previous Section
The Target Airspeed Pointer points to the PFD Symbols 1
target airspeed or Mach value. The pointer Flight Mode Annunciations

is magenta when the target airspeed is a
VMAX
managed speed and blue when the target
airspeed is a selected speed. Next Flap Extend Speed

If the target airspeed is beyond the speed
tape display range, the target speed value Target Airspeed Pointer
displays as a digital value above or below Actual Airspeed Reference

the speed tape.
Speed Trend Arrow
MANAGED APPROACH SPD - When an Min Flap Retraction Speed

approach is flown in managed speed, the
target speed is indicated on the PFD by a
magenta triangle. Managed speed is Alpha Protection
adjusted by the FMGCs for mini Alpha Maximum

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
groundspeed and is limited by both VAPP
PFD Symbols 2
and VFE.
PFD Symbols 3
SELECTED APPROACH SPEED - When an PFD Symbols 4

approach is flown using selected speed,
PFD Symbols 5
target speed is set by the pilots on the FCU
and is indicated on the PFD by a blue Next Section
triangle. Target speed is normally equal to

VAPP as displayed on the PERF APPR page.
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Target Airspeed Pointer | Section 8.3.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Table 1
TCAS
Table 2

Table 3
10.3NM TCAS ILS Up to two displayed when no bearing information is Table 4

+01↑ No Bearing VOR available. Displays distance in NM, altitude, and vertical
Table 5
12.4NM Data NAV direction at the bottom of the ND. Displays in amber or
-02 ↓ (A, R) ARC red according to threat level. Table 6
TCAS Table 7
No Bearing ILS
Displays distance in NM at the bottom of the ND when no Table 8
& VOR
10.3 NM bearing or altitude information is available. Displays in
No Alt NAV Next Section
amber or red according to threat level.
Data ARC
(A, R)
TCAS ILS
Indicates TCAS failure. Flashes for 9 seconds, then
TCAS Failure VOR
remains steady. NAV TCAS FAULT appears on upper
FAIL Indication NAV
ECAM.
(R) ARC
TCAS Off ILS/VOR

Indicates STBY has been selected or both transponders
TCAS: OFF Indication NAV
have failed.
(B) ARC
Indicates TA only mode is selected or the RA function is

TCAS ILS
inhibited or failed. With TA/RA selected, the message
TA Only VOR
TA ONLY appears automatically during climb until 1100 feet AGL
Indication NAV
and on descent below 900 feet AGL when the TCAS
(A, W) ARC
automatically switches to the TA ONLY mode.
Primary Flight Display Symbols | TCAS Fail Flag | Section 8.3.52

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

TCAS F aIl F laG Previous Section
When a TCAS system fault is detected, the PFD Symbols 1
TCAS Fail Flag (annunciation) appears in PFD Symbols 2

red on the PFD and ND.
PFD Symbols 3
In addition, a NAV TCAS FAULT message PFD Symbols 4

appears on the upper ECAM when a TCAS
PFD Symbols 5
system fault is detected.
ILS Information
Mach Number
ILS Message
Landing Elevation
Ground Reference

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS Fail Flag
PFD TCAS Display
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | TCAS Fail Flag | Section 8.3.52

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Table 1
TCAS
Table 2

Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
TCAS ILS Table 6

TCAS Offscale VOR With TFC selected, RA or TA traffic is outside the traffic
Offscale (A for TA) NAV area covered by the selected ND range. Table 7
(R for RA) ARC
Table 8
Next Section
With TA, TA/RA, or TFC selected, displays relative traffic

altitude in hundreds of feet. For an intruder above the
TCAS ILS airplane, the relative altitude will be placed over the
+05
Relative VOR traffic symbol preceded by an + sign. For intruders co-
−05
Traffic NAV altitude or lower, the relative altitude will be placed
00
(W) ARC below the target symbol preceded by - sign (except 00,
which had no sign). Range must be 40 NM or less on
some airplanes.

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Table 1
TCAS
Table 2

Table 3
With TA, TA/RA, or TFC selected, displays TA intruder Table 4

ILS
TCAS within 20 to 48 seconds of CPA. TA traffic only displayed
VOR Table 5
TA Traffic by non-altitude reporting transponders even if intruder
NAV
(A) meets RA criteria. Range must be 40 NM or less on Table 6
ARC
some airplanes. Inhibited below 500 feet AGL.
Table 7
With TA, TA/RA, or TFC selected, displays nonthreatening Table 8

TCAS ILS intruder within 1200 feet vertically and 6 NM laterally.
Next Section
Proximate VOR Symbol alone indicates traffic without altitude reporting
Traffic NAV and must be assumed to be co-altitude. This symbol is
(W) ARC visible only if a TA or RA is active and the range selected
is 40 NM or less on some airplanes.
With TFC selected, displays nonthreatening traffic within

TCAS ILS
about 30 NM and 2700 feet vertically. Symbol alone
Other VOR
indicates traffic without altitude reporting and must be
Traffic NAV
assumed to be co-altitude. Range must be 40 NM or less
(W) ARC
on some airplanes.
TCAS
ILS With TA, TA/RA, or TFC selected, indicates traffic is
Vertical
VOR climbing ↑ or descending ↓ at least 500 FPM. Arrows not
↑ ↓ Speed
NAV displayed indicates vertical motion less than 500 FPM.
Arrows
ARC Range must be 40 NM or less on some airplanes.
(R, A, W)
EGPWS Control Panel | Terrain Switch | Section 16.5.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

T ErrAIN S wITCH Previous Section
FAULT - The TERR FAULT light illuminates in Description
case of a system malfunction and triggers Terrain Switch

the NAV GPWS TERR DET FAULT ECAM and
System Switch
GPWS TERR status messages. The GPWS is
not affected by this fault. G/S Mode
< PREVIOUS NEXT > Flap Mode

ON - When the TERR Switch is selected ON
all lights are extinguished and it activates Landing Flap 3
all modes of EGPWS for operation. Next Section
OFF - The OFF light illuminates white when L OCATION

selected OFF and inhibits all EGPWS terrain
modes including pop-up. The GPWS is not
affected.
EGPWS Control Panel | Terrain Switch | Section 16.5.1
A319 Cargo Smoke Panel | Test Button | Section 6.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A319 C ARGO S mOkE P ANEl S ECTION 6.1.2

T EsT B UTTON Previous Section
When the TEST button is pressed for at Smoke Disch Lights
least 3 seconds, it tests: Discharge Switch
The cargo smoke detectors in Test Button
sequence Cargo Fire Schematic

SMOKE light illuminates red twice
Next Section
Displays the ECAM warning twice on
the E/WD L OCATION
DISCH lights illuminate amber
Closes the ventilation system's
isolation valves

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A320 C ARGO S mOkE P ANEl S ECTION 6.2.1

T EsT B UTTON Previous Section
When the TEST button is pressed for at Smoke Light
least 3 seconds, it tests: Test Button
The cargo smoke detectors in Discharge Switch
sequence Discharge Lights

SMOKE light illuminates red twice
Agent 2 Light
Displays the ECAM warning twice on
the E/WD Cargo Ext Schematic
DISCH lights illuminate amber Next Section

Closes the ventilation system's
isolation valves L OCATION
Engine and APU Fire Panel | APU Test Button | Section 6.3.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Engine Fire Switch
Engine Agent Switch
Engine Test Button
APU Fire Switch
APU T EsT B uTTON APU Agent Switch
FIRE DETECTION - The APU is When the APU's TEST Button is pressed it: APU Test Button
equipped with a fire and overheat Next Section

Activates an ECAM APU FIRE warning
detection system in the APU
on the Engine Warning Display
compartment that consists of two L OCATION
Activates the Continuous Repetitive
identical loops (A and B) mounted in
Chime (CRC)
parallel. When a sensing element detects
Illuminates two flashing MASTER
an overheat, a signal is transmitted to a
WARNING lights
fire detection unit. If a fault or break occurs
Illuminates the associated APU FIRE
in one loop, the fire warning system is not
switch
affected; fire detection is provided by the
Illuminates the SQUIB light (if
unaffected loop.
discharge supplies are available)
TEST - The APU's TEST Button permits Illuminates the DISCH light
testing of the APU's fire detection and
extinguishing system operation.
Engine and APU Fire Panel | APU Test Button | Section 6.3.5
Engine and APU Fire Panel | Engine Test Button | Section 6.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Engine Fire Switch
Engine Agent Switch
Engine Test Button
APU Fire Switch
E NgINE T EsT B uTTON APU Agent Switch
TEST - The Engine's TEST Button FIRE DETECTION - Each engine is equipped APU Test Button
permits testing of the engine's with a fire and overheat detection system Next Section
fire detection and extinguishing consisting of two identical loops (A and B)
system operation. When the TEST mounted in parallel. Each detection loop L OCATION
Button is pressed it: consists of three sensing elements located
in the pylon nacelle, engine core, and
Activates an ECAM ENG FIRE warning engine fan section. When a sensing
on the Engine Warning Display element detects an overheat, a signal is
Activates the Continuous Repetitive transmitted to a fire detection unit. If a
Chime fault or break occurs in one loop, the fire
Illuminates two flashing MASTER warning system is not affected; fire
WARNING lights detection is provided by the unaffected
Illuminates the associated ENG FIRE loop.
switch
Illuminates the SQUIB lights (if
discharge supplies are available)
Illuminates the DISCH lights
Illuminates the FIRE light on engine
start and ignition panel
Engine and APU Fire Panel | Engine Test Button | Section 6.3.2
Primary Flight Display Symbols | V1, Vr, and V2 | Section 8.3.40

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImary F LIGHT D IspLay S ymBOLs S ECTION 8.3.40

V1, VR, aNd V 2 S pEEds Previous Section
PFD Symbols 1
TAKEOFF DECISION SPEED - The V1 symbol
appears in blue next to the speed during PFD Symbols 2
takeoff. When the V1 symbol is off scale, PFD Symbols 3
the blue color numeric V1 value is displayed PFD Symbols 4

at the top and right side of speed scale. V1
is entered by the pilots on the PERF TAKE
OFF page of the MCDU. It disappears after
liftoff. Digital Vertical Speed Indicator

ROTATION SPEED - VR is not indicated on
Stall Warning Speed
the PFD.
TAKEOFF SAFETY SPEED - The V2 symbol is
indicated by the magenta color airspeed
pointer during takeoff. When the V2 symbol Green Dot Speed
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
is off scale, then the magenta color Econ Speed Range
numeric V2 value is displayed at the top of
Altitude Indicator
the speed scale.
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | V1, Vr, and V2 | Section 8.3.40
MCDU | Progress Page - Vertical Deviation | Section 14.4.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOgrEss P agE - V ErTICaL D EvIaTION S ECTION 14.4.10

Displays vertical deviation (±) from the Previous Section
descent profile when NAV is engaged or Description

HDG is engaged and the airplane’s
Phase of Flight
crosstrack from the flight plan route is less
than 4 NM. The vertical deviation is the CRZ
airplane's position relative to the descent OPT

profile.
REC MAX
Report
Report Page
Update At
Predictive GPS
Predictive GPS Page
Required Accuracy
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Progress Page - Vertical Deviation | Section 14.4.10
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Vertical Deviation Indication | Section 8.3.24

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMarY F lIgHT D IsplaY S YMBOls S ECTION 8.3.24

V ErTICal D EvIaTION I NdICaTION Previous Section
On GPS-equipped airplanes, the vertical PFD Symbols 1
deviation indication, scale, and index PFD Symbols 2

appear magenta when:
PFD Symbols 3
A non-precision approach (VOR, ADF, Vertical Deviation Indication

RNAV, or GPS) has been selected,
and
The PERF APP phase is active. Max Side Stick Deflection

The Vertical Deviation Indication flashes
amber if the ILS/LS button is selected ON Actual Track Diamond
when the APP NAV mode is armed. Selected Heading FD Off
True Heading
DH Flags
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Vertical Deviation Indication | Section 8.3.24
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Vertical Deviation Indicator | Section 8.3.35

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImArY F LIgHT D IspLAY S YmBOLs S ECTION 8.3.35

V ErTICAL D EvIATION I NdICATOr Previous Section
The Vertical Deviation Indicator is a PFD Symbols 1
magenta symbol that indicates the PFD Symbols 2

airplane's vertical path computed by the
PFD Symbols 3
FMGC. This symbol is displayed during the
descent and approach phases of flight. PFD Symbols 4

The scale of the deviation is the same as
the altitude scale next to it (approximately Vertical Speed Scale
+/-500 feet). When the deviation exceeds Digital Vertical Speed Indicator
+/-500 feet, the symbol stays at the limit.
The PROG page displays the exact value.
Stall Warning Speed
Green Dot Speed

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Econ Speed Range
Altitude Indicator
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Vertical Deviation Indicator | Section 8.3.35
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Vertical Deviation Scale | Section 8.3.25

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImArY F lIgHT D IsplAY S YmBOls S ECTION 8.3.25

V ErTICAl D EvIATION S CAlE Previous Section
The Vertical Deviation Scale and Index PFD Symbols 1
displays vertical deviation from the FMGC- PFD Symbols 2

computed vertical flight path. Each dot
PFD Symbols 3
represents 100 feet.

NOTE
If ILS/LS button is selected ON,
glideslope deviation has priority over Ground Roll Guidance
vertical deviation information.
True Heading
DH Flags
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Vertical Deviation Scale | Section 8.3.25
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Vertical Speed Scale | Section 8.3.36

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImArY F LIGHT D IspLAY S YmBOLs S ECTION 8.3.36

V ErTICAL S pEEd S CALE Previous Section
The Vertical Speed Scale is displayed as PFD Symbols 1
white scale on gray background. Each PFD Symbols 2

graduate is in 500 FPM increments.
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
Stall Warning Speed
Green Dot Speed

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Econ Speed Range
Altitude Indicator
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Vertical Speed Scale | Section 8.3.36
Flight Control Unit | Vertical Speed/Flight Path Angle Selector | Section 13.2.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGHT C ONTROl U NIT S ECTION 13.2.8

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Speed/Mach Selector
Altitude Selector
VS/FPA Selector
V ERTICAl S pEED /F lIGHT P ATH A NGlE S ElECTOR Buttons
Next Section
Vertical Speed/Flight Path Angle Selector
when rotated, changes the VS or FPA NOTE
L OCATION
displayed in the V/S / FPA window. The When engaging a vertical speed or
vertical speed range is from ± 6000 FPM. flight path angle, the selector must be
The FPA range is from ± 9.9°. pulled within approximately 45
seconds, or the selection is lost and
When the selector is pulled, V/S or FPA
dashes are redisplayed.
engages. When pushed, the airplane levels
off.
Flight Control Unit | Vertical Speed/Flight Path Angle Selector | Section 13.2.8
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Vmax | Section 8.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V max Previous Section
The lower end of a red and black strip along PFD Symbols 1
the speed scale defines VMAX. It indicates Flight Mode Annunciations
the lowest of: VMAX
VMO/MMO Next Flap Extend Speed
VFE for the selected flap setting Over Speed Protection Symbol
VLE if the landing gear is extended Target Airspeed Pointer
Speed Trend Arrow
Alpha Protection
Alpha Maximum
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 2
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Vmax | Section 8.3.1
EFIS Control Panel | VOR/ADF Switches - On | Section 8.1.21

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
VOR S WITCHEs O N
VOR Switches On
The VOR/ADF Switches provide selection of
VOR Switches Off
VOR and/or ADF (if installed) bearing
pointers and DME on respective ND in any Next Section
mode except PLAN.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
EFIS Control Panel | VOR/ADF Switches - On | Section 8.1.21
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | Tilt Selector | Section 16.2.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

T IlT S ElECTOr Previous Section
TILT - The TILT Selector controls antenna System Switch
tilt angle with reference to horizon. Tilt Image Selector

angle is displayed on lower right corner of
Tilt Selector
ND. Clockwise rotation commands tilt up,
and counterclockwise commands tilt down. Gain Selector
Windshear
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | Tilt Selector | Section 16.2.2
Operating Limits | Wind Limits | Section 1.4.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

W IND L IMITs Previous Section
Airspeed Max
T AKEOFF AND L ANDING C ROsswIND G UIDElINEs
Pressure Altitude
Reported Braking Action Normal Narrow Max Weights
Dry (including gusts) 38 38 Wind Limits
Good 38 33 Operating Speeds
Oxygen Pressure
Medium 25 10
Poor 15 10
Anti-Ice
Nil Prohibited Prohibited
Autoflight Limits
M AX T AIl W IND L IMITs Next Section
Aircraft Model A320 A319
Max Tailwind Knots 15 10
Max Tailwind Landing Knots 10 10
Crosswind Nil Braking Prohibited Prohibited
Operating Limits | Wind Limits | Section 1.4.3
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Wing Light Switch | Section 3.5.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Strobe Light
Rotating Beacon
Wing
Nav and Logo
Runway Turn Off
W ING L IGHT S wITCH Landing Light
Takeoff and Taxi

extinguishes the wing lights. Next Section
ON - The ON position L OCATION

illuminates the wing lights.
The wing lights are located
forward of the leading edge on each side of
the fuselage to illuminate the wing leading
edge and engine nacelle.
Exterior Lighting Control Panel | Wing Light Switch | Section 3.5.2
Flight Controls | Yaw Control | Section 7.4.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT C ONTrOls S ECTION 7.4.4

Y aw C ONTrOl Previous Section
Yaw is controlled by a single rudder. The RUDDER LIMTER - Rudder deflection is Flight Controls Description
rudder is electrically controlled by trim limited as a function of airspeed. If both Flight Control Inputs
motors, or mechanically controlled by the FACs fail, maximum rudder deflection can
Pitch Control
rudder pedals. The rudder is electrically be obtained after the slats are extended.
controlled by the ELACs or FACs, and are Roll Control
hydraulically actuated. Yaw Control
RUDDER ACTIVATION - Three independent Next Section
servo-jacks operate in parallel to actuate

the rudder. In automatic operation (turn
coordination, yaw damping) a green
hydraulic actuator drives all three servo-
jacks. A yellow hydraulic actuator remains
synchronized, an takes over if there is a
green hydraulic actuator failure.
YAW DAMPING AND TURN CORDINATION -
AUTOMATIC RUDDER TRIM - In flight, with The yaw orders for both yaw damping and
the autopilot engaged, automatic rudder turn coordination are computed by the
trim is provided by inputs from the FACs ELACs and sent to the FACs.
and FMGCs. If an engine fails, FMGC and
MECHANICAL CONTROL - The rudder can
FAC signals provide rudder trim according
also be mechanically controlled (via a
to engine power, airspeed, bank angle, and
cable) using the rudder pedals, provided
yaw.
hydraulic power is available.
Flight Controls | Yaw Control | Section 7.4.4
Hydraulic Control Panel | Yellow Electric Pump Switch | Section 10.2.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H ydrAulIC C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 10.2.4

Previous Section
Engine Pump
RAT Manual On
Blue Electric Pump
Power Transfer Unit
Y EllOw E lECTrIC P ump S wITCh Yellow Electric Pump
ON - The YELLOW ELEC PUMP is FAULT - The YELLOW PUMP FAULT light Hydraulic Schematic
energized when selected ON, illuminates amber when:
Next Section
selection is indicated when a blue
Reservoir low level
color boxed ON light is L OCATION
Reservoir overheat
illuminated. If electrical power is removed,
Reservoir low air pressure
the pump remains de-energized at the next
Pump low pressure
electrical power application.
Pump overheat
OFF - When the YELLOW ELEC PUMP switch
The YELLOW ELEC PUMP FAULT light
is selected to OFF, selection is indicated
extinguishes when the YELLOW ELEC PUMP
when no lights are illuminated and the
switch is selected to OFF (except during an
electric-driven pump is de-energized. It is
overheat, when the light remains
automatically energized when the forward
or aft cargo door lever is operated. During
present).
cargo door operation, all other yellow
system users are inhibited except for the
No. 2 engine thrust reverser and yellow
system braking (alternate brakes, parking
brake, and brake accumulator).
Hydraulic Control Panel | Yellow Electric Pump Switch | Section 10.2.4
MCDU | BRT and DIM Selector | Section 14.2.11

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
BRT aNd DIM S ELECTOr S ECTION 14.2.11

The BRT/DIM Selector controls intensity of Previous Section
MCDU display pages. A short press on the Description

BRT key performs a power-up of the MCDU.
Page Title
A long press of the DIM key starts the
MCDU power-off. Line Select Keys
Scratch Pad
Slew Keys
Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | BRT and DIM Selector | Section 14.2.11
MCDU | FM Annunciator | Section 14.2.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
FM A NNuNCIaTOr S ECTION 14.2.6

The FM Annunciator illuminates when the Previous Section
FMGC is not the active system and it has Description

been sent a message. Use the MCDU MENU
Page Title
key to return to the FMGC page.
Line Select Keys
Scratch Pad
Slew Keys
Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | FM Annunciator | Section 14.2.6
MCDU | Page Title | Section 14.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P AGE T ITLE S ECTION 14.2.1

The Page Title identifies the page in view. Previous Section
Description
Page Title
Line Select Keys
Scratch Pad
Slew Keys
Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | Page Title | Section 14.2.1
MCDU | Scratch Pad | Section 14.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S CrATCH P Ad S ECTION 14.2.3

The Scratch Pad displays typed Previous Section
alphanumeric characters and FMGC- Description

generated messages (up to 22 characters).
Page Title
The two MCDU scratch pads operate
independently for data entry. Line Select Keys
Scratch Pad
Slew Keys
Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | Scratch Pad | Section 14.2.3
MCDU | Alphanumeric Keys | Section 14.2.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A LpHaNuMErIC K EYs S ECTION 14.2.7

The Alphanumeric Keys enable entry of Previous Section
letters and numbers into the scratchpad. Description

The +/- key alternates between a + and -
Page Title
for positive and negative figures. The slash
key (/) is used to separate pairs of entries Line Select Keys
in the same data field (e.g., wind Scratch Pad

direction/speed: 270/110). The trailing
Slew Keys
entry of a pair must be preceded by a slash
if it is entered alone, except for frequencies Fail Annunciator
and identifiers entered on the RADIO NAV FM Annunciator

page.
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | Alphanumeric Keys | Section 14.2.7
MCDU | Top Annunciator Keys | Section 14.2.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
T Op A NNuNCIaTOr K Eys S ECTION 14.2.8

FM1 or FM2 indicate a failure of that FMGC. Previous Section
Description
IND indicates the FMGCs are operating in
the independent mode. Page Title
Line Select Keys

RDY light indicates that the FMGC has
passed its power-on test. Scratch Pad
Slew Keys
Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | Top Annunciator Keys | Section 14.2.8
MCDU | Additional Page Arrow | Section 14.2.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A DDITIONaL P aGE A rrOW S ECTION 14.2.9

The Additional page arrow indicates Previous Section
additional pages are available. Additional Description

pages may be viewed by pressing the
Page Title
horizontal slew keys.
Line Select Keys
Scratch Pad
Slew Keys
Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | Additional Page Arrow | Section 14.2.9
MCDU | Page Keys | Section 14.2.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P agE K EYs S ECTION 14.2.10

To view a description of the various MCDU Previous Section
pages click on the appropriate key; DIR, Description

PROG, PERF, INIT, DATA, F-PLN, RAD NAV,
Page Title
et cetra.
Line Select Keys
Scratch Pad
Slew Keys
Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | Page Keys | Section 14.2.10
MCDU | SP Key | Section 14.2.13

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SP K EY S ECTION 14.2.13
The SP Key inserts a space in an Previous Section
alphanumeric sequence. Description
Page Title
Line Select Keys
Scratch Pad
Slew Keys
Fail Annunciator
FM Annunciator
Alphanumeric Keys
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | SP Key | Section 14.2.13
MCDU | OVFY Δ Key | Section 14.2.14

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
OVFY Δ K Ey S ECTION 14.2.14

When pushed, Δ appears in the scratchpad. Previous Section
Line selecting the waypoint to be overflown Description

causes the Δ to appear next to that
Page Title
waypoint designator in the flight plan, and
the lateral flight plan is modified so that Line Select Keys
the airplane directly overflies the waypoint. Scratch Pad

The overfly function provides for flight
Slew Keys
directly over a waypoint while maintaining
NAV. Once a waypoint has been Fail Annunciator
commanded to be overflown, OVFY Δ can FM Annunciator

only be removed by reentering the
Alphanumeric Keys
waypoint name.
Page Keys
BRT/DIM Selector

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | OVFY Δ Key | Section 14.2.14
MCDU | Clear Key | Section 14.2.15

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lEar K EY S ECTION 14.2.15

Clears messages and data from the Previous Section
scratchpad or an individual data field. If Description

alphanumeric characters have been
Page Title
entered into the scratchpad, a single, short
press of the key erases the last character Line Select Keys
entered. A longer press of the key erases Scratch Pad

the entire scratchpad entry.
Slew Keys
When the key is pushed and the scratchpad Fail Annunciator

is empty, CLR appears in the scratchpad. If
FM Annunciator
a line select key is then pressed, the
adjacent data field is cleared, or will Alphanumeric Keys
change to a defaulted or FMGC-calculated Top Annunciator Keys

value. If the data field to be cleared is a leg
in the flight plan, the leg is deleted from
the flight plan, and a discontinuity created Page Keys
(in most cases). CLR can be removed from BRT/DIM Selector

the scratchpad by pushing the key a
second time or by entering an
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
alphanumeric character. SP Key
OVFY Δ Key
Clear Key
Next Section
MCDU | Clear Key | Section 14.2.15
Radio Management Panel | Frequency Selector Knob | Section 2.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

F rEQuENCy S ElECTOr K NOb Previous Section
The frequency selector knob Frequency Display
allows for dialing in the desired Radio Selection Buttons

frequency or course in the
Frequency Selector
STBY/CRS window.
Nav Buttons
On/Off Switch
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Radio Management Panel | Frequency Selector Knob | Section 2.4.2
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | Gain Selector | Section 16.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W EATHEr R ADAr AND PWS C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 16.2.3

G AIN S ElECTOr Previous Section
The GAIN Selector adjusts the sensitivity of System Switch
the receiver. It provides automatic gain Image Selector

adjustment when positioned to AUTO, and
Tilt Selector
manual adjustment up to MAX.
Gain Selector
Windshear
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | Gain Selector | Section 16.2.3
Speed Brake Lever | Ground Spoilers Takeoff | Section 7.10.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S pEEd B rAkE L EvEr S ECTION 7.10.1

G rOuNd S pOIlErs T AkEOff Previous Section
All ten spoiler panels serve as ground Speed Brakes
spoilers during rejected takeoffs and Ground Spoilers TO

landings. Raising the speed brake lever
arms the ground spoilers. The speed brake
lever does not move when ground spoilers Next Section
deploy. Ground spoilers can only be

deployed automatically for a landing or
L OCATION
rejected takeoff.
REJECTED TAKEOFF - Ground spoiler

extension occurs automatically during a
rejected takeoff when the wheel speed is
greater than 72 knots and :
Both thrust levers are at forward idle

if the ground spoilers are armed, or
Reverse thrust is selected on at least < PREVIOUS NEXT >
lever at idle if the ground spoilers CAUTION
are not armed
Manually moving the speed brake lever
aft commands speed brakes, not
ground spoilers. If the lever is moved
aft on the ground, all spoiler panels
retract if the flaps are full (a normal
inhibit). If the flaps are at 3, panels 1
and 5 retract and panels 2 through 4
remain partially extended.
Speed Brake Lever | Ground Spoilers Takeoff | Section 7.10.1
Cockpit Door Panel | Cockpit Door Switch | Section 1.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C OCkPIT D OOr P ANEl S ECTION 1.3.1

C OCkPIT D OOr S wITCH Previous Section
UNLOCK - Unlocks door when Cockpit Door Lights
raised above the detent and Cockpit Door Switch

held in this position. Door must
Next Section
be pushed to open. UNLOCK is
an override and reset selection of any L OCATION
previous action.
NORM - When NORM is selected, it allows

the door to be locked when closed. It also
allows the door to be opened after an
emergency access code entry and 30
second delay in case of pilot incapacitation.
LOCK - Momentarily placing the cockpit door

switch to LOCK illuminates the red cockpit
access panel light, rejects keypad entry
request, inhibits aural alerts, and prevents
further access code entry for 20 minutes.
The cockpit door switch returns to NORM
when released, but remains in locked mode
for 20 minutes or until UNLOCK is selected.
Cockpit Door Panel | Cockpit Door Switch | Section 1.3.1
ECAM Control Panel | Display Control Knobs | Section 16.1.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Description
TO Configuration
Emergency Cancel
System Buttons
All Button
D IsplAY C ONTrOl K NObs Clear Button
ECAM Control Knobs select respective Status Button
display ON/OFF and controls brightness. Recall Button

(Brightness is also automatically adjusted
with changing light conditions.) When the
upper ECAM display is selected OFF, the Next Section
E/WD automatically transfers to the lower

ECAM display. L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
ECAM Control Panel | Display Control Knobs | Section 16.1.8
Engine Thrust Levers | Autothrust Disconnect Buttons | Section 5.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NgINE T hrusT L EVErs S ECTION 5.4.1

A uTOThrusT D IsCONNECT B uTTONs Previous Section
The auto thrust is disconnected by: Thrust Lever Detents
ATHR Disconnect
Pushing either disconnect button on
the thrust levers Rev Thrust Detent
Positioning both thrust levers to the Next Section

idle stop. Pushing the A/THR button
when the auto thrust system is L OCATION
engaged
Losing of arming signals
Setting both thrust levers above CL
or one thrust lever above MCT with
both the flight directors and
autopilots off when the radio altitude
is below 100 feet
Max Reverse
CAUTION
If an auto thrust disconnect button is

pushed and held for more than 15
seconds, the auto thrust system is
disconnected for the remainder of the
flight. All auto thrust functions,
including alpha floor, are lost. The
auto thrust system can be regained
only during the next FMGC power-up.
Engine Thrust Levers | Autothrust Disconnect Buttons | Section 5.4.1
Engine Start and Ignition Panel | Engine Fire/Fault Light | Section 5.5.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NGINE S TArT AND I GNITION P ANEl S ECTION 5.5.1

E NGINE F IrE /F AulT L IGhT Previous Section
FIRE - The Engine Start and Eng Master Switch
Ignition Panel's FIRE light Eng Fire/Fault Light

illuminates red when the
Eng Mode Selector
respective engine fire warning
is activated and during a fire test. Eng Mode Continued
FADEC Schematic
FAULT - The Engine Start and Ignition
Panel's FAULT light illuminates amber for Next Section
the respective engine, in the event of an

automatic aborted start, a start valve fault,
L OCATION
or for a disagreement between the HP fuel
valve and its commanded position.
Engine Start and Ignition Panel | Engine Fire/Fault Light | Section 5.5.1
Engine Start and Ignition Panel | Engine Mode Selector | Section 5.5.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E NgINE M OdE S ElECTOr Previous Section
CRANK - The start valve Eng Master Switch
opens if the ENG MAN Eng Fire/Fault Light

START switch is ON and
Eng Mode Selector
N2 is less than 10%.
Ignition is not supplied. Eng Mode Continued
FADEC Schematic
NORM - When the NORM position is
selected, continuous ignition A and B is Next Section
automatically selected when an engine is

running and one of the following is met:
L OCATION
FLX or TO/GA thrust is selected on

the ground
TO/GA thrust is selected in flight
ENG ANTI ICE switch is ON
Engine surge or stall occurs in flight
FLAPS lever position is other than 0
in flight (approach idle is selected)
IGN/START IN FLIGHT - When the ENG

MODE selector is positioned to IGN/START
inflight the ENG MASTER switch is armed
and provides continuous ignition using both
igniters.
CONTINUE
Engine Start and Ignition Panel | Engine Mode Selector | Section 5.5.2
Engine Start and Ignition Panel | Engine Mode Selector Continued | Section 5.5.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E NgINE M OdE S ElECTOr Previous Section
CONTINUED Eng Master Switch
Eng Fire/Fault Light

IGN/START ON GROUND - When the ENG
MODE selector is positioned to IGN/START Eng Mode Selector
on the ground: Eng Mode Continued
The ENG page on the System Display FADEC Schematic
(S/D) is displayed, if another page Next Section

has not been manually selected on
the S/D L OCATION
Supplies electrical power to the
FADECs
Amber XXs disappear from all engine
parameters except N1 and N2
Arms the ENG MASTER switch
Closes pack valves. If the ENG
MASTER switch is not selected ON
within 30 seconds, the pack valves
reopen, then re-close when the
switch is selected ON. Likewise, if
the second engine is not started
within 30 seconds of the first start
valve closing, the pack valves
reopen until the second ENG
MASTER switch in selected ON
If one or more engines are running,
provides continuous ignition using
Engine Start and Ignition Panel | Engine Mode Selector Continued | Section 5.5.3
both igniters
Flap Lever | Flap Protections | Section 7.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lAp L EVEr S ECTION 7.1.1

F lAp P rOTECTIONs Previous Section
TAKEOFF WITH FLAPS 1 - When flaps 1 is FLAPS SELECTION IN FLIGHT - When the Flap Description
selected for takeoff (1 + F), the trailing flaps lever is moved from configuration 0 to Flap Protections
edge flaps automatically retract to 1 in flight, only the slats are extended.
Flap Limits
configuration 0 at 210 KIAS.
FLAP DIFFENTIAL SAME WING - A flap Next Section
TAKEOFF OR GO-AROUND WITH FLAPS 2 disconnect detection system is installed
OR 3 - When flaps 1 is selected, the 1 + F which stops flap movement if excessive L OCATION
configuration is obtained if airspeed is less differential movement is detected between
than 210 KIAS. The trailing edge flaps the inner and outer flaps on the same wing.
automatically retract to configuration 0 at
210 KIAS.
HIGH AOA - An alpha lock function prevents

initiation of slat retraction from position 1
to 0 at a high angle of attack or low
airspeed. The inhibition is removed
automatically when the angle of attack is
reduced or airspeed is increased.
WING TIP BRAKES - Four hydraulically

operated wing tip brakes are installed to
lock the flaps or slats in case of
asymmetry, overspeed, symmetrical
runaway, or uncommanded movement. The
brakes cannot be reset in flight.
Flap Lever | Flap Protections | Section 7.1.1
Flap Lever | Flap Limits | Section 7.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lAP L EVER S ECTION 7.1.2

A IRBUs F lAP L IMITs Previous Section
Flap Description
Position Slats° Flaps° Max Speed
Flap Protections
1 18 0 230
1+F 18 10 215 Flap Limits
2 22 15 200 Next Section
3 22 20 185
L OCATION
4 27 40 177
Flap Lever | Flap Limits | Section 7.1.2
Parking Brake Handle | Braking Schematic Parking Brake Off | Section 12.6.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P ARKING B RAKE H ANDlE S ECTION 12.6.2

B RAKING S ChEMATIC P ARKING B RAKE O FF Previous Section
Parking Brake Handle
Schematic Parking Brake On
Next Section
L OCATION
Parking Brake Handle | Braking Schematic Parking Brake Off | Section 12.6.2
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Transponder Code Window | Section 16.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

T rANspONdEr C OdE W INdOw Previous Section
The Transponder Code Window indicates the Altitude Range
code selected with the code selector. Code Window
DESCRIPTION - Two ATC transponders are Mode Selector
controlled by a single control panel. In Code Selector

flight, the selected transponder replies to
ATC Fail Light
beacon code aircraft ID (Mode A),
barometric altitude (Mode C), and aircraft Ident Button
ID flight data (Mode S) interrogations when Transponder Selector

the transponder mode selector is in XPNDR,
Next Section
TA ONLY, or TA/RA. On the ground,
transponder replies are inhibited for L OCATION
general (all call) Mode A, C, and S
interrogations. However, the transponder
will reply to selective Mode S interrogations
on the ground that are specifically directed
to the aircraft, based on each aircraft’s
unique Mode S address. This function can
be used by ATC for ground surveillance
during taxi when the transponder is active
(mode selector not in STBY). All
transponder modes are inhibited when the
mode selector is in STBY. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Transponder Code Window | Section 16.3.1
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Transponder Mode Selector | Section 16.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

T rANspONdEr M OdE S ElECTOr Previous Section
STBY - TCAS and the transponders are in Altitude Range
standby. Message TCAS STBY displays in Code Window

green on upper ECAM.
Mode Selector
XPDR - TCAS is in standby. During flight, Code Selector

the transponder is ON; on the ground, the
ATC Fail Light
transponder only responds to the selective
interrogation mode of mode S. Ident Button
TA - The transponder is ON. TCAS is on but
only the traffic advisory function of TCAS is Next Section
operational. Both resolution advisories and

pitch guidance are inhibited. The message
L OCATION
TA ONLY appears on the ND.
TA/RA - The transponder is ON and all TA

and RA functions of TCAS are operational.
TFC - The TCAS/ATC system is ON and all

transponder equipped airplanes within
approximately 30 NM (40 NM range or less
must be selected on some airplanes), and
the altitude slice selected by the Altitude
Range (ABOVE/N/BELOW) switch are < PREVIOUS NEXT >
displayed full time (Other, Proximate, TA,
and RA traffic).
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Transponder Mode Selector | Section 16.3.2
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Code Selector | Section 16.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TCAS/ATC T rANspONDEr C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 16.3.3

C ODE S ElECTOr Previous Section
The Code Selector uses two concentric Altitude Range
selectors to select the transponder code. Code Window
Mode Selector
Code Selector
ATC Fail Light
Ident Button
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Code Selector | Section 16.3.3
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | ATC Fail Light | Section 16.3.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TCAS/ATC T rANspONDEr C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 16.3.4

ATC F AIl L IGHT Previous Section
The ATC FAIL Light indicates a failure of the Altitude Range
selected transponder when illuminated. Code Window
Mode Selector
Code Selector
ATC Fail Light
Ident Button
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | ATC Fail Light | Section 16.3.4
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Transponder Selector | Section 16.3.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

T rANspONdEr S ElECTOr Previous Section
The Transponder Selector provides a means Altitude Range
for selecting a transponder. Code Window
Position 1 - Selects transponder 1 Mode Selector
and ADR 1 Code Selector

Position 2 - Selects transponder 2
ATC Fail Light
and ADR 2
Ident Button
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TCAS/ATC Transponder Control Panel | Transponder Selector | Section 16.3.6
ADIRS Control Panel | Data Selector | Section 14.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

D ATA S ElECTOr Previous Section
TEST - The TEST position displays all 8s in Data Display Window
data display window and illuminates ENT Data Selector

and CLR keys on the keypad.
System Selector
TK/GS - The TK/GS position displays true Data Entry Keypad

track and groundspeed.
ON Battery Light
PPOS - The PPOS displays present latitude IR Lights

and longitude.
IR Mode Selectors
WIND - The WIND position displays true ADR Switch

wind direction and wind speed.
Next Section
HDG - The HDG position displays true

heading and minutes remaining until
L OCATION
alignment is complete. When entering
heading while in ATT mode, a magnetic
heading must be entered.
STS - The STS position displays system

status message code. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
ADIRS Control Panel | Data Selector | Section 14.1.1
ADIRS Control Panel | System Selector | Section 14.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S YsTEm S ElECTOr Previous Section
OFF - The OFF position blanks the data Data Display Window
display window. Data Selector
1, 3, or 2 - Position 1, 3, or 2 displays data System Selector
for the associated IRS. Note that ADIRUs Data Entry Keypad
are arranged in a 1-3-2 sequence.
ON Battery Light
IR Lights
ADIRU
IR Mode Selectors
Three identical Air Data Inertial Reference
Units (ADIRUs) are installed in the airplane. ADR Switch
Each ADIRU combines an Air Data Next Section

Reference (ADR) system with a laser gyro
Inertial Reference (IR) system in a single L OCATION
unit.
The ADR provides barometric altitude,

airspeed, Mach, angle of attack,
temperature, and over speed warnings.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
The IR provides attitude, flight path vector,
heading, track, acceleration (speed trend),
VSI, groundspeed, and airplane position.
The IR does not navigate; rather, it
provides an inertial position input to the
FMGCs for navigation computations.
ADIRS Control Panel | System Selector | Section 14.1.2
ADIRS Control Panel | Data Entry Keypad | Section 14.1.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

D ATA E NTry K EypAd Previous Section
The Data Entry Keypad allows entry of Data Display Window
present position, or heading in ATT mode, Data Selector

in the selected system.
System Selector
ALPHA KEYS - The Alpha Keys select N, S, Data Entry Keypad

E, W for present position entry, or H for
ON Battery Light
magnetic heading entry in ATT mode.
IR Lights
NUMERIC KEYS - The Numeric Keys are
IR Mode Selectors
used to enter present position, or present
magnetic heading in ATT mode to the data ADR Switch
display window. Next Section
ENT KEY - The ENT Key illuminates when an L OCATION

alpha key is selected. Enters keyed data
into ADIRS.
CLR KEY - The CLR key illuminates when the

N, E, S, W or H key is pressed prior to data
entry. Pressing the CLR key clears keyed
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
data (but not yet entered) from the display
window.
ADIRS Control Panel | Data Entry Keypad | Section 14.1.3
ADIRS Control Panel | Battery Light | Section 14.1.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

B ATTErY L IGHT Previous Section
The ON BAT Light illuminates amber when Data Display Window
one or more IRUs are supplied by the Data Selector

airplane battery only. A horn in the nose
System Selector
wheel well sounds if on the ground. The ON
BAT light also illuminates for a few seconds Data Entry Keypad
at the initiation of alignment. ON Battery Light
IR Lights
IR Mode Selectors
ADR Switch
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
ADIRS Control Panel | Battery Light | Section 14.1.4
ADIRS Control Panel | IR Lights | Section 14.1.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

IR L IgHTs Previous Section
FAULT - The IR FAULT Light illuminates Data Display Window
amber when a fault affects the associated Data Selector

IR. If the light is flashing, it is possible that
System Selector
attitude and heading information may be
recovered in the ATT mode. Data Entry Keypad
ON Battery Light
ALIGN - The IR ALIGN Lights illuminate
white when the associated IR is operating IR Lights
normally in the ALIGN mode. IR Mode Selectors
The ALIGN light extinguishes when the ADR Switch
alignment is complete. Next Section
The ALIGN light flashes if: L OCATION

IR alignment fault is detected
No present position entry has been
made after 10 minutes
Difference between position at shut
down and entered position exceeds
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
1° of latitude or longitude
ADIRS Control Panel | IR Lights | Section 14.1.5
ADIRS Control Panel | IR Mode Selectors | Section 14.1.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

IR M OdE S ElECTOrs Previous Section
OFF - The OFF position deactivates the Data Display Window
associated ADIRU. Attitude data reference Data Selector

(ADR) and inertial reference (IR) data are
System Selector
not available.
Data Entry Keypad
NAV - The NAV position provides full inertial
ON Battery Light
data to airplane systems. (Normal mode of
operation.) IR Lights
IR Mode Selectors
ATT - The ATT position provides only
attitude and heading data. Magnetic ADR Switch
heading must be entered via the ADIRS Next Section

control panel, and must be reset frequently
(approximately every 10 minutes). L OCATION
Attitude Data Reference is available in NAV

or ATT positions.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
ADIRS Control Panel | IR Mode Selectors | Section 14.1.6
ADIRS Control Panel | ADR Switches | Section 14.1.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A TTITudE D ATA R EfErENCE S wITCHEs Previous Section
FAULT - The ADR FAULT Light illuminates Data Display Window
amber when a fault is detected in the Data Selector

associated air data reference component.
System Selector
OFF - When the ADR is switched to OFF, it Data Entry Keypad

indicates the air data output is
ON Battery Light
disconnected to the associated ADR. The
OFF light will illuminate white and the IR is IR Lights
not affected. IR Mode Selectors
ADR Switch
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
ADIRS Control Panel | ADR Switches | Section 14.1.7
Flight Control Computers | Elevator Aileron Computers | Section 7.5.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E lEVATOr A IlErON C OMPuTErs Previous Section
Description
ELAC
SEC
FAC
ELAC - Normally ELAC 1 commands the RESET - Turning the computer OFF then ON
operation of the ailerons and ELAC 2 resets the computer.
Next Section
commands the operation of the elevators
FAULT - The associated FAULT Light
and horizontal stabilizer. ELAC 1 and 2
illuminates amber: L OCATION
perform the following:
Normal pitch and roll, normal LAF When a failure is detected

Alternate pitch, alternate LAF During computer's power-up test (8-
Direct pitch and roll second duration). This test occurs for
Aileron droop each flight control computer upon
Abnormal attitude electrical power application or after
Acquisition of autopilot orders electrical transient/interruption.
ON - When the associated flight control The FAULT light extinguishes when OFF is
computer switch is ON, it engages the selected or at completion of satisfactory
computer and lights are extinguished. power-up test.
OFF - When selected to OFF, the OFF light

illuminates white and disengages the
Flight Control Computers | Elevator Aileron Computers | Section 7.5.1
Flight Control Computers | Flight Augmentation Computers | Section 7.5.3
A320 D IsPlAys ANd P ANEls

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

F lIGHT A uGMENTATION C OMPuTErs Previous Section
Description
ELAC
SEC
FAC
FAC - The Flight Augmentation Computers OFF - When selected to OFF, the OFF light
have three main functions: illuminates white and disengages the
Next Section
Rudder trim
Rudder travel limits FAULT - The associated FAULT Light L OCATION
Yaw damping inputs illuminates amber:
Alternate yaw
Flight envelope and speed When a failure is detected
computations During computer's power-up test (8-
Wind shear detection second duration). This test occurs for
each flight control computer upon
When both FACs are operational, FAC 1 is electrical power application or after
primary, and FAC 2 is standby. electrical transient/interruption.
ON - When the associated flight control The FAULT light extinguishes when OFF is
computer switch is ON, it engages the selected or at completion of satisfactory
computer and lights are extinguished. power-up test.
RESET - Turning the computer OFF then ON

resets the computer.
Flight Control Computers | Flight Augmentation Computers | Section 7.5.3
Recorder Panel | CVR Erase Button | Section 2.5.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

CVR E rAsE B uTTON Previous Section
ERASE - When the ERASE button Ground Control Switch
is pushed for two seconds,it CVR Erase Button

erases the CVR tape, provided
CVR Test Button
the airplane is on the ground
and the parking brake handle is Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
ON.
L OCATION
DESCRIPTION - The cockpit voice recorder
is located in the aft section of the airplane,
and is equipped with an underwater
locating beacon. The system records direct
conversations between crew members
through a cockpit area microphone and
boom microphones, aural cockpit warnings,
inter communications and radio
transmissions.
The passenger address system is also

recorded if the PA reception knob is
selected on. Only the last 30 minutes of
recording is retained.
Recorder Panel | CVR Erase Button | Section 2.5.1
Recorder Panel | CVR Test Button | Section 2.5.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

CVR T EsT B uTTON Previous Section
When pushed and held, the CVR Ground Control Switch
test is activated provided the CVR Erase Button

CVR is energized and the
CVR Test Button
parking brake handle is ON.
During the test, a low frequency Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
tone is heard through the cockpit
loudspeakers.
L OCATION
Recorder Panel | CVR Test Button | Section 2.5.2
Engine and APU Fire Panel | Engine Agent Switch | Section 6.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Engine Fire Switch
Engine Agent Switch
Engine Test Button
APU Fire Switch
E NgINE A gENT S wITCh APU Agent Switch
SQUIB - The engine's AGENT FIRE PROTECTION - Each engine is provided APU Test Button
switches are active when a with two fire extinguishers with electrically Next Section
corresponding engine FIRE switch operated squibs to discharge their
is released out. The SQUIB lights contents. Each squib has a dual electric L OCATION
illuminate white to facilitate identification of supply. An AGENT switch for each fire
the agent switch(es) that are active. extinguisher bottle is located on the
respective ENG FIRE panel that enables
DISCH - When the engine's AGENT switch is
discharging of the fire extinguisher's agent.
active and pushed momentarily, the fire
extinguisher bottle is discharged. The
DISCH light illuminates amber when the
fire extinguisher bottle agent pressure is
low.
Engine and APU Fire Panel | Engine Agent Switch | Section 6.3.1
Engine and APU Fire Panel | APU Fire Switch | Section 6.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Engine Fire Switch
Engine Agent Switch
Engine Test Button
APU Fire Switch
APU F IrE S wITCh APU Agent Switch
APU FIRE WARNING INDICATIONS - An APU APU FIRE SWITCH (guarded) - The APU Fire APU Test Button
fire is indicated by an aural CRC, the Switch is normally IN and Guarded. When Next Section
illumination of the APU FIRE switch and the APU ENG FIRE Switch is released OUT,
MASTER WARNING lights, and by an ECAM an electrical signal: L OCATION
warning on the E/WD.
Silences the aural warning
APU FIRE WARNING - An APU fire warning Arms the squib (Squib light
appears under the following conditions: illuminates)
Deactivates the APU Generator
Both loops detect a fire APU shuts down
One loop detects a fire when the APU fuel pump is turned off
other loop is faulty APU bleed and cross bleed valves are
A break in both loops occurs within 5
closed
seconds of each other
When a fire test is performed
Engine and APU Fire Panel | APU Fire Switch | Section 6.3.3
Engine and APU Fire Panel | APU Agent Switch | Section 6.3.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Engine Fire Switch
Engine Agent Switch
Engine Test Button
APU Fire Switch
APU A gENT S wITCh APU Agent Switch
SQUIB - The APU AGENT switch is FIRE PROTECTION - A single fire APU Test Button
active when a corresponding APU extinguisher bottle is provided for the APU. Next Section
FIRE switch is released out. The If an APU fire is detected on the ground,
SQUIB light illuminates white to the APU automatically shuts down and the L OCATION
indicate that the agent switch is active. extinguishing agent is automatically
discharged (3 seconds after fire warning is
DISCH - When the APU's AGENT switch is
activated).
active and pushed momentarily, the fire
extinguisher bottle is discharged. The If an APU fire is detected in flight, the APU
DISCH light illuminates amber when the must be manually shut down, and the
fire extinguisher bottle agent pressure is agent manually discharged.
low.
Engine and APU Fire Panel | APU Agent Switch | Section 6.3.4
Hydraulic Control Panel | Hydraulic Schematic | Section 10.2.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YDRAUlIC C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 10.2.5

Previous Section
Engine Pump
RAT Manual On
Blue Electric Pump
Power Transfer Unit
H YDRAUlIC S ChEMATIC Yellow Electric Pump
Hydraulic Schematic
Next Section
L OCATION
Hydraulic Control Panel | Hydraulic Schematic | Section 10.2.5
Electrical Control Panel | Integrated Drive Generator Switch | Section 3.2.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrICAl C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 3.2.5

Previous Section
Commercial Switch
Battery Indicator
Battery Switches
IDG Switch
Generator Switch
I NTEgrATEd D rIVE G ENErATOr S wITCH
GUARDED - The IDG switch is Bus Tie Switch

guarded and normally spring-
loaded out. When pushed, the
IDG is disconnected from its Electrical Schematic
drive shaft and can only be Next Section

reconnected by maintenance.
L OCATION
The main galley bus
In-seat power supply system, and to
the passenger entertainment system
FAULT - An amber FAULT light indicates an

IDG oil outlet overheat or low oil pressure.
Inhibited below 14% N2.
Electrical Control Panel | Integrated Drive Generator Switch | Section 3.2.5
Electrical Control Panel | APU Generator Switch | Section 3.2.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Commercial Switch
Battery Indicator
Battery Switches
IDG Switch
Generator Switch
APU G ENErATOr S wITCH
ON - The APU generator field is energized Bus Tie Switch

and the line contactor closes provided
electrical parameters are normal and the
EXT PWR line contactor is open. The bus tie Electrical Schematic
contactor (1 and/or 2) automatically closes Next Section

if generators 1 and/or 2 are not operating.
L OCATION
amber, a protection trip is initiated by the
APU generator control unit (GCU), or the
line contactor opens without selecting the
APU GEN switch to OFF.
OFF - When the OFF light illuminates white,

the APU generator field is de-energized and
the line contactor opens. The fault circuit is
reset. In this example, GEN 1 is selected ON with
Electrical Control Panel | APU Generator Switch | Section 3.2.7
engine 1 running, APU operating, and

engine 2 has not started.
Electrical Control Panel | External Power Switch | Section 3.2.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Commercial Switch
Battery Indicator
Battery Switches
IDG Switch
Generator Switch
E xTErNAl P OwEr S wITCh
ON - When the EXT PWR AVAIL Bus Tie Switch

light is illuminated, pushing
the EXT PWR switch
illuminates the blue ON light, Electrical Schematic
closes the external power line Next Section

contactor, and the AVAIL light goes off.
L OCATION
AVAIL - A green AVAIL light illuminates
when external power is plugged in and the
electrical parameters are normal. On the
ECAM ELEC page the EXT PWR indication
normally appears white. Voltage (110V to
120V) and Frequency (390Hz to 410Hz)
appears green when in normal range, and
is amber when it exceeds the normal
range.
Electrical Control Panel | External Power Switch | Section 3.2.9
Air Conditioning Panel | Pack Switch | Section 15.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Pack Flow Selector
Hot Air Switch
Pack Switch
Engine Bleed Switch
Ram Air Switch
APU Bleed Switch
P ACK S wITCH Cross Bleed Selector
Pneumatic Schematic
ON is indicated when all lights are Pack Controllers - The two packs operate
extinguished on the switch. automatically and independently of each Leak Detection
Selecting the switch to ON allows other. Each pack is regulated by it's Next Section
the pack flow control valve to be respective dual channel pack controller.
regulated automatically by its respective The pack controller receives demand L OCATION
pack controller. signals from the zone controller to regulate
the applicable pack temperature.
amber, a compressor/pack overheat is If the primary pack controller channel fails,
detected or the pack flow control valve the secondary pack controller channel
position disagrees with the selected automatically takes over and defaults to a
position. The fault light remains illuminated fixed pack flow control pre-failure setting.
until until the fault condition is corrected.
If the secondary pack controller channel
OFF - When the OFF light illuminates white, fails, with the primary pack controller
the pack flow control valve is closed. channel operating, pack regulation is not
Air Conditioning Panel | Pack Switch | Section 15.2.3
affected; however, related ECAM pack

Automatic Closure of Pack Flow Control information is not displayed.
Valve occurs when any of the following
occurs: Should both pack controller channels fail,
pack outlet temperature is controlled to a
Upstream pressure is below minimum set temperature range by the pack anti-ice
For a compressor outlet overheat valve, and related ECAM pack information
During engine start sequence on the is not displayed.
ground
Corresponding fire switch is
depressed
If ditching switch is selected ON
Air Conditioning Panel | Engine Bleed Switch | Section 15.2.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Pack Flow Selector
Hot Air Switch
Pack Switch
Engine Bleed Switch
Ram Air Switch
APU Bleed Switch
E NgINE B lEEd S wITCh Cross Bleed Selector
Pneumatic Schematic
FAULT - The engine bleed OFF - When the OFF light illuminates white,
switch is normally selected to the IP and HP valves are closed. Leak Detection
ON for flight conditions, Next Section

commanding the engine bleed
NOTE
switch to open. The engine bleed fault light L OCATION
illuminates amber when the switch's With the ENG BLEED switch OFF, the
command position disagrees with the FAULT light will extinguish when the
engine bleed valve position. ENG BLEED switch is selected OFF and
the cause of the fault no longer exists.
The engine bleed valve will close
automatically if:

The ENG BLEED switch is off, The BMC (Bleed Management Computer)
ENG FIRE switch pushed, or closes the engine bleed valve electrically
The BMC detects a fault or for any of the following fault conditions:
A pressure regulating and shut-off
Over-pressure downstream of bleed
Air Conditioning Panel | Engine Bleed Switch | Section 15.2.4
valve will close the engine bleed

valve
valve pneumatically if upstream
Bleed over-heat
pressure is low or reverse airflow
Wing or engine leak on associated
occurs.
side
ON - Is indicated when all lights are Bleed valve not closed during engine
extinguished on the engine bleed switch. start, and/or bleed valve not closed
Selecting the switch to ON commands the with APU bleed valve open
engine bleed valve to open.
Air Conditioning Panel | APU Bleed Switch | Section 15.2.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A IR C ONdITIONING C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 15.2.6

Previous Section
Pack Flow Selector
Hot Air Switch
Pack Switch
Engine Bleed Switch
Ram Air Switch
APU Bleed Switch
APU B lEEd S wITCH Cross Bleed Selector
Pneumatic Schematic
ON - Selecting APU BLEED switch FAULT - The APU bleed switch FAULT light
to ON opens the APU bleed valve illuminates amber when an APU leak is Leak Detection
provided the APU N is greater detected. Next Section

than 95% and there is no leak on
the APU or left bleed side. The ON light L OCATION
illuminates blue when the APU bleed valve
is open. When the ON light extinguishes
the APU bleed valve is closed.
Air Conditioning Panel | APU Bleed Switch | Section 15.2.6
Air Conditioning Panel | Cross Bleed Selector | Section 15.2.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Pack Flow Selector
Hot Air Switch
Pack Switch
Engine Bleed Switch
Ram Air Switch
APU Bleed Switch
C ROss B lEED S ElECTOR Cross Bleed Selector
Pneumatic Schematic
AUTO - When the Cross OPEN - When the Cross Bleed Selector is
Bleed Selector is selected to OPEN, it opens the cross bleed Leak Detection
selected to AUTO, the valve. Next Section

cross bleed valve opens
SHUT - When the Cross Bleed Selector is L OCATION
if the APU bleed valve is
selected to SHUT, it closes the cross bleed
open; it closes the cross
valve.
bleed valve if the APU
bleed valve is closed or any air leak is
detected (except engine start).
Air Conditioning Panel | Cross Bleed Selector | Section 15.2.7
Anti-ice Panel | Engine Anti-ice Switch | Section 11.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Wing Anti-ice
Engine Anti-Ice
Probe Window Heat

E NgINE A NTI - ICE S wITCH
DESCRIPTION - Each engine ON - The ENG ANTI ICE Switch controls the
Anti-Ice Locations
nacelle is anti-iced by pneumatic engine anti-ice system. When selected ON:
bleed air. The engine anti-ice Next Section
The ON light illuminates blue
ducting is independent of the
ENG A. ICE message appears on L OCATION
pneumatic system ducting. Each engine
ECAM MEMO display
anti-ice valve is electrically controlled by
Engine anti-ice valves open if
the respective ENG ANTI ICE switch and is
pneumatic supply is available
pneumatically operated. The engine must
be running for the valve to open. When OFF - When selected to OFF the ON light
either engine anti-ice valve is open: extinguishes and the respective engine
anti-ice valve closes.
Maximum N1 is limited
Continuous ignition is provided FAULT - The ENG ANTI ICE FAULT Light
Minimum idle RPM is increased. illuminates amber if the engine anti-ice
The valves open with a loss of electrical valve position disagrees with selected
power. position. The FAULT light also illuminates
momentarily when valves are in transit.
Anti-ice Panel | Engine Anti-ice Switch | Section 11.1.1
Anti-ice Panel | Probe/Window Heat Switch | Section 11.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Wing Anti-ice
Engine Anti-Ice
Probe Window Heat

P rObE /W INdOw H EAT S wITCh
DESCRIPTION - The pitot probes, AUTO - The AUTO selection (no lights)
Anti-Ice Locations
static ports, angle of attack provides automatic heating of probes and
probes, and total air windows in flight. On the ground if one Next Section
temperature probes are engine is running windows and probes are

L OCATION
electrically heated. Three independent automatically heated except for TAT
probe heat computers automatically control probes.
the ground/flight modes and provide
ON - When the probe/window heat switch is
overheat protection and fault indications.
selected to ON all probes and windows are
The probes are automatically heated in
electrically heated. The ON light also
flight, and on the ground when at least one
illuminates blue.
engine is running. They can be operated
manually prior to engine start by placing
the PROBE/WINDOW HEAT switch ON. The
TAT probes are not heated on the ground.
Probe heat operates at low power on the
ground, and automatically switches to
normal power in flight.
Anti-ice Panel | Probe/Window Heat Switch | Section 11.1.2
Anti-ice Panel | Wing Anti-Ice Schematic | Section 11.1.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Wing Anti-ice
Engine Anti-Ice
Probe Window Heat

W ING A NTI -I CE S CHEMATIC
Anti-Ice Locations
Next Section
L OCATION
Anti-ice Panel | Wing Anti-Ice Schematic | Section 11.1.3
Anti-ice Panel | Engine Anti-Ice Schematic | Section 11.1.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Wing Anti-ice
Engine Anti-Ice
Probe Window Heat

E NgINE A NTI -I CE S CHEmATIC
DESCRIPTION - Each engine
Anti-Ice Locations
nacelle is anti-iced by pneumatic
bleed air. The engine anti-ice Next Section
ducting is independent of the

L OCATION
pneumatic system ducting. Each engine
anti-ice valve is electrically controlled by
the respective ENG ANTI ICE switch and is
pneumatically operated. The engine must
be running for the valve to open.
When either engine anti-ice valve is open:
Maximum N1 is limited.
Continuous ignition is provided
Minimum idle RPM is increased
The valves open with a loss of
electrical power
Anti-ice Panel | Engine Anti-Ice Schematic | Section 11.1.4
Anti-ice Panel | Anti-Ice Locations | Section 11.1.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Wing Anti-ice
Engine Anti-Ice
Probe Window Heat

A NTI -I CE L OCATIONs
Anti-Ice Locations
Next Section
L OCATION
Anti-ice Panel | Anti-Ice Locations | Section 11.1.5
Cabin Pressurization Control Panel | Landing Elevation Selector | Section 15.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L ANdINg E lEvATION S ElECTOr Previous Section
AUTO - When the LDG ELEV Man V/S Control
selector is positioned to AUTO Mode Select

the landing elevation data
Landing Elevation
from the FMGC is relayed to
the cabin pressure controller. Ditching
A green color AUTO annunciation is also Next Section

displayed on the ECAM CAB PRESS page.
L OCATION
MANUALLY SETTING LANDING ELEVATION -
The cabin landing elevation is manually set
using the Landing Elevation Selector when
the FMGC landing elevation data is not
correct or the FMGC is inoperative. When
the Landing Elevator Selector is placed out
of the AUTO position the cabin MAN
annunciation and the selected LDG ELEV
altitude is displayed on the ECAM CAB
PRESS page.
Cabin Pressurization Control Panel | Landing Elevation Selector | Section 15.3.2
APU Control Panel | APU Start Switch | Section 5.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
APU C ONTrOl P ANEl S ECTION 5.1.1

APU S TArT S wITCH Previous Section
ON - When the APU START AVAIL - The AVAIL light Master Switch
switch is selected to ON; illuminates when N is above Start Switch

95% and extinguishes when the
ON light illuminates Next Section
APU shuts down.
blue
APU starter is energized
L OCATION
after air inlet flap is
fully open and ignition
occurs.
At a preset N, the
starter is de-energized,
and ignition ceases.
At 95% N; the ON light
extinguishes, APU
bleed air and/or
electrical power is
available, and after 10
seconds, the ECAM
APU page disappears.
APU Control Panel | APU Start Switch | Section 5.1.1
Cockpit Door Controller | Door Pressure Sensors | Section 1.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C OCKpIT D OOR C ONTROllER S ECTION 1.2.1

P REssURE S ENsORs Previous Section
Pressure sensors simultaneously open all Strike Lights
latches when a defined pressure drop is Pressure Sensors

detected.
Channel Lights
Next Section
L OCATION
Cockpit Door Controller | Door Pressure Sensors | Section 1.2.1
Cockpit Door Controller | Channel Lights | Section 1.2.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C OCKPIT D OOR C ONTROllER S ECTION 1.2.2

C HANNEl L IGHTs Previous Section
The cockpit door has two channel Strike Lights
lights that indicate the status of the Pressure Sensors

door pressure sensors. A channel
Channel Lights
light illuminates amber when a
respective pressure sensor is faulty. Next Section
L OCATION
Cockpit Door Controller | Channel Lights | Section 1.2.2
Cargo Heat Control Panel | Cargo Temperature Selector | Section 15.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ARGO H EAT C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 15.4.2

C ARGO T EMpERATURE S ElECTOR Previous Section
The cargo temperature Cargo Heat Hot Air
selector controls the Aft Isolation Valve

temperature in the aft
Cargo Temperature
cargo compartment. Hot
trim air is mixed with air Next Section
from the cabin and supplied to the cargo

compartment through the ventilation inlet
L OCATION
isolation valve.
Cargo Heat Control Panel | Cargo Temperature Selector | Section 15.4.2
Ventilation Control Panel | Extract Fan Switch | Section 15.5.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E XTrACT F AN S wITCH Previous Section
AUTO - When both avionic Blower Fan
equipment blower and extract Extract Fan

vent fan switches are in AUTO
the avionics equipment
ventilation system is Normal Configuration
configured for the normal operational FAULT - The fault light on the extract vent Abnormal Configuration
configuration. fan switch illuminates amber when:
Smoke Configuration
OVRD - When the extract vent fan switch is Extract vent air pressure is low Next Section
selected to OVRD (override), the extract Duct overheat
fan will continue to run and both the vent The avionics ventilation computer L OCATION
air inlet and outlet valves will close, power supply fails
changing the ventilation system to the Smoke warning occurs
abnormal configuration if the blower switch A warning horn will also sound for a
is in AUTO. When both blower and extract fault, if on the ground with the
vent fans are in OVRD, then the ventilation engines stopped.
system changes to the smoke
configuration.
Ventilation Control Panel | Extract Fan Switch | Section 15.5.1
Ventilation Control Panel | Cabin Ventilation Fan Switch | Section 15.5.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
V ENTIlATION C ONTROl P ANEl S ECTION 15.5.2

C AbIN R ECIRCulATION F AN S wITCH Previous Section
The cabin, lavatories and Blower Fan
galleys are ventilated by two Extract Fan

cabin recirculation fans that
extract cabin and lavatory air
to the outflow valve. The Normal Configuration
recirculation fans run continuously. Abnormal Configuration
ON - When the CAB FANS switch is Smoke Configuration
positioned to ON, two cabin recirculation Next Section

fans are activated. ON is the normal switch
position and no lights are displayed on the L OCATION
switch.
OFF - When the CAB FANS switch is

positioned to OFF, both cabin recirculation
fans stop. A white color OFF light is
displayed on the switch.
FANS FAIL - If the cabin and lavatory

recirculation fans fail, the forward and aft
cabin zone inlet temperatures will be fixed

at 59°F. The cockpit temperature control
CABIN FAN FAULT INDICATION - Displays
will remain normal.
amber if fault in cabin fan detected.
Ventilation Control Panel | Cabin Ventilation Fan Switch | Section 15.5.2
Ventilation Control Panel | Avionics Ventilation Normal Configuration | Section 15.5.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A vIONICs V ENTIlATION N OrmAl C ONFIGUrATION Previous Section
The avionics ventilation system provides Blower Fan
cooling air for the avionics compartment, Extract Fan

flight deck instruments, and circuit breaker
panels. The system uses two electric fans
to circulate cooling air. An avionics Normal Configuration
equipment ventilation computer controls In flight normal operation is CLOSED or Abnormal Configuration
the system. INTERMEDIATE (with warm skin
Smoke Configuration
temperature).
The system has three normal operational Next Section
configurations determined by ground/flight In addition to the normal operational
modes, and airplane skin temperature. On configurations, ABNORMAL and SMOKE L OCATION
the ground, normal operation is OPEN or configurations also exist.
CLOSED (with with cold skin temperature).
Ventilation Control Panel | Avionics Ventilation Normal Configuration | Section 15.5.3

OPEN - Outside air enters through the inlet valve, cools the avionics equipment, and exits
through the extract valve.
CLOSED - Avionics equipment cooling air is circulated through a skin heat exchanger and
exits under the cargo compartment.
INTERMEDIATE - Avionics equipment cooling air is circulated through a skin heat exchanger
and exits under the cargo compartment and through the extract valve.
Ventilation Control Panel | Avionics Ventilation Abnormal Configuration | Section 15.5.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A vIONICs V ENTIlATION A bNOrMAl C ONFIGUrATION Previous Section
The abnormal configuration occurs when Blower Fan
either the BLOWER or EXTRACT fan Extract Fan

switches are selected to OVRD. The system
reverts to a closed configuration, except
that air is supplied from the air conditioning Normal Configuration
system and there is no cargo compartment Abnormal Configuration

heating. When the BLOWER fan switch is
Smoke Configuration
selected to OVRD, the blower fan stops and
the extract fan runs. When the EXTRACT Next Section
fan switch is selected to OVRD, both fans

continue to run.
L OCATION
Ventilation Control Panel | Avionics Ventilation Abnormal Configuration | Section 15.5.4

Ventilation Control Panel | Avionics Ventilation Smoke Configuration | Section 15.5.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A vIONICs V ENTIlATION S mOkE C ONfIgurATION Previous Section
BLOWER and EXTRACT FAULT LIGHTS - Blower Fan
Illuminate amber when smoke is detected Extract Fan

in the avionics ventilation system, with an
associated ECAM warning. One smoke
detector is installed in the avionics Normal Configuration
compartment air extraction duct. Avionics lights, and EXTRACT FAULT lights on the Abnormal Configuration
smoke is indicated by an aural single chime VENTILATION panel and MASTER CAUT
Smoke Configuration
(SC), the illumination of the SMOKE light lights, and by an ECAM caution on the
on the EMER ELEC PWR panel, the BLOWER E/WD. Placing the BLOWER and EXTRACT Next Section
and EXTRACT FAULT lights on the switches to OVRD configures the ventilation
VENTILATION panel and MASTER CAUT sytem to the smoke configuration. L OCATION
Ventilation Control Panel | Avionics Ventilation Smoke Configuration | Section 15.5.5

Engine Manual Start and Ignition Panel | Engine N1 Mode Switch | Section 5.6.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E NgINE N1 M OdE S wITCH Previous Section
ALTERNATE CONTROL MODE - If any of the Eng Man Start
inputs required for normal control mode Eng N1 Mode / Alternate Control
are lost, the FADEC automatically reverts
to its alternate control mode, which uses
N1 as the controlling engine parameter Next Section
(EPR mode inoperative). The alternate

control mode consist of an N1 Rated Mode
L OCATION
ON - When an ENG N1
or N1 Unrated Mode. All auto thrust MODE switch is selected
functions, including alpha floor, are lost. to ON, associated thrust
Depending upon which specific inputs are control reverts from the
lost, the engine may revert to either of two normal (EPR) control
N1 modes; N1 rated mode, or N1 unrated mode to the alternate (N1) control mode.
mode. Additionally, the N1 mode can be When an automatic reversion to the N1
manually selected by pressing the N1 rated or unrated mode occurs, selecting the
MODE switch on the overhead panel. switch ON confirms the mode. The ON light
illuminates blue to confirm the switch is
OFF - When an ENG N1 MODE switch is
selected to ON.
selected to OFF (no light illumination), the
normal (EPR) control mode is selected, if
available.
Engine Manual Start and Ignition Panel | Engine N1 Mode Switch | Section 5.6.1
Engine Manual Start and Ignition Panel | Engine N1 Mode/Rated/Unrated | Section 5.6.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E NgINE N1 M OdE / R ATEd / U NrATEd Previous Section
N1 RATED MODE - In the Eng Man Start
N1 rated mode, the Eng N1 Mode / Alternate Control

FADEC controls engine
N1 as a function of thrust
lever position, Next Section
temperature, and altitude while preventing

the engine from exceeding operating limits.
L OCATION
The thrust lever detents do not provide limit
Thrust is controlled in the same manner as protections; over boost is possible. With
in the normal mode without auto thrust. one engine in the N1 rated mode, the N1 of
Place the thrust lever in the TO/GA detent the unrated engine should be matched with
to obtain TO/GA thrust, the MCT detent to the N1 of the rated engine (the thrust
obtain MCT thrust, and the CL detent to levers may not be aligned). If both engines
obtain climb thrust. degrade to the N1 unrated mode, N1 limit
values in the Takeoff Performance, Climb
N1 UNRATED MODE - In the N1 unrated
Performance, and Landing Performance
mode (N1 DEGRADED mode on ECAM) the
chapters must be used.
FADEC controls engine N1 as a function of
thrust lever position only.
Engine Manual Start and Ignition Panel | Engine N1 Mode/Rated/Unrated | Section 5.6.2
Clocks | Set Digital Chronometer | Section 8.5.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S ET D IgITAl C HrONOmETEr Previous Section
SET - Allows the pilot to set the internal Clocks Description
time. Analog Chronometer
The internal clock can be set to internal Set Analog Chronometer
time by: Digital Chronometer
1. Manually placing the UTC selector Set Digital Chronometer
from GPS to SET. The minutes digits Chronometer ND Switches

flash and the seconds are blank.
Next Section
2. The DATE/SET button is rotated to
increase or decrease the minutes. L OCATION
3. Pushing the DATE/SET button causes
the hour digits flash.
4. Rotating the DATE/SET button sets
the hour. Subsequent pushes allow < PREVIOUS NEXT >
the pilot to set the year, month, and
day.
NOTE
5. When complete the UTC selector
should be rotated to INT. The UTC selector must not be left in
the SET position for more than 1
minute. Otherwise, maintenance
action is necessary to synchronize the
lower ECAM time with the flight deck
clock.
Clocks | Set Digital Chronometer | Section 8.5.4
Clocks | Set Analog Chronometer | Section 8.5.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S ET A NAlOG C hrONOmETEr Previous Section
To set the clock, ensure time is displayed in Clocks Description
the digital window (if date is displayed, Analog Chronometer

push the date button to display time):
1. Turn the UTC selector to the HSD Digital Chronometer

position. The hours display advances
Set Digital Chronometer
1 hour per second.
2. When the correct hour is displayed, Chronometer ND Switches
turn the UTC selector to the MSM Next Section

position. The minutes display
advances 1 minute per second. L OCATION
3. When the correct hour and minute
have been set, return the UTC
selector to the HLDY position. The
clock holds the current time. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
4. To start the clock, place the UTC
selector to RUN.
Clocks | Set Analog Chronometer | Section 8.5.2
Side Stick Priority Light | Priority Right | Section 7.9.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S IDE S TICK P RIORITY L IGHTs S ECTION 7.9.1

P RIORITY R IGHT Previous Section
The Arrow Light illuminates red in front of Priority Left
pilot losing authority. Extinguishes when Priority Right

side stick activation is re-established by
Next Section
Captain or First Officer Light
The CAPT or F/O Light illuminates green to

L OCATION
indicate associated side stick has
established priority by activation of its
priority switch, and the opposite side stick
is not in neutral.
On newer airplanes, both lights flash when

both side sticks are moved simultaneously
and neither has taken priority. Extinguishes
when the opposite side stick is returned to
neutral.
Side Stick Priority Light | Priority Right | Section 7.9.1
EFIS Control Panel | Barometric Window Reference in Hg | Section 8.1.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons

B arOMETrIC W INDOw R EfErENCE IN HG
FD Off Button
The BARO Window displays barometric
FD On Button
reference in inches of Hg or hPa of Hg and
the primary flight director altitudes are ILS Off
displayed in thousands of feet.
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
VOR Switches On
VOR Switches Off
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
EFIS Control Panel | Barometric Window Reference in Hg | Section 8.1.5
EFIS Control Panel | NDB Button | Section 8.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
EFIS C ONTrOL P ANEL S ECTION 8.1.1

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
ARPT Button
NDB Button
VOR.D Button
WPT Button
CST Button
NDB B uTTON
FD Off Button
When the NDB button is
FD On Button
selected ON, the NDB symbol is
displayed a magenta color. ILS Off
When the NDB symbol is part of the flight
ILS On
plan, the symbol is a green color. The NDB
Mode/Range Selector
symbol is a white color if the TO waypoint
and blue when tuned by the FMGC VOR Switches On
(automatically or manually).
VOR Switches Off
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
EFIS Control Panel | NDB Button | Section 8.1.1
EFIS Control Panel | VOR/ADF Switches - Off | Section 8.1.22

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
VOR S WITCHEs O ff
VOR Switches On
The VOR/ADF Switches provide selection of
VOR Switches Off
VOR and/or ADF (if installed) bearing
pointers and DME on respective ND in any Next Section
mode except PLAN.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
EFIS Control Panel | VOR/ADF Switches - Off | Section 8.1.22
EFIS Control Panel | VOR.D Button | Section 8.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
ARPT Button
NDB Button
VOR.D Button
WPT Button
CST Button
VOR.D B uTTON
FD Off Button
When the VOR.D button is
FD On Button
selected ON, the VOR/DME,
VOR, DME, and TACAN symbols ILS Off
are displayed a magenta color. Whenever
ILS On
the VOR/DME, VOR, and TACAN symbols
Mode/Range Selector
are part of the flight plan, the symbol is a
green color. The VOR/DME, VOR, and VOR Switches On
TACAN symbols are a white color if the TO
VOR Switches Off
waypoint and blue when tuned by the
Next Section
FMGC (automatically or manually).
DME OR TACAN SYMBOL
< PREVIOUS NEXT >

DME OR TACAN SYMBOL
EFIS Control Panel | VOR.D Button | Section 8.1.2
EFIS Control Panel | Waypoint Button | Section 8.1.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
ARPT Button
NDB Button
VOR.D Button
WPT Button
CST Button
W aYpOINT B uTTON
FD Off Button
When the WPT Button is
FD On Button
selected ON, waypoints not in
the flight plan are displayed a ILS Off
magenta color. The TO waypoint displays
ILS On
white. All other flight plan waypoints
Mode/Range Selector
display green.
VOR Switches On
VOR Switches Off
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
EFIS Control Panel | Waypoint Button | Section 8.1.3
EFIS Control Panel | Constraint Button | Section 8.1.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
ARPT Button
NDB Button
VOR.D Button
WPT Button
CST Button
C ONsTraINT B uTTON
FD Off Button
When the CSTR button is selected ON; the
FD On Button
altitude, speed, or time constraints are
displayed a magenta color. ILS Off
ILS On
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT SYMBOL
When the CSTR button is Mode/Range Selector
selected ON, the altitude
VOR Switches On
constraint symbol is displayed
VOR Switches Off
in conjunction with the flight
plan waypoints if in a descent Next Section
mode. The MCDU will indicate the predicted
altitude crossing at the fix. The color of the
altitude constraint symbol indicates
predicted altitude constraint compliance or
non-compliance.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MAGENTA/AMBER CONSTRAINT SYMBOL
When in descent mode (DES), the altitude
EFIS Control Panel | Constraint Button | Section 8.1.4
constraint symbol is a magenta color if the

constraint is predicted to be met or an
amber color if predicted to be missed.
EFIS Control Panel | Flight Director On | Section 8.1.11

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
F LIgHT D IrECTOr O N
VOR Switches On
The FD Button when pushed cycles the
VOR Switches Off
flight director command bars ON or OFF.
The FD Button illuminates green when Next Section
selected ON.
-FD2 - Annunciation indicates that the the

Captain's FD is selected OFF and the FO's
flight director is selected ON.

flight directors are selected ON, but one FD
has failed or one FMGC data is not valid.

flight directors are ON.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
EFIS Control Panel | Flight Director On | Section 8.1.11
EFIS Control Panel | ILS/LS On | Section 8.1.13

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
ILS/LS O N
VOR Switches On
The ILS/LS Button when pushed cycles the
VOR Switches Off
localizer and glideslope scales ON or OFF. It
also displays: Next Section
The ILS identifier & frequency

ILS DME on the associated PFD if a
DME is collocated
The ILS course bar on the heading
scale
Deviation symbols are displayed
when a valid ILS signal is received
The LS label may replace the ILS label on

some aircraft. The ILS/LS Button
illuminates green when selected ON.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
EFIS Control Panel | ILS/LS On | Section 8.1.13
Flight Control Unit | Heading/Track Window | Section 13.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Speed/Mach Window
FD Display Mode
ALT Window
V/S / FPA Window
H EAdINg /T rACk W INdOw Selectors
Buttons
The HDG/TRK Window displays selected
HDG/TRK. Displays dashes when a Next Section
managed lateral mode is engaged.

L OCATION
L ATErAl L IghT
The LAT Light illuminates to indicate
managed lateral mode is either armed or
engaged.
Flight Control Unit | Heading/Track Window | Section 13.2.1
Flight Control Unit | Flight Director Display Mode | Section 13.2.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Speed/Mach Window
FD Display Mode
ALT Window
V/S / FPA Window
F lIghT D IrECTOr D IsplAY M OdE Selectors
Buttons
The Flight Director Display Mode indicates
that the flight director is in either HDG-V/S Next Section
or TRK-FPA display mode.

L OCATION
Flight Control Unit | Flight Director Display Mode | Section 13.2.2
Flight Control Unit | Altitude Window | Section 13.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Speed/Mach Window
FD Display Mode
ALT Window
V/S / FPA Window
A lTITudE W INdOw Selectors
Buttons
The ALT Window displays altitude selected
with the altitude selector. The window Next Section
never displays dashes, even when CLB or

DES is engaged.
L OCATION
Flight Control Unit | Altitude Window | Section 13.2.3
Flight Control Unit | Vertical Speed/Flight Path Angle Window | Section 13.2.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Speed/Mach Window
FD Display Mode
ALT Window
V/S / FPA Window
V ERTICAl S pEED /F lIGHT P ATH A NGlE W INDOw Selectors
Buttons
The V/S / FPA Window displays the selected

vertical speed or flight path angle. It Next Section
normally displays dashes when not in V/S

or FPA mode.
L OCATION
Flight Control Unit | Vertical Speed/Flight Path Angle Window | Section 13.2.4
Flight Control Unit | Speed/Mach Button | Section 13.2.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Buttons
SPD/MACH Button
Metric ALT Button
S pEEd /M ACh B uTTON AP Button
LOC Button
The SPD/MACH Button when pushed,
changes the value in the SPD/MACH A/THR Button
window from airspeed to Mach, and vice EXPED Button

versa.
APPR Button
APPR Button 2
Next Section
L OCATION
Flight Control Unit | Speed/Mach Button | Section 13.2.9
Flight Control Unit | HDG-V/S/TRK-FPA Button | Section 13.2.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Buttons
SPD/MACH Button
Metric ALT Button
HDG-V/S/TRK-FPA B uTTON AP Button
LOC Button
The HDG-V/S/TRK-FPA Button changes
between heading/vertical speed and A/THR Button
track/flight path angle display modes. EXPED Button
When HDG V/S mode is selected, HDG APPR Button
appears above the HDG/TRK window and APPR Button 2

V/S appears above the V/S FPA window.
Next Section
Flight director command bars can be
displayed on the PFD. L OCATION
When TRK FPA mode is selected, TRK
appears above the HDG/TRK window and
FPA appears above the V/S / FPA window.
Flight path vector is displayed on the PFD,
and the flight path director can be
displayed on the PFD.
Flight Control Unit | HDG-V/S/TRK-FPA Button | Section 13.2.10
Flight Control Unit | Auto Pilot Buttons | Section 13.2.12

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Buttons
SPD/MACH Button
Metric ALT Button
A uTO P IlOT B uTTONs AP Button
LOC Button
The AP Buttons engage/disengage selected
autopilot. Autopilot guidance modes are A/THR Button
selected on the FCU and MCDU. EXPED Button

Engagement is confirmed by the flight
APPR Button
mode annunciation (FMA) on the PFD.
APPR Button 2
The autopilots utilize ailerons, rudder,
Next Section
spoilers, and elevators to achieve the
desired flight profile. Rudder inputs, yaw L OCATION
damping, and rudder trim are computed by
the FACs and are automatic when an
autopilot is engaged.
The autopilot also provides inputs to the

nose wheel steering unit during the ROLL
OUT mode on an autoland approach.
Flight Control Unit | Auto Pilot Buttons | Section 13.2.12
Flight Control Unit | A/THR Button | Section 13.2.14

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT C ONTrOl U NIT S ECTION 13.2.14

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Buttons
SPD/MACH Button
Metric ALT Button
A/THR B uTTON AP Button
LOC Button
The A/THR Button arms or disengages the
auto thrust system. A/THR Button
EXPED Button
The autothrust system is an integral part of
the autoflight system. When engaged, the APPR Button
autothrust mode is determined by the APPR Button 2

active vertical mode of the autopilot/flight
Next Section
director system.
If both autopilots and flight directors are

L OCATION
off, the default mode of the autothrust
system is SPEED. Autothrust modes are
indicated in the first column of the FMA.
Refer to ATHR FMA definitions 13.3.56 for
detailed autothrust information.
Flight Control Unit | A/THR Button | Section 13.2.14
Flight Control Unit | Expedite Button | Section 13.2.15

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Buttons
SPD/MACH Button
Metric ALT Button
E xpEdITE B uTTON AP Button
LOC Button
The EXPED Button engages the EXPED
mode to reach the altitude set in the A/THR Button
altitude window with maximum vertical EXPED Button

gradient. Automatically engages managed
APPR Button
speed. Airspeed is green dot during climb,
and .80M/340 KIAS during descent. To APPR Button 2
disengage EXPED, select new vertical mode Next Section

or selected speed.
L OCATION
EXP CLB is not recommended above FL 250
because the Mach corresponding to green
dot is too low.
Flight Control Unit | Expedite Button | Section 13.2.15
Flight Control Unit | APPR Button | Section 13.2.16

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Buttons
SPD/MACH Button
Metric ALT Button
APPR B uTTON AP Button
LOC Button
The APPR Button Arms, engages, or
disengages the following modes: CAUTION A/THR Button
Do not arm the ILS APPR mode above EXPED Button

LOC and G/S modes if an ILS
8000 feet AGL. Radio altimeter signals
approach has been selected via the APPR Button
are not available above this altitude
flight plan or RADIO NAV page or APPR Button 2
and with the APPR button armed, the
RMP (takes a minimum of 3 seconds
autopilot disengages at glideslope Next Section
after arming for the LOC and/or G/S
capture and the flight directors revert
to engage in the capture mode). L OCATION
to HDG-V/S.
APP NAV, FINAL, and FINAL APP
modes if a non-precision approach
has been selected from the MCDU
database.
Flight Control Unit | APPR Button | Section 13.2.16
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Lowest Selectable Speed | Section 8.3.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rImarY F lIgHT D IsplaY S YmBOls S ECTION 8.3.8

L OWEsT S ElECTaBlE S pEEd Previous Section
VLS is defined by the top of the amber strip PFD Symbols 1
along the speed scale. VLS is the minimum Flight Mode Annunciations
speed that provides an adequate margin VMAX

above stall. It is the slowest speed the auto
Next Flap Extend Speed
flight and auto thrust system will fly, if
engaged. It provides a 1.2 G low speed Over Speed Protection Symbol
buffet margin when above FL 200. During Target Airspeed Pointer

approach or below FL 200 provides a 1.23
VSTALL margin for landing. VLS on the PFD
Speed Trend Arrow
is a dynamic number computed by the
FACs based on airplane configuration and Min Flap Retraction Speed
load factor.
VLS in the MCDU is a static number Alpha Protection
generated by the FMGC based on predicted Alpha Maximum

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
landing weight and selected landing flap
PFD Symbols 2
configuration on the PERF APPR page (e.g.,
FLAPS 3 or FULL). PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Lowest Selectable Speed | Section 8.3.8
Engine Warning and System Displays | EWD During Start | Section 5.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

EWD D urINg S TArT Previous Section
The ignition system provides for engine EWD Prior to Start
start on the ground and restart in flight. It EWD During Start

consists of two identical independent
EWD After Start
circuits (channel A and B) for each engine.
Each FADEC controls its respective engine SD APU Page
igniters. SD APU Page 2
During an automatic start on the ground, SD Engine Page
only one igniter is used; the other igniter SD Engine Page 2

serves as a backup. The FADEC
SD Cruise Page
automatically alternates the use of the
igniters at each start. Ignition and fuel flow Next Section
are introduced approximately 30 seconds

after the ENG MASTER switch is selected
L OCATION
ON. The start valve closes and ignition cuts
off automatically when N2 reaches 43%.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
During a manual start or an inflight
automatic start, both igniters are used.
Engine Warning and System Displays | EWD During Start | Section 5.3.1
Engine Warning and System Displays | Engine System Display 2 | Section 5.3.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E NgINE S YsTEm D IsplAY 2 Previous Section
4. OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATION - EWD Prior to Start
Displays oil temperature in °C. The EWD During Start

indication pulses if oil temperature
EWD After Start
increases above 156°C and stops pulsing
when oil temperature decreases below SD APU Page
150°C. It becomes amber if the SD APU Page 2

temperature exceeds 156°C for more than
SD Engine Page
15 minutes, or instantaneously when above
165°C. SD Engine Page 2
SD Cruise Page
5. START VALVE INDICATION - Displays
position of start valve. A horizontal line Next Section
through the circle signifies the valve is fully

open. A vertical line signifies the valve is
L OCATION
fully closed.
6. IGN INDICATION - Displayed during start < PREVIOUS NEXT >

sequence. The selected igniters A or B or
AB are displayed when supplied.
7. ENGINE BLEED PRESSURE INDICATION -

Displays bleed pressure upstream from the
precooler. The value becomes amber below
21 PSI when N2 exceeds 10‰ with the
engine start valve not closed, or when
bleed over pressure is detected.
Engine Warning and System Displays | Engine System Display 2 | Section 5.3.6
Engine Warning and System Displays | Cruise Page | Section 5.3.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NGINE W ArNING AND S YsTEM D IsplAYs S ECTION 5.3.7

C ruIsE S YsTEM D IsplAY Previous Section
The Cruise Page is normally displayed for all EWD Prior to Start
phases of flight. Other system displays will EWD During Start

automatically appear for ecam faults or
EWD After Start
other system changes such as flight control
check during taxi or landing gear down SD APU Page
during an approach. SD APU Page 2
SD Engine Page
SD Engine Page 2
SD Cruise Page
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Engine Warning and System Displays | Cruise Page | Section 5.3.7
Landing Gear Panel | Auto Brake Switches | Section 12.5.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANdING G EAr P ANEl S ECTION 12.5.2

A uTO B rAkE S WITCHEs Previous Section
LO - Low may be LG Indicator Lights
selected for Brake Fan Switch

landing. If the
Auto Brake Switches
deceleration rate
from reverse thrust is not adequate, A/Skid and N/W Steering
progressive pressure is applied to the LG Schematic

brakes 4 seconds after ground spoiler
Next Section
deployment to provide the selected
deceleration rate. L OCATION
MAX - Maximum is normally selected for
takeoff. During an aborted takeoff,
maximum brake pressure is applied when < PREVIOUS NEXT >
ground spoiler deployment occurs.

ON - The AUTO/BRK Switches arm the
MED - Medium may be selected for landing. required deceleration rate. The ON light
If the deceleration rate from reverse thrust illuminates blue to indicate positive arming
is not adequate, progressive pressure is (LO, MED, or MAX).
applied to the brakes 2 seconds after
ground spoiler deployment to provide the
selected deceleration rate.
DECEL - The DECEL light illuminates green

when actual airplane deceleration
corresponds to 80% of the selected rate.
Landing Gear Panel | Auto Brake Switches | Section 12.5.2
Landing Gear Panel | Landing Gear Schematic | Section 12.5.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANDING G EAR P ANEl S ECTION 12.5.4

L ANDING G EAR S CHEMATIC Previous Section
LG Indicator Lights
Brake Fan Switch
Auto Brake Switches
A/Skid and N/W Steering
LG Schematic
Next Section
L OCATION
Landing Gear Panel | Landing Gear Schematic | Section 12.5.4
Landing Gear Lever | Down Arrow | Section 12.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANdINg G EAr L EVEr S ECTION 12.4.1

D OwN A rrOw Previous Section
The Down Arrow illuminates red with Description
associated ECAM L/G GEAR NOT DOWN Down Arrow

warning if the landing gear is not down
Next Section
with any of the following:
Radio altitude below 750 feet with

L OCATION
power back (regardless of flaps)
Radio altitude below 750 feet and
Flaps 3 or FULL selected (regardless
of power)
Flaps 3 or FULL selected with both
radio altimeters inoperative
All three conditions trigger a continuous

repetitive chime (CRC) in the cockpit. The
chime can be silenced by pressing the
EMER CANC key.
Landing Gear Lever | Down Arrow | Section 12.4.1
Brakes and Accumulator Indicator | Brake Pressure Indication | Section 12.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
B rAkEs ANd A CCuMulATOr I NdICATOr S ECTION 12.1.1

B rAkE P rEssurE I NdICATION Previous Section
YELLOW BRAKE PRESSURE INDICATION - Accumulator Pressure
The brake pressure indication displays the Brake Pressure

yellow hydraulic system pressure that is
Next Section
supplied to the left and right brakes.
Normally the green system is providing L OCATION
hydraulic pressure for normal brakes.
When the parking brake is set to ON, the
yellow hydraulic system is providing
parking brake pressure. Click on link to see
Schematic Parking Brake On. When the In the last three cases, alternate braking is
barking brake is set to OFF, the pressure available but without antiskid. When
indication is zero pressure if the green braking without antiskid, pedal pressure
system is supplying brake pressure. must be controlled to prevent wheel lockup
and brake pressure limited to a maximum
ALTERNATE BRAKES - The yellow hydraulic
of 1000 PSI on the BRAKES and ACCU
system automatically provides alternate
PRESS indicator.
brakes when:
Green hydraulic pressure is

insufficient
Electrical power has failed
The BSCU has failed, or
The A/SKID & N/W STRG switch is
selected OFF
Brakes and Accumulator Indicator | Brake Pressure Indication | Section 12.1.1
Flight Mode Annunciations | SRS | Section 13.3.16

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT M OdE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.16

V ErTICal M OdE - SRS Previous Section
The Speed Reference System for takeoff is: A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
ALT
Armed when V2 is entered in the
ALT CST
MCDU and the Flap lever is not at 0
Engaged by selecting TO/GA or by V/S -500
selecting FLX/MCT with a FLEX FPA -3.0

temperature setting
EXP CLB
For all other phases, engaged by selecting EXP DES

TO/GA when the FLAPS lever is not at 0. At
G/S
least one autopilot or flight director must
be on. OP CLB
OP DES
SRS commands pitch to maintain:
CLB
Takeoff phase, 2 engines: V2 + 10
DES
Takeoff phase, 1 engine: Speed
existing at the time of engine failure FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
but not lower than V2 LAND
Go-around phase: Speed existing at Next Section

the time of the go-around, but not
lower than VAPP
SRS allows speed to decrease to maintain a

minimum of a 120 FPM climb.
Flight Mode Annunciations | SRS | Section 13.3.16
Flight Mode Annunciations | RWY | Section 13.3.30

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L aTEral M OdE - RWY Previous Section
When thrust levers are set to TOGA or FLEX A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
RWY
thrust detent position, the RWY command HDG

guidance engages automatically at the
TRACK
beginning of the takeoff roll, and the RWY
annunciation is displayed if the runway has LOC
an operational localizer. NAV
It provides lateral guidance during the RWY TRK
takeoff roll up to 30 feet AGL. Ground roll GA TRK

guidance (yaw) command bar is also
Next Section
displayed on the PFD. The departure
runway localizer is tuned automatically
when the departure runway is entered in
the MCDU.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | RWY | Section 13.3.30
Flight Mode Annunciations | CAT 1 or 2 | Section 13.3.38

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A pprOaCh C apaBIlITIEs - CAT 1 Or CAT 2 SINGLE Previous Section
When CAT 1 SINGLE or CAT 2 SINGLE A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
CAT 1 or CAT 2 SINGLE
annunciations are displayed, then the CAT 3 SINGLE

airplane is capable of a CAT I non-autoland
CAT 3 DUAL
ILS approach (autopilot connected).
DH XXX
A CAT 1 annunciation is displayed during an
NO DH
ILS approach and when the autopilot is
disconnected and the APPR button is MDA XXX
selected. Next Section
CAT 3 SINGLE annunciations are normally

displayed during an ILS approach when one
autopilot is engaged and the APPR button is
selected.
CAT 3 DUAL annunciations are normally

displayed during an ILS approach when
both autopilots are engaged and the APPR
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
button is selected.
Flight Mode Annunciations | CAT 1 or 2 | Section 13.3.38
Flight Mode Annunciations | AP 1 + 2 | Section 13.3.45

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT M ODE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.45

AP S TaTus - AP 1 + 2 Previous Section
When AP 1+2 annunciation is displayed, A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT

AP/FD/ATHR Status
then autopilot 1 and 2 are engaged; AP 1 is AP 1 + 2

flying, autopilot 2 is standby.
AP 1
AP 2
1FD2
1FD-
-FD2
2FD-
-FD1
1FD1
2FD2
A/THR Armed
A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Special Messages
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | AP 1 + 2 | Section 13.3.45
Flight Mode Annunciations | VERT DISCON AHEAD | Section 13.3.67

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT M OdE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.67

S pECIal M EssaGEs - V ErT D IsCON A hEad Previous Section
DES mode is engaged and: A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT

AP/FD/ATHR Status
Special Messages
A TOO STEEP path exists on the next
leg and MACH SEL
The airplane is less than 30 seconds SPEED SEL

from the TOO STEEP path segment
MORE DRAG
VERT DISCON AHEAD message also appears SET GREEN DOT SPEED
in the MCDU.
SET MANAGE SPEED
SET HOLD SPEED
USE MAN PITCH TRIM
MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY
CHECK APP SEL
DECELERATE
VERT DISCON AHEAD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | VERT DISCON AHEAD | Section 13.3.67
Flight Mode Annunciations | MAN FLX | Section 13.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - MAN FLX Previous Section
When the thrust levers are manually set in A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
the FLX/MCT detent and at least one flight MAN FLX

director is set to ON:
MAN MCT
The auto thrust system is armed MAN THR

Engines power is advanced to the
THR MCT
FLEX TO TEMP thrust setting, and
"MAN FLX" annunciation is displayed THR CLB
THR LVR
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | MAN FLX | Section 13.3.1
Flight Mode Annunciations | MAN MCT | Section 13.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - MAN MCT Previous Section
With the most forward thrust lever in the A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
MCT detent, the auto thrust system is MAN FLX

armed, the maximum available thrust is
MAN MCT
MCT, and the "MAN MCT" annunciation is
displayed. The MCT thrust is only available MAN THR
in flight with both engines operating. THR MCT
THR CLB
THR LVR
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | MAN MCT | Section 13.3.2
Flight Mode Annunciations | MAN THR | Section 13.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - MAN THR Previous Section
Autothrust system is armed with the most A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
forward thrust lever above the CL detent MAN FLX

(both engines operating) or above the MCT
MAN MCT
detent (single engine operating), but not in
a detent. MAN THR
THR MCT
THR CLB
THR LVR
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | MAN THR | Section 13.3.3
Flight Mode Annunciations | THR MCT | Section 13.3.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - THR MCT Previous Section
The most forward thrust lever is in the MCT A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
detent. Auto thrust system commands MCT MAN FLX

thrust only (single engine operating).
MAN MCT
MAN THR
THR MCT
THR CLB
THR LVR
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | THR MCT | Section 13.3.4
Flight Mode Annunciations | THR CLB | Section 13.3.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - THR CLB Previous Section
The THR CLB annunciation is displayed A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
when the most forward thrust lever is MAN FLX

placed in the CLB detent. The auto thrust
MAN MCT
system commands CLB thrust only.
MAN THR
THR MCT
THR CLB
THR LVR
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | THR CLB | Section 13.3.5
Flight Mode Annunciations | Thr Lvr | Section 13.3.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - THR LVR Previous Section
The THR LVR annunciation is displayed A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
when both thrust levers are below the CL MAN FLX

detent or the operative thrust lever is
MAN MCT
below the MCT detent (single engine
operating). MAN THR
THR MCT
Available thrust to auto thrust system is
limited to thrust lever position rather than THR CLB
the normal CLB or MCT thrust detent THR LVR

position.
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | Thr Lvr | Section 13.3.6
Flight Mode Annunciations | THR IDLE | Section 13.3.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - THR IDLE Previous Section
The THR IDLE annunciation is displayed A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
when the auto thrust system commands MAN FLX

idle thrust and the the most forward thrust
MAN MCT
lever is in the engagement range.
MAN THR
THR MCT
THR CLB
THR LVR
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | THR IDLE | Section 13.3.7
Flight Mode Annunciations | A FLOOR | Section 13.3.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - A FLOOR Previous Section
The amber boxed A FLOOR annunciation is A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
displayed when the speed is between MAN FLX

ALPHA Max and ALPHA Protection, then the
MAN MCT
auto thrust system commands TO/GA
thrust regardless of thrust lever position. MAN THR
ALPHA FLOOR occurs at a predetermined THR MCT

angle of attack.
THR CLB
The Alpha FLOOR engaged mode changes to THR LVR

TOGA LK when the Alpha FLOOR conditions
THR IDLE
no longer exist.
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | A FLOOR | Section 13.3.8
Flight Mode Annunciations | TOGA LK | Section 13.3.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - TOGA LK Previous Section
The amber boxed TOGA LK annunciation is A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
displayed when A FLOOR conditions no MAN FLX

longer exist (speed equal to or greater than
MAN MCT
ALPHA Protection) and TO/GA thrust is still
engaged. MAN THR
THR MCT
To recover thrust control the auto thrust
system must be disengaged. THR CLB
THR LVR
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | TOGA LK | Section 13.3.9
Flight Mode Annunciations | SPEED | Section 13.3.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - SPEED Previous Section
The SPEED annunciation is displayed when A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
the AP/FD vertical mode is in ALT, V/S, or a MAN FLX

vertical approach mode (G/S, FINAL APP,
MAN MCT
etc) and the most forward thrust lever is in
the engagement range. The auto thrust MAN THR
system varies thrust to maintain speed THR MCT

(managed or selected SPEED mode).
THR CLB
THE A/THR also defaults to the SPEED mode THR LVR

if both autopilots and flight directors are
THR IDLE
OFF.
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | SPEED | Section 13.3.10
Flight Mode Annunciations | MACH | Section 13.3.11

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - MACH Previous Section
The MACH annunciation is displayed when A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
the AP/FD vertical mode is in ALT, ALT MAN FLX

CRZ, or V/S and the most forward thrust
MAN MCT
lever is in the engagement range. The auto
thrust system varies thrust to maintain MAN THR
indicated mach number (managed or THR MCT

selected MACH mode).
THR CLB
The A/THR also defaults to the MACH or THR LVR

SPEED mode if both autopilots and flight
THR IDLE
directors are OFF.
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | MACH | Section 13.3.11
Flight Mode Annunciations | LVR ASYM | Section 13.3.12

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - LVR ASYM Previous Section
One thrust lever is in CL or MCT/FLX detent, A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
and the other one is not (2 engines only). MAN FLX
MAN MCT
MAN THR
THR MCT
THR CLB
THR LVR
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | LVR ASYM | Section 13.3.12
Flight Mode Annunciations | LVR CLB | Section 13.3.13

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - LVR CLB Previous Section
Flashes white to prompt setting thrust A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
levers in the CL detent. Automatically MAN FLX

appears at takeoff or go-around at thrust
MAN MCT
reduction altitude. The MASTER CAUT lights
flash and a single chime sounds every 5 MAN THR
seconds when the thrust lever is aft of the THR MCT

CL detent.
THR CLB
THR LVR
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | LVR CLB | Section 13.3.13
Flight Mode Annunciations | LVR MCT | Section 13.3.14

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - LVR MCT Previous Section
Flashes white to prompt setting the A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
MAN TOGA
operating thrust lever in the MCT detent. MAN FLX

Automatically appears as part of the
MAN MCT
takeoff or missed approach profile at green
dot speed if EO CLR is present. The MAN THR
MASTER CAUTION lights flash and a single THR MCT

chime sounds every 5 seconds when the
THR CLB
thrust lever is aft of the FLX/MCT detent.
THR LVR
THR IDLE
A. FLOOR
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | LVR MCT | Section 13.3.14
Flight Mode Annunciations | THR LK | Section 13.3.15

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT - THR LK Previous Section
THR LK annunciation flashes amber A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT

MAN TOGA
indicating A/THR disconnection due to the MAN FLX

failure of the auto thrust system (or the
MAN MCT
FCU A/THR button being deselected) with
both thrust levers in the CL detent, or one MAN THR
in the FLX/MCT detent (engine out). The THR MCT

MASTER CAUTION lights flash and a single
THR CLB
chime sounds every 5 seconds. The thrust
is locked at its current setting. Moving the THR LVR
thrust levers out of CL or MCT removes all THR IDLE

warnings and gives the pilot manual thrust
A. FLOOR
control.
TOGA LK
SPEED
MACH
LVR ASYM
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LVR CLB
LVR MCT
THR LK
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | THR LK | Section 13.3.15
Airplane General | Turning Radius | Section 1.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A320 T URNING R aDIUs S ECTION 1.1.1

Previous Section
A320 Dimensions
A320 Turning Radius
Probe Locations
Antenna Locations
Exterior Doors
Ground Service
Next Section
Airplane General | Turning Radius | Section 1.1.1
Airplane General | Exterior Doors | Section 1.1.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A320 E XTERIOR D OORs S ECTION 1.1.4

Previous Section
A320 Dimensions
A320 Turning Radius
Probe Locations
Antenna Locations
Exterior Doors
Ground Service
Next Section
Airplane General | Exterior Doors | Section 1.1.4
Operating Limits | Pressure Altitude | Section 1.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

P REssURE A lTITUDE - O PERATING Previous Section
Airspeed Max
Maximum 39,100 feet
Pressure Altitude
P REssURE A lTITUDE - T AKEOFF AND L ANDING Max Weights
Wind Limits
Maximum 9,200 feet
Operating Speeds
Oxygen Pressure
Anti-Ice
Autoflight Limits
Next Section
Operating Limits | Pressure Altitude | Section 1.4.1
Operating Limits | Operating Speeds | Section 1.4.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

O PERATING S PEEDs Previous Section
Airspeed Max
Severe Turbulence

(Recommended) Pressure Altitude
Above 20,000 feet .76 Mach/275 KIAS Max Weights
Below 20,000 feet 250 KIAS Wind Limits
Operating Speeds
Best climb rate 280 KIAS
Oxygen Pressure
Best climb angle Green Dot

Anti-Ice
Turbulent air penetration speeds provide an optimum margin
between low and high speed buffets. Autoflight Limits
Next Section
Operating Limits | Operating Speeds | Section 1.4.4
Operating Limits | Oxygen Pressure | Section 1.4.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

O XYGEN P REssURE - M INIMUM Previous Section
Airspeed Max
Flight Deck 850 PSI
Pressure Altitude
Portable Bottle 1600 PSI
Max Weights
A dJUsTMENTs Wind Limits
Operating Speeds
OAT > 20°C + 3 PSI per 1°C above 20°C
Oxygen Pressure
OAT < 20°C - 3 PSI per 1°C below 20°C
For each unoccupied OMC seat: - 150 PSI from flight deck limit
Anti-Ice
Autoflight Limits
Next Section
Operating Limits | Oxygen Pressure | Section 1.4.5
Operating Limits | Airplane General Limits | Section 1.4.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A IRPlANE G ENERAl L IMITs Previous Section
Airspeed Max
W INDsHIElD W IPER O PERATION
Pressure Altitude
Maximum 230 KIAS Max Weights
Wind Limits
W INDOw O PEN - F lIGHT D ECk
Operating Speeds
Maximum 200 KIAS
Oxygen Pressure
D OOR O PERATION - P AssENGER Airplane General Limits
Anti-Ice
Maximum wind for passenger
65 knots
door operation Autoflight Limits
Next Section
Operating Limits | Airplane General Limits | Section 1.4.6
Operating Limits | Anti-Ice | Section 1.4.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
O pERaTING L IMITs S ECTION 1.4.7

A NTI -I CE Previous Section
Engine anti ice must be on during all Icing conditions exist in flight when: Airspeed Max
ground and flight operations when icing Pressure Altitude

Total air temperature 10°C or below
conditions exist or are anticipated, except
and Max Weights
during climb and cruise when temperature
Visible moisture in any form is
is below 40°C SAT. Wind Limits
present (i.e., clouds, fog/mist with
Operating Speeds
Engine anti ice must be on prior to and visibility of 1 mile or less, rain,
during descent in icing conditions, including snow, sleet, or ice crystals) Oxygen Pressure
temperatures below 40°C SAT. Airplane General Limits

Anti-ice and rain parameters include:
Icing conditions exist on the ground and for Anti-Ice
Wing anti ice is not permitted on the
takeoff when: Autoflight Limits
ground
Outside air temperature 10°C or Use of APU bleed air for wing Next Section
below anti ice is not permitted

Visible moisture in any form is
present (i.e., clouds, fog/mist with
visibility of 1 mile or less, rain,
snow, sleet, or ice crystals), or
While operating on ramps, taxiways,
or runways where surface snow,
standing water, or slush may be
ingested by the engines or freeze on
the engines, nacelles, or engine
sensor probes.
Operating Limits | Anti-Ice | Section 1.4.7
Operating Limits | Autoflight Limits | Section 1.4.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A UTOFlIGHT L IMITs Previous Section
Airspeed Max
A UTOlAND M INIMUMs
Pressure Altitude
Approach Aircraft Status Minimums Max Weights
CAT II - 100 feet DH Wind Limits
CAT III Fail Passive 50 feet DH Operating Speeds
Oxygen Pressure
CAT III Fail Operational 100 feet AH
A UTOPIlOT E NGAGED - M INIMUM H EIGHT
Anti-Ice
After takeoff (at least 5 seconds Autoflight Limits

100 feet AGL
after
liftoff
Next Section
Enroute 500 feet AGL
Nonprecision approaches At DA
Nonautoland ILS with CAT 1

160 feet AGL
FMA
Nonautoland ILS with CAT 2 or 3

80 feet AGL
FMA
Go-around 100 feet AGL
Circling Approaches MDA - 100 feet
A UTOlAND M AXIMUM W INDs
Headwind 30 Knots
Operating Limits | Autoflight Limits | Section 1.4.8
Tailwind 10 Knots
Crosswind 15 Knots
System Limits | Engine Parameters | Section 1.1.1.A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E NGINE P ARAMETERs Previous Section
Engine Limits
E NGINE O Il Q UANTITY
Engine Parameters
Minimum before start 17.0 quarts APU Limits
Minimum at idle RPM 12.0 quarts APU Parameters
Fuel Limits
Minimum 60 PSI
E NGINE O Il T EMpERATURE Landing Gear Limits

Minimum prior to start -40°C
Next Section
Minimum prior to exceeding idle -10°C
Minimum prior to takeoff 50°C
Maximum continous operation 155°C
Maximum for up to 15 minutes 165°C
E NGINE R EVERsE T HRUsT

Do not use reverse thrust during any taxi operations.
E NGINE S TARTER P REssURE
Minimum duct pressure while

Green
starter rotating (PSI)
System Limits | Engine Parameters | Section 1.1.1.A
System Limits | APU Limits | Section 1.1.1.B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

APU L IMITs Previous Section
Engine Limits
APU EGT aND R OTOr S pEED
Engine Parameters
Maximum 742°C APU Limits
At or above 25,000 feet: 982°C APU Parameters

Maximum EGT for Inflight Start:
Below 25,000 feet: 900°C Fuel Limits

Maximum Rotor Speed 107%
Landing Gear Limits
Next Section
System Limits | APU Limits | Section 1.1.1.B
System Limits | APU Parameters | Section 1.5.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

APU P aRaMETERs Previous Section
Engine Limits
APU A lTITuDEs - M aXIMuM
Engine Parameters
For APU start using battery APU Limits

25,000 feet
power only
APU Parameters
For APU start using normal
39,0001 feet Fuel Limits
electrics
Two-pack operation: 15,000 feet
One-pack operation 20,000 feet
Landing Gear Limits
For engine start 20,000 feet
1 APU start capability is improved below 31,000 feet.
Next Section
APU O Il Q uaNTITY
Minimum before start ECAM
APU ECAM Page LOW OIL LEVEL Message: The remaining oil
quantity allows for normal operation for approximately 10
hours.
APU O pERaTION
Do not start APU during fueling operations following an APU
automatic shutdown or failed start.
APU S TaRTER D uTY C YClE

System Limits | APU Parameters | Section 1.5.3
Required Cooling Time
Between each start attempt 1 Minute
After three consecutive start

60 Minutes
attempts
System Limits | Flight Control Parameters | Section 1.5.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

F lIGHT C ONTROl P ARAMETERs Previous Section
Engine Limits
A IRCRAfT T RIM
Engine Parameters
With the autopilot engaged, the aircraft is considered
APU Limits
properly trimmed if the rudder trim indication is between 1°
right and 2.3° left, provided the aircraft is in level flight at APU Parameters
approximately M.77, with symmetrical thrust and fuel Fuel Limits

distribution. No maintenance action is required if the rudder
trim indication is within these limits.
S pEED B RAKEs Landing Gear Limits

All meteorological conditions Do not use below 1000 feet AGL
Next Section
In flight with slats retracted Do not use below 200 KIASg
Speed brakes should not be extended more than one half

when below Mach .75 at altitudes above FL 310 to prevent
activation of the high angle of attack protection
System Limits | Flight Control Parameters | Section 1.5.6
System Limits | Landing Gear Limits | Section 1.5.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L ANDING G EAR L IMITs Previous Section
Engine Limits
L ANDING G EAR S PEED - M AXIMUM
Engine Parameters
Retraction – VLO 220 KIAS APU Limits
Extension – VLO1 250 KIAS APU Parameters
Fuel Limits
VLE 280 KIAS/.67 Mach
1Use Extension VLO - 10 KIAS for landing gear extension Flight Control Parameters
Landing Gear Limits

T AXI S PEED - M AXIMUM (A320)
When takeoff weight is higher than 167,500 pounds, do not Next Section
exceed 20 knots
in a turn.
T IRE S PEED
Maximum 195 knots groundspeed
B RAkE T EMPERATURE
Maximum for takeoff 300°C
L ANDING G EAR E XTENDED A lTITUDE
Maximum 25,000 feet MSL
System Limits | Landing Gear Limits | Section 1.5.7
System Limits | Warning System Parameters | Section 1.5.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

W ARNING S YsTEM P ARAMETERs Previous Section
Engine Limits
ECAM P ROCEDUREs A CCOMplIsHED UsING QRH M ANUAl
Engine Parameters
The following ECAM procedures are to be completed by reference to the QRH/Flight Manual
APU Limits
rather than following the ECAM presented on the E/WD. These procedures are labeled as
Special. APU Parameters
Fuel Limits
AIR ENG 1(2) BLEED ABNORMAL PR (Special)
AIR ENG 1(2) BLEED FAULT (Special) Flight Control Limits
AVIONICS SMOKE (Special) Flight Control Parameters

F/CTL SPLR FAULT (Special)
Landing Gear Limits
Next Section
System Limits | Warning System Parameters | Section 1.5.8
External Service Interphone Panel | External Power Not In Use | Section 2.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E xTErNAl S ErvICE I NTErphONE P ANEl S ECTION 2.3.1

E xTErNAl P OwEr N OT IN U sE AND A vAIlABlE L IghTs Previous Section
EXT PWR NOT IN Flight Interphone Jack
USE LIGHT - The Ext Power Available Lights

NOT IN USE light
Cockpit Call Light
illuminates white
when external ADIRU and Vent Light
power is connected but is not APU Fire Light

supplying electrical power.
Light Test Button
EXT PWR AVAIL LIGHT - The external Cockpit Call Button

power AVAIL light illuminates amber
Reset Button
when external electrical power
parameters are normal. APU Shut Off Switch
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
L OCATION
External Service Interphone Panel | External Power Not In Use | Section 2.3.1
External Service Interphone Panel | Cockpit Call Light | Section 2.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C OCKpIT C All L IGHT Previous Section
When the cockpit calls Flight Interphone Jack
the mechanic or ground, Ext Power Available Lights

the call light illuminates
Cockpit Call Light
blue and an external
horn also sounds. ADIRU and Vent Light
APU Fire Light
Light Test Button
Cockpit Call Button
Reset Button
APU Shut Off Switch
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
L OCATION
External Service Interphone Panel | Cockpit Call Light | Section 2.3.2
External Service Interphone Panel | APU Fire Light | Section 2.3.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

APU F IrE L IGHT Previous Section
The APU fire light Flight Interphone Jack
illuminates when an APU Ext Power Available Lights

fire is detected on the
Cockpit Call Light
ground. An external
warning horn sounds. the APU fire ADIRU and Vent Light
extinguisher discharges 3 seconds APU Fire Light

automatically after the fire warnings
Light Test Button
activate. The APU FIRE light
extinguishes and the external Cockpit Call Button
warning horn silences when the fire Reset Button

is extinguished.
APU Shut Off Switch
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
L OCATION
External Service Interphone Panel | APU Fire Light | Section 2.3.4
External Service Interphone Panel | Light Test Button | Section 2.3.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L IGHT T EsT B uTTON Previous Section
Pushing the light test Flight Interphone Jack
button illuminates the Ext Power Available Lights

APU Fire, ADIRU and
Cockpit Call Light
Vent, and External
Power lights. ADIRU and Vent Light
APU Fire Light
Light Test Button
Cockpit Call Button
Reset Button
APU Shut Off Switch
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
L OCATION
External Service Interphone Panel | Light Test Button | Section 2.3.5
External Service Interphone Panel | Cockpit Call Button | Section 2.3.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C OCkpIT C All B uTTON Previous Section
The COCKPIT CALL Flight Interphone Jack
BUTTON initiates a call Ext Power Available Lights

to the cockpit. When
Cockpit Call Light
pushed, the MECH light
flashes on the pilot's audio control ADIRU and Vent Light
panel and a buzzer sounds in the APU Fire Light

cockpit.
Light Test Button
Cockpit Call Button
Reset Button
APU Shut Off Switch
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
L OCATION
External Service Interphone Panel | Cockpit Call Button | Section 2.3.6
External Service Interphone Panel | Reset Button | Section 2.3.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

R EsET B uTTON Previous Section
When RESET button is Flight Interphone Jack
pushed the COCKPIT Ext Power Available Lights

CALL light extinguishes.
Cockpit Call Light
ADIRU and Vent Light
APU Fire Light
Light Test Button
Cockpit Call Button
Reset Button
APU Shut Off Switch
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
L OCATION
External Service Interphone Panel | Reset Button | Section 2.3.7
External Service Interphone Panel | APU Shut Off Switch | Section 2.3.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

APU S huT O ff S WITCh Previous Section
The guarded APU SHUT Flight Interphone Jack
OFF switch shuts down Ext Power Available Lights

the APU and silences
Cockpit Call Light
the external fire
warning when pushed. ADIRU and Vent Light
APU Fire Light
Light Test Button
Cockpit Call Button
Reset Button
APU Shut Off Switch
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
L OCATION
External Service Interphone Panel | APU Shut Off Switch | Section 2.3.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

D uAl AC B us F AIlurE S pEEd 50 Previous Section
When the speed is below 50 knots IAS, the Normal Power
AC ESS bus is no longer powered and the APU Power

CRTs are lost.
The DC ESS bus remains powered which External Power Only

provides communiction capability
AC 1 Bus Failure
TR 1 Failure
Generator Line 1
Dual AC Bus Failure
Dual AC Bus Failure GD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCATION
Electrical System Displays | APU Power | Section 3.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

APU P OWEr Previous Section
The APU can supply electrical power for the Normal Power
entire airplane on the ground. A receptacle APU Power

forward of the nose wheel well is used to
connect external power to the airplane.
External power can be used instead of APU External Power Only
power; however, both cannot be used AC 1 Bus Failure

simultaneously.
TR 1 Failure
Electrical SD example is with APU operating. Generator Disconnect
Generator Line 1
Dual AC Bus Failure
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Electrical System Displays | APU Power | Section 3.1.1
Electrical System Displays | External Power Available | Section 3.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E xTErNAl P OWEr A vAIlABlE Previous Section
The main AC system is divided into two Normal Power
electrical channels (1 and 2); they cannot APU Power

be paralleled. Each AC bus is normally
supplied by an IDG on the associated
engine. The IDG incorporates a generator, External Power Only
a constant speed drive, and the drive oil AC 1 Bus Failure

system in a single unit. IDG oil is cooled by
TR 1 Failure
a fuel/oil heat exchanger. The IDG can be
disconnected from an engine by an IDG Generator Disconnect
disconnect switch, but can only be Generator Line 1

reconnected on the ground.
Dual AC Bus Failure
Engine Generators (IDGs) are providing Next Section

power and external power is available in
this example. L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Electrical System Displays | External Power Available | Section 3.1.2
Electrical System Displays | External Power Only | Section 3.1.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E xTErNAl P OWEr O NlY Previous Section
Although the two AC channels are normally Normal Power
isolated, a bus tie priority system provides APU Power

for automatic interconnection of both
channels when one engine driven generator
is powering the airplane, or when external External Power Only
power or the APU is supplying electrical AC 1 Bus Failure

power.
TR 1 Failure
External power is connected and the Generator Disconnect

batteries are charging in is this SD
Generator Line 1
example.
Dual AC Bus Failure
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Electrical System Displays | External Power Only | Section 3.1.3
Electrical System Displays | TR 1 Failure | Section 3.1.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

TR 1 F AIlurE Previous Section
DC channels are normally isolated, but loss Normal Power
of any TR results in automatically APU Power

interconnecting through the DC BAT bus to
power both DC channels.
External Power Only
In the event a TR fails or is unpowered, DC
AC 1 Bus Failure
buses 1 and 2 will interconnect through the
DC battery bus and DC essential power will TR 1 Failure
disconnect from the DC battery bus. DC Generator Disconnect

essential power will then be provided by
Generator Line 1
the essential TR, which is powered by the
AC essential bus. Dual AC Bus Failure
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Electrical System Displays | TR 1 Failure | Section 3.1.5
Electrical System | AC Power | Section 3.7.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrICal S YsTEM S ECTION 3.7.1

AC P OwEr Previous Section
The main AC electrical power sources are: TThe APU can supply electrical power for Description
the entire aircraft on the ground. A AC Power

Left and right engine integrated drive receptacle forward of the nose wheel well is
generators (IDGs) (90-KVA each) used to connect external power to the
Batteries
APU generator (90-KVA) aircraft. External power can be used Circuit Breakers
External power instead of APU power; however, both DC Power
The main AC system is divided into two cannot be used simultaneously.

electrical channels (1 and 2); they cannot
Although the two AC channels are normally Essential Power
be paralleled. Each AC bus is normally
isolated, a bus tie priority system provides
supplied by an IDG on the associated Smoke Configuration
for automatic interconnection of both
engine. The IDG incorporates a generator,
channels when one engine driven Ground Services Busses
a constant speed drive, and the drive oil
generator is powering the aircraft, or when Next Section
system in a single unit. IDG oil is cooled by
external power or the APU issupplying
a fuel/oil heat exchanger. The IDG can be
electrical power.
disconnected from an engine by an IDG
disconnect switch, but can only be The normal priority for supplying electrical
reconnected on the ground. power to AC bus 1 and 2 is:
The number 1 AC bus normally supplies 1. Engine generators (i.e., GEN 1 to AC

power to TR 1, and to the AC ESS bus that BUS 1, GEN 2 to AC BUS 2)
supplies power to the AC ESS SHED bus. 2. External power (when EXT PWR
The number 2 AC bus normally supplies switch is ON)
power to TR 2 and to the AC GND/FLT bus. 3. APU
4. Remaining engine generator (i.e.,
GEN 2 to AC BUS 1)
Electrical System | AC Power | Section 3.7.1
Electrical System | Batteries | Section 3.7.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E LECTRICaL S YsTEM S ECTION 3.7.2

B aTTERIEs Previous Section
Two batteries, BAT 1 and BAT 2, are Description
installed. They are not connected in AC Power

parallel, and each is connected directly to
Batteries
its respective HOT BAT bus. Each battery
has its own battery charge limiter that Circuit Breakers
monitors battery charging and controls its DC Power

battery contactor. The batteries can be
charged when DC power is supplied to the
DC BAT bus. In addition to powering their Essential Power
respective HOT BAT busses, the batteries Smoke Configuration

can also supply power for the following:
APU starting Next Section

Static inverter (used in the
emergency electrical configuration)
DC ESS bus
On the ground, the batteries have an
Provided BAT 1 and 2 switches are ON, the automatic cutoff logic that prevents them
batteries are automatically connected to from being completely discharged. In flight,
the DC BAT bus when the APU is being battery endurance is approximately 22
started, when the batteries are being minutes.
charged, and on the ground below 100
knots when AC buses 1 and 2 are both
unpowered.
Electrical System | Batteries | Section 3.7.2
Electrical System | Circuit Breakers | Section 3.7.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E LECTrICaL S ysTEm S ECTION 3.7.3

C IrCUIT B rEaKErs Previous Section
Circuit breakers are installed to prevent Description
damage to systems or components from AC Power

electrical faults and can be used to isolate
Batteries
equipment during maintenance. They can
also be used to reset computer faults not Circuit Breakers
resolved after accomplishing ECAM DC Power

procedure(s) or to remove power from a
system that does not have a dedicated
power switch (e.g., FMGC). Essential Power
Smoke Configuration
MONITORED CBs - There are two types of
circuit breakers (CBs): monitored and Ground Services Busses
non monitored. Color coding is used for Next Section

identification. Green CBs are monitored by
the electronic centralized and aircraft On aircraft without yellow-guarded circuit
monitoring (ECAM) system. The ECAM C/B breakers, the required action is covered in
TRIPPED warning appears when a the appropriate irregular procedure. Red
monitored circuit breaker is pulled/tripped guards are installed on wing tip brakes CBs
for more than 1 minute. to preclude cycling the wing tip brakes in
case of asymmetry.
NON-MONITORED CBs - Black CBs, and
yellow-guarded CBs (if installed), are not
monitored by the ECAM system. Yellow-
guarded CBs may be pulled when flying on
battery power only.
Electrical System | Circuit Breakers | Section 3.7.3
Electrical System | DC Power | Section 3.7.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E LECTrICaL S YsTEM S ECTION 3.7.4

DC P OWEr Previous Section
The main DC system is divided into two Description
sides, each supplied by its associated main AC Power

AC bus through a transformer rectifier
Batteries
(TR). The two sides are normally isolated.
TR 1 normally powers DC bus 1 and the DC Circuit Breakers
battery bus. TR 2 normally powers DC bus DC Power

2. Batteries are charged automatically
through the DC battery bus.
Essential Power
The DC battery bus normally provides
Smoke Configuration
essential DC power by powering the DC
essential bus and its respective DC Ground Services Busses
essential shed bus. Next Section
In the event a TR fails or is unpowered, DC

buses 1 and 2 will interconnect through the
DC battery bus and DC essential power will
disconnect from the DC battery bus. DC
essential power will then be provided by
the essential TR, which is powered by the
AC essential bus. See TR 1 Failure page
3.1.5.
Electrical System | DC Power | Section 3.7.4
Electrical System | Emergency Electrical Configuration | Section 3.7.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrICal S YsTEm S ECTION 3.7.5

E mErgENCY E lECTrICal C ONfIguraTION Previous Section
A ram air turbine (RAT) automatically On later 320s and all 319s, the emergency Description
extends (see RAT and Emer Gen, page generator operates until touchdown AC Power
3.3.2) if both AC busses 1 and 2 lose (greater than 125 knots), regardless of
Batteries
electrical power above 100 knots; however, landing gear position.
a minimum airspeed of 140 knots is Circuit Breakers
required to provide sufficient blue hydraulic After the emergency generator drops off
DC Power
pressure to operate the emergency line, power is transferred to the batteries.
generator. The RAT pressurizes the blue The RAT can be stowed only on the ground. Emergency Electrical Config
hydraulic system, which powers the Essential Power

To view busses powered in the emergency
emergency generator via a hydraulic
electrical configuration see Dual AC Bus Smoke Configuration
motor. A generator control unit (GCU)
Failure, page 3.1.8. Ground Services Busses
controls the generator speed, voltage,
generator line contactor and start up. The Next Section
emergency generator is automatically NOTE

coupled to the electrical system after RAT
The RAT can also be extended by
extension is complete.
pressing the RAT MAN ON switch,
On earlier 320s, the emergency generator located on the hydraulic panel;
operates only with the landing gear however, this switch is dedicated to
retracted. On these aircraft, if the landing pressurizing the blue hydraulic system
gear is extended and AC busses 1 and 2 only and does not provide emergency
lose power, the emergency generator does electrical power.
not operate until the nose gear is retracted
and the EMER ELEC PWR MAN ON switch is
selected on. If the nose gear is extended
after RAT deployment, the emergency
generator drops off line and cannot be
Electrical System | Emergency Electrical Configuration | Section 3.7.5
manually recoupled until the nose gear is
retracted.
Electrical System | Essential Power | Section 3.7.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrICal S YsTEM S ECTION 3.7.6

E ssENTIal P OWEr Previous Section
The AC and DC ESS busses provide power Description
to critical instruments, communication, and AC Power

navigation equipment. The AC and DC ESS
Batteries
SHED busses provide power to equipment
not essential for the safe completion of the Circuit Breakers
flight. They are shed when the aircraft is on DC Power

battery power to preserve battery
endurance for critical items. See Dual AC
Bus Failure page 3.1.8. Essential Power
Smoke Configuration
The AC ESS bus is normally powered by AC
bus 1. The AC ESS SHED bus is powered by Ground Services Busses
the AC ESS bus. In case of AC bus 1 Next Section

failure, the AC ESS bus can be manually
transferred to AC bus 2 by selecting the AC
ESS FEED switch on the overhead panel to
ALTN. On aircraft that are modified with There are four essential busses:
the addition of an automatic switching
AC ESS
system, the switch should not need to be
AC ESS SHED
pushed.
DC ESS
The DC ESS bus is normally powered by the DC ESS SHED
DC BAT bus. It can also be powered by the
ESS TR if TR 1 or TR 2 fails. The DC ESS
SHED bus is powered by the DC ESS bus.
Electrical System | Essential Power | Section 3.7.6
Electrical System | Smoke Configuration | Section 3.7.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrICAl S YsTEm S ECTION 3.7.7

S mOkE C ONfIgUrATION Previous Section
If avionics smoke is detected, ECAM directs Description
the aircraft be placed in the smoke AC Power

configuration. This requires placing the
Batteries
GEN 1 LINE switch on the EMER ELEC PWR
panel to OFF, see Gen 1 Line Switch page Circuit Breakers
3.3.1. DC Power
When this occurs, the GEN 1 line contactor Emergency Electrical Config
opens, GEN 2 powers AC busses 1 and 2 Essential Power

(main galley bus is shed) through the tie
Smoke Configuration
bus, and GEN 1 powers a fuel pump in each
wing tank. This permits removing AC power Ground Services Busses
from all busses during the AVIONICS Next Section

SMOKE ECAM procedure without removing
power from the fuel pumps. L OCATION
Electrical System | Smoke Configuration | Section 3.7.7
Electrical System | Ground Services Busses | Section 3.7.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrICal S YsTEm S ECTION 3.7.8

G rOuNd S ErVICEs B ussEs Previous Section
The GND/FLT service busses can be Description
powered on the ground using external AC Power

power without powering the entire aircraft.
Batteries
With external power plugged in and the
MAINT BUS switch in the forward cabin Circuit Breakers
ceiling placed to ON, power is supplied to DC Power

the AC GND/FLT bus and TR 2, which
powers the DC GND/FLT bus. The GND/FLT
busses are normally powered through AC Essential Power
bus 2 and DC bus 2 when the MAINT BUS Smoke Configuration

switch is OFF.
Next Section
Electrical System | Ground Services Busses | Section 3.7.8
Auto Thrust FMA | Retard Mode | Section 5.2.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

R ETArd M OdE Previous Section
At 40 ft. the flare mode engages, at 30 ft. FMA During Taxi
A/THR reduces thrust to idle, at 10 ft. a FMA During Takeoff

RETARD auto call out reminds you to
FMA at Rotation
manually set the thrust levers to idle. If
FLARE does not annunciate by 30 feet RA, FMA at THR Altitude
the airplane cannot autoland. A/THR Engaged In Flight
Alpha Floor
TOGA Lock
Thrust Lock
Retard Mode
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >

Auto Thrust FMA | Retard Mode | Section 5.2.8
Auto Thrust FMA | FMA During Takeoff | Section 5.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

FMA D urINg T AKEOff Previous Section
When the thrust lever is set in the FLX (or FMA During Taxi
TOGA) detent position during takeoff roll, FMA During Takeoff

the auto thrust system is armed.
FMA at Rotation
The FD speed reference system is engaged FMA at THR Altitude

(SRS FMA) and commands pitch to
maintain V2+10 knots.
Alpha Floor
Runway guidance is engaged (RWY FMA) if
TOGA Lock
an operational runway localizer is available.
Thrust Lock
The ATH/R status is confirmed armed when
Retard Mode
a blue color A/THR annunciation (right
column) is displayed. Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >

Auto Thrust FMA | FMA During Takeoff | Section 5.2.1
Auto Thrust FMA | FMA at Rotation | Section 5.2.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

FMA AT R OTATION Previous Section
At rotation the AP/FD lateral FMA changes FMA During Taxi
automatically form RWY to RWY TRK. The FMA During Takeoff

track mode engages at rotation or 30 feet
FMA at Rotation
AGL and the RWY TRK annunciation is
displayed automatically. RWY TRK mode FMA at THR Altitude
provides lateral guidance to maintain the A/THR Engaged In Flight

track being flown upon engagement.
Alpha Floor
If the Flight Control Unit (FCU) NAV mode is TOGA Lock

armed the navigation mode will
Thrust Lock
automatically engage after rotation as
indicated by NAV in the AP/FD FMA. The Retard Mode
FCU NAV mode can be manually engaged Next Section

by pushing the heading selector.
L OCATION
To engage the AP/FD to HDG the FCU's
heading selector must be pulled after < PREVIOUS NEXT >
rotation and the AP/FD FMA will change to
HDG, see FMA at THR Altitude.
Auto Thrust FMA | FMA at Rotation | Section 5.2.2
Auto Thrust FMA | FMA at Thrust Reduction Altitude | Section 5.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

FMA AT T hrusT R EduCTION A lTITudE Previous Section
At the thrust reduction altitude the ATHR FMA During Taxi
operation FMA (left column) LVR CLB FMA During Takeoff

flashes white to prompt setting thrust
FMA at Rotation
levers to the CLIMB detent position.
FMA at THR Altitude
In this example, HDG has also been
selected after rotation.
Alpha Floor
TOGA Lock
Thrust Lock
Retard Mode
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >

Auto Thrust FMA | FMA at Thrust Reduction Altitude | Section 5.2.3
Auto Thrust FMA | FMA A/THR Engaged In Flight | Section 5.2.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

FMA A/THR E NgAgED I N F lIghT Previous Section
A/THR is engaged when the thrust lever is FMA During Taxi
reduced from TOGA or MCT to the CLB FMA During Takeoff

detent.
FMA at Rotation
This is confirmed by the A/THR operation FMA at THR Altitude

FMA (left column) changing from TOGA or
MAN FLEX to THR CLB and by the A/THR
status (far right column) changing from a Alpha Floor
blue color A/THR (armed) to a white color TOGA Lock

A/THR (engaged).
Thrust Lock
Retard Mode
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >

Auto Thrust FMA | FMA A/THR Engaged In Flight | Section 5.2.4
Auto Thrust FMA | Alpha Floor | Section 5.2.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A lphA F lOOr Previous Section
The amber boxed A FLOOR annunciation is FMA During Taxi
displayed when the speed is between FMA During Takeoff

ALPHA Max and ALPHA Protection, and the
FMA at Rotation
auto thrust system commands TO/GA
thrust regardless of thrust lever position. FMA at THR Altitude
ALPHA FLOOR occurs at a predetermined A/THR Engaged In Flight

angle of attack.
Alpha Floor
The A FLOOR engaged mode changes to TOGA Lock

TOGA LK when A FLOOR conditions no
Thrust Lock
longer exist.
Retard Mode
The α floor function is not available below
Next Section
100 feet RA or during single engine
operation with flaps at CONF 1 or greater. L OCATION
Alpha floor protection is only available in
normal law. < PREVIOUS NEXT >

Auto Thrust FMA | Alpha Floor | Section 5.2.5
Auto Thrust FMA | TOGA Lock | Section 5.2.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A uTO T HrusT FMA S ECTION 5.2.6

TOGA L OCk Previous Section
The ALPA FLOOR annunciation changes to FMA During Taxi
an amber boxed TOGA LOCK annunciation FMA During Takeoff

when alpha floor conditions no longer exist
FMA at Rotation
(airspeed above alpha protection).
FMA at THR Altitude
TOGA thrust remains engaged whenver in
TOGA LOCK. To recover normal autothrust
control, the autothrust system must be Alpha Floor
disengaged. Reengaging the autothrust TOGA Lock

system will then operate normally.
Thrust Lock
Retard Mode
NOTE
Next Section
If an autothrust disconnect button is
pushed and held for more than 15 L OCATION
seconds, the autothrust system is
disconnected for the remainder of the < PREVIOUS NEXT >
flight. All autothrust functions,

including alpha floor, are lost. The
autothrust system can be regained
only during the next FMGC power-up.
Auto Thrust FMA | TOGA Lock | Section 5.2.6
Auto Thrust FMA | Thrust Lock | Section 5.2.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

T hrusT L OCk Previous Section
THR LK flashes once when thrust is FMA During Taxi
disconnected with thrust levers set below FMA During Takeoff

CLB detent.
FMA at Rotation
THR LK flashes continuously when thrust is FMA at THR Altitude

disconnected with thrust levers set in CLB
detent.
Alpha Floor
TOGA Lock
Thrust Lock
Retard Mode
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >

Auto Thrust FMA | Thrust Lock | Section 5.2.7
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Full Authority Digital Engine Control | Section 5.7.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
IAE V2527/V2522 E NGINEs S ECTION 5.7.1

F ULL A UTHOrITY D IGITaL E NGINE C ONTrOL Previous Section
The FADEC has full authority over the If the alternator fails, the FADEC switches Description
operation of the engine. It controls the over to aircraft electrical power FADEC
following: automatically. Aircraft data used for engine
management is transmitted to the FADEC
Fuel metering by an engine interface unit. Idle Control Modes
Engine limits
Ignition
Engine parameters transmission and The FADEC has two engine power setting
monitoring for flight deck indications modes: Oil System
Automatic and manual starting Start System

Normal
sequences
Thrust reversers Alternate Next Section
Fuel recirculation
Detection, isolation, and recording of
failures
FADEC cooling
See FADEC Schematic page 5.5.4
Each FADEC has two channels for

redundancy. Should the active channel fail,
the other channel takes control
automatically. The FADEC is powered by its
own alternator when N2 RPM increases
above 15%, or by the aircraft’s electrical
system when N2 decreases below 15%.
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Full Authority Digital Engine Control | Section 5.7.1
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Engine Power Setting Modes | Section 5.7.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E NGINE P OWER S ETTING M ODEs Previous Section
Description
N ORMAL C ONTROL M ODE (EPR)
FADEC
In the normal mode, the FADEC meters fuel
to maintain a reference EPR as the
controlling engine parameter. The Idle Control Modes
reference EPR is computed by the FADEC Ignition

as a function of thrust lever position, Additionally, the N1 mode can be manually Oil System
temperature, altitude, airspeed, and bleed selected by pressing the N1 MODE switch
configuration. The autothrust system is on the overhead panel. See Engine N1
Start System
available in the normal mode. Mode Switch page 5.6.1. Next Section
A LTERNATE C ONTROL M ODE (N1)

If any of the inputs required for normal
control mode are lost, the FADEC
automatically reverts to its alternate
control mode, which uses N1 as the
controlling engine parameter (EPR mode
inoperative). All autothrust functions,
including alpha floor, are lost. Depending
upon which specific inputs are lost, the
engine may revert to either of two N1
modes; N1 rated mode, or N1 unrated
mode.
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Engine Power Setting Modes | Section 5.7.2
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Idle Control Modes | Section 5.7.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

I dLE C ONTROL M OdEs Previous Section
The FADEC has three idle modes: Description
FADEC
M OdULaTEd I dLE Engine Power Setting Modes
Engine idle speed depends on bleed system Idle Control Modes

demands and ambient atmospheric
Ignition
conditions. Selected inflight when the
FLAPS lever is UP and on the ground when Oil System
not in reverse range. Start System
Next Section
A ppROaCH I dLE
Engine idle speed depends on altitude and is
selected when the FLAPS lever is out of the
UP position. Approach idle ensures rapid
acceleration from idle to go-around thrust
(i.e., the engine is spooled up).
R EVERsE I dLE
Selected on the ground when the thrust
lever is in the REV IDLE position. Reverse
idle thrust is slightly higher than forward
idle thrust.
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Idle Control Modes | Section 5.7.3
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Ignition | Section 5.7.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

I gNITION Previous Section
The ignition system provides for engine Description
start on the ground and restart in flight. It FADEC

consists of two identical independent
circuits (channel A and B) for each engine.
Each FADEC controls its respective engine Idle Control Modes
igniters. Ignition
AUTOMATIC START - During an automatic Oil System
start on the ground, only one igniter is Start System

If continuous ignition is required after the
used; the other igniter serves as a backup.
engines are started, the ENG MODE Next Section
The FADEC automatically alternates the use
selector must be cycled to NORM and then
of the igniters at each start. Ignition and
back to IGN/START.
fuel flow are introduced approximately 30
seconds after the ENG MASTER switch is AUTOMATIC CONTINUOUS IGNITION - With
selected ON. The start valve closes and the ENG MODE selector positioned to NORM
ignition cuts off automatically when N2 and the engine running, continuous ignition
reaches 43%. During a manual start or an is automatically provided under the
inflight automatic start, both igniters are following conditions:
used.
FLX or TO/GA thrust is selected on
CONTINUOUS IGNITION - Continuous the ground.
ignition can be selected manually by TO/GA thrust is selected in flight
positioning the Eng Mode Selector to ENG ANTI ICE switch is ON
IGN/START, see page 5.5.2. Engine surge or stall occurs in flight
FLAPS lever position is other than 0
in flight
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Ignition | Section 5.7.4
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Oil System | Section 5.7.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

O IL S YsTEm Previous Section
Oil from the engine tank is circulated under Description
pressure through the engine to lubricate FADEC

and cool internal parts.
The oil is cooled by an engine mounted Idle Control Modes

fuel/oil heat exchanger and an air/oil heat
Ignition
exchanger. Engine oil temperature,
quantity, pressure, and oil filter clog are Oil System
displayed on the ECAM. Start System
Next Section
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Oil System | Section 5.7.5
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Start System | Section 5.7.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S TarT S YsTEm Previous Section
DESCRIPTION - Pneumatic air drives a Description
starter motor. The APU normally supplies FADEC

air, but ground or engine bleed air may
also be used. Fuel and ignition are
controlled by the FADEC. Normally the Idle Control Modes
engine start is fully automatic, however, it Ignition

may be controlled manually.
Oil System
GROUND AUTO START - During an Start System

automatic ground start, the FADEC controls
Next Section
the start valve, igniter (A or B), and the
high pressure fuel valve. The FADEC
monitors N1, N2, EGT, and detects hot
starts, hung starts, stalls, and no starts.
When N2 is below 50%, the FADEC
automatically aborts the start, if necessary,
and also automatically cranks the engine if
needed to cool it and eliminate residual fuel
vapor. Above 50% N2, the FADEC no
longer monitors start parameters and will
not abort the start. During an automatic
start with a residual EGT above 250°C, the
FADEC will crank the engine until EGT MANUAL START - Manual starts are only
decreases below 250°C before initiating the performed on the ground. During start, the
start sequence. There is no ECAM message FADEC controls the ignitors (A and B), the
to indicate this. See EWD During Start page high pressure fuel valve, and the closure of
5.3.1. the start valve. The FADEC monitors N1,
IAE V2527/V2522 Engines | Start System | Section 5.7.6
N2, and EGT when N2 is below 50%. ECAM

INFLIGHT AUTO START - During an
start fault detection is available, however,
automatic inflight start, the FADEC controls
automatic abort and crank capabilities are
the start valve and the high pressure fuel
not available. See Engine Manual Start
valve. The FADEC will not abort the start.
Switches page 5.6.0.
Fire Protection Systems | APU | Section 6.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F IrE P rOTECTION S YsTEm S ECTION 6.4.1

APU Previous Section
FIRE DETECTION - The APU is equipped FIRE PROTECTION - A single fire Description
with a fire and overheat detection system extinguisher bottle is provided for the APU. APU
in the APU compartment that consists of If an APU fire is detected on the ground,
Avionics Compartment
two identical loops (A and B) mounted in the APU automatically shuts down and the
parallel. The system is continuously extinguishing agent is automatically Cargo Compartments
monitored by the flight warning computer. discharged (3 seconds after fire warning is Engines
When a sensing element detects an activated). If an APU fire is detected in
Lavatories
overheat, a signal is transmitted to a fire flight, the APU must be manually shut
detection unit. If a fault or break occurs in down, and the agent manually discharged. Next Section
one loop, the fire warning system is not

affected; fire detection is provided by the
FIRE WARNING INDICATIONS - An APU fire L OCATION
is indicated by an aural continuous
unaffected loop.
repetitive chime (CRC), the illumination of
APU fire warnings appear when: the APU FIRE switch and MASTER WARN
lights, and by an ECAM warning on the
Both loops detect a fire E/WD. See APU Fire Switch page 6.3.3.
One loop detects a fire when the
other loop is faulty If a fire is detected on the ground, a
A break in both loops occurs within 5 warning horn in the nose wheel well
seconds of each other sounds, and the APU FIRE light illuminates
A fire test is performed on the external service interphone panel,
see APU Fire Light page 2.3.4. The light
extinguishes and the horn silences when
the fire is extinguished.
Fire Protection Systems | APU | Section 6.4.1
Fire Protection System | Avionics Compartment | Section 6.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A vIONICs C OmpArTmENT Previous Section
One smoke detector is installed in the Description
avionics compartment air extraction duct. APU

Avionics smoke is indicated by an aural
single chime (SC), the illumination of the
SMOKE light on the EMER ELEC PWR panel, Cargo Compartments
the BLOWER and EXTRACT FAULT lights on Engines

the VENTILATION panel and MASTER CAUT
Lavatories
lights, and by an ECAM caution on the
E/WD. See Avionics Schematic Smoke Next Section
Configuration page 15.5.5.

L OCATION
Fire Protection System | Avionics Compartment | Section 6.4.2

Fire Protection System | Cargo Compartments | Section 6.4.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C ArgO C OmpArTmENTs Previous Section
SMOKE DETECTION - The forward and aft Description
cargo compartments are equipped with a APU

dual loop smoke detection system. Cavities
in the cargo compartment ceiling panels
each hold two smoke detectors. Each Cargo Compartments
detector is linked to one of the the two Engines

dectection loops. The forward cargo
Lavatories
compartment has one cavity. The aft cargo
compartment has two cavities. The Smoke Next Section
Detection Control Unit (SDCU) receives

signals from the detectors and transmits
FIRE PROTECTION - The A320 has two fire L OCATION
bottles installed; both can be discharged to
them to the ECAM that displays a warning
either the forward or aft cargo
in the cockpit.
compartment. See A320 Cargo Smoke
If cargo ventilation is installed, and the Light page 6.2.0.
cargo smoke warning is activated, the
The A319 has only one fire bottle installed
associated isolation valves close and the
and can be discharged into either the
extraction fan stops. See Avionics
forward or aft cargo compartment. See
Schematic Smoke Configuration page
A319 Cargo Smoke Light page 6.1.0.
15.5.5.
SMOKE WARNING - Smoke in one cavity

activates the smoke warning if:
Both smoke detectors detect smoke

One smoke detector detects smoke
and the other is inoperative
Fire Protection System | Cargo Compartments | Section 6.4.3
Fire Protection System | Engines | Section 6.4.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E NgINEs Previous Section
FIRE DETECTION - Each engine is equipped Description
with a fire and overheat detection system APU

consisting of two identical gas detection
loops (A and B) mounted in parallel. Each
detection loop consists of three sensing Cargo Compartments
elements located in the pylon nacelle, Engines

engine core, and engine fan section. The
Lavatories
system is continuously monitored by the
flight warning computer. When a sensing Next Section
element detects an overheat, a signal is

transmitted to a fire detection unit. If a
L OCATION
fault or break occurs in one loop, the fire
warning system is not affected; fire
detection is provided by the unaffected FIRE PROTECTION - Each engine is provided
loop. with two fire extinguishers. An AGENT
DISCH switch for each bottle is located on
Both loops detect a fire the respective ENG FIRE panel.
One loop detects a fire when the
other loop is faulty FIRE WARNING INDICATIONS - An engine
A break in both loops occurs within 5 fire is indicated by an aural CRC, the
seconds of each other illumination of the FIRE light on the ENG
A fire test is performede panel, ENG FIRE switch, and MASTER
WARN lights, and by an ECAM warning on
the E/WD. See Engine and APU Fire Panel
page 6.3.0.
Fire Protection System | Engines | Section 6.4.4
Fire Protection System | Lavatories | Section 6.4.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L AvATOrIEs Previous Section
SMOKE DETECTION - Each lavatory is Description
equipped with a smoke detector which is APU

connected to a dual channel smoke
detection control unit (SDCU). When smoke
is detected, the lavatory detector sounds Cargo Compartments
an audible warning and the SDCU transmits Engines

a detection signal to the cabin
Lavatories
intercommunication data system (CIDS),
which sounds a chime through the flight Next Section
attendant loudspeakers and illuminates the

LAV SMOKE light on the forward
L OCATION
attendant’s panel. Pushing the RESET
button on the forward attendant’s panel
silences all smoke alarms.
FIRE PROTECTION - A fire extinguisher is

installed above each trash bin. The
extinguisher is completely self contained
and requires no electrical power to operate.
The extinguisher automatically discharges
Halon gas through one or both heat
activated nozzles whenever the
temperature rises sufficiently to melt the
nozzle tips. The extinguisher indicator
needle will be in the red band after being
discharged.
Fire Protection System | Lavatories | Section 6.4.5
Engine Warning Display | Flaps Indicator Description 2 | Section 7.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NgINE W ArNINg D IsplAY S ECTION 7.2.3

F lAps I NdICATOr D EsCrIpTION 2 Previous Section
1. POSITION TRIANGLE - Displays green; F/CTL Page Description 1
changes to amber with of both supplying F/CTL Page Description 2

hydraulic systems, except on ground with
both engines shut down, application of
wing tip brakes or failure of slats or flaps. Flaps Indicator Description 2
Next Section
2. FLAPS LEVER POSITION - Displays green
when selected position (0, 1 + F, 1, 2, 3, or L OCATION
FULL) is reached.
0 not displayed when clean configuration is

reached.
Indication displays blue during transit.
S (F) LOCKED indication appears amber

when wing tip brakes are applied or when
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
nonalignment between flaps is detected.
3. SELECTABLE POSITIONS - Display white.
Alpha LOCK indication flashes blue when the
Not displayed in clean configuration.
slat alpha/speed lock function is active.
Flight Control System Display | F/CTL Page Description 2 | Section 7.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT C ONTrOl S ysTEm D IsplAy S ECTION 7.2.1

F/CTL P AGE D EsCrIpTION 2 Previous Section
1. HYDRAULIC SYS PRESSURE INDICATION F/CTL Page Description 1
- Displays green when pressurization is F/CTL Page Description 2

normal; changes to amber when low
pressure detected.
2. ELEVATOR ACTUATOR INDICATION -
Next Section
Displays green; changes to amber when
the associated actuator is not available. L OCATION
Partially boxed amber if associated
computer fails.
3. RUDDER TRIM POSITION - Displays blue;

changes to amber if rudder trim reset fails.
Amber Xs appear if the aircraft reverts to
the yaw mechanical mode.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Control System Display | F/CTL Page Description 2 | Section 7.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E NGINE W ArNING D IsplAY S ECTION 7.2.2

F lAps I NdICATOr D EsCrIpTION 1 Previous Section
1. FLAP INDICATION - Displays when slats F/CTL Page Description 1
or flaps not fully retracted. Disappears F/CTL Page Description 2

when flaps and slats are up.
Displays white when selected position Flaps Indicator Description 2

is reached
Next Section
Blue when flaps or slats are in transit
Changes to amber with loss of both L OCATION
supplying hydraulic systems, except
on ground with both engines shut
down, application of wing tip brakes
or failure of slats or flaps
2. S and F INDICATION
Displays when slats and/or flaps not

fully retracted. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Changes to amber with loss of both
supplying hydraulic systems, except
on ground with both engines shut
down, application of wing tip brakes
or failure of slats or flaps.
Flight Controls | Flight Control Inputs | Section 7.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGHT C ONTROLs S ECTION 7.4.1

F LIGHT C ONTROL I NPUTs Previous Section
All flight control surfaces are hydraulically The side stick and rudder pedals input Flight Controls Description
actuated via hydraulic jacks. Flight control commands to the flight control computers. Flight Control Inputs
inputs are normally accomplished via The flight computers then send appropriate
Pitch Control
electrical inputs from flight control electrical signals to hydraulic jacks.
computers to hydraulically actuated flight Roll Control
surfaces. Yaw Control
Next Section
Flight Controls | Flight Control Inputs | Section 7.4.1
Side Stick | Takeover or Priority Button | Section 7.8.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S IdE S TICk S ECTION 7.8.1

T akEOvEr Or P rIOrITy B uTTON Previous Section
Takeover or Priority Button when pressed: Description
Priority Button
Disconnects autopilot
When held in, deactivates the other Transmit Switch
side stick and allows full singular Next Section

control
Holding switch for approximately 40
seconds latches the system, allowing
the switch to be released without
losing priority. A deactivated stick
can be reactivated at any time by
momentarily pushing either priority
switch. If the priority switches on
both side sticks are pushed, the last < PREVIOUS NEXT >
one activated assumes priority.
Illuminates glare shield SIDE STICK
PRIORITY lights and activates
“PRIORITY LEFT” or “PRIORITY
RIGHT” aural alert according to
control configuration.
Side Stick | Takeover or Priority Button | Section 7.8.1
Side Stick | Transmit Switch | Section 7.8.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S IdE S TICK S ECTION 7.8.2

T raNsmIT S wITCH Previous Section
Transmit Switch operates as a press-to-talk Description
switch for boom or oxygen mask Priority Button

microphones.
Transmit Switch
NEUTRAL - Boom and mask microphones Next Section

are disconnected from transmission,
although reception is normal. Switch is
spring-loaded to neutral.
TRANSMIT - When selected, provides

transmission on the radio selected by the
Audio Control Panel (ACP) transmission
button. If transmit is selected on the side
stick when the ACP INT/RAD switch is set
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
to INT, the transmit function has priority
over the interphone function.
Side Stick | Transmit Switch | Section 7.8.2
Electronic Intrument System | EFIS Control Panel | Section 8.7.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrONIC I NsTruMENT S YsTEM S ECTION 8.7.1

EFIS C ONTrOl P ANEl Previous Section
An EFIS control panel is located toward Two flight director buttons allow the display Description
each end of the glareshield and is used to of the flight director command bars or flight EFIS Control Panel
control the onside PFD and ND. The panel path director, and two ILS/LS buttons allow
Displays
includes controls for selecting various display of the localizer and glideslope
modes and ranges on the ND as well as scales and indices on the PFD. See EFIS Next Section
buttons to display navaids, waypoints, Control Panel page 8.1.0.

airports, etc. Two toggle switches allow
L OCATION
display of the VOR (and ADF, if installed) SWITCHING PANEL - A panel on the forward
bearing pointers on the ND. Two control pedestal allows the pilots to
barometric selectors are available to set reconfigure Display Unit sources in case of
the barometric altimeter setting for display component failure. See Switching Panel
on the PFD. page 8.4.0.
I NsTruMENT P ANEl
Electronic Intrument System | EFIS Control Panel | Section 8.7.1
Electronic Intrument System | Displays | Section 8.7.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrONIC I NsTrUmENT S ysTEm S ECTION 8.7.2

D IsplAys Previous Section
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY - The PFDs NAVIATION DISPLAY - The NDs provide Description
provide numerous flight instrument navigation, route, traffic, weather, and EFIS Control Panel
indications on one color display, including: ground proximity information in color.
Displays
Attitude In either of the map modes, pilots can elect Next Section
Localizer, glideslope, and vertical to display additional navigation
deviation indications information, including VORs, NDBs, L OCATION
Flight director commands constraints, waypoints, and airports. See
Vertical speed ND Symbols page 8.2.0 for explanation of
Barometric altitude navigation symbols.
Radio altitude
Section 16.0 WARNING SYSTEMS provides
Flight mode annunciations (FMAs)
descriptions of weather, TCAS, windshear,
Altimeter setting
and EGPWS that are displayed on the ND or
ILS identifier
PFD. Explanations of System and E/W
Marker beacons
Displays are found in each system section
TCAS commands
(chapter).
Windshear annunciation and recovery
command
See Primary Flight Display Symbols, page

8.3.0 for a description of every symbol
used on the PFD.
See Flight Mode Annunciations, page 13.3.0

for description of every FMA and message
used on PFD.
Electronic Intrument System | Displays | Section 8.7.2
Fuel System Display | Automatic Fuel Transfer | Section 9.1.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl S YsTEM D IsplAYs S ECTION 9.1.3

A uTOMATIC F uEl T rANsfEr Previous Section
When the inner compartment fuel quantity Normal Fuel Indications
decreases to 1650 lbs., the associated SD During Preflight

transfer valve opens to transfer fuel from
Unusable Fuel
the outer compartment to the inner
compartment. Automatic Fuel Transfer
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
The outer fuel tanks are automatically

transferring fuel in this example.
Fuel System Display | Automatic Fuel Transfer | Section 9.1.3
Fuel System Display | Fuel S/D During Preflight | Section 9.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl S ysTEM D IsplAys S ECTION 9.1.1

F uEl S/D D urING P rEflIGHT Previous Section
1. FUEL QUANTITY INDICATIONS - Display Normal Fuel Indications
fuel quantity for associated tank in green. SD During Preflight
If a fuel imbalance greater than 3300 Unusable Fuel
pounds is detected, indications of the wing Automatic Fuel Transfer

inner and outer tanks with the highest fuel
Next Section
level pulses green. Double dashes
displayed over the last two digits mean the L OCATION
fuel quantity indication is still operative,
but inaccurate. The maximum loss of
accuracy depends upon which tanks are
affected as follows:
Wing Outer Tank: Actual fuel in the

tank may be up to 45 pounds less
than or up to 440 pounds greater
than indicated. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Wing Inner Tank: Wing Actual fuel in
In this example, the fuel pumps are off, the
the tank may be up to 240 pounds
engines are shutdown, and the APU is
less than or greater than indicated.
operating.
Center Tank: Actual fuel in the tank
may be up to 290 pounds less than
or greater than indicated.
Fuel System Display | Fuel S/D During Preflight | Section 9.1.1
Fuel System Display | Unusable Fuel Indications | Section 9.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl S YsTEm D IsplAYs S ECTION 9.1.2

U NusAblE F uEl I NdICATIONs Previous Section
1. FOB INDICATION - Displays fuel on board Normal Fuel Indications
in green. The indication is boxed amber if SD During Preflight

both center tank pumps are failed or
Unusable Fuel
switched off, or if both transfer valves in
either wing fail to open when inner tank Automatic Fuel Transfer
quantity is less than 1650 pounds (trapping Next Section

fuel in an outer tank). Double dashes
displayed over the last two digits mean the L OCATION
fuel quantity indication is still operative,
but inaccurate. Actual fuel on board may be
up to 860 pounds less than or 1660 pounds
greater than indicated, depending upon
which tanks are affected.
2. FUEL TEMPERATURE INDICATION -

Displays green when associated
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
temperature sensor is wet. Becomes amber
if high or low limit is exceeded. The
associated fuel quantity indication is boxed
amber indicating fuel is trapped or
unusable in this example.
Fuel System Display | Unusable Fuel Indications | Section 9.1.2
Fuel System | Fuel Tanks | Section 9.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl S ysTEm S ECTION 9.3.1

F uEl T ANKs Previous Section
OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION SYSTEM - PUMPS - Each wing tank is equipped with Description
Overpressure protectors are located in the two fuel pumps located in the inner Fuel Tanks
vent surge, outer and inner wing tanks, compartment. The center tank also
and between the center tank and the left contains two fuel pumps.
inner tank. An overpressure burst disk Recirculation System
ruptures if the internal and external ENGINE LOW PRESSURE VALVES - Engine
Refueling/Defueling
pressure differential exceeds a low pressure fuel valves control fuel flow
predetermined level. It will not from each inner wing tank to its engine. Fuel Tank Inerting System
contaminate the fuel system nor will The valves close when the ENG MASTER Next Section
structural integrity be affected. switch is OFF, or when the ENG FIRE switch
is released. L OCATION
Fuel System | Fuel Tanks | Section 9.3.1
Fuel System | Quanity Indication System | Section 9.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl S YsTEm S ECTION 9.3.2

Q uANITY I NdICATION S YsTEm Previous Section
The Fuel Quantity Indication System Description
includes: Fuel Tanks
A FOI computer Quanity Indication System
A set of capacitance probes in each Recirculation System

tank to measure fuel level and
Refueling/Defueling
temperature
One densitometer (cadensicon) Fuel Tank Inerting System
sensor in each wing inner tank Next Section

permitting the calculation of the fuel
quantity L OCATION
One capacitance Index Compensator
(CIC) in each inner tank giving the
dielectric constant of the fuel in cas
of cadensicon failure
A quanitity indicator for each tank
installed on the refuel/defuel panel The fuel level sensing control unit (FLSCU)
A preselector on the refuel/defuel senses high, low, and overflow levels.
panel that shows the preselected When fuel quantity in one wing tank goes
and actual total fuel quanity below 1650 pounds (750 kg), the low-level
sensor triggers the FUEL LO LVL warning
Fuel weight, as well as the quantity and on the ECAM. The fuel level system
temperature are transmitted to the ECAM generates fuel-level and fuel temperature
system by a dual channel fuel quantity in order to operate switching functions for
indicator computer (FQIC). If one channel refueling and defueling, controlling the IDG
fails, the second channel automatically recirculation system, and the center-tank-
activates. The fuel temperature indication towing-tank fuel transfer system. See Fuel
Fuel System | Quanity Indication System | Section 9.3.2
displays as amber XXs when the FQIC System Display page 9.1.0.
detects a fault in either channel.
Fuel System | Refueling/Defueling | Section 9.3.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl S YsTEM S ECTION 9.3.4

R EfuElING /D EfuElING Previous Section
A refueling/defueling coupling is normally Electrical power for refueling is supplied Description
installed under the right wing. The from an external source, the APU, or the Fuel Tanks
refueling control panel is located adjacent aircraft battery. If the battery is used as
to the coupling. The aircraft can also be the electrical power source, the tank may
refueled via overwing refueling points. not fill to full capacity and the transfer Recirculation System
Some airline companies configure their valves may not fully close; however, they Refueling/Defueling
aircraft with refueling panels under the left close when normal power is established.
wing. A common fueling/defueling manifold
is used for refueling, fuel transfer, and Next Section
defueling. Fueling is normally automatic by

preselecting the required fuel load.
L OCATION
Fuel System | Refueling/Defueling | Section 9.3.4
Fuel System | Fuel Tank Inerting System | Section 9.3.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F UEl S YsTEM S ECTION 9.3.5

F UEl T ANK I NERTING S YsTEM Previous Section
The 319s and 320s are equipped with a fuel The air then goes through the air separation Description
tank inerting system. The intent of this module, which produces oxygen-depleted Fuel Tanks
system is to reduce flammability in the air (with less than 12% oxygen), replacing
center fuel tank by producing oxygen- the ambient air of the center tank. The fuel
depleted air that goes in the center tank to tank inerting system does not require any Recirculation System
replace the ambient air. This system pilot action. It works independently as soon Refueling/Defueling
extracts and conditions some engine bleed as the engines start until they stop.
air to adequate pressure and temperature.
Next Section
L OCATION
Fuel System | Fuel Tank Inerting System | Section 9.3.5
Hydraulic System Display | PTU Operation | Section 10.1.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YdrAulIC S YsTEM D IsplAY S ECTION 10.1.3

PTU O pErATION Previous Section
1. PTU CONTROL - The PTU is pressurizing Prior to Engine Start
the green hydraulic system in this example. After Engine Start

In previous examples the PTU switch is in
AUTO and the PTU is not pressurizing the
green or yellow system. PTU Operation
Next Section
When the PTU is in AUTO, a reversible
motor pump is armed and both yellow and L OCATION
green electro-hydraulic valves are open.
The PTU runs automatically when the
differential pressure between the green and
yellow systems is more than 500 PSI
(except when inhibited).
2. RESERVOIR LO AIR PRES INDICATION -

Appears amber if the respective reservoir
air pressure is low. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
3. RESERVOIR OVHT INDICATION - Appears In this example, the green hydraulic engine-
amber when a reservoir overheat exists. driven pump is inoperative and the PTU is
operating to pressurize the green hydraulic
system.
Hydraulic System Display | PTU Operation | Section 10.1.3
Hydraulic System Display | Cargo Door Operation | Section 10.1.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YDrAulIC S YsTEM D IsplAY S ECTION 10.1.2

C ArGO D OOr O pErATION Previous Section
The yellow electric-driven hydraulic pump Prior to Engine Start
operates automatically during cargo door After Engine Start

operation. Illustration depicts cargo door
operation prior to engine start.
PTU Operation
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Hydraulic System Display | Cargo Door Operation | Section 10.1.2
Hydraulic System | Reservoirs | Section 10.3.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YDrauLIC S YsTEm S ECTION 10.3.7

R EsErvOIrs Previous Section
The reservoirs store fluid under pressure to Description
maintain a fluid supply for each hydraulic Engine Driven Pumps

pump and to prevent pump cavitation. The
Electric Pumps
reservoirs are pressurized automatically
using bleed air. The hydraulic quantity is System Accumulators
displayed on the lower ECAM. Temperature Power Transfer Unit

and reservoir air pressure are only
Priority Valves
displayed when abnormal.
Ram Air Turbine
See Page 10.3.8 for hydraulic schematic.
Reservoirs
Schematic
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Hydraulic System | Reservoirs | Section 10.3.7
Hydraulic System | Engine Driven Pumps | Section 10.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E NgINE D rIvEN P umps Previous Section
The engine driven pumps are mounted on Description
the accessory drive section of the engine. Engine Driven Pumps

They are depressurized when the ENGINE
Electric Pumps
PUMP switch is OFF. When the ENG FIRE
switch is released out, the engine fire System Accumulators
shutoff valve closes, shutting off all Power Transfer Unit

hydraulic fluid to the pump. The hydraulic
Priority Valves
pump pressure output is displayed on the
lower ECAM and is monitored by the power Ram Air Turbine
transfer unit (PTU) pressure sensor. Reservoirs
Schematic
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H ydraulIC S ysTEm S ECTION 10.3.2

E lECTrIC P umps Previous Section
BLUE ELECTRIC PUMP - The blue hydraulic Description
system is powered by an electric driven Engine Driven Pumps

pump. On the ground with the BLUE ELEC
Electric Pumps
PUMP switch in AUTO and AC power
available, the pump pressurizes the System Accumulators
hydraulic system if at least one engine is Power Transfer Unit

running. In flight, the pump operates
Priority Valves
continuously unless the ELEC PUMP switch
is OFF. The system can also be pressurized Ram Air Turbine
on the ground when the BLUE PUMP OVRD Reservoirs

switch, on the overhead maintenance
Schematic
panel, is ON.
Next Section
YELLOW ELECTRIC PUMP - The yellow
electric pump pressurizes the hydraulic
system when the YELLOW ELEC PUMP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
switch is selected ON. If the pump is on
and electrical power is interrupted, the
pump is de energized until the switch is
cycled. The pump starts automatically,
regardless of switch position, when either
the forward or aft cargo door lever is
operated. During cargo door operation, all
other yellow system users are not
pressurized except for the No. 2 engine
thrust reverser and yellow system braking
(alternate brakes, parking brake, and the
brake accumulator). A hand pump can be
used to operate the cargo doors.
Hydraulic System | System Accumulators | Section 10.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YdraulIC S YsTEm S ECTION 10.3.3

S YsTEm A CCumulaTOrs Previous Section
A system accumulator is installed in each Description
hydraulic system to help maintain a Engine Driven Pumps

constant system pressure during normal
Electric Pumps
operation and for periods of high demand.
The accumulator pressure cannot be System Accumulators
viewed on the ECAM. Power Transfer Unit
LOAD ALLEVIATION FUNCTION (LAF) Priority Valves
ACCUMULATORS - The LAF accumulators, Ram Air Turbine

available on some 320s, assist with high
Reservoirs
hydraulic demands required to provide
rapid movement of the ailerons and Schematic
spoilers 4 and 5 for the purpose of relieving Next Section

wing structural loads.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Hydraulic System | System Accumulators | Section 10.3.3
Hydraulic System | Power Transfer Unit | Section 10.3.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

P OwEr T raNsfEr U NIT Previous Section
The PTU is a reversible motor pump located Description
between the green and yellow hydraulic Engine Driven Pumps

systems. It enables the green system to
Electric Pumps
pressurize the yellow system and vice
versa. The PTU is automatically activated System Accumulators
when the differential pressure between the Power Transfer Unit

green and yellow systems is greater than
Priority Valves
500 PSI. On the ground with the engines
stopped, the PTU enables the green system Ram Air Turbine
to be pressurized by the yellow system via Reservoirs

the yellow electric pump. PTU operation is
Schematic
displayed on the ECAM hydraulic page.
Next Section
The PTU is inhibited:
When the PARK BRK is ON and only

one ENG MASTER switch is ON < PREVIOUS NEXT >
When the nose wheel steering
disconnect pin is installed and only
one ENG MASTER switch is ON
When the PTU switch is OFF
When the cargo doors are being
operated (inhibition continues for
approximately 40 seconds after
cargo door operation)
Hydraulic System | Power Transfer Unit | Section 10.3.4
Hydraulic System | Priority Valves | Section 10.3.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YDrAulIC S YsTEM S ECTION 10.3.5

P rIOrITY V AlvEs Previous Section
If system pressure drops below a Description
predetermined value, the priority valves Engine Driven Pumps

shut off hydraulic power to heavy users,
Electric Pumps
including flaps, slats, landing gear, nose
wheel steering, and the emergency System Accumulators
generator. The valves open and close Power Transfer Unit

automatically, depending on hydraulic
Priority Valves
pressure, to ensure that hydraulic pressure
is available to the flight controls, brakes, Ram Air Turbine
spoilers, and thrust reversers. Reservoirs
The priority valve shuts off pressure to the Schematic
following when presure is low: Next Section
Nose wheel steering (green system)

Landing gear (green system)
Flaps (green and yellow systems) < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Slats (green and blue sytems)
Emergency generator (blue sytem)
Hydraulic System | Priority Valves | Section 10.3.5
Hydraulic System | Ram Air Turbine | Section 10.3.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YDraulIC S YsTEm S ECTION 10.3.6

R am A Ir T urBINE Previous Section
The RAT can be deployed for emergency use Description
to pressurize the blue hydraulic system. Engine Driven Pumps

When the RAT MAN ON switch is selected
Electric Pumps
on the hydraulic panel, the RAT, coupled to
a hydraulic pump, extends and pressurizes System Accumulators
the blue system. The RAT can be stowed Power Transfer Unit
only on the ground.
Priority Valves
See Page 10.3.8 for hydraulic schematic. Ram Air Turbine
Reservoirs
Schematic
Next Section
NOTE
The RAT extends automatically if AC

busses 1 and 2 are not electrically < PREVIOUS NEXT >
powered and the speed is above 100
knots, or by pressing the EMER ELEC
PWR MAN ON switch on the overhead
ELEC panel. In either case, the RAT
pressurizes the blue hydraulic system,
which drives the emergency generator
via a hydraulic motor.
Hydraulic System | Ram Air Turbine | Section 10.3.6
Hydraulic System | Schematic | Section 10.3.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H YDRAULIC S YsTEM S ECTION 10.3.8

S ChEMATIC Previous Section
Description
Engine Driven Pumps
Electric Pumps
System Accumulators
Power Transfer Unit
Priority Valves
Ram Air Turbine
Reservoirs
Schematic
Next Section
Hydraulic System | Schematic | Section 10.3.8
Anti-Ice System | Probe Heat | Section 11.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A NTI -I CE S YsTEm S ECTION 11.3.1

P rObE H EAT Previous Section
PROBE HEAT - The pitot probes, static WING ANTI-ICE - In flight, the three Description
ports, angle of attack probes, and total air outboard slats on each wing are anti iced Anti-Ice
temperature probes are electrically heated. with pneumatic
bleed air. A single WING
Next Section
Three independent probe heat computers ANTI ICE switch controls a pneumatic
automatically control the ground/flight shutoff valve
in each wing. The valves are L OCATION
modes and provide overheat protection and inhibited from opening on the ground
fault indications. The probes are except for
testing. They close automatically
automatically heated in flight and on the when a leak is detected and upon
ground when at least one engine is touchdown.
running. They can be operated manually
prior to engine start by placing the When either wing anti-ice valve is open:
PROBE/WINDOW HEAT switch ON. The TAT EPR limit is automatically reduced
probes are not heated on the ground. Minimum idle RPM is increased
Probe heat operates at low power on the
ground and automatically switches to The valves close with a loss of electrical
normal power in flight. power.
Anti-Ice System | Probe Heat | Section 11.3.1
Landing Gear System Displays | Auto Brakes Armed | Section 12.2.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANdING G EAr S YsTEm D IsplAYs S ECTION 12.2.6

A uTO B rAkEs A rmEd Previous Section
AUTO BRK - The AUTO BRK legend appears ECAM Wheel Page Indications
green whenever the auto brake system is Brake Temperature

armed. It flashes green for 10 seconds
LG and Brake Legends
after auto brake disengagement. It
becomes amber in case of system failure. LG Up Indication
Anti-Skid Indications
DECELERATION RATE - A green MED, LOW,
or MAX legend indicates selected Alternate Brake Mode
deceleration rate on Auto Brake System. Auto Brakes Armed
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Landing Gear System Displays | Auto Brakes Armed | Section 12.2.6
Landing Gear System Displays | Brake Temperature Indications | Section 12.2.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANdING G EAr S YsTEm D IsplAYs S ECTION 12.2.1

B rAkE T EmpErATurE I NdICATIONs Previous Section
BRAKE TEMPERATURE INDICATION - Brake ECAM Wheel Page Indications
temperature indication (green) is displayed Brake Temperature

above wheel number identification (white
number). Brake temperature is displayed
as a green number below 300°C. At or LG Up Indication
above 300°C brake temperature is Anti-Skid Indications

displayed as an amber brake temperature
Alternate Brake Mode
indication.
Auto Brakes Armed
ARC - A green arc appears on the hottest
Next Section
wheel when one brake temperature
exceeds 100°C. When the brake L OCATION
temperature exceeds 300°C, the arc
becomes amber on the hottest wheel.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Landing Gear System Displays | Brake Temperature Indications | Section 12.2.1
Landing Gear System Displays | Landing Gear and Brake Legends | Section 12.2.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANdINg G EAr S YsTEm D IsplAYs S ECTION 12.2.2

L ANdINg G EAr ANd B rAkE L EgENds Previous Section
STEERING - The STEERING legend appears ECAM Wheel Page Indications
amber in case of nose wheel steering Brake Temperature

failure or the A/SKID and N/W STRG switch
is OFF.
LG Up Indication
L/G CTL - The L/G CTL legend appears
amber when a disagreement between the
landing gear lever position and landing Alternate Brake Mode
gear position is detected. Auto Brakes Armed
A/SKID - The A/SKID legend appears amber Next Section
associated with ECAM caution for any the

following:
L OCATION
Total BSCU failure

A/SKID and N/W STRG switch is OFF
Anti-skid failure detected by the < PREVIOUS NEXT >
BSCU
AUTO BRK - The AUTO BRK legend appears

amber in case of AUTO BRK system failure.
Landing Gear System Displays | Landing Gear and Brake Legends | Section 12.2.2
Landing Gear System Displays | Landing Gear Up Indication | Section 12.2.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANdINg G EAr S YsTEM D IsplAYs S ECTION 12.2.3

L ANdINg G EAr U p I NdICATION Previous Section
The landing gear lever provides electrical ECAM Wheel Page Indications
signals to the LGCIUs which control the Brake Temperature

hydraulic safety valves. When selecting
gear UP or DOWN with the airspeed less
than 260 KIAS, all landing gear doors open, LG Up Indication
the gear retracts or extends, and all doors Anti-Skid Indications

close.
When the airspeed is greater than 260 Auto Brakes Armed

KIAS, a hydraulic safety valve closes to cut
Next Section
off the hydraulic supply. Below 260 KIAS, it
remains cut off as long as the landing gear L OCATION
lever is UP. The safety valve is controlled
by the gear lever and ADIRU 1 and/or 3.
During gear retraction, automatic braking is

applied to the main gear wheels by a < PREVIOUS NEXT >
normal braking system. The landing gear is
LG UP - Above example illustrates landing
held up mechanically in the wheel wells.
gear up in cruise.
Landing Gear System Displays | Landing Gear Up Indication | Section 12.2.3
Landing Gear System Displays | Anti-Skid Indications | Section 12.2.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANDING G EAr S YsTEM D IsplAYs S ECTION 12.2.4

A NTI -S KID I NDICATIONs Previous Section
The green release indication illuminates ECAM Wheel Page Indications
after the landing gear has been extended Brake Temperature

indicating that the antiskid signal is valid.
At touch down the release indications only
appear when the antiskid is active along LG Up Indication
with REL (blue). Anti-Skid Indications
Auto Brakes Armed
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Landing Gear System Displays | Anti-Skid Indications | Section 12.2.4
Landing Gear System Displays | Alternate Brake Mode | Section 12.2.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L ANdINg G EAr S YsTEM D IsplAYs S ECTION 12.2.5

A lTErNATE B rAkE M OdE Previous Section
The ALTN BRK legend appears green if ECAM Wheel Page Indications
braking system is in the alternate mode. Brake Temperature

Alternate mode braking does not provide
for auto braking. Antiskid may or may not
be available depending on failures. LG Up Indication
The yellow hydraulic system automatically
provides alternate brakes when: Alternate Brake Mode
Auto Brakes Armed

Green hydraulic pressure is
insufficient Next Section
Electrical power has failed

BSCU has failed
L OCATION
selected OFF
In the last three cases, alternate braking is < PREVIOUS NEXT >
available but without antiskid. If both the
green and yellow hydraulic systems fail,
the accumulator supplies pressure for at
least seven full brake applications.
Landing Gear System Displays | Alternate Brake Mode | Section 12.2.5
Brake System | Parking Braking | Section 12.8.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
B rakE S YsTEM S ECTION 12.8.5

P arkINg B rakINg Previous Section
When the parking brake is ON, the yellow General Description
hydraulic system or the brake accumulator Normal Braking

pressurizes the brakes. If parking brake
Antiskid System
pressure decreases below a threshold
value, normal braking through the brake Autobrake System
pedals is automatically restored (provided Alternate Brake System

green hydraulic pressure is available and
Parking Brake
the A/SKID & N/W STRG switch is on).
Next Section
The brake accumulator in the yellow
hydraulic system maintains pressure for
braking when the yellow system is
unpressurized. It is normal for the brake
accumulator pressure to gradually decrease
below the green band over time. (Adequate
parking brake pressure is maintained for at
least 12 hours.)
CAUTION
Setting the PARK BRK handle to ON

does not ensure that the parking
brakes are set. Normal brake and < PREVIOUS NEXT >
accumulator pressure must be
confirmed on the BRAKES and ACCU
PRESS indicator.
Brake System | Parking Braking | Section 12.8.5
Brake System | Normal Braking | Section 12.8.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
B rakE S YsTEM S ECTION 12.8.1

N OrMaL B rakINg Previous Section
The normal brake system is powered by the General Description
green hydraulic system and includes Normal Braking

antiskid and autobrakes. The dual-channel
Antiskid System
brake and steering control unit (BSCU)
control normal braking functions along with Autobrake System
antiskid, autobrakes, and brake Alternate Brake System

temperature indications.
Parking Brake
Braking operation is normal when: Next Section
The green hydraulic pressure is

available
The A/SKID and N/W STRG switch is
ON, and
The parking brake is OFF
On the ground, braking is controlled by

using the pilot's brake pedals (via BSCU) or
auomatically using the autobrake control
panel.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Brake System | Normal Braking | Section 12.8.1
Brake System | Antiskid System | Section 12.8.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
B rakE S YsTEm S ECTION 12.8.2

A NTIskId S YsTEm Previous Section
The antiskid system provides maximum General Description
braking efficiency by maintaining the Normal Braking

release signals are sent to the normal and
Antiskid System
alternate servo valves as well as to the
ECAM, which displays the released brakes. Autobrake System
Once the skid is no longer detected, the Alternate Brake System

antiskid system returns to normal skid
Parking Brake
detection and protection.
Next Section
The antiskid system is automatically
deactivated when:
Groundspeed is below 20 knots.

selected OFF
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Brake System | Antiskid System | Section 12.8.2
Brake System | Autobrake System | Section 12.8.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
B RakE S YsTEM S ECTION 12.8.3

A uTObRakE S YsTEM Previous Section
The autobrake system operates through the General Description
normal brake system to maintain a Normal Braking

selected deceleration rate during landing
Antiskid System
and to reduce the stopping distance during
a rejected takeoff. Autobrake System
Alternate Brake System
A RMNING Parking Brake
The system can be armed with the PARK Next Section

BRK handle selected ON. When the
autobrakes are armed for landing, an ECAM
memo displays below 750 feet AGL.
Automatic braking is initiated by ground
spoiler extension command; therefore,
during a rejected takeoff below 72 knots,
the autobrakes will not activate since the
ground spoilers are not provided with an
automatic extension command below that
speed.
Autobrakes can be selected and armed

when:
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Green hydraulic pressure is available
Antiskid is powered
No failures exist in the braking
system
At least one ADIRU is available
Brake System | Autobrake System | Section 12.8.3
D IsaRMNING
The autobrake system is disarmed:
When AUTO/BRK switch is deselected

When one or more arming conditions
are lost
When ground spoilers are retracted
10 seconds after raising landing gear
lever
When applying sufficient brake pedal
deflection to one brake pedal
Brake System | Alternate Braking | Section 12.8.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
B RaKE S YsTEM S ECTION 12.8.4

A LTERNaTE B RaKING Previous Section
Alternate braking capabilities are the same General Description
as with normal brakes with antiskid, except Normal Braking

the autobrakes are inoperative. The yellow
Antiskid System
hydraulic system automatically provides
alternate brakes when: Autobrake System
Alternate Brake System

The green hydraulic pressure is
available Parking Brake
Electrical power has failed Next Section

BSCU has failed
A LTERNaTE B RaKING WITHOuT A NTIsKID

If the A/SKID & N/W STRG switch is
selected OFF; alternate braking is still
available, but without antiskid. When
braking without antiskid, pedal pressure
must be controlled to prevent wheel lockup
and brake pressure is limited to a
maximum of 1000 PSI on the BRAKES and
ACCU PRESS indicator.
B RaKE A CCuMuLaTOR O NLY < PREVIOUS NEXT >
If both the green and yellow hydraulic

by the brake accumulator only. The
accumulator supplies pressure for at least
Brake System | Alternate Braking | Section 12.8.4
seven full brake applications.
Landing Gear System | Gear Operation | Section 12.9.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L aNdINg G Ear S ysTEm S ECTION 12.9.1

G Ear O pEraTION Previous Section
NORMAL GEAR OPERATION - The landing During normal operation with green Description
gear lever provides electrical signals to the hydraulic pressure available, the hydraulic Gear Operation
LGCIUs which control the hydraulic safety system remains pressurized when the
Nose Wheel Steering
valves. When selecting gear UP or DOWN landing gear is extended.
with the airspeed less than 260 KIAS, all Next Section
landing gear doors open, the gear retracts GRAVITY EXTENSION - A gravity extension
or extends, and all doors close. When the handle, located on the aft edge of the
airspeed is greater than 260 KIAS, a control pedestal, is used when the gear
hydraulic safety valve closes to cut off the cannot be extended due to electrical,
hydraulic supply. Below 260 KIAS, it hydraulic, or mechanical failure. The hand
remains cut off as long as the landing gear crank is turned three times to shut off
lever is UP. The safety valve is controlled hydraulic pressure, open the doors (which
remain open), and unlock the gear. During
by the gear lever and ADIRU 1 and/or 3.
gravity extension, downlocking is assisted
During gear retraction, automatic braking is by locking springs on the main gear and
applied to the main gear wheels by a aerodynamic forces on the nose gear. Nose
normal braking system. The landing gear is wheel steering is deactivated.
held up mechanically in the wheel wells.
Once the gear is down and locked, an
interlock system prevents unsafe retraction
by locking the gear lever in the DOWN
position when either main gear shock
absorber is compressed or the nose wheel
steering is not centered.
Landing Gear System | Gear Operation | Section 12.9.1
Landing Gear System | Nose Wheel Steering | Section 12.9.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
L aNdINg G Ear S YsTEm S ECTION 12.9.2

N OsE W hEEl S TEErINg Previous Section
Nose wheel steering is electrically controlled A lever on the towing electrical box (located Description
by the BSCU and hydraulically operated by on the nose gear) deactivates the steering Gear Operation
the green hydraulic system. Hydraulic system for towing. When this occurs, the
Nose Wheel Steering
pressure is applied to the steering system nose gear can be turned at ± 95°. When
when all of the following conditions are the lever is in the towing position, a NW Next Section
satisfied: STRG DISC ECAM message displays. The

message is green and becomes amber after
Nose landing gear doors are closed the first engine start. Rudder pedal steering
A/SKID & N/W STRG switch is is disconnected by the rudder PEDALS DISC
selected ON button located on each steering tiller. Nose
Towing control lever is in the normal wheel steering is self centering after
position takeoff by an internal cam mechanism.
At least one engine is running
Main landing gear are compressed
The BSCU receives inputs from the

Captain’s and First Officer’s nose wheel.
When using the tillers, the nose wheel
steering angle is ±75° until approximately
20 knots groundspeed. As speed increases,
the angle decreases progressively to 0° at
70 knots. When using the rudder pedals,
the nose wheel steering angle is ±6° until
approximately 40 knots groundspeed. As
speed increases, the angle decreases
progressively to 0° at 130 knots.
Landing Gear System | Nose Wheel Steering | Section 12.9.2
Auto Flight | Description 2 | Section 13.1.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A uTO F lIGHT S ECTION 13.1.1

F lIGHT D IRECTORs F lIGHT M OdE A NNuNCIATIONs Previous Section
The FCU and the FMGC command flight The FMAs, located on the top of the PFD, Description
director guidance modes. Engagement are the only valid indication of the status of Description 2
must always be confirmed by verifying the the auto flight system. The green lights on
Next Section
FMAs. In the HDG-V/S mode, guidance is the FCU buttons only indicate that they
provided by a cross bar consisting of a have been selected. The FMAs display the
L OCATION
pitch command bar and a roll command engaged, captured and/or armed modes of
bar. Guidance in the TRK-FPA mode is the auto thrust, autopilot, and flight
provided by a single guidance bar which director systems, approach capabilities,
combines the commands for pitch and bank and special messages.
angle.
Most FMA indications are green for an
engaged mode, blue for an armed mode,
A uTO T HRusT S YsTEm
white for a status indication, and amber for
The auto thrust system is an integral part of an advisory indication.
the auto flight system. When engaged, the
auto thrust mode is determined by the Normally, the first line indicates
active vertical mode of the autopilot/flight engaged/captured modes, and the second
director system. If both autopilots and line indicates armed modes. When the auto
flight directors are off, the default mode of thrust system is in an armed mode, the
the auto thrust system is SPEED. Auto FMA automatically engages when the thrust
thrust modes are indicated in the first levers are placed in the engagement range.
column of the FMA. Refer to Engines and
APU chapter for detailed auto thrust
information.
Auto Flight | Description 2 | Section 13.1.1
Flight Maneuvers | Engine Failure After V1 | Section 13.4.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E NGINE F AILURE A fTER V1 P ROfILE Previous Section
ILS Autoland
ILS - No Autoland
Managed/Managed App
Takeoff
No Flaps Approach
Next Section

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

E NGINE F AILURE A fTER V2 P ROfILE Previous Section
ILS Autoland
ILS - No Autoland
Managed/Managed App
Takeoff
No Flaps Approach
Next Section
MCDU | Direct To Page - Waypoint | Section 14.3.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D IrECT T O P agE - W aYpOINT S ECTION 14.3.1

When the DIRECT TO function is selected, Previous Section
the FMGC initiates a direct flight leg to the Direct To Page Description
selected waypoint. A DIR TO waypoint may
Waypoint
be selected from points in the flight plan or
entered from the scratchpad. Waypoint Inserted
Direct To Erase
DIR TO INSERT - To insert the MLB
waypoint LS 6R. Direct To
Abeam Pts
DIR TO ERASE - To erase the direct to
waypoint LS 6L. Radial In
Radial Out
Direct To Insert
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Direct To Page - Waypoint | Section 14.3.1
MCDU | Direct To Page - Waypoint Inserted | Section 14.3.1A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D IrECT T O P agE - W aYpOINT I NsErTEd S ECTION 14.3.1A

When the DIRECT TO function is selected, Previous Section
the FMGC initiates a direct flight leg to the Direct To Page Description
selected waypoint. A DIR TO waypoint may
Waypoint
be selected from points in the flight plan or
entered from the scratchpad. Waypoint Inserted
Direct To Erase
Direct To
Abeam Pts
Radial In
Radial Out
Direct To Insert
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Direct To Page - Waypoint Inserted | Section 14.3.1A
MCDU | Direct To Page - Direct To Erase | Section 14.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D IrECT T O P agE - D IrECT T O E rasE S ECTION 14.3.2

The DIRECT TO function can be canceled Previous Section
prior to inserting by selecting the ERASE Direct To Page Description

prompt.
Waypoint
Waypoint Inserted
NOTE
Direct To Erase
When a DIR TO waypoint has been
Direct To
entered, four options for the DIR TO
function become active. Selecting one Abeam Pts
of the four options modifies the DIR
Radial In
TO functions with the option selected.
Radial Out
The FMGC defaults to DIR TO with
abeam waypoints. Direct To Insert
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Direct To Page - Direct To Erase | Section 14.3.2
MCDU | Direct To Page - Direct To | Section 14.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D IrECT T O P AGE - D IrECT T O S ECTION 14.3.3

Select this option to navigate direct to a Previous Section
waypoint without any waypoints in between Direct To Page Description

present position and the DIR TO waypoint.
Waypoint
Waypoint Inserted
Direct To Erase
Direct To
Abeam Pts
Radial In
Radial Out
Direct To Insert
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Direct To Page - Direct To | Section 14.3.3
MCDU | Direct To Page - Abeam Points | Section 14.3.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D IrECT T O P aGE - A bEaM P OINTs S ECTION 14.3.4

When selected, points are built on the new Previous Section
route which are perpendicular to the Direct To Page Description

previous route’s waypoints. The points are
Waypoint
labeled as ABXXXXX.
Waypoint Inserted
Direct To Erase
Direct To
Abeam Pts
Radial In
Radial Out
Direct To Insert
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Direct To Page - Abeam Points | Section 14.3.4
MCDU | Direct To Page - Radial In | Section 14.3.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D IrECT T O P agE - R adIaL I N S ECTION 14.3.5

A flight path is created from an extension of Previous Section
the DIR TO waypoint inbound on the course Direct To Page Description

designated by the radial entered. The
Waypoint
FMGC will stay in heading until reaching the
radial inbound navigation solution. If no Waypoint Inserted
solution can be achieved, NO NAV Direct To Erase

INTERCEPT is displayed in the scratchpad.
Direct To
Abeam Pts
Radial In
Radial Out
Direct To Insert
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Direct To Page - Radial In | Section 14.3.5
MCDU | Direct To Page - Radial Out | Section 14.3.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D IrECT T O P agE - R adIaL O uT S ECTION 14.3.6

A flight path is created along the extension Previous Section
of a radial starting at the DIR TO waypoint Direct To Page Description

outbound along the radial entered. The
Waypoint
FMGC will stay in heading until reaching the
radial outbound navigation solution. If no Waypoint Inserted
solution can be achieved, NO NAV Direct To Erase

INTERCEPT is displayed in the scratchpad.
Direct To
Abeam Pts
Radial In
Radial Out
Direct To Insert
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Direct To Page - Radial Out | Section 14.3.6
MCDU | Direct To Page - Direct To Insert | Section 14.3.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D IrECT T O P AGE - D IrECT T O I NsErT S ECTION 14.3.7

Selecting insert will insert the DIRECT TO Previous Section
function with the selected options. Direct To Page Description
Waypoint
Waypoint Inserted
Direct To Erase
Direct To
Abeam Pts
Radial In
Radial Out
Direct To Insert
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | Direct To Page - Direct To Insert | Section 14.3.7
MCDU | Progress Page - Phase of Flight | Section 14.4.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOGrEss P aGE - P HasE OF F LIGHT S ECTION 14.4.1

The phase of flight is indicated as a title at Previous Section
the top of the page. The flight number (i.e. Description

1127) is entered via INIT page A and
Phase of Flight
indicated to the right of title.
CRZ
OPT
REC MAX
Report
Report Page
Update At
Predictive GPS
Predictive GPS Page
Required Accuracy
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Progress Page - Phase of Flight | Section 14.4.1
MCDU | Progress Page - CRZ | Section 14.4.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOgrEss P agE - CRZ S ECTION 14.4.2

Displays cruise altitude as entered on INIT Previous Section
page A or as entered directly into this field Description

by the pilot, or as automatically entered
Phase of Flight
when the alternate is enabled.
CRZ
If an altitude is selected in the FCU that is
OPT
above the current cruise altitude, the CRZ
altitude on the PROG page automatically REC MAX
updates to the new FCU altitude when the Report

climb is initiated. If, after reaching the
Report Page
cruise altitude the, FCU altitude is reset
below the current cruise altitude and the Update At
airplane is more than 200 NM from the Predictive GPS

destination and the FCU altitude is set
Predictive GPS Page
above the higher of FL 200 or the first
descent altitude constraint, the CRZ Required Accuracy
altitude on the PROG page automatically Estimated Accuracy

updates to the new FCU altitude when the
Vertical Deviation
descent is initiated.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Anytime the CRZ altitude is automatically
Next Section
changed, NEW CRUISE ALTITUDE XXX
displays in the MCDU scratchpad. An
altitude lower than the current FCU altitude
cannot be inserted directly into this field.
MCDU | Progress Page - CRZ | Section 14.4.2
MCDU | Progress Page - OPT | Section 14.4.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOGrEss P AGE - OPT S ECTION 14.4.3

Displays the most fuel-efficient altitude for Previous Section
ECON CRZ speed based on gross weight, Description

cost index, and temperature, using 500-
Phase of Flight
foot
increments and a minimum of 5
minutes cruise. Does not account for cruise CRZ
winds (see appropriate Recommended Step OPT

Climb chart in the Cruise Performance
REC MAX
chapter).
Report
If a selected speed other than ECON CRZ is
Report Page
being flown, OPT is not valid.
Update At
Predictive GPS
Predictive GPS Page
Required Accuracy
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Progress Page - OPT | Section 14.4.3
MCDU | Progress Page - REC MAX | Section 14.4.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOGrEss P AGE - REC MAX S ECTION 14.4.4

Based on gross weight, center of gravity, Previous Section
and temperature. The recommended Description

maximum altitude is the highest altitude at
Phase of Flight
which the airplane can:
CRZ
Maintain a 0.3g buffet margin
OPT
Fly in level flight at max cruise thrust
Maintain a vertical speed of 300 FPM REC MAX
at climb thrust Report
With an engine out, it displays the Report Page
recommended maximum EO altitude, Update At

computed for long range cruise speed at
Predictive GPS
max continuous thrust and anti-icing off.
Predictive GPS Page
Required Accuracy
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Progress Page - REC MAX | Section 14.4.4
MCDU | Progress Page - Report | Section 14.4.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOGrEss P AGE - R EpOrT S ECTION 14.4.5

Selects the REPORT page. Click here to view Previous Section
report page. Description
Phase of Flight
CRZ
OPT
REC MAX
Report
Report Page
Update At
Predictive GPS
Predictive GPS Page
Required Accuracy
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Progress Page - Report | Section 14.4.5
MCDU | Progress Page - Report Page | Section 14.4.5A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOGrEss P aGE - R EpOrT P aGE S ECTION 14.4.5A

The REPORT page may be useful for ATC Previous Section
position reporting, if the TO waypoint Description

matches the next compulsory reporting
Phase of Flight
point on the orientation chart.
CRZ
OPT
REC MAX
Report
Report Page
Update At
Predictive GPS
Predictive GPS Page
Required Accuracy
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Progress Page - Report Page | Section 14.4.5A
MCDU | Progress Page - Update At | Section 14.4.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOgrEss P agE - U pdaTE A T S ECTION 14.4.6

Only used to update position in the event of Previous Section
a large navigation error. Allows pilots to Description

update the airplane position over a known
Phase of Flight
position/navaid by entering a waypoint in
the brackets. After an entry, a small font CRZ
CONFIRM UPDATE AT prompt displays OPT

above the entered or computed LAT/LONG,
REC MAX
and an asterisked waypoint identifier also
displays for pilot confirmation. Report
Report Page
If a waypoint is incorrectly entered, do not
select the CONFIRM UPDATE AT prompt or Update At
attempt to CLR. Another page (e.g., flight Predictive GPS

plan, RADIO NAV, etc.) must be selected to
Predictive GPS Page
cancel the update.
Required Accuracy
When the CONFIRM UPDATE AT prompt is
Estimated Accuracy
selected, the FMGC position is updated to
the displayed LAT/LONG and brackets Vertical Deviation
redisplay to allow another update. < PREVIOUS NEXT >

CAUTION: Large navigation errors may Next Section
occur when the CONFIRM UPDATE AT

prompt is improperly selected.
MCDU | Progress Page - Update At | Section 14.4.6
MCDU | Progress Page - Predictive GPS | Section 14.4.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOgrEss P AgE - P rEDICTIvE GPS S ECTION 14.4.7

Selects the Predictive GPS page. Click here Previous Section
to view predictive GPS page. Description
Phase of Flight
CRZ
OPT
REC MAX
Report
Report Page
Update At
Predictive GPS
Predictive GPS Page
Required Accuracy
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Progress Page - Predictive GPS | Section 14.4.7
MCDU | Progress Page - Estimated Accuracy | Section 14.4.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rOgrEss P AgE - E sTImATEd A CCurACY S ECTION 14.4.9

Displays the FMGC’s statistical assessment Previous Section
of its own navigation accuracy. Description
Phase of Flight
CRZ
OPT
REC MAX
Report
Report Page
Update At
Predictive GPS
Predictive GPS Page
Required Accuracy
Estimated Accuracy
Vertical Deviation
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Progress Page - Estimated Accuracy | Section 14.4.9
MCDU | Climb Page Preflight - Next/Previous Phase | Section 14.5.16

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lIMB P agE P rEFlIghT - N ExT /P rEvIOus P hasE S ECTION 14.5.16


the NEXT or PREVIOUS PHASE prompt.
TO Page - Preflight
PREV PHASE - Provides access to Take Off Check TO Data

page - LS 6L.
NEXT PHASE - Provides access to Cruise Next/Previous Phase

page - LS 6R.
Active Mode Speed Target
Cost Index
Managed Speed
Preselected Speed Entry
Climb Page - Active

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Preflight - Next/Previous Phase | Section 14.5.16
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Next Phase | Section 14.5.21

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lIMB P agE A CTIvE - N ExT P hasE S ECTION 14.5.21


the NEXT PHASE prompt. Page title is a
TO Page - Preflight
green color when flight phase is active.
Check TO Data
Click on LS 6R to view next phase.
Click on LS 6L to activate approach phase. Climb Page - Active
Next Phase
Speed Target
Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
UTC and DEST EFOB
Target Altitude
Performance Predictions

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Next Phase | Section 14.5.21
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Next Phase | Section 14.5.31

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE P agE A CTIvE - N ExT P hasE S ECTION 14.5.31


the NEXT PHASE prompt. Page title is a
TO Page - Preflight
green color when flight phase is active.
Check TO Data
Click on LS 6R to view next phase.
Click on LS 6L to activate approach phase. Climb Page - Active
Next Phase
Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
Act Mode
Cost Index
Computed Speed
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Next Phase | Section 14.5.31
MCDU | Descent Page Active - Description | Section 14.5.35

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT P agE A CTIvE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.5.35

ACTIVE MODE - Indicates the active mode Previous Section
speed target in green (managed or Description

selected). Cannot be modified through this
TO Page - Preflight
field.
Check TO Data
TIME, UTC and DEST EFOB - Before takeoff,
displays the flight time (time) to
destination and the predicted landing fuel. Climb Page - Active
After takeoff, it displays the predicted Cruise Page - Preflight

arrival time at destination (UTC) and the
predicted landing fuel. If the pilots enter an
estimated takeoff time, the predicted Descent Page - Preflight
arrival time (UTC) at destination displays Descent Page - Active

automatically.
Description
SPEED TARGETS - Current speed targets for Activate Appr Phase

both MANAGED and SELECTED speed. The
Confirm Appr Phase
active mode is in large font.
Target Altitude
ACTIVATE APPR PHASE - Appears when < PREVIOUS NEXT >
displayed page is active. First push causes
CONFIRM APPR PHASE prompt to appear; Approach Page - Preflight
second push activates the APPR PHASE. Approach Page - Active
NEXT PHASE - Provides access to Approach Go Around Page
Page page - LS 6R. Next Section
MCDU | Descent Page Active - Description | Section 14.5.35
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Enter Destination Data | Section 14.5.40

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCh P agE P rEFlIghT - E NTEr D EsTINaTION D aTa S ECTION 14.5.40

ENTER DEST DATA message appears in Previous Section
amber on the scratchpad when within 180 Description

NM of the destination and data is not
TO Page - Preflight
entered.
Check TO Data
PREV PHASE - Provides access to Descent
page - LS 6L.
Climb Page - Active
NEXT PHASE - Provides access to Go Around
Page page - LS 6R.
Enter Destination Data
QNH
Temperature
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Mag Wind
Trans FL
Vapp
F, S, Clean Speeds
Vls
Go Around Page
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Enter Destination Data | Section 14.5.40
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Active - Final | Section 14.5.48

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCh P agE A CTIvE - F INal S ECTION 14.5.48

Displays selected approach from the flight Previous Section
plan. Cannot be modified through this field. Description
NEXT PHASE - Provides access to Go Around TO Page - Preflight
Page page - LS 6R. Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Final
MDA
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
DH
Ldg Config 3
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Active - Final | Section 14.5.48
MCDU | Go Around Page - Engine Out ACC | Section 14.5.56

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
G O A rOuNd P agE - E NgINE O uT ACC S ECTION 14.5.56

Displays engine out acceleration altitude. Previous Section
Defaults to 800 feet above destination Description

runway elevation. For display only;
TO Page - Preflight
however, can be modified by the pilots.
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Go Around Page
Description
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
F, S, Clean Speeds
Thr Red
ACC
Engine Out ACC
Next Section
MCDU | Go Around Page - Engine Out ACC | Section 14.5.56
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Prev Phase | Section 14.6.41

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT W INd P aGE - P rEv P hasE S ECTION 14.6.41

PREV PHASE - Line select 4R to display the Previous Section
CRUISE WIND page. Description
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Return
Altn Wind
Wind Request
Prev Phase
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Prev Phase | Section 14.6.41
MCDU | Data Index Page 1 - Description | Section 14.7.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D aTa I NdEx P agE 1 - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.7.1

POSITION MONITOR - Allows the pilot to Previous Section
review the current computed position for Data Index Pages

each FMGC, the MIX position, and the
Data Index Page 1
estimated navigation performance for each
IRS. Description

IRS MONITOR - Allows the pilot to review
the current computed values for each IRS. Selected NavAids Page
Position Frozen Page

GPS MONITOR - Allows the pilot to review
the current computed values for each GPS. IRS Monitor Page
IRS1 Page
A/C STATUS - Allows the pilot to review the
current database information and GPS Monitor Page
performance corrections. A/C Status Page
CLOSEST AIRPORTS - Allows the pilot to Software Status Page
obtain data for the four closest airports. Closest Airports Page 1
EQUITIME POINT - Allows the pilot to set up Closest Airports Page 2
a Point of Equal Time calculation. < PREVIOUS NEXT >

Equi-Time Point Page
Data Index Page 2
Next Section

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D aTa I NdEx P aGE 2 - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.7.9

WAYPOINTS / NAVAIDS / RUNWAYS / Previous Section
ROUTES (left keys) - Allows the pilot to Data Index Pages

review expanded information for database
Data Index Page 1
points.
Data Index Page 2
PILOTS WAYPOINTS / NAVAIDS / RUNWAYS
Description
/ ROUTES (right Keys) - Allows the pilot to
build new points (waypoints, navaids, Waypoint Page
runways, and routes) with information for Waypoint HAFNR

nav data that is not in the nav database.
New Waypoint Page
SEC F-PLN WINDS - Allows the pilot to Store Waypoint

access the winds page for the secondary
Pilot Waypoint Page
flight plan.
NavAid Page
This page is accessed by selecting the DATA
NavAid ORD
key.
New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | Pilots Route Page | Section 14.7.20

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P IlOTs R OuTE P aGE S ECTION 14.7.20

Displays parameters for route identified in Previous Section
1L. Data Index Pages
CO RTE - Any company route ident entered Data Index Page 1
in this field allows all the elements of the Data Index Page 2
route to display. Pilots must insert nine
Description
digits.
Waypoint Page
NEW ROUTE - Displays NEW ROUTE page.
Waypoint HAFNR
DELETE ALL - Deletes all routes stored by New Waypoint Page

the pilots.
Store Waypoint
Pilot Waypoint Page
NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | Pilots Route Page | Section 14.7.20
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | Flight Plan A Page | Section 14.8.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGHT P LAN A P AGE S ECTION 14.8.1

Time, speed, and altitude predictions are Previous Section
displayed for each waypoint in the primary Description

flight plan. Before takeoff, time predictions
Flight Plan A Page
represent estimated time enroute.
Flight Plan A Prior to TO
When takeoff thrust is set, TIME changes to
UTC to show that time predictions
represent estimated time of arrival. Lateral Rev at PPOS

Ditto marks (“) are displayed if the
parameters remain unchanged from the Lateral Rev Dest Airport
line above. Airways Page
Departure Page B
Flight Plan B Page
Arrival Page A
Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Flight Plan A Page | Section 14.8.1
MCDU | Flight Plan A Prior to Take Off | Section 14.8.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIgHT P laN A P rIOr TO T aKE O ff S ECTION 14.8.2

ORIGIN - Allows selection of departure Previous Section
runway and/or SID - LS 1L. Description
RUNWAY EXTENSION - Provides dynamic Flight Plan A Page
waypoint indicating where the airplane will Flight Plan A Prior to TO

be at 1500 feet AFE.
DESTINATION - Allows selection of landing Lateral Rev at PPOS

runway and/or STAR - LS 6L.
Airways Page
Departure Page B
Flight Plan B Page
Arrival Page A
Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Flight Plan A Prior to Take Off | Section 14.8.2
MCDU | Airways Page | Section 14.8.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A Irways P aGE S ECTION 14.8.7

Accessed from lateral revision at waypoint Previous Section
page. Description
ALTN - Waypoint displays the FROM Flight Plan A Page
waypoint for the beginning of the airway Flight Plan A Prior to TO

routing.
VIA - Insert the airway that defines the next Lateral Rev at PPOS
portion of the route.
TO - The end point for the first airway Lateral Rev Dest Airport
sequence.
Airways Page
TMPY INSERT - Allows the pilot to insert the Departure Page B

complete airway routing that has been built
Flight Plan B Page
on the airways page.
Arrival Page A
Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Airways Page | Section 14.8.7
MCDU | Departure Page B | Section 14.8.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EparTurE P aGE B S ECTION 14.8.8

RWY / SID / TRANS - Displays current Previous Section
selected runway, SID, and transition. Description
SIDS / AVAILABLE - Displays SIDS available Flight Plan A Page
for the departure runway. Flight Plan A Prior to TO
TMPY F-PLN - Returns to the current flight Lateral Rev Dept Airport
plan without inserting changes. Lateral Rev at PPOS
EOSID - (Engine Out SID) Displays if an Lateral Rev at Waypoint
engine-out SID exists for the departure Lateral Rev Dest Airport
runway; otherwise, NONE appears.
Airways Page
TMPY INSERT - Inserts changes into flight Departure Page B

plan.
Flight Plan B Page
Arrival Page A
Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Departure Page B | Section 14.8.8
MCDU | Flight Plan B Page | Section 14.8.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGHT P LAN B P AGE S ECTION 14.8.9

Displays fuel and wind predictions for each Previous Section
waypoint in the primary flight plan. Ditto Description

marks (“) are displayed if the parameters
Flight Plan A Page
remain unchanged from the line above.
Flight Plan A Prior to TO
Lateral Rev at PPOS
Airways Page
Departure Page B
Flight Plan B Page
Arrival Page A
Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Flight Plan B Page | Section 14.8.9
MCDU | Arrival Page A | Section 14.8.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A rrIval P aGE A S ECTION 14.8.10

Accessed from the LAT REV page from Previous Section
either the destination or alternate airports. Description

ARRIVAL page A allows selection of a
Flight Plan A Page
runway or instrument approach. Page B
provides selection of a STAR and an arrival Flight Plan A Prior to TO
transition. Lateral Rev Dept Airport
APPR AVAILABLE - Displays approaches and Lateral Rev at PPOS
runways available. If at least one STAR Lateral Rev at Waypoint

compatible with the selected approach
exists, or if an arrival transition is
compatible, the ARRIVAL page B displays Airways Page
automatically after APPR selection. Departure Page B
Flight Plan B Page
Arrival Page A
Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Arrival Page A | Section 14.8.10
MCDU | Arrival Page B | Section 14.8.11

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A rrIval P aGE B S ECTION 14.8.11

Accessed from the ARRIVAL page A allows Previous Section
selection of a STAR and an arrival Description

transition.
Flight Plan A Page
APPR / VIA / STAR - Displays selections. If Flight Plan A Prior to TO

no selection has been made, white dashes
display.
Lateral Rev at PPOS
APPR VIAS - Displays VIAS available for the
selected approach.
VIAS are the transitions from the IAFs to
Airways Page
the final approach segment. Creates a
temporary flight plan until inserted. Departure Page B
Flight Plan B Page
CAUTION Arrival Page A
Auto-stringing a VIA to an approach Arrival Page B

may delete part of a previously loaded
Approach Vias Page
STAR. < PREVIOUS NEXT >

STARS AVAILABLE - Displays STARs Step Altitude at Waypoint
available for the arrival runway. Database Hold Page
TRANS - Displays the selected STAR Computed Hold at Waypoint
transition. Next Section
TRANS AVAILABLE - Displays arrival
MCDU | Arrival Page B | Section 14.8.11
transitions for the selected STAR.
MCDU | Approach Vias Page | Section 14.8.12

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCH V Ias P aGE S ECTION 14.8.12

APPR / VIA / STAR - Currently selected Previous Section
approach, STAR, and VIA. Description
APPR VIAS - Accessed by selecting the VIAS Flight Plan A Page
prompt on the ARRIVAL page. Flight Plan A Prior to TO
NO VIAS - Selected when none of the Lateral Rev Dept Airport
available VIAS are desired (e.g., when Lateral Rev at PPOS

radar vectors are provided after the last
point of the STAR) to prevent auto-
stringing from an IAF to the approach. Lateral Rev Dest Airport
Airways Page
Departure Page B
Flight Plan B Page
Arrival Page A
Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Vias Page | Section 14.8.12
MCDU | Vertical Rev At Depart Airport | Section 14.8.13

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
V ErTICal R Ev A T D EparT A IrpOrT S ECTION 14.8.13

Accessed from the ARRIVAL page A allows Previous Section
selection of a STAR and an arrival Description

transition.
Flight Plan A Page
APPR / VIA / STAR - Displays selections. If Flight Plan A Prior to TO

no selection has been made, white dashes
display.
Lateral Rev at PPOS
APPR VIAS - Displays VIAS available for the
selected approach.
VIAS are the transitions from the IAFs to
Airways Page
the final approach segment. Creates a
temporary flight plan until inserted. Departure Page B
Flight Plan B Page
CAUTION Arrival Page A
Auto-stringing a VIA to an approach Arrival Page B

may delete part of a previously loaded
Approach Vias Page
STAR. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Database Hold Page
Next Section
MCDU | Vertical Rev At Depart Airport | Section 14.8.13
MCDU | Vertical Rev At Waypoint | Section 14.8.14

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
V ErTICal R Ev A T W aYpOINT S ECTION 14.8.14

SPD CSTR - If entered, creates a speed Previous Section
constraint at the selected waypoint. The Description

asterisk is magenta if the speed constraint
Flight Plan A Page
will be made, or amber if it will be missed
by +10 knots. Flight Plan A Prior to TO
NOTE Lateral Rev at PPOS
Altitude and speed constraints may Lateral Rev at Waypoint

apply to climb, descent, or
approachphase, but never to the
Airways Page
cruise phase. If an ALT or SPD CSTR is
entered between the T/C and T/D, the Departure Page B
CLB and DES prompts appear.
Flight Plan B Page
Arrival Page A

Arrival Page B
Approach Vias Page

NOTE
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
The speed constraint can also be
entered directly on the flight plan ALT CSTR - If entered, creates an altitude Vertical Rev At Waypoint
page. constraint at the selected waypoint. The Step Altitude at Waypoint

asterisk is magenta if the altitude constraint
Database Hold Page
will be made, or amber if it will be missed by

plus or minus 250 feet. Note: The altitude Computed Hold at Waypoint
WIND DATA - Enables selection of the wind
constraint can also be entered directly on Next Section
pages.
the flight plan page.
RTA - Allows entry of estimated takeoff
MCDU | Vertical Rev At Waypoint | Section 14.8.14
time. Flight plan UTC then displays ETA at
destination in UTC. When past the takeoff
time, a CLK TIME IS TAKEOFF TIME
message appears in the scratchpad. Flight
plan will continue to update new arrival
UTC.
MCDU | Radio Nav Page - Description 2 | Section 14.9.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
R adIO N av P aGE - D EsCrIpTION 2 S ECTION 14.9.1

ILS/FREQ - Auto-tuned if an ILS is Previous Section
associated with the departure runway, or if Description

an ILS approach is selected at destination.
Description Page 2
It may also be manually entered. When the
manually entered ILS differs from the ILS Next Section
frequency for the selected landing runway,

RWY/ILS MISMATCH displays.
CRS - Displays the associated ILS course.

Automatically selected only when an ILS is
auto-tuned or if an ILS is manually tuned
with its identifier; otherwise, amber boxes
appear, requesting course information. An
‘F’ prefix designates a front course.
ADF/FREQ - Displays associated identifiers

and frequencies. Auto-tuned only when the
airplane passes the first fix of a selected
NDB approach. ADF is manually tuned
either via the identifier or the frequency. If < PREVIOUS NEXT >
the frequency is used, a decimal must

always be included in the figure (i.e.,
346.0).
ADF, BFO - When an ADF is selected, ADF

BFO prompt displays. Selecting 6L deletes
the arrow and provides BFO. Using the CLR
key cancels BFO and the arrow returns.
MCDU | Radio Nav Page - Description 2 | Section 14.9.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEl P rEd P agE - D EsCrIpTION P agE 2 S ECTION 14.10.1

FINAL/TIME - Carried over from INIT page A Previous Section
after the first engine is started. Displays Description Page 1

the final fuel and time at the alternate
Description Page 2
airport (at the destination, if no alternate
entered). The pilot can enter a final fuel in Description Page 3
pounds or a final endurance in hours and Next Section

minutes (HHMM). The FMGC will calculate
the other value assuming a racetrack
holding pattern, 1500 feet above the
airport, in clean configuration, at green dot
speed. The default value is 45 minutes.
EXTRA/TIME - Displays the uncommitted

fuel left over for contingencies. Extra fuel is
automatically calculated by subtracting RTE
RSV and FINAL fuel from the estimated fuel
on board at the alternate (at the
destination, if no alternate entered). The
corresponding endurance is calculated
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
assuming a racetrack holding pattern, 1500
feet above the destination airport, in clean
configuration, at green dot speed. If the
extra fuel is negative, dashes are displayed
in the endurance field. EXTRA/TIME cannot
be modified by the pilots.
NOTE
If in holding when the EXTRA fuel

reaches zero, a TIME TO EXIT

message appears in the scratchpad.

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F uEL P rEd P AgE - D EsCrIpTION P AgE 3 S ECTION 14.10.2

ZFW / ZFWCG - Pilot-entered zero fuel Previous Section
weight and zero fuel weight CG. Description Page 1
FOB - The fuel on board that is updated Description Page 2
from the fuel quantity system. This number Description Page 3

should not be entered by the pilot in
Next Section
normal operations.
GW/CG - Computed gross weight and center

of gravity.
MIN DEST FOB - Min destination FOB is

calculated by the FMGC and equals the
pilot-entered final time and fuel required to
fly to the alternate.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
SEC I NdEx P agE - D EsCrIpTION P agE 2 S ECTION 14.11.1

COPY ACTIVE - Copies the active flight plan Previous Section
into the secondary flight plan, and erases Description Page 1

the previous secondary flight plan. The
Description Page 2
active flight plan remains unchanged.
Next Section
SEC F-PLN - Accesses the secondary flight
plan route pages.
DELETE SEC - Deletes the current

secondary flight plan.
ACTIVATE SEC - Copies the secondary flight

plan into the active flight plan. The
secondary flight plan remains unchanged.
ACTIVATE SEC prompt is available if:
HDG/TRK is active.
NAV mode is active and the current
leg is common to both the active
and secondary flight plans. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
INIT - Accesses the secondary flight plan

INIT pages.
Flight Management Guidance Computer | Modes of Operation | Section 14.16.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIgHT M aNagEmENT G uIdaNCE C OmpuTEr S ECTION 14.16.1

M OdEs Of O pEraTION Previous Section
The FMGC has three possible modes of INDEPENDENT MODE - The FMGCs Description
operation: automatically degrade to independent Modes of Operation

mode under specific abnormal conditions.
Dual Position Computation
Each FMGC continues to make its own
Independent
computations of airspeed, position, etc., Navigation Accuracy
Single
but the two FMGCs no longer exchange Next Section
DUAL MODE - The normal mode of data with each other over the cross-talk
operation is the dual mode. Each FMGC bus. Therefore, there is no coordination or
makes its own computations of airspeed, validation of data and cross-check with raw
aircraft position, etc., and exchanges data data is recommended. Each MCDU
with the other FMGC through a cross talk communicates only with its onside FMGC,
bus. One FMGC is the master and the other and each FMGC controls only its onside
is the slave. Entries on either MCDU are displays and radios. When this occurs, the
transmitted to both FMGCs. Most INDEPENDENT OPERATION message
information is exchanged between both appears in the MCDU scratchpad.
FMGCs for cross comparison and
To keep the FMGCs synchronized, pilots
validation. The following conditions exist
must make the same entries on both
during the normal mode of operation:
MCDUs. This ensures both autopilots and
If one autopilot button is selected flight directors display similar orders.
ON, the associated FMGC is the
SINGLE MODE - Single mode occurs if one
master
FMGC fails. Entries on either MCDU are
If both autopilot buttons are selected
transferred to the operating FMGC, and the
ON, FMGC 1 is the master
OPP FMGC IN PROCESS message appears
If neither autopilot button is selected
on the MCDU. In the single mode, both NDs
ON:
must be set to the same mode and range
FMGC 1 is the master any
Flight Management Guidance Computer | Modes of Operation | Section 14.16.1
or a SET OFFSIDE RNG/MODE message will
time the Captain’s flight
appear on the ND. Cross-check with raw
director button is selected ON
data is recommended.
FMGC 2 is the master when
the First Officer’s flight Either FMGC is capable of performing all
director button is selected on operations if the other FMGC fails.
and the Captain’s flight
director button is selected
OFF
FMGC 1 is the master when
both flight director buttons
are selected OFF
Flight Management Guidance Computer | Position Computation | Section 14.16.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIgHT M aNagEmENT G uIdaNCE C OmpuTEr S ECTION 14.16.2

P OsITION C OmpuTaTION Previous Section
Each FMGC receives position information Description
from all three IRS units and couples this Modes of Operation
with the GPS position to compute a hybrid
position, referred to as the GPIRS position.
If one IRS fails, each FMGC uses only the Navigation Accuracy
onside IRS (if operable) or IRS 3. Next Section
In flight, the FMGC position always

approaches the GPIRS position at a rate
depending on aircraft altitude. If the GPIRS
position is lost, the FMGC reverts to radio
position updating until GPIRS position is
restored. When the GPIRS position is lost,
GPS PRIMARY LOST displays on the ND and
on the MCDU scratchpad. The MCDU
message may be cleared but the ND
message remains.
Position computation may be checked on

the Position Monitor Page or GPS Monitor
Page.
Flight Management Guidance Computer | Position Computation | Section 14.16.2
Flight Management Guidance Computer | Navigation Accuracy | Section 14.16.32

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT M aNagEmENT G uIdaNCE C OmpuTEr S ECTION 14.16.3

N avIgaTION A CCuraCY Previous Section
The FMGC continuously monitors its The required accuracy displays on the PROG Description
performance to compute an estimated page, and may be directly modified by the Modes of Operation
position error (EPE), which displays on the pilots, but normally varies automatically
PROG page. The displayed EPE does not according to the following criteria:
necessarily indicate the present FMGC Navigation Accuracy
Enroute - Over 51 NM from the
position is accurate or inaccurate, as this Next Section
departure or arrival airport.
can only be determined with raw data. It is
Required accuracy is
2.0 NM
only a number with statistical significance
Terminal - Within 51 NM of the
based on the assessed quality of the
departure or arrival airport.
aircraft’s sensors and the navigation mode
Required accuracy is 1.0 NM
in use (which displays on the POSTION
Approach - From the FAF to the
MONITOR page).
runway, or within 5 NM of the first
In decreasing order of accuracy, the four defined fix on the final approach,
navigation modes are: whichever occurs first. If no
approach is selected, within 15 NM
IRS-GPS
of the destination airport. Required
IRS-DME/DME
accuracy is 0.30 NM
IRS-VOR/DME
IRS only If the estimated accuracy is better than
required, the FMGC displays HIGH nav
During ILS approaches, the system
accuracy. If the required accuracy is equal
performs temporary lateral updating, using
to or lower than required, it displays LOW
the localizer.
nav accuracy. Pilots are alerted when the
The FMGC compares the current EPE to the nav accuracy changes from HIGH to LOW,
required accuracy, referred to as RNP, for or LOW to HIGH, by messages on the ND
the current area of flight (enroute, and the MCDU. Position accuracy is always
Flight Management Guidance Computer | Navigation Accuracy | Section 14.16.32
terminal, and approach). HIGH if in GPS primary mode.
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Manually Setting Landing Elevation | Section 15.1.18

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C Ab P rEss SD - M ANuAllY S ETTINg L ANdINg E lEvATION Previous Section
When the Landing Elevation Selector is Cond SD
placed out of the AUTO position, the cabin Bleed SD

MAN annunciation and the selected LDG
Cruise SD
ELEV altitude is displayed on the ECAM CAB
PRESS page. Cab Press SD
Description 1
Description 2
Smoke Config

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCATION
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Manually Setting Landing Elevation | Section 15.1.18
Pneumatic System Displays | Cruise SD - Description | Section 15.1.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C ruIsE SD - D EsCrIpTION Previous Section
1. ΔP INDICATION - Displays green and Cond SD
becomes amber when out of normal range. Bleed SD
2. LDG ELEV AUTO/MAN INDICATION - Cruise SD
Displays identically to CAB PRESS page. Description
3. LANDING ELEVATION - Displays Cruise w/Man Press
identically to CAB PRESS page. Cab Press SD
4. CABIN VERTICAL SPEED - Displays green Next Section
when in normal range. Pulses green when

vertical speed exceeds 1800 FPM. Displays
L OCATION
amber when vertical speed is exceeds 2000
FPM.
5. CABIN ALTITUDE - Displays green when

in normal range. Pulses green when cabin
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
altitude exceeds 8800 feet. Displays red
when cabin altitude exceeds 9550 feet.
Pneumatic System Displays | Cruise SD - Description | Section 15.1.9
Pneumatic System | APU Bleed Air | Section 15.6.1

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P NEumATIC S YsTEm S ECTION 15.6.1

APU B lEEd A IR Previous Section
The APU supplies air to the pneumatic Description
system through the APU bleed valve, which APU Bleed Air
operates as a shutoff valve. It is electrically
Engine Bleed Air
controlled and pneumatically operated, see
APU Bleed Switch page 15.2.6. External Air
Leak Detection
When the APU BLEED valve is open, signals
are provided to the BMCs, which command Next Section
the crossbleed valve to open (with the X

BLEED selector in AUTO) and engine bleed
L OCATION
valves to close. The APU bleed air supplies
the pneumatic system.
The APU can be used to supply bleed air to

the packs during takeoff and while airborne
permitting additional thrust to be obtained
from the engines. The APU bleed must not
be used for wing anti-ice.
Pneumatic System | APU Bleed Air | Section 15.6.1
Pneumatic System | Engine Bleed Air | Section 15.6.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P NEuMATIC S YsTEM S ECTION 15.6.2

E NgINE B lEEd A Ir Previous Section
Each engine supplies temperature limited Description
and pressure regulated bleed air to the APU Bleed Air

pneumatic system. Engine bleed air
Engine Bleed Air
temperature is controlled by a precooler
that uses fan air. Air is normally bled from External Air
the intermediate pressure (IP) stage of the Leak Detection

compressor. When IP stage pressure is
Next Section
insufficient, a high pressure bleed valve
opens to supply bleed air from the high L OCATION
pressure (HP) stage. In flight, if the
pressure is insufficient even with the HP
stage valve open (i.e., engine at idle), the
engine spools up automatically to provide
minimum air pressure.
PRESSURE REGULATOR - A pressure

regulating and shutoff valve (bleed valve) See System Display Bleed Air page 15.1.3
is located downstream of the IP and HP for description of symbols.
engine bleed valves. The valve closes if the
upstream pressure is low or reverse airflow
occurs. If the pressure regulating and
shutoff valve fails to regulate, an
overpressure valve closes to protect the
pneumatic system. See Engine Bleed
Switch for when pressure regulating valve
closes automatically.
Pneumatic System | Engine Bleed Air | Section 15.6.2
Pneumatic System | External Air | Section 15.6.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P NEuMATIC S YsTEM S ECTION 15.6.3

E xTErNAl A Ir Previous Section
EXTERNAL AIR - External air can be Description
supplied to the left side of the pneumatic APU Bleed Air

manifold through a connector located
Engine Bleed Air
forward of the left gear well.
External Air
GND HP CONNECTION INDICATION -
Leak Detection
Displays green on the ground and DOES
NOT indicate exteranl air is connected. Next Section
DISTRIBUTION - During normal operation L OCATION

with the engines supplying bleed air, the
crossbleed valve is closed and the
pneumatic manifold is separated into two
systems. If either pneumatic source is lost,
the crossbleed valve can be opened
manually by a selector on the air
conditioning panel. The crossbleed valve is See System Display Bleed Air page 15.1.3
controlled by two electric motors: one for for description of symbols.
the automatic mode and the other for the
manual mode. The crossbleed valve closes
automatically any time an air leak is
detected, except during engine start.
Pneumatic System | External Air | Section 15.6.3
Pneumatic System | Leak Detection | Section 15.6.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P NEuMATIC S ysTEM S ECTION 15.6.4

L EAk D ETECTION Previous Section
The leak detection system senses overheat Description
conditions in the vicinity of the hot air APU Bleed Air

ducts located in the fuselage, pylons, and
Engine Bleed Air
wings. The sensing elements are single
loop for the pylons and APU. A double loop External Air
is located in the fuselage up to the APU Leak Detection

check valve and in the wings. A wing leak
Next Section
signal is activated when both loops detect a
leak, or when one loop detects a leak with L OCATION
the other loop inoperative.
WING LEAK - The following occur with a

wing leak signal:
The bleed valve closes on the related

side
The associated ENG BLEED FAULT
APU LEAK - The following occur with a APU
light illuminates
leak signal:
The crossbleed valve closes (except
during engine start) The APU bleed valve closes
If open, the APU bleed valve closes The APU BLEED FAULT light
(except during engine start) if the illuminates
leak involves the left wing. The crossbleed valve closes (except
during engine start)
PYLON LEAK - The following occur with a
pylon leak signal:
The bleed valve closes on the related
Pneumatic System | Leak Detection | Section 15.6.4
side
The associated ENG BLEED FAULT
light illuminates
The crossbleed valve closes (except
during engine start)
Electrical System Displays | AC 1 Bus Failure Fault | Section 3.1.4.A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrICal S YsTEM D IsplaYs S ECTION 3.1.4.A

AC 1 B us F aIlurE F aulT Previous Section

External Power Only
AC 1 Bus Failure

TR 1 Failure
Generator Line 1
The illustration to the right depicts AC BUS
Dual AC Bus Failure
1 FAILURE fault. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCaTION
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/electrical/sys-3.1.4.A.html[23.01.2021 22:59:25]
Electrical System Displays | AC 1 Bus Failure Fault | Section 3.1.4.A
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/electrical/sys-3.1.4.A.html[23.01.2021 22:59:25]
Electrical System Displays | AC 1 Bus Failure Essential Power | Section 3.1.4.B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E lECTrICAl S YsTEM D IsplAYs S ECTION 3.1.4.B

AC 1 B us F AIlurE E ssENTIAl P OWEr Previous Section

External Power Only
AC 1 Bus Failure

TR 1 Failure
Generator Line 1
The illustration to the right depicts AC ESS
Dual AC Bus Failure
BUS powered via AC BUS 2. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCATION
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/electrical/sys-3.1.4.B.html[23.01.2021 22:59:29]
Electrical System Displays | AC 1 Bus Failure Essential Power | Section 3.1.4.B
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/electrical/sys-3.1.4.B.html[23.01.2021 22:59:29]
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Thrust Reduction Altitude | Section 14.5.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P aGE P rEFlIGhT - T hrusT R EduCTION A lTITudE S ECTION 14.5.3

Displays the thrust reduction altitude. Previous Section
Altitudes are MSL. The minimum value is Description

400 feet above runway elevation. THR RED
TO Page - Preflight
is always less than or equal to ACC altitude
and can be modified by the pilots. The V1, VR, V2
default value is 800 feet above runway Trans Alt

elevation. It must be entered as a four-
Thr Red
digit number (i.e., 900’ as 0900).
Acc
Uplink TO Data
F, S, Clean Speeds
Rwy
TO Shift
Flaps/THS
Flex TO Temp
Eng Out ACC

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Thrust Reduction Altitude | Section 14.5.3
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Uplink TO Data | Section 14.5.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P aGE P rEFlIGHT - U plINk TO D aTa S ECTION 14.5.5

LS 6L button when UPLINK TO DATA is Previous Section
displayed to upload takeoff data. This Description

function may not not be utilized by your
TO Page - Preflight
airline company.
V1, VR, V2
Trans Alt
Thr Red
Acc
Uplink TO Data
F, S, Clean Speeds
Rwy
TO Shift
Flaps/THS
Flex TO Temp
Eng Out ACC

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Uplink TO Data | Section 14.5.5
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Trans Alt | Section 14.5.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P AGE P rEFLIGHT - T rANs A LT S ECTION 14.5.2

Displays the transition altitude based on the Previous Section
departure airport. Can be modified by the Description

pilots.
TO Page - Preflight
V1, VR, V2
Trans Alt
Thr Red
Acc
Uplink TO Data
F, S, Clean Speeds
Rwy
TO Shift
Flaps/THS
Flex TO Temp
Eng Out ACC

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Trans Alt | Section 14.5.2
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - F, S, Clean Speeds | Section 14.5.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P AGE P rEfLIGHT - F, S, C LEAN S pEEds S ECTION 14.5.6

Displays F speed, S speed, and green dot Previous Section
speed for the predicted takeoff weight. Description

White dashes display until airplane weight
TO Page - Preflight
is entered on INIT page B.
V1, VR, V2
Trans Alt
Thr Red
Acc
Uplink TO Data
F, S, Clean Speeds
Rwy
TO Shift
Flaps/THS
Flex TO Temp
Eng Out ACC

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - F, S, Clean Speeds | Section 14.5.6
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Runway | Section 14.5.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P AGE P rEFLIGHT - R uNWAY S ECTION 14.5.7

Indicates the takeoff runway selected on the Previous Section
active flight plan. Pilot entry is not possible Description

through this field; runway must be entered
TO Page - Preflight
on the flight plan page. Dashed if no
runway is inserted into the flight plan. V1, VR, V2
Trans Alt
Thr Red
Acc
Uplink TO Data
F, S, Clean Speeds
Rwy
TO Shift
Flaps/THS
Flex TO Temp
Eng Out ACC

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Runway | Section 14.5.7
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - TO Shift | Section 14.5.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P agE P rEfLIgHT - TO S HIfT S ECTION 14.5.8

Allows pilot entry of new FMGC update Previous Section
position when performing an intersection Description

takeoff. The value entered should be the
TO Page - Preflight
distance in feet from the runway threshold
to the intersection, not the distance V1, VR, V2
remaining. Trans Alt
Thr Red
Acc
Uplink TO Data
F, S, Clean Speeds
Rwy
TO Shift
Flaps/THS
Flex TO Temp
Eng Out ACC

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - TO Shift | Section 14.5.8
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Flap THS | Section 14.5.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P agE P rEfLIgHT - F Laps /THS S ECTION 14.5.9

Allows pilot entry for takeoff flaps. Used for Previous Section
display only and has no effect on FMGC Description

computations. Stabilizer trim may or may
TO Page - Preflight
not be entered by your company.
V1, VR, V2
Trans Alt
Thr Red
Acc
Uplink TO Data
F, S, Clean Speeds
Rwy
TO Shift
Flaps/THS
Flex TO Temp
Eng Out ACC

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Flap THS | Section 14.5.9
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Flex TO Temp | Section 14.5.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P agE P rEflIgHT - F lEx TO T EMp S ECTION 14.5.10

Allows FLEX (assumed) takeoff temperature Previous Section
insertion (entered in degrees C). If no Description

value is entered, or if FLEX temperature is
TO Page - Preflight
less than OAT, FLEX is not available and
TO/GA must be used for takeoff. V1, VR, V2
Trans Alt
Thr Red
Acc
Uplink TO Data
F, S, Clean Speeds
Rwy
TO Shift
Flaps/THS
Flex TO Temp
Eng Out ACC

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Flex TO Temp | Section 14.5.10
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Eng Out ACC | Section 14.5.11

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P AGE P rEFLIGHT - E NG O uT ACC S ECTION 14.5.11

Displays engine out acceleration altitude as Previous Section
defined in the database or if manually Description

entered by the pilot. Used for display only.
TO Page - Preflight
V1, VR, V2
Trans Alt
Thr Red
Acc
Uplink TO Data
F, S, Clean Speeds
Rwy
TO Shift
Flaps/THS
Flex TO Temp
Eng Out ACC

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Eng Out ACC | Section 14.5.11
Go Around Page
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Selected Heading or Track Index - FD On | Section 8.3.30

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMarY F LIGhT D IspLaY S YMBOLs S ECTION 8.3.30

S ELECTEd H EadING Or T raCK I NdEx - FD O N Previous Section
Selected Heading or Track Index on heading PFD Symbols 1
scale is not present in the NAV mode; PFD Symbols 2

however, it does display when a heading is
PFD Symbols 3
preselected while in the NAV mode for
approximately 45 seconds. Vertical Deviation Indication
True Heading
DH Flags
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Selected Heading or Track Index - FD On | Section 8.3.30
Primary Flight Display Symbols | True Heading | Section 8.3.31

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMArY F LIGHT D IspLAY S YMBOLs S ECTION 8.3.31

T ruE H EAdING Previous Section
The TRU symbol is displayed when true PFD Symbols 1
heading is utilized instead of magnetic PFD Symbols 2

heading. This occurs when north of 73°
PFD Symbols 3
North or south of 60° South.
True Heading
DH Flags
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | True Heading | Section 8.3.31
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Load Factor Demand Mode | Section 7.3.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A lTErNaTE L aw - L Oad F aCTOr D EmaNd M OdE Previous Section
Whenever in alternate law, load factor Direct Law
demand mode is only available while in Alternate Law

flight when the landing gear is up. When
Description
the landing gear is extended the flight
control system reconfigures from alternate Load Factor Demand Mode
law to direct law and Load Factor Demand Load Factor Limitation
Mode is lost.
Low Speed Stability
AUTOMATIC PITCH TRIM - Load Factor High Speed Stability

Demand Mode is automatic pitch trim with
built-in protections. This automatic pitch
trim is engaged when the side stick is Stall Warning Speed
displaced from neutral and the G-load is Normal Law

between .5Gs to 1.25Gs. When the G load
demand exceeds the automatic pitch trim
G-limits (less than 0.5Gs or more than Mechanical Backup
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
1.25Gs or 33° of bank angle), then the Next Section
stabilizer stops trimming and the G-load is
displayed on the lower ECAM display.
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Load Factor Demand Mode | Section 7.3.2
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Load Factor Limitation | Section 7.3.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F LIGHT C ONTrOL L AWs S ECTION 7.3.3

A LTErNATE L AW - L OAD F ACTOr L IMITATION Previous Section
The load factor is automatically limited to: Direct Law
Alternate Law
Trailing edge flaps retracted: +2.5g
to -1.0g Description
Trailing edge flaps extended: +2.0g Load Factor Demand Mode

to 0.0g
Low Speed Stability
Stall Warning Speed
Normal Law
Mechanical Backup
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Load Factor Limitation | Section 7.3.3
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Load Alleviation Function | Section 7.3.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A lTErNaTE L aw - L OaD A llEvIaTION F uNCTION Previous Section
In alternate law, a Load Alleviation Function Direct Law
(LAF) is available on some A320s and Alternate Law

relieves wing structural loads in turbulent
Description
conditions. The ELACs and SECs monitor
the airplane's load factor and pilot- Load Factor Demand Mode
demanded load factor to determine LAF Load Factor Limitation

activation. When activated, the ailerons
Low Speed Stability
and spoilers 4 and 5 on each wing are
deflected symmetrically upward. Pilot High Speed Stability
control authority is not changed when this Load Alleviation Function

function is active.
Stall Warning Speed
The LAF is inhibited under the following Normal Law

conditions:
FLAPS lever not in the 0 position Mechanical Backup

Airspeed below 200 KIAS or above < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
VMO + 10 knots
Slats/flaps wing tip brakes engaged
Pitch alternate law without stability
protection
Pitch direct law
Flight Control Laws | Alternate Law - Load Alleviation Function | Section 7.3.6
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Stall Warning Speed | Section 8.3.39

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S TaLL W arNING S pEEd Previous Section
The VSW is defined by the top of a red and PFD Symbols 1
black strip along the speed scale. It PFD Symbols 2
represents the speed corresponding to the PFD Symbols 3

stall warning, as computed by the FACs.
PFD Symbols 4
The VSW symbol is displayed on the PFD in
alternate and direct law. Vertical Deviation Indicator
Stall Warning Speed
Green Dot Speed

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Econ Speed Range
Altitude Indicator
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Stall Warning Speed | Section 8.3.39

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

F lIghT D IrECTOr C OMMaNd B ars Previous Section
CONTINUED PFD Symbols 1
PFD Symbols 2
On newer airplanes, the flight directors
automatically pop up in the HDG-V/S mode Side Slip Index Beta Target
when a go-around is initiated and provide Bank Angle Limit Indicator

pitch and roll commands to maintain or
return to a lateral and vertical profile.
The following occur with either flight
Airplane Symbol
director is displayed:
Flight Path Vector
Bars bias out of view when bank
angle exceeds 45°, and return when
bank is reduced to less than 40° Flight Path Director
Bars bias out of view when pitch Pitch Scale

exceeds +25° or -13°, and return
when pitch is reduced to less than < PREVIOUS NEXT >
+22° or -10° Radio Altitude Height
Bars bias out of view at touchdown in Loc and GS Scales and Indices
the ROLL OUT mode
Bars flash (for a limited time) when a
reversion occurs or there is a loss of PFD Symbols 3
LOC or G/S signal in the LAND mode PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Airplane Symbol | Section 8.3.15

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A IrpLaNE S YMBOL Previous Section
The fixed Airplane Symbol is dimmed when PFD Symbols 1
TRK-FPA selected. PFD Symbols 2
Bank Angle Limit Indicator
Airplane Symbol
Flight Path Vector
Pitch Scale

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Airplane Symbol | Section 8.3.15
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Flight Path Vector | Section 8.3.16

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

F lIghT P aTh V ECTOr Previous Section
The FPV symbol appears when the HDG- PFD Symbols 1
V/S/ TRK-FPA button is selected to TRK-FPA PFD Symbols 2

and represents the airplane as seen from
behind. The FPV displays the lateral and
vertical inertial path (trajectory) of the Bank Angle Limit Indicator
airplane with respect to the ground. Flight Director Command Bars
BANK ANGLE - The FPV wings are always Flight Director Command Bars 2
parallel to the fixed airplane symbol wings; Airplane Symbol

therefore, the roll scale always indicates
Flight Path Vector
current bank angle.
CONTINUE
Pitch Scale

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMarY F lIghT D IsplaY S YMBOls S ECTION 8.3.17

F lIghT P aTh V ECTOr Previous Section
CONTINUED PFD Symbols 1
PFD Symbols 2
FLIGHT PATH ANGLE - Placement of the FPV
along the pitch axis indicates Flight path Side Slip Index Beta Target
angle (FPA). When the FPV is on the PFD Bank Angle Limit Indicator
horizon line, the FPA is zero (level flight). If
the FPV is above the horizon line, the
airplane is climbing; below the line, the Flight Director Command Bars 2
airplane is descending. Airplane Symbol
The angle of climb or descent corresponds Flight Path Vector
to where the center of the FPV intersects Flight Path Vector 2

the PFD pitch scale. FPA does not vary with
speed or configuration changes. Flying the
FPV onto the horizon line always produces Pitch Scale
level flight, regardless of airspeed or Pitch Limit Indicator

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
configuration; flying the FPV to 3° below
the horizon always produces a 3°
glidepath. Loc and GS Scales and Indices
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Pitch Scale | Section 8.3.19

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P rIMArY F LIGHT D IspLAY S YMbOLs S ECTION 8.3.19

P ITCH S CALE Previous Section
The Pitch Scale graduates between 80° PFD Symbols 1
nose-up and 80° nose-down with 2.5° PFD Symbols 2

increments between 30° nose-up and 10°
nose-down, and 10° increments thereafter.
Beyond 30° nose-up or nose-down, large Bank Angle Limit Indicator
red arrows indicate an excessive attitude Flight Director Command Bars

and the direction to follow in order to
reduce it.
Airplane Symbol
Flight Path Vector
Pitch Scale

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
PFD Symbols 3
PFD Symbols 4
PFD Symbols 5
Next Section
Primary Flight Display Symbols | Pitch Scale | Section 8.3.19
EFIS Control Panel | Barometric Window Reference STD | Section 8.1.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons

B ArOMETrIC W INdOw R EfErENCE STD
FD Off Button
STD is displayed in the window when the
FD On Button
barometric selector is pulled and FL is
displayed for all altitudes on the PFD. ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
VOR Switches On
VOR Switches Off
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
EFIS Control Panel | Barometric Window Reference STD | Section 8.1.6
EFIS Control Panel | Barometric Selector hPA | Section 8.1.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons

B ArOMETrIC S ElECTOr h PA
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
VOR Switches Off


< PREVIOUS NEXT >
the PFD.
EFIS Control Panel | Barometric Selector hPA | Section 8.1.8
EFIS Control Panel | Barometric Selector STD | Section 8.1.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons

B ArOMETrIC S ElECTOr STD
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
VOR Switches Off


< PREVIOUS NEXT >
the PFD.
EFIS Control Panel | Barometric Selector STD | Section 8.1.9
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - V-speed Box Prompts | Section 14.5.13

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P AGE P rEFLIGHT - V- spEED B Ox P rOMpTs S ECTION 14.5.13

V-speeds have been moved out of the fill-in Previous Section
fields due to a runway change on the flight Description

plan page.
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
V-speed Box Prompts
Flex Temp Brackets
Confirm TO Data
Climb Page - Active

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - V-speed Box Prompts | Section 14.5.13
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Flex Temp Brackets | Section 14.5.14

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P AGE P rEfLIGHT - F LEx T EMp B rACKETs S ECTION 14.5.14

Flex Temperature has been moved out of Previous Section
the fill-in fields due to a runway change on Description

the flight plan page.
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
V-speed Box Prompts
Flex Temp Brackets
Confirm TO Data
Climb Page - Active

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Flex Temp Brackets | Section 14.5.14
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Confirm TO Data | Section 14.5.15

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
TO P AGE P rEFLIGHT - C ONFIrM TO D ATA S ECTION 14.5.15

This may be selected to reinsert the V- Previous Section
speeds and flex temperature values after a Description

runway change has been performed in the
TO Page - Preflight
flight plan. If any values are manually
reinserted individually, this option is no Check TO Data
longer available. Check TO Data Message
V-speed Box Prompts
Flex Temp Brackets
Confirm TO Data
Climb Page - Active

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | TO Page Preflight - Confirm TO Data | Section 14.5.15
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - TRIP WIND | Section 14.6.23

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEL P rEDICTION P aGE - TRIP WIND S ECTION 14.6.23

If no winds have been entered on the wind Previous Section
page, an average wind component can be Description

added for short range flight plans. A (-)
Init A Page
sign prefix denotes a headwind.
Init B Page
Description
Init Fuel Prediction Page
Taxi
Trip Time
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - TRIP WIND | Section 14.6.23
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - Tru Wind/Alt | Section 14.6.25

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C LIMB W IND P AGE - T ru W IND /A LT S ECTION 14.6.25

Climb winds can be entered for up to four Previous Section
altitudes and cruise flight levels. Description
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Return
History Wind
Wind Request
Next Phase
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - Tru Wind/Alt | Section 14.6.25
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - Return | Section 14.6.25A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lImB W INd P aGE - R ETurN S ECTION 14.6.25A

Line select 6L returns the MCDU to the Previous Section
previous page, either INIT page A or VERT Description

REV page.
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Return
History Wind
Wind Request
Next Phase
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - Return | Section 14.6.25A
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - History Wind | Section 14.6.26

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lIMB W INd P AGE - H IsTOry W INd S ECTION 14.6.26

If winds cannot be uplinked, the HISTORY Previous Section
WIND function is available. Line select 1R Description

displays the HISTORY WIND page.
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Return
History Wind
Wind Request
Next Phase
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - History Wind | Section 14.6.26
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - Wind Request | Section 14.6.26A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C LIMB W INd P aGE - W INd R EQuEsT S ECTION 14.6.26A

During preflight the pilots line select 3R to Previous Section
request wind via datalink. The forecast Description

enroute winds are uplinked for the points
Init A Page
that are loaded in the Flight Plan. The climb
and descent winds are uploaded at the Init B Page
departure and arrival airports. A Climb Wind Page

temperature forecast is uploaded for a
Description
default altitude near the Tropopause in the
CRUISE WIND page. Tru Wind/Alt
Return
CAUTION History Wind
The route must be independently Wind Request

cross-checked against the Flight Plan.
Next Phase
Due to some rare formatting
History Wind Page
anomalies, the route uplink can
contain errors that must be corrected Cruise Wind Page
after the upload is complete.
Descent Wind Page
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - Wind Request | Section 14.6.26A
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - Next Phase | Section 14.6.27

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lIMB W IND P aGE - N ExT P hasE S ECTION 14.6.27

If a flight plan has been entered on the Previous Section
flight plan page, NEXT PHASE will allow Description

entry of winds for flight plan waypoints on
Init A Page
the Cruise Wind page.
Init B Page
Line select 5R to view the Cruise Wind page
Climb Wind Page
example.
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Return
History Wind
Wind Request
Next Phase
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Wind Page - Next Phase | Section 14.6.27
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Climb Performance Predictions | Section 14.5.26

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lImb P aGE A CTIvE - C lImb P ErFOrmaNCE P rEdICTIONs S ECTION 14.5.26

Displays predicted ETA (center field) and Previous Section
the distance (right side field) required to Description

reach the altitude displayed on line 2R. The
TO Page - Preflight
predictions are paired to the lines on the
left side of the screen. Line 3R displays Check TO Data
predicted climb performance for ECON Climb Page - Preflight

(managed) speed. Line 4R displays
Climb Page - Active
predicted climb performance for selected
speed/Mach. Line 5R displays predicted Next Phase
climb performance for EXP CLB. The line Speed Target

corresponding to the active mode displays
Activate Appr Phase
in large font.
Confirm Appr Phase
UTC and DEST EFOB
Target Altitude

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Climb Performance Predictions | Section 14.5.26
MCDU | Cruise Page Preflight - Managed Speed | Section 14.5.28

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE P AgE P rEfLIgHT - M ANAgED S pEED S ECTION 14.5.28

Computed by the FMGC based on cost Previous Section
index. Description
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Previous/Next Phase
Managed Speed
Presel
Des Cabin Rate

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Page Preflight - Managed Speed | Section 14.5.28
MCDU | Cruise Page Preflight - Presel | Section 14.5.29

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE P aGE P rEFLIGhT - P rEsEL S ECTION 14.5.29

If cruise phase is active, field is blank. If Previous Section
cruise phase is not active, a preselected Description

entry is possible as a SPD or MACH
TO Page - Preflight
number.
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Previous/Next Phase
Managed Speed
Presel
Des Cabin Rate

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Page Preflight - Presel | Section 14.5.29
MCDU | Cruise Page Preflight - Descent Cabin Rate | Section 14.5.30

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE P AGE P rEFLIGHT - D EsCENT C ABIN R ATE S ECTION 14.5.30

Displays defaulted value for cabin altitude Previous Section
descent rate. Can be modified. Description
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Previous/Next Phase
Managed Speed
Presel
Des Cabin Rate

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Page Preflight - Descent Cabin Rate | Section 14.5.30
MCDU | History Wind Page - Select | Section 14.6.29

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H IsTOrY W INd P AGE - S ElECT S ECTION 14.6.29

Select Prompt inserts memorized history Previous Section
winds into the CLIMB WIND page. Description
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Description
Climb Wind
Select
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | History Wind Page - Select | Section 14.6.29
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Tru Wind/Alt | Section 14.6.31

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE W IND P AgE - T ru W IND /A LT S ECTION 14.6.31

True winds can be entered for four flight Previous Section
levels. The FMGC can make the best step Description

climb predictions when complete wind data
Init A Page
is entered.
Init B Page
In this example, the wind has been entered
Climb Wind Page
via the scratch pad.
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Sat/Alt
Return
Wind Request
UpLink Request
UpLink Insert
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Prev Phase
Next Phase
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Tru Wind/Alt | Section 14.6.31
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Sat/Alt | Section 14.6.32

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE W IND P AGE - S AT /A LT S ECTION 14.6.32

The temperature can be entered for one Previous Section
flight level. Description
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Sat/Alt
Return
Wind Request
UpLink Request
UpLink Insert
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Prev Phase
Next Phase
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Sat/Alt | Section 14.6.32
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Return | Section 14.6.32A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE W INd P aGE - R ETurN S ECTION 14.6.32A


REV page.
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Sat/Alt
Return
Wind Request
UpLink Request
UpLink Insert
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Prev Phase
Next Phase
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Return | Section 14.6.32A
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Wind Request | Section 14.6.32B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE W IND P aGE - W IND R EQuEsT S ECTION 14.6.32B

In this example, the pilots line select 3R to Previous Section
request wind via datalink while enroute. Description

The forecast enroute winds are uplinked for
Init A Page
the points that are loaded in the Flight
Plan. The enroute and descent winds are Init B Page
uploaded for the arrival airports. A Climb Wind Page

temperature forecast is uploaded for a
History Wind Page
default altitude near the Tropopause.
Cruise Wind Page
Line select 3R to begin the datalink request.
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Sat/Alt
Return
Wind Request
UpLink Request
UpLink Insert
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Prev Phase
Next Phase
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/nav-flight-management/sys-14.6.32B.html[23.01.2021 23:04:01]
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Wind Request | Section 14.6.32B
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - UpLink Request | Section 14.6.32C

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE W INd P aGE - U p L INK R EQuEsT S ECTION 14.6.32C

All fields go blank during uplink request. Previous Section
Click on NEXT button below MCDU to view Description

uploaded wind data.
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Sat/Alt
Return
Wind Request
UpLink Request
UpLink Insert
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Prev Phase
Next Phase
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/nav-flight-management/sys-14.6.32C.html[23.01.2021 23:04:09]
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - UpLink Request | Section 14.6.32C
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - UpLink Request | Section 14.6.32D

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE W INd P aGE - U p L INk I NsErT S ECTION 14.6.32D

When the uplink is complete a WIND DATA Previous Section
UPLINK message is displayed at the bottom Description

of the MCDU screen. A yellow color UPLINK
Init A Page
is displayed in the title indicating wind data
was inserted via data link. A yellow color Init B Page
DRAFT is dislayed in the title when wind Climb Wind Page

data is entered manually from the
History Wind Page
scratchpad.
Cruise Wind Page
UPLINK INSERT - Line selet 6R to insert the
Description
wind data into the cruise and descent wind
pages. Tru Wind/Alt
Sat/Alt
UPLINK CANCEL - Line selet 6L to cancel the
wind data uplink. All cruise and descent Return
wind data will return to previous input Wind Request

data.
UpLink Request
UpLink Insert
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Prev Phase
Next Phase
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/nav-flight-management/sys-14.6.32D.html[23.01.2021 23:04:15]
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - UpLink Request | Section 14.6.32D
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Prev Phase | Section 14.6.33

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE W INd P aGE - P rEv P hasE S ECTION 14.6.33

PREV PHASE - Line select 4R to display the Previous Section
CLIMB WIND page. Description
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Sat/Alt
Return
Wind Request
UpLink Request
UpLink Insert
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Prev Phase
Next Phase
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Prev Phase | Section 14.6.33
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Next Phase | Section 14.6.34

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE W INd P aGE - N ExT P hasE S ECTION 14.6.34

NEXT PHASE - Line select 5R to display the Previous Section
DESCENT WIND page. Description
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Sat/Alt
Return
Wind Request
UpLink Request
UpLink Insert
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Prev Phase
Next Phase
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Wind Page - Next Phase | Section 14.6.34
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Computed Speed | Section 14.5.33

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE P AGE A CTIvE - C OMpuTED S pEED S ECTION 14.5.33

The computed managed and selected Previous Section
speed. The time and distance to the top of Description

descent is computed for each speed with
TO Page - Preflight
selected speed active and only managed
speed with managed speed active. Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Next Phase
Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
Act Mode
Cost Index
Computed Speed
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Computed Speed | Section 14.5.33
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Tru Wind/Alt | Section 14.6.37

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT W INd P AGE - T ru W INd /A LT S ECTION 14.6.37

True winds can be entered for four flight Previous Section
levels. Description
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Return
Altn Wind
Wind Request
Prev Phase
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Tru Wind/Alt | Section 14.6.37
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Return | Section 14.6.38

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT W INd P aGE - R ETurN S ECTION 14.6.38


REV page.
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Return
Altn Wind
Wind Request
Prev Phase
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Return | Section 14.6.38
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Altn Wind | Section 14.6.39

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT W INd P aGE - A lTN W INd S ECTION 14.6.39

When an alternate airport is entered into Previous Section
the INIT page, the ALTN WIND prompt is Description

available for entering wind at 10,000 feet
Init A Page
from the destination airport to the alternate
airport. In this example no wind has been Init B Page
entered yet by the pilots. Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Return
Altn Wind
Wind Request
Prev Phase
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Altn Wind | Section 14.6.39
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Wind Request | Section 14.6.40

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT W INd P aGE - W INd R EquEsT S ECTION 14.6.40

The WIND REQUEST prompt provides a Previous Section
means to request wind via datalink while Description

enroute. The forecast enroute winds are
Init A Page
uplinked for the points that are loaded in
the Flight Plan. The enroute and descent Init B Page
winds are uploaded for the arrival airports. Climb Wind Page
A temperature forecast is uploaded for a
History Wind Page
default altitude near the Tropopause.
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Description
Tru Wind/Alt
Return
Altn Wind
Wind Request
Prev Phase
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
MCDU | Descent Wind Page - Wind Request | Section 14.6.40
Pneumatic System Displays | Bleed Air SD - Engine Bleed Overheat | Section 15.1.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

B lEEd A Ir SD - E NGINE B lEEd O vErHEAT Previous Section
A bleed air overheat fault results in the Cond SD
Bleed Management Computer (BMC) Bleed SD

automatically closing the appropriate
Description 1
engine bleed valve.
Description 2
Pack 1 Overheat
APU Bleed Air
Cruise SD
Cab Press SD
Next Section
Pneumatic System Displays | Bleed Air SD - Engine Bleed Overheat | Section 15.1.7
MCDU | Approach Page Active - Ldg Config 3 | Section 14.5.51

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCH P aGE A CTIvE - L DG C ONfIG 3 S ECTION 14.5.51

Allows pilots to select the configuration that Previous Section
will determine the: Description
Basis for VLS displayed on the PERF TO Page - Preflight
APPR page Check TO Data

Flap setting at which the autoflight
will slow to managed approach
speed Climb Page - Active

Large font indicates the selected
configuration. To change, select key Cruise Page - Active
adjacent to the small font, asterisked Descent Page - Preflight

landing configuration.
Final
MDA
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
DH
Ldg Config 3
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Active - Ldg Config 3 | Section 14.5.51
MCDU | Go Around Page - F, S, Clean Speeds | Section 14.5.53

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
G O A rOuNd P agE - F, S, C LEaN S pEEds S ECTION 14.5.53

Displays flap and slat retraction speeds, and Previous Section
green dot speed. Cannot be modified by Description

the pilots.
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Go Around Page
Description
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
F, S, Clean Speeds
Thr Red
ACC
Engine Out ACC
Next Section
MCDU | Go Around Page - F, S, Clean Speeds | Section 14.5.53
MCDU | Go Around Page - Thr Red | Section 14.5.54

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
G O A rOuNd P agE - T Hr R Ed S ECTION 14.5.54

Altitude at which thrust should be reduced Previous Section
from TO/GA thrust to maximum climb Description

thrust. Defaults to 800 feet above
TO Page - Preflight
destination runway elevation. Can be
modified by the pilots but is always lower Check TO Data
than or equal to ACC altitude (minimum of Climb Page - Preflight

400 feet above destination runway
Climb Page - Active
elevation).
Go Around Page
Description
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
F, S, Clean Speeds
Thr Red
ACC
Engine Out ACC
Next Section
MCDU | Go Around Page - Thr Red | Section 14.5.54
MCDU | Go Around Page - ACC | Section 14.5.55

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
G O A rOuNd P agE - ACC S ECTION 14.5.55

Acceleration Altitude - Altitude at which Previous Section
target speed changes to green dot speed Description

(managed speed). Defaults to 800 feet
TO Page - Preflight
above destination runway elevation. Can be
modified by the pilots but is always equal Check TO Data
to or higher than THR RED altitude. Climb Page - Preflight
Climb Page - Active
Go Around Page
Description
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
F, S, Clean Speeds
Thr Red
ACC
Engine Out ACC
Next Section
MCDU | Go Around Page - ACC | Section 14.5.55
MCDU | History Wind Page - Climb Wind | Section 14.6.28A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
H IsTOrY W INd P aGE - C lImb W INd S ECTION 14.6.28A

Line select 6L to return to the CLIMB WIND Previous Section
page. Description
Init A Page
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Description
Climb Wind
Select
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
MCDU | History Wind Page - Climb Wind | Section 14.6.28A
MCDU | Init Page - Company Route | Section 14.6.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT A P aGE - C OMpaNY R OuTE S ECTION 14.6.2

Enables a nine-digit company route number Previous Section
to be entered for which all data associated Description

with the route (except SIDS and STARS)
Init A Page
displays. When entered, loads the
departure and destination airport, as well Description
as all waypoints along the route, into the Co Rte

flight plan page.
Altn/Co Rte
Some companies use ACARS to Flt Nbr

automatically load all waypoints along the
Cost Index
route into the flight plan page and the
departure and destination airport. In this Crz FL/Temp
case, NONE would be shown under the CO From/To

RTE.
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | Init Page - Company Route | Section 14.6.2
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Init A Page - Alternate Airport/Co Rte | Section 14.6.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT A P agE - A LTErNaTE A IrpOrT /C O R TE S ECTION 14.6.3

Enables an alternate airport (four-letter Previous Section
ICAO code) to be entered. These fields are Description

dashed until a primary destination is
Init A Page
entered in line 1R. Once the primary
destination has been entered, NONE is Description
displayed in this field, which may be Co Rte

overwritten. Entering an alternate allows
Altn/Co Rte
pilots to use FMGC predictions as an aid in
decision making. If the airport is not in the Flt Nbr
database, the NEW RUNWAY page displays. Cost Index

The alternate airport can be deleted by
Crz FL/Temp
entering NONE.
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | Init A Page - Alternate Airport/Co Rte | Section 14.6.3
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Init A Page - Flight Number | Section 14.6.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT A P agE - F lIgHT N uMBEr S ECTION 14.6.4

Enables flight number to be entered for Previous Section
numerous interface requirements. The Description

flight number displays on the upper right
Init A Page
corner of the flight plan and PROG pages.
The flight number may be entered as a Description
number with a preface (eg UAL458). Co Rte
Altn/Co Rte
Flt Nbr
Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | Init A Page - Flight Number | Section 14.6.4
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Init A Page - Cost Index | Section 14.6.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT A P aGE - C OsT I NDEx S ECTION 14.6.5

Enables a CI to be entered by the pilots. A Previous Section
typical cost index is between 15 to 100. Description
Init A Page
Description
Co Rte
Altn/Co Rte
Flt Nbr
Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | Init A Page - Cost Index | Section 14.6.5
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Init A Page - Crz FL/Temp | Section 14.6.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT ASS P aGE - C rZ FL/T Emp S ECTION 14.6.6

Displays pilot entered cruise flight level. Previous Section
Temperature defaults to ISA. During Description

preflight after the FL is entered, the TEMP
Init A Page
should be modified by using the ISA
temperature from the Flight Plan. Once Description
airborne the ISA temperature goes blank Co Rte

(three dash lines).
Altn/Co Rte
Flt Nbr
Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | Init A Page - Crz FL/Temp | Section 14.6.6
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Init A Page - From/To | Section 14.6.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT A P aGE - F rOM /T O S ECTION 14.6.7

Enables a city pair (departure/destination Previous Section
ICAO code) to be entered. Entry Description

automatically deletes any CO RTE
Init A Page
previously entered and displays the route
selection page. If either airport is not in the Description
database, the NEW RUNWAY page displays. Co Rte
Altn/Co Rte
Flt Nbr
Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | Init A Page - From/To | Section 14.6.7
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Init A Page - IRS Init | Section 14.6.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT A P agE - IRS I NIT S ECTION 14.6.8

Selects the IRS INIT page and allows Previous Section
LAT/LONG coordinates to be confirmed or Description

changed. LAT/LONG coordinates default to
Init A Page
the current departure airport coordinates.
The symbols ↑ or ↓ allow the value to be Description
changed with the slew keys. To move the ↑ Co Rte

or ↓ from LAT to LONG, select LONG.
Altn/Co Rte
Line select (LS) 3R to view IRS INIT page. Flt Nbr
Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | Init A Page - IRS Init | Section 14.6.8
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | IRS Init Page | Section 14.6.8A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
IRS I NIT P agE - A lIgN ON REF S ECTION 14.6.8A

IRS alignment is initiated by selecting and Previous Section
confirming the ALIGN ON REF prompt. IRS Description

1/2/3 ALIGNING ON REF will appear during
Init A Page
the alignment process.
Description
IRS Reference is based on on the airport
Co Rte
reference (LAT and LONG) verses aircraft
position. After confirmning airport Altn/Co Rte
reference is correct Line select (LS) 6R to Flt Nbr

align IRS.
Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | IRS Init Page | Section 14.6.8A
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | IRS Init Page - Confirm Align | Section 14.6.8B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
IRS I NIT P agE - C ONfIrM A lIgN S ECTION 14.6.8B

Line select (LS) 6R to confirm IRS Previous Section
alignment. Description
Init A Page
NOTE
Description
If RESET IRS TO NAV message
Co Rte
appears, check LAT/LONG on the IRS
Altn/Co Rte
INIT page against the position of the
IRs (navmode). If these positions Flt Nbr
differ, place all IR mode selectors to
Cost Index
OFF, wait for the IRs to shut down,
Crz FL/Temp
then place the mode selectors to NAV
to begin a new alignment. From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | IRS Init Page - Confirm Align | Section 14.6.8B
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | IRS Init Page - IRS Aligning | Section 14.6.8C

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
IRS I NIT P aGE - IRS A lIGNING S ECTION 14.6.8C

It takes approximatly 10 minutes to align Previous Section
the IRSs. Description
RETURN - Line select 6L to return to the Init A Page
INIT A page. Description
Co Rte
Altn/Co Rte
Flt Nbr
Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | IRS Init Page - IRS Aligning | Section 14.6.8C
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | IRS Init Page - Return | Section 14.6.8D

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
IRS I NIT P aGE - IRS A lIGNEd S ECTION 14.6.8D

This illustration is an example of the IRS Previous Section
INIT page after the IRSs are aligned. Description
RETURN - Line select 6L to return to the Init A Page
INIT A page. Description
Co Rte
Altn/Co Rte
Flt Nbr
Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS Aligned
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | IRS Init Page - Return | Section 14.6.8D
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Init A Page - Wind | Section 14.6.9

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT A P aGE - W INd S ECTION 14.6.9

Enables selection of the WIND pages. Previous Section
During prelight LS 4R will display the climb Description

wind page.
Init A Page
. Description
Co Rte
Altn/Co Rte
Flt Nbr
Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Return
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | Init A Page - Wind | Section 14.6.9
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Init A Page - Tropo | Section 14.6.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT A P aGE - T rOpO S ECTION 14.6.10

Displays ISA tropopause altitude. Previous Section
Description
Init A Page
Description
Co Rte
Altn/Co Rte
Flt Nbr
Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Return
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | Init A Page - Tropo | Section 14.6.10
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Init A Page - Gnd Temp | Section 14.6.10A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT A P agE - G Nd T EMp S ECTION 14.6.10A

Displays gound temperature. Ground Previous Section
temperature is normally entered during Description

preflight. In flight the ground temperature
Init A Page
defaults to a blank display (3 dash lines).
Description
Co Rte
Altn/Co Rte
Flt Nbr
Cost Index
Crz FL/Temp
From/To
IRS Init
IRS Init Page
Confirm Align
IRS Aligning
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Return
Wind
Tropo
Gnd Temp
Init B Page
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
MCDU | Init A Page - Gnd Temp | Section 14.6.10A
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
Next Section
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Description | Section 14.6.11A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEl P rEdICTION P agE - D EsCrIpTION S ECTION 14.6.11A

When a fuel value is entered (BLOCK fuel), Previous Section
the INIT B page becomes the INIT FUEL Description

PREDICTION page.
Init A Page
After the first engine is started, the FMGC Init B Page

disregards the pilot-entered value and uses
Description
measured fuel quantity. The INIT FUEL
PREDICTION page also changes to the Init Fuel Prediction Page
FUEL PRED page after an engine start. Taxi
Trip Time
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Description | Section 14.6.11A
Next Section
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Taxi | Section 14.6.12

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEL P rEdICTION P AGE - T AxI S ECTION 14.6.12

Displays default taxi fuel value. Can be Previous Section
modified by the pilots. Description
Init A Page
Init B Page
Description
Taxi
Trip Time
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Taxi | Section 14.6.12
Next Section
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Trip Time | Section 14.6.13

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEL P rEdICTION P AgE - T rIp T ImE S ECTION 14.6.13

Displays trip fuel and time calculated by the Previous Section
FMGC. It is not accurate unless climb, Description

cruise, and descent winds are entered. It
Init A Page
cannot be modified by the pilots.
Init B Page
Description
Taxi
Trip Time
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Trip Time | Section 14.6.13
Next Section
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Rte Rsv | Section 14.6.14

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEL P rEdICTION P aGE - R TE R sv S ECTION 14.6.14

Displays fuel that is reserved for a specific Previous Section
purpose and is not included in EXTRA. The Description

pilot can enter a value in pounds or as a
Init A Page
percent of the trip. It is not normally used
for fuel planning. Init B Page
Description
Taxi
Trip Time
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Rte Rsv | Section 14.6.14
Next Section
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Alt/Time | Section 14.6.15

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEL P rEDICTION P AgE - A LT /T ImE S ECTION 14.6.15

If an alternate was entered on the INIT Previous Section
page, then this line displays the FMGC- Description

calculated fuel and time to the alternate.
Init A Page
The calculation assumes cruising to the
alternate at cost index 0, at the FMGC Init B Page
default cruise altitude, along the route of Description

flight on the flight plan page (with direct
legs across any discontinuities). It cannot
be modified by the pilots. Taxi
Trip Time
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Alt/Time | Section 14.6.15
Next Section
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Final/Time | Section 14.6.16

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEL P rEdICTION P AgE - F INAL /T ImE S ECTION 14.6.16

Displays the final fuel and time at the Previous Section
alternate airport (at the destination, if no Description

alternate entered).
Init A Page
The pilot can enter a final fuel in pounds or Init B Page

a final endurance in hours and minutes
Description
(HHMM). The FMGC will calculate the other
value assuming a racetrack holding Init Fuel Prediction Page
pattern, 1500 feet above the airport, in Taxi

clean configuration, at green dot speed.
Trip Time
The default value is 45 minutes.
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Final/Time | Section 14.6.16
Next Section
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Extra/Time | Section 14.6.17

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEl P rEdICTION P aGE - E xTra /T ImE S ECTION 14.6.17

Displays the uncommitted fuel left over for Previous Section
contingencies. It is automatically calculated Description

by subtracting TAXI, TRIP, RTE RSV, ALTN,
Init A Page
and FINAL fuel from the fuel on board. The
corresponding endurance at the alternate Init B Page
(at the destination, if no alternate entered) Description

is calculated assuming a racetrack holding
pattern, 1500 feet above the airport, in
clean configuration, at green dot speed. Taxi
Trip Time
If the extra fuel is negative, dashes are
displayed in the endurance field. Rte Rsv
EXTRA/TIME cannot be modified by the Alt/Time

pilots.
Final/Time
Extra/Time
NOTE
ZFW/ZFWCG
If in holding when the EXTRA fuel
Block
reaches zero, a TIME TO EXIT
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
message appears in the scratchpad. TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Extra/Time | Section 14.6.17
Next Section
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - ZFW/ZFWCG | Section 14.6.18

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEL P rEDICTION P AgE - ZFW/ZFWCG S ECTION 14.6.18

Enables the zero fuel weight and zero fuel Previous Section
weight center of gravity to be entered. For Description

ZFWCG, enter a default value of /25.0 (a
Init A Page
slash must precede the numerals). This
value can be updated when final weights Init B Page
are received. Description
Taxi
Trip Time
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - ZFW/ZFWCG | Section 14.6.18
Next Section
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Block | Section 14.6.19

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEl P rEdICTION P agE - B lOCK S ECTION 14.6.19

Enables fuel on board to be entered for the Previous Section
purpose of preflight predictions. When a Description

fuel value is entered, the INIT B page
Init A Page
becomes the INIT FUEL PREDICTION page.
After the first engine is started, the FMGC Init B Page
disregards the pilot-entered value and uses Description

measured fuel quantity. The INIT FUEL
PREDICTION page also changes to the
FUEL PRED page after an engine start. Taxi
Trip Time
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - Block | Section 14.6.19
Next Section
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - TOW/LW | Section 14.6.21

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEl P rEdICTION P aGE - TOW/LW S ECTION 14.6.21

Displays the computed takeoff/landing Previous Section
weight. TOW is automatically calculated by Description

subtracting TAXI fuel from ZFW plus BLOCK
Init A Page
fuel. Cannot be modified by the pilots.
Init B Page
Description
Taxi
Trip Time
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - TOW/LW | Section 14.6.21
Next Section
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - MIN DEST FOB | Section 14.6.22

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
I NIT F uEl P rEDICTION P aGE - MIN DEST FOB S ECTION 14.6.22

This value will be equal to FINAL fuel + Previous Section
ALTN fuel. This is the calculated fuel Description

remaining at the destination.
Init A Page
Init B Page
Description
Taxi
Trip Time
Rte Rsv
Alt/Time
Final/Time
Extra/Time
ZFW/ZFWCG
Block
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
TOW/LW
Min Dest Fob
Trip Wind
Climb Wind Page
History Wind Page
Cruise Wind Page
Descent Wind Page
MCDU | Init Fuel Prediction Page - MIN DEST FOB | Section 14.6.22
Next Section
Flight Control Unit | APPR Button 2 | Section 13.2.17

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
Windows
Selectors
Buttons
SPD/MACH Button
Metric ALT Button
APPR B uTTON AP Button
LOC Button
NOTE NOTE A/THR Button
If the LOC or APPR button is selected If a VOR or NDB approach has been EXPED Button
on and the ILS/LS button is not selected in the database, the LOC and
APPR Button
selected, and an ILS approach is APPR buttons will not arm for localizer
APPR Button 2
entered in the flight plan or the RADIO or glideslope capture, even if the ILS
NAV page, ILS flashes amber on the frequency is manually tuned. An ILS Next Section
PFD. If the ILS/LS and APPR buttons approach must be selected via the
are selected on when a non-ILS flight plan page. L OCATION
approach is selected in the flight plan,
V/DEV flashes amber on the PFD.
Flight Control Unit | APPR Button 2 | Section 13.2.17
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Cabin Pressurization SYS 2 Fault | Section 15.1.16

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P NEumATIC S ysTEm D IsplAy S ECTION 15.1.16

C AB P rEss SD - C ABIN P rEssurIZATION SYS 2 F AulT Previous Section
In this example, the MODE SEL switch is Cond SD
selected to AUTO. When SYS 2 has a fault, Bleed SD

the outflow valve control is automatically
Cruise SD
transferred to and controlled by SYS 1. The
FMGC has automatically set the landing Cab Press SD
elevation to 250 feet. Description 1
If a FMGC fails the ouflow valve control will Description 2
not automatically transfer. Normal Operational Config
Smoke Config

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCATION
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Cabin Pressurization SYS 2 Fault | Section 15.1.16

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C Ab P rEss SD - D EsCrIpTION 2 Previous Section
1. LDG ELEV AUTO/MAN INDICATION - Cond SD
AUTO displays green when LDG ELEV Bleed SD

selector is in AUTO position. MAN displays
Cruise SD
green when LDG ELEV selector is not in
AUTO position. Not displayed when MODE Cab Press SD
SEL switch is in MAN position. Description 1
2. LANDING ELEVATION - Displays green Description 2
landing elevation when either automatically Normal Operational Config

selected by the FMGS or manually by the
pilot. Not displayed when MODE SEL switch
is in MAN position. Smoke Config

3. CABIN VERTICAL SPEED - Displays green
when in normal range. Pulses green when Cabin Press w/Man Mode
vertical speed exceeds 1800 FPM. Displays Man Setting Ldg Elev
amber when vertical speed exceeds 2000 < PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
FPM.
6. VENT INDICATION - Displays white.
4. CABIN ALTITUDE - Displays green when Becomes amber if there is a blower, L OCATION
in normal range. Pulses green when cabin extract, or avionics system fault.
altitude exceeds 8800 feet. Displays red
when cabin altitude exceeds 9550 feet.
5. OUTFLOW VALVE POSITION - Displays

green during normal operation. Displays
amber when valve is fully open in flight.
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Abnormal Operational Configuration | Section 15.1.14

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C AB P rEss SD - A BNOrMAl O pErATIONAl C ONFIGurATION Previous Section
When either the blower or extract fan Cond SD
switch is selected to OVRD the ventilation Bleed SD

system configures to the abnormal
Cruise SD
configuration. Conditioned air is added to
the ventilation air. Cab Press SD
Description 1
Refer to Section 15.5.4 to view Abnormal
Operational Configuration Schematic. Description 2
Smoke Config

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCATION
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Abnormal Operational Configuration | Section 15.1.14
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Smoke Configuration | Section 15.1.15

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C AB P rEss SD - S MOKE C ONFIGurATION Previous Section
When both the blower and extract fan Cond SD
switches are selected to OVRD the Bleed SD

ventilation system is configured to the
Cruise SD
smoke configuration. Avionics ventilation is
provided by air conditioning system and Cab Press SD
smoke is extracted overboard. Description 1
Refer to Section 15.5.5 to view Smoke Description 2
Configuration Schematic. Normal Operational Config
Smoke Config

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
L OCATION
Pneumatic System Displays | Cab Press SD - Smoke Configuration | Section 15.1.15
EFIS Control Panel | Mode Selector - NAV Mode | Section 8.1.15

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
M OdE S ElECTOr - NAV M OdE
ARC Mode
The mode selector allows selection of five
NAV Mode
respective Navigation Display modes that
include: VOR Mode
ARC ILS Mode
Rose NAV PLAN Mode

Rose VOR
Rose ILS
Plan
VOR Switches On
HEADING INDEX - The Heading Index is
represented as a fixed yellow lubber line on VOR Switches Off
a white rotating compass rose when NAV is Next Section

selected on the mode selector.
SELECTED HEADING - The blue color

Selected Heading or Track symbol displays < PREVIOUS NEXT >
the value indicated in the HDG/TRK window
EFIS Control Panel | Mode Selector - NAV Mode | Section 8.1.15
on the FCU. This symbol is displayed when
in Selected Heading or Track.
EFIS Control Panel | Mode Selector - VOR Mode | Section 8.1.16

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
M OdE S ElECTOr - VOR M OdE
ARC Mode
NAV Mode
include: VOR Mode
ARC ILS Mode
Rose NAV PLAN Mode

Rose VOR
Rose ILS
Plan
VOR Switches On


EFIS Control Panel | Mode Selector - VOR Mode | Section 8.1.16
EFIS Control Panel | Mode Selector - ILS Mode | Section 8.1.17

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
M OdE S ElECTOr - ILS M OdE
ARC Mode
NAV Mode
include: VOR Mode
ARC ILS Mode
Rose NAV PLAN Mode

Rose VOR
Rose ILS
Plan
VOR Switches On


EFIS Control Panel | Mode Selector - ILS Mode | Section 8.1.17

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Previous Section
EFIS ND Buttons
FD Off Button
FD On Button
ILS Off
ILS On
Mode/Range Selector
R aNgE S ELECTOr - 40 NM
ARC Mode
The Range Selector provides selection of
NAV Mode
desired range on the respective ND. In the
event of a mode or range data failure, the VOR Mode
ND defaults to the ROSE NAV mode with an
ILS Mode
80-NM range. The range must be 80 NM or
PLAN Mode
less to display SID or STAR waypoints.
marks from the the aircraft. The compass VOR Switches On
VOR Switches Off
this example, the maximum range is 40 NM
Next Section
two range marks. < PREVIOUS NEXT >

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

B lEEd A Ir SD - D EsCrIpTION 2 Previous Section
1. ANTI ICE INDICATION - Displays white Cond SD
when the WING ANTI ICE switch is ON. Bleed SD
Arrow - Displays green when associated Description 1
wing anti-ice valve is open. Not displayed Description 2

when associated wing anti-ice valve is
Pack 1 Overheat
closed. Becomes amber when the wing
anti-ice valve is open and air pressure is Pack Channel Failure
low or high, or when the wing anti-ice Engine Bleed Overheat

valve is open on the ground.
APU Bleed Air
2. RAM AIR INLET - Displays green when Cruise SD

fully opened or closed. Displays amber
Cab Press SD
when in transit.
Next Section
3. CROSS BLEED VALVE - Displays green
when valve agrees with commanded switch < PREVIOUS NEXT > L OCATION
position, amber color for disagreement.
4. GND HP CONNECTION INDICATION

Displays green on the ground and DOES
NOT indicate exteranl air is connected.
5. HP BLEED VALVE - Displays green when

valve agrees with commanded switch
position and an amber color for
disagreement.
Pneumatic System Displays | Bleed Air SD - APU Bleed Air | Section 15.1.8

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

B lEEd A Ir SD - APU B lEEd A Ir Previous Section
The APU is providing bleed air for air Cond SD
conditioning packs. Bleed SD
Description 1
Description 2
Pack 1 Overheat
APU Bleed Air
Cruise SD
Cab Press SD
Next Section
Pneumatic System Displays | Bleed Air SD - APU Bleed Air | Section 15.1.8
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | Reactive Windshear Alert | Section 16.2.4A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W EaThEr R adar aNd PWS C ONTrOl P aNEl S ECTION 16.2.4A

R EaCTIvE W INdshEar A lErT Previous Section
Reactive windshear alerts pilots when System Switch
windshear is detected by the FACs. Image Selector

Reactive windshear system is active at
Tilt Selector
takeoff, rotation and any time below 1300
feet RA when flaps are set to a minimum of Gain Selector
CONF 1. Windshear
Provides “WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR, Windshear Switch
WINDSHEAR” voice alert, the GPWS Reactive Windshear Alert

lights illuminate, and a red
PWS Alert Warning
WINDSHEAR message displays on
both PFDs. PWS Alert Caution
When the windshear warning is PWS Alert Advisory

active, all other ground proximity
Next Section
warnings and alerts are inhibited
until the windshear condition ceases. L OCaTION
Reactive Windshear is computed by the
FACs. This information is provided in this
section to clarify the difference between
reactive and predictive windshear.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/warning-systems/sys-16.2.4A.html[23.01.2021 23:10:23]
Weather Radar and PWS Control Panel | Reactive Windshear Alert | Section 16.2.4A
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/warning-systems/sys-16.2.4A.html[23.01.2021 23:10:23]
Pneumatic System Displays | Cruise SD - Manual Cabin Pressurization | Section 15.1.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

C ruIsE SD - M ANuAl C ABIN P rEssurIZATION Previous Section
This is an example of the ECAM Cruise page Cond SD
when controlling the cabin pressurization Bleed SD

rate of climb or descent manually with the
Cruise SD
MODE SEL switch set to MAN.
Description
Cruise w/Man Press
Cab Press SD
Next Section
L OCATION
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pneumatic System Displays | Cruise SD - Manual Cabin Pressurization | Section 15.1.10
Flight Mode Annunciations | A/Thr Engaged | Section 13.3.56

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT S TaTus - A/T hr E NGaGED Previous Section
In flight, autothrust engagement is A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT

AP/FD/ATHR Status
confirmed when A/THR is displayed in white AP 1 + 2

in the right column of the FMA, and the
AP 1
A/THR button is illuminated.
AP 2
The autothrust system is engaged in flight
1FD2
by:
1FD-
Setting the thrust levers in the
-FD2
engagement range when autothrust
system is armed. 2FD-
Pushing the A/THR button when the -FD1

thrust levers are in the engagement
1FD1
range.
Activating alpha floor, regardless of 2FD2
thrust lever position or arming A/THR Armed

status.
A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
The thrust levers are in the engagement Special Messages
range:
Next Section
With two engines operating, both

thrust levers are above idle and at
or below the CL detent.
With one engine operating, the thrust
lever for that engine is above idle
and at or below the MCT detent.
Flight Mode Annunciations | A/Thr Engaged | Section 13.3.56
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT - Armed | Section 13.3.17

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M ODE - ALT - A rmED Previous Section
When the FCU altitude value is changed to a A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
new target altitude, then the armed ALT ALT

annunciation is displayed on the second
ALT ARMED
line.
ALT CAPTURED
When the target altitude is captured, then
ALT ENGAGED
the ALT* annunciation (captured) is
displayed on line 1 and the armed ALT ALT CST
annunciation is extinguished on line 2. V/S -500
When the current altitude and altitude FPA -3.0
target deviation are less than 20 feet, then EXP CLB

the ALT (altitude hold) annunciation is
EXP DES
displayed on line 1.
G/S
OP CLB
OP DES
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT - Armed | Section 13.3.17
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT CST - Armed | Section 13.3.18

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M OdE - ALT CST - A rmEd Previous Section
When a MCDU constraint altitude is armed A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
the magenta color ALT annunciation is ALT

displayed on the second FMA line. Managed
ALT CST
lateral (NAV) and vertical modes (DES or
CLB or FINAL) must be engaged. During a ALT CST ARMED
managed descent or climb the magenta ALT CST CAPTURED

color ALT may change between magenta or
ALT CST ENGAGED
blue arm mode. The color indicates which
altitude has priority - selected altitude or V/S -500
constraint altitude. FPA -3.0
When the MCDU altitude constraint is EXP CLB
captured the green color ALT CST* EXP DES

annunciation is displayed on line 1 and the
G/S
armed magenta color ALT annunciation is
extinguished on line 2. OP CLB
OP DES
When the current altitude and managed < PREVIOUS NEXT >
altitude constraint (MCDU) deviation are CLB
less than 20 feet, then the ALT CST DES

annunciation is displayed.
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT CST - Armed | Section 13.3.18
Flight Mode Annunciations | V/S ±XXXX | Section 13.3.19

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M OdE - V/S ±XXXX Previous Section
When the Vertical Speed Selector is pulled, A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
it commands pitch to maintain the selected ALT

vertical speed value and the V/S ±XXXX
ALT CST
V/S -500
Auto thrust, if engaged, is SPEED.
FPA -3.0
Pushing the V/S FPA selector commands the EXP CLB

airplane to level off.
EXP DES
G/S
OP CLB
OP DES
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | V/S ±XXXX | Section 13.3.19
Flight Mode Annunciations | FPA ± XXX | Section 13.3.20

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M OdE - FPA ± XXX Previous Section
When the Flight Path Angle Selector is A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
pulled, it commands pitch to maintain the ALT

selected flight path angle and the FPA ±X.X
ALT CST
V/S -500
FPA -3.0
Pushing the V/S - FPA selector commands a EXP CLB

flight path angle of + 0.0 and the airplane
EXP DES
levels off.
G/S
OP CLB
OP DES
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | FPA ± XXX | Section 13.3.20
Flight Mode Annunciations | EXP CLB | Section 13.3.21

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M OdE - EXP CLB Previous Section
When the EXPED (expedite) button is A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
pushed, it commands pitch to maintain ALT

managed speed at green dot and EXP CLB
ALT CST
V/S -500
Auto thrust, if engaged, is THR CLB.
FPA -3.0
The FCU target altitude must be set above EXP CLB

actual altitude. The MCDU altitude and
EXP DES
speed constraints are ignored.
G/S
OP CLB
OP DES
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | EXP CLB | Section 13.3.21
Flight Mode Annunciations | EXP DES | Section 13.3.22

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M OdE - EXP DES Previous Section
When the EXPED (expedite) button is A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
pushed, it commands pitch to maintain ALT

managed speed at .80 Mach / 340 KIAS
ALT CST
and the EXP DES annunciation is displayed.
V/S -500
A/THR, if engaged, is THR IDLE.
FPA -3.0
The FCU target altitude must be set below EXP CLB

actual altitude. The MCDU altitude and
EXP DES
speed constraints, including 250 KIAS
below 10,000 feet, are ignored. G/S
OP CLB
OP DES
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | EXP DES | Section 13.3.22
Flight Mode Annunciations | G/S - Armed | Section 13.3.23

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M OdE - G/S - A rmEd Previous Section
When the APPR and ILS/LS buttons are A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
pushed the glideslope mode is armed, and ALT

the armed G/S annunciation (blue color) is
ALT CST
displayed.
V/S -500
When the glideslope is captured the G/S*
FPA -3.0
annunciation is displayed and the green
color G/S engaged mode annunciation is EXP CLB
displayed a few seconds later. EXP DES
The FCU target altitude will not capture G/S
after the glideslope mode is captured. G/S ARMED
Auto thrust, if engaged, is SPEED. G/S CAPTURED
G/S ENGAGED
OP CLB
OP DES
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | G/S - Armed | Section 13.3.23
Flight Mode Annunciations | OP CLB | Section 13.3.24

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M ODE - OP CLB Previous Section
The OP CLB (open climb) annunciation is A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
displayed when the Altitude Selector is ALT

pulled. The FCU altitude must be above
ALT CST
actual altitude.
V/S -500
Open climb commands pitch to maintain the
FPA -3.0
managed or selected target speed.
Autothrust, if engaged, is THR CLB. EXP CLB
EXP DES
FCU altitude must be above actual altitude.
Altitude constraints are ignored. Speed G/S
constraints are met only if in managed OP CLB

speed.
OP DES
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | OP CLB | Section 13.3.24
Flight Mode Annunciations | OP DES | Section 13.3.25

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M OdE - OP DES Previous Section
The OP DES (open descent) annunciation is A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
displayed when the Altitude Selector is ALT

pulled. The FCU altitude must be below
ALT CST
actual altitude.
V/S -500
The A/THR commands THR IDLE thrust
FPA -3.0
setting.
EXP CLB
The Open Descent mode commands the
EXP DES
AP/FD pitch to maintain the managed or
selected target speed. Altitude constraints G/S
are ignored. Speed constraints are met OP CLB

only if in managed speed.
OP DES
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | OP DES | Section 13.3.25
Flight Mode Annunciations | CLB | Section 13.3.26

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M OdE - CLB Previous Section
The CLB annunciation is displayed when the A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
Altitude Selector is pushed. The target ALT

altitude must be above actual altitude and
ALT CST
NAV mode must be engaged. The A/THR
commands THR CLB thrust setting. The V/S -500
CLB mode commands the AP/FD pitch to FPA -3.0

maintain the managed or selected target
EXP CLB
speed.
EXP DES
Speed constraints are met only if in
G/S
managed speed. CLB mode meets altitude
constraints entered in the MCDU. If NAV OP CLB
mode is lost, it reverts to OP CLB. OP DES
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | CLB | Section 13.3.26
Flight Mode Annunciations | DES | Section 13.3.27

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M OdE - DES Previous Section
The DES annunciation is displayed when the A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
Altitude Selector is pushed. The target ALT

altitude must be below actual altitude and
ALT CST
NAV mode must be engaged. The A/THR
commands SPEED / MACH or THR IDLE V/S -500
thrust setting. If the airplane is more than FPA -3.0

200 NM from destination, DES flies a 1000
EXP CLB
FPM cruise descent to the FCU altitude.
EXP DES
If less than 200 NM from the destination,
G/S
DES attempts to maintain the computed
vertical path. If selected speed is used, OP CLB
speed constraints are ignored. If NAV mode OP DES

is lost, DES reverts to vertical speed.
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | DES | Section 13.3.27
Flight Mode Annunciations | FINAL | Section 13.3.28

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M OdE - FINAL Previous Section
The armed FINAL vertical mode and APP A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
NAV lateral mode annunciations are ALT

displayed when;
ALT CST
A non-ILS-LOC approach is selected V/S -500

from the MCDU database, and
FPA -3.0
The APPR button is pushed
EXP CLB
If proceeding in the NAV lateral engaged
EXP DES
mode when pushing the APPR button, then
the armed FINAL vertical mode and the G/S
lateral APP NAV engaged mode OP CLB

annunciations are displayed.
OP DES
When both the vertical FINAL (armed) and CLB

lateral APP NAV (armed) paths are
DES
captured, then the engaged FINAL APP
annunciation is displayed (engaged). FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
FINAL
APP NAV
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | FINAL | Section 13.3.28
Flight Mode Annunciations | LAND | Section 13.3.29

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal aNd L aTEral M OdEs - LAND Previous Section
During an ILS approach, LAND mode A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
engages at 400 feet AGL, and the LAND ALT

annunciation is displayed. The FCU modes
ALT CST
are frozen. There is no way to disengage
the LAND mode using the FCU. V/S -500
FPA -3.0
EXP CLB
If LAND annunciation is not displayed by
EXP DES
350 feet RA, the airplane cannot auto-land.
G/S
OP CLB
OP DES
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LAND
LAND
FLARE
ROLL OUT
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | LAND | Section 13.3.29
Flight Mode Annunciations | ROLL OUT | Section 13.3.29B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT M ODE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.29B

V ErTICal aND L aTEral M ODEs - ROLL OUT Previous Section
The ROLL OUT mode engages at touch down A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
during an autoland ILS approach. The ROLL ALT

OUT mode steers the airplane on the
ALT CST
ground using the localizer. The ground roll
guidance command bar replaces the flight V/S -500
director at touch down. FPA -3.0
If the localizer is lost after touch down, EXP CLB
ROLL OUT mode maintains the memorized EXP DES

track.
G/S
OP CLB
OP DES
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LAND
LAND
FLARE
ROLL OUT
Next Section
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/nav-autoflight/sys-13.3.29B.html[23.01.2021 23:11:07]
Flight Mode Annunciations | ROLL OUT | Section 13.3.29B
Flight Mode Annunciations | HDG | Section 13.3.31

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L aTEral M OdE - HDG Previous Section
When the HDG selector is pulled it A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
RWY
commands lateral guidance to maintain the HDG

FCU's heading selected value, and the
TRACK
engaged HDG annunciation is displayed.
LOC
The heading value can be pre-selected prior
NAV
to takeoff. When the HDG Selector knob is
rotated, it changes the value displayed in RWY TRK
the HDG/TRK window. GA TRK
In flight, the HDG selector may be pre- Next Section
selected to a new heading, but must be

pulled within approximately 45 seconds, or
the heading pre-selection value is lost.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | HDG | Section 13.3.31
Flight Mode Annunciations | TRACK | Section 13.3.32

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L aTEral M OdE - TRACK Previous Section
When the TRK selector is pulled it A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
RWY
commands lateral guidance to maintain the HDG

FCU's track selected value, and the
TRACK
engaged TRACK annunciation is displayed.
The track value can be pre-selected prior to LOC
takeoff. When the TRK Selector knob is NAV

rotated, it changes the value displayed in
RWY TRK
the HDG/TRK window.
GA TRK
In flight, the TRK selector may be pre-
Next Section
selected, but must be pulled within
approximately 45 seconds, or the track
selection value is lost.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | TRACK | Section 13.3.32
Flight Mode Annunciations | LOC | Section 13.3.33

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L aTEral M ODE - LOC - A rmED Previous Section
When the LOC and ILS/LS buttons are A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
RWY
pushed the localizer mode is armed, and HDG

the armed LOC annunciation (blue color) is
TRACK
displayed.
LOC
When the localizer is captured the LOC*
LOC ARMED
annunciation is displayed and the armed
LOC annunciation (blue) is extinguished. LOC CAPTURED
LOC ENGAGED
After the localizer is engaged the green
color LOC annunciation is displayed. NAV
RWY TRK
GA TRK
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | LOC | Section 13.3.33
Flight Mode Annunciations | NAV - Armed | Section 13.3.34

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L aTEral M OdE - NAV - A rmEd Previous Section
When the HDG selector is pushed it arms A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
RWY
the NAV mode and displays a blue color HDG

NAV annunciation on line 2. The NAV mode
TRACK
engages when intercepting the course
between the FROM and TO waypoints, by LOC
selecting DIR TO prompt in the MCDU, or NAV

automatically during takeoff.
NAV ARMED
When the nav mode initially engages NAV CAPTURED

(captured) a white box is displayed
NAV ENGAGED
momentarily around the green color NAV
engaged annunciation on line 1. RWY TRK
GA TRK
When the NAV mode is engaged then the
green color NAV annunciation is displayed Next Section
on line 1.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | NAV - Armed | Section 13.3.34
Flight Mode Annunciations | RWY TRK | Section 13.3.35

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L aTEral M ODE - RWY TRK Previous Section
When the Thrust Levers are positioned into A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
RWY
the TOGA or FLEX detent, a heading value HDG

is preselected on the FCU, then the RWY
TRACK
TRK mode engages at rotation or 30 feet
AGL and the RWY TRK annunciation is LOC
displayed automatically. NAV
RWY TRK mode provides lateral guidance to RWY TRK
maintain the track being flown upon GA TRK

engagement.
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | RWY TRK | Section 13.3.35
Flight Mode Annunciations | GA TRK | Section 13.3.36

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

L aTEral M ODE - GA TRK Previous Section
When at least one thrust lever is positioned A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
RWY
to TO/GA detent when the FLAPS lever is at HDG

1, 2, 3 or 4 flap position, then the GA TRK
TRACK
mode engages and the GA TRK
annunciation is displayed. LOC
NAV
The GA TRK mode provides lateral guidance
to maintain the airplane's track being flown RWY TRK
upon engagement. GA TRK
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | GA TRK | Section 13.3.36
Flight Mode Annunciations | CAT 3 SINGLE | Section 13.3.39

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A pprOaCh C apaBIlITIEs - CAT 3 SINGLE Previous Section
CAT 3 SINGLE annunciations are displayed A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
when the airplane's approach capability is CAT 3 SINGLE

fail passive.
CAT 3 DUAL
CAT 3 SINGLE annunciations indicate that DH XXX

the aircraft is capable of a CAT III autoland
NO DH
ILS approach with visibility that is equal to
or greater than 600 RVR. MDA XXX
Next Section
ILS approach and when the autopilot is
disconnected and the APPR button is
selected.

selected.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
button is selected.
Flight Mode Annunciations | CAT 3 SINGLE | Section 13.3.39
Flight Mode Annunciations | CAT 3 DUAL | Section 13.3.40

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A pprOaCh C apaBIlITIEs - CAT 3 DUAL Previous Section
CAT 3 DUAL annunciations indicate that the A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
airplane's approach capability is fail CAT 3 SINGLE

operational, meaning it is capable of a CAT
CAT 3 DUAL
III autoland ILS approach with visibility
that is equal to or less than 600 RVR. DH XXX
NO DH
ILS approach and when the autopilot is MDA XXX
disconnected and the APPR button is Next Section

selected.

selected.

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
button is selected.
Flight Mode Annunciations | CAT 3 DUAL | Section 13.3.40
Flight Mode Annunciations | DH XXX | Section 13.3.41

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A pprOaCh C apaBIlITIEs - DH XXX Previous Section
The PFD displays the DH (radio altitude) A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
minimums on line 3. The DH radio altitude CAT 3 SINGLE

is entered in the DH field in the MCDU
CAT 3 DUAL
MCDU PERF APPR page for CAT II or CAT
III approaches. DH XXX is only displayed DH XXX
during the descent and approach phases of NO DH

flight.
MDA XXX
The charted CAT II DH radio altitude is Next Section

normally entered for CAT II approaches,
but not less than 100 feet.
For CAT III approaches, 100 feet is normally

entered for the alert height.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | DH XXX | Section 13.3.41
Flight Mode Annunciations | NO DH | Section 13.3.42

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A pprOaCh C apaBIlITIEs - NO DH Previous Section
The PFD displays "NO DH" annunciation on A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
line 3 when "NO" has been entered in the CAT 3 SINGLE

DH field on the PERF APPR page.
CAT 3 DUAL
DH XXX
NO DH
MDA XXX
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | NO DH | Section 13.3.42
Flight Mode Annunciations | MDA XXX | Section 13.3.43

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A pprOaCh C apaBIlITIEs - MDA XXX Previous Section
The PFD displays the "MDA XXX" A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
(barometric minimums) on line 3. The MDA CAT 3 SINGLE

altitude is entered in the MDA field in the
CAT 3 DUAL
MCDU PERF APPR page for both
nonprecision and precision CAT I DH XXX
approaches. NO DH
The MDA XXX annunciation is only displayed MDA XXX
during the descent and approach phases of Next Section

flight.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | MDA XXX | Section 13.3.43
Flight Mode Annunciations | AP 1 | Section 13.3.46

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

AP S TaTus - AP 1 Previous Section
When AP 1 annunciation is displayed, then A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT

AP/FD/ATHR Status
autopilot 1 is engaged. AP 1 + 2
AP 1
AP 2
1FD2
1FD-
-FD2
2FD-
-FD1
1FD1
2FD2
A/THR Armed
A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Special Messages
Next Section

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

AP S TaTus - AP 2 Previous Section
When AP 2 annunciation is displayed, then A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT

AP/FD/ATHR Status
autopilot 2 is engaged. AP 1 + 2
AP 1
AP 2
1FD2
1FD-
-FD2
2FD-
-FD1
1FD1
2FD2
A/THR Armed
A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Special Messages
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | 1FD2 | Section 13.3.48

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

FD S TaTus 1FD2 Previous Section
Both flight directors are ON. A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
AP 1 + 2
AP 1
AP 2
1FD2
1FD-
-FD2
2FD-
-FD1
1FD1
2FD2
A/THR Armed
A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Special Messages
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | 1FD- | Section 13.3.49

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

FD S TaTus 1FD- Previous Section
Captain’s flight director is selected ON and A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
the First Officer’s flight director is selected AP 1 + 2

OFF.
AP 1
AP 2
1FD2
1FD-
-FD2
2FD-
-FD1
1FD1
2FD2
A/THR Armed
A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Special Messages
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | -FD2 | Section 13.3.50

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

FD S TaTus -FD2 Previous Section
Captain’s flight director is selected OFF and A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
the First Officer’s flight director is selected AP 1 + 2

ON.
AP 1
AP 2
1FD2
1FD-
-FD2
2FD-
-FD1
1FD1
2FD2
A/THR Armed
A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Special Messages
Next Section

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

FD S TaTus 2FD- Previous Section
Captain's flight director is selected ON, A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
flight director 1 has failed, or FMGC 1 is not AP 1 + 2

valid; and First Officer’s flight director is
AP 1
selected OFF.
AP 2
1FD2
1FD-
-FD2
2FD-
-FD1
1FD1
2FD2
A/THR Armed
A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Special Messages
Next Section

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

FD S TaTus -FD1 Previous Section
First Officer’s flight director is selected ON, A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
flight director 2 has failed, or FMGC 2 is not AP 1 + 2

valid; and Captain's flight director is
AP 1
selected OFF.
AP 2
1FD2
1FD-
-FD2
2FD-
-FD1
1FD1
2FD2
A/THR Armed
A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Special Messages
Next Section

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Both flight directors selected ON with one A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
flight director failed or FMGC 2 not valid. AP 1 + 2
AP 1
AP 2
1FD2
1FD-
-FD2
2FD-
-FD1
1FD1
2FD2
A/THR Armed
A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Special Messages
Next Section

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

Both flight directors are selected ON with A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
one flight director failed or FMGC 1 not AP 1 + 2

valid.
AP 1
AP 2
1FD2
1FD-
-FD2
2FD-
-FD1
1FD1
2FD2
A/THR Armed
A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Special Messages
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | A/Thr Armed | Section 13.3.55

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

A uTO T hrusT S TaTus - A/T hr A rmEd Previous Section
On the ground or in flight, autothrust A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT

AP/FD/ATHR Status
arming is confirmed when A/THR is AP 1 + 2

displayed in blue in the right column of the
AP 1
FMA, and the A/THR button is illuminated.
AP 2
When the autothrust system is armed,
1FD2
thrust is controlled directly by thrust lever
position until the thrust lever is placed in 1FD-
the engagement range. Then, the -FD2

autothrust system is engaged and
2FD-
automatically controls thrust or speed,
depending on the AP/FD mode. -FD1
1FD1
The autothrust system is armed on the
ground by: 2FD2
A/THR Armed
Setting the thrust levers to TO/GA if
at least one flight director is on. A/THR Engaged
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Setting the thrust levers to FLX if at Special Messages
least one flight director is on and a
Next Section
FLEX temperature has been entered
in the FMGC.
The autothrust system is armed in flight by

pushing the A/THR button when the thrust
levers are not in the engagement range.
Flight Mode Annunciations | A/Thr Armed | Section 13.3.55
Flight Mode Annunciations | Mach Sel | Section 13.3.57

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S pECIal M EssaGEs - M aCh S El Previous Section
The MACH SEL annunciation indicates the A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
selected Mach number that was entered via Special Messages

the MCDU CRUISE page before takeoff.
MACH SEL
SPEED SEL
MORE DRAG
SET GREEN DOT SPEED
SET MANAGE SPEED
SET HOLD SPEED
USE MAN PITCH TRIM
MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY
CHECK APP SEL
DECELERATE
VERT DISCON AHEAD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | Mach Sel | Section 13.3.57
Flight Mode Annunciations | DECELERATE | Section 13.3.66

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S pECIal M EssaGEs - D ECElEraTE Previous Section
Airplane is in managed speed and descent A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
was not initiated at T/D point. Special Messages
DECELERATE message also appears in the MACH SEL
MCDU. SPEED SEL
MORE DRAG
SET GREEN DOT SPEED
SET MANAGE SPEED
SET HOLD SPEED
USE MAN PITCH TRIM
MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY
CHECK APP SEL
DECELERATE
VERT DISCON AHEAD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | DECELERATE | Section 13.3.66
Flight Mode Annunciations | Speed Sel | Section 13.3.58

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S pECIal M EssaGEs - S pEEd S El Previous Section
The SPEED SEL annunciation can only occur A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
when the airplane is in the takeoff phase or Special Messages

the climb phase.
MACH SEL
Takeoff phase: will revert to a SPEED SEL

selected speed when the airplane
MORE DRAG
reaches the ACC ALT (climb phase)
provided a selected speed was SET GREEN DOT SPEED
preset in the PERF CLIMB page. SET MANAGE SPEED

Climb phase: will revert to a selected
SET HOLD SPEED
speed when the airplane reaches the
cruise altitude entered in the MCDU USE MAN PITCH TRIM
if a selected speed was preset in the MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY

PERF CRUISE page.
CHECK APP SEL
DECELERATE
VERT DISCON AHEAD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | Speed Sel | Section 13.3.58
Flight Mode Annunciations | More Drag | Section 13.3.59

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S pECIal M EssagEs - M OrE D rag Previous Section
The MORE DRAG annunciation may be A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
displayed when the DES mode is engaged Special Messages

and either:
MACH SEL
The aircraft is above the vertical SPEED SEL

profile and the predicted intercept
MORE DRAG
point is less than 2 miles from the
next vertical constraint, or SET GREEN DOT SPEED
Managed speed is engaged and the SET MANAGE SPEED

aircraft enters a decelerating
SET HOLD SPEED
segment which requires the use of
speed brakes. USE MAN PITCH TRIM
MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY
CHECK APP SEL
DECELERATE
VERT DISCON AHEAD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | More Drag | Section 13.3.59
Flight Mode Annunciations | Set Green Dot Speed | Section 13.3.60

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S pECIal M EssagEs - S ET G rEEN D OT S pEEd Previous Section
The FMGS is in an engine-out mode, A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT

AP/FD/ATHR Status
selected speed is active, FCU selected Special Messages

speed is less than green dot minus 10
MACH SEL
knots, and ALT* is not engaged. Also
appears if the FCU selected speed is SPEED SEL
greater than green dot +10 knots and the MORE DRAG
vertical mode is other than ALT* or ALT.
SET GREEN DOT SPEED
Message also appears on MCDU. SET MANAGE SPEED
SET HOLD SPEED
USE MAN PITCH TRIM
MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY
CHECK APP SEL
DECELERATE
VERT DISCON AHEAD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | Set Green Dot Speed | Section 13.3.60
Flight Mode Annunciations | Set Manage Speed | Section 13.3.61

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S pECIal M EssaGEs - S ET M aNaGE S pEEd Previous Section
The airplane is in selected speed and has A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
just entered the: Special Messages
Cruise phase without a preselected MACH SEL
speed entered, or SPEED SEL

Descent phase without a preselected
MORE DRAG
speed entered
SET GREEN DOT SPEED
SET MANAGE SPEED
SET HOLD SPEED
USE MAN PITCH TRIM
MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY
CHECK APP SEL
DECELERATE
VERT DISCON AHEAD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | Set Manage Speed | Section 13.3.61
Flight Mode Annunciations | Set Hold Speed | Section 13.3.62

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S pECIal M EssagEs - S ET H Old S pEEd Previous Section
The airplane is in selected speed, a holding A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
pattern has been entered in the flight plan, Special Messages

the airplane is less than 30 seconds from
MACH SEL
the deceleration point, and the FCU-
selected speed differs by more than 5 knots SPEED SEL
from the FMGS computed holding speed. MORE DRAG
Message also appears on MCDU. SET GREEN DOT SPEED
SET MANAGE SPEED
SET HOLD SPEED
USE MAN PITCH TRIM
MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY
CHECK APP SEL
DECELERATE
VERT DISCON AHEAD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | Set Hold Speed | Section 13.3.62
Flight Mode Annunciations | USE MAN PITCH TRIM | Section 13.3.63

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S pECIal M EssaGEs - U sE M aN P ITCh T rIm Previous Section
Automatic pitch trim is inoperative and the A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
flight controls have reverted to direct law in Special Messages

pitch as well as in roll.
MACH SEL
For example, a jammed stabilizer or flight SPEED SEL

control ELAC 1 and 2 computer faults can
MORE DRAG
cause flight controls to default to alternate
law. Then when the landing gear is SET GREEN DOT SPEED
extended pitch and roll revert to direct law, SET MANAGE SPEED
as indicated by the amber color USE
SET HOLD SPEED
MANUAL PITCH TRIM message.
USE MAN PITCH TRIM
MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY
CHECK APP SEL
DECELERATE
VERT DISCON AHEAD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | USE MAN PITCH TRIM | Section 13.3.63
Flight Mode Annunciations | MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY | Section 13.3.64

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S pECIal M EssaGEs - M aN P ITCh T rIm O NlY Previous Section
Flight controls are in mechanical backup. A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
Elevators are not available for pitch control. Special Messages

Manual pitch trim (stabilizer), throttles, and
MACH SEL
rudders are the only means for controlling
flight. SPEED SEL
MORE DRAG
SET GREEN DOT SPEED
SET MANAGE SPEED
SET HOLD SPEED
USE MAN PITCH TRIM
MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY
CHECK APP SEL
DECELERATE
VERT DISCON AHEAD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY | Section 13.3.64
Flight Mode Annunciations | CHECK APP SEL | Section 13.3.65

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

S pECIal M EssaGEs - C hECk A pp S El Previous Section
The airplane is less than 100 miles from A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
AP/FD/ATHR Status
T/D, or in the descent or approach phase, a Special Messages

nonprecision approach has been selected
MACH SEL
from the database, and the pilots have
tuned an ILS frequency in the RADIO NAV SPEED SEL
page. MORE DRAG
CHECK APP SEL message also appears in SET GREEN DOT SPEED
the MCDU. SET MANAGE SPEED
SET HOLD SPEED
USE MAN PITCH TRIM
MAN PITCH TRIM ONLY
CHECK APP SEL
DECELERATE
VERT DISCON AHEAD

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | CHECK APP SEL | Section 13.3.65
MCDU | Climb Page Preflight - Active Mode Speed Target | Section 14.5.17

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C LIMB P AGE P rEFLIGHT - A CTIvE M ODE S pEED T ArGET S ECTION 14.5.17

Indicates the active mode speed target in Previous Section
green (managed or selected). Cannot be Description

modified through this field.
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Next/Previous Phase
Cost Index
Managed Speed
Climb Page - Active

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Preflight - Active Mode Speed Target | Section 14.5.17
MCDU | Climb Page Preflight - Cost Index | Section 14.5.18

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C LIMB P aGE P rEFLIGHT - C OsT I NdEx S ECTION 14.5.18

Displays cost index in blue. Can be entered Previous Section
on INIT page A, defaulted from database, Description

or inserted manually in this field.
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Next/Previous Phase
Cost Index
Managed Speed
Climb Page - Active

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Preflight - Cost Index | Section 14.5.18
MCDU | Climb Page Preflight - Managed Speed | Section 14.5.19

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lImB P AGE P rEFlIGHT - M ANAGEd S pEEd S ECTION 14.5.19

Displays in green, the optimum speed in Previous Section
terms of time and cost index related to Description

active flight plan, wind data, cruise
TO Page - Preflight
altitude, and airplane gross weight.
Managed speed is limited by SPD LIM, SPD Check TO Data
CSTR, or time constraint, if any. When Climb Page - Preflight

managed speed is active, values display in
Next/Previous Phase
large font.
Cost Index
Managed Speed
Climb Page - Active

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Preflight - Managed Speed | Section 14.5.19
MCDU | Climb Page Preflight - Preselected Speed Entry | Section 14.5.20

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C LImB P aGE P rEfLIGhT - P rEsELECTEd S pEEd E NTrY S ECTION 14.5.20

Allows a preselected speed entry prior to Previous Section
acceleration altitude. The speed bug moves Description

from V2 (managed) to the preselected
TO Page - Preflight
speed (selected) at the acceleration
altitude. The FCU SPD/MACH window Check TO Data
displays the preselected speed. If a Climb Page - Preflight

preselected speed was not entered, the
Next/Previous Phase
speed bug goes to 250 knots below 10,000
feet. Active Mode Speed Target
Cost Index
Managed Speed
Climb Page - Active

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Preflight - Preselected Speed Entry | Section 14.5.20
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Speed Target | Section 14.5.22

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C LIMB P AGE A CTIvE - S pEED T ArGET S ECTION 14.5.22

Current speed targets for both managed Previous Section
and selected speed. Description
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Next Phase
Speed Target
Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
UTC and DEST EFOB
Target Altitude

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Speed Target | Section 14.5.22
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Activate Appr Phase | Section 14.5.23

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lImB P agE A CTIvE - A CTIvaTE A pprOaCh P hasE S ECTION 14.5.23

Appears when displayed page is active. First Previous Section
push causes CONFIRM APPR PHASE prompt Description

to appear; second push activates the APPR
TO Page - Preflight
PHASE.
Check TO Data
If the approach phase is not confirmed, the
CONFIRM APPR PHASE prompt reverts to
the ACTIVATE APPR PHASE prompt when a Climb Page - Active
mode key or line select key other than 6L is Next Phase

pushed, or if a flight phase transition
Speed Target
occurs.
Activate Appr Phase
If the approach phase is activated
Confirm Appr Phase
inadvertently, reentering the CRZ FL into
the PROG page restores the climb phase. UTC and DEST EFOB
Target Altitude
Click on LS 6L to confirm approach phase.

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Activate Appr Phase | Section 14.5.23
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Confirm Appr Phase | Section 14.5.23A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lImB P agE A CTIvE - C ONfIrm A pprOaCh P hasE S ECTION 14.5.23A

After CONFIRM APPR PHASE prompt Previous Section
appears; second push activates the APPR Description

PHASE.
TO Page - Preflight
If the approach phase is not confirmed, the Check TO Data

the ACTIVATE APPR PHASE prompt when a
mode key or line select key other than 6L is Climb Page - Active
pushed, or if a flight phase transition Next Phase

occurs.
Speed Target
If the approach phase is activated Activate Appr Phase

Confirm Appr Phase
the PROG page restores the climb phase.
UTC and DEST EFOB
Click on LS 6L to activate approach phase.
Target Altitude

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Confirm Appr Phase | Section 14.5.23A
MCDU | Climb Page Active - UTC and DEST EFOB | Section 14.5.24

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C LIMb P aGE A CTIvE - UTC aND DEST EFOB S ECTION 14.5.24

Before takeoff, displays the flight time to Previous Section
destination and the predicted landing fuel. Description
After takeoff, it displays the predicted TO Page - Preflight
arrival time at destination (UTC) and the Check TO Data

predicted landing fuel.
If the pilots enter an estimated takeoff time, Climb Page - Active

the predicted arrival time (UTC) at
Next Phase
destination displays automatically.
Speed Target
Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
UTC and DEST EFOB
Target Altitude

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Active - UTC and DEST EFOB | Section 14.5.24
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Target Altitude | Section 14.5.25

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C LIMB P AGE A CTIvE - T ArGET A LTITudE S ECTION 14.5.25

Displays the target altitude for the Previous Section
predictions provided in 3R, 4R, or 5R. Description

Defaults to FCU altitude. Can be modified
TO Page - Preflight
to any altitude at or below the cruise flight
level. Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Next Phase
Speed Target
Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
UTC and DEST EFOB
Target Altitude

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Climb Page Active - Target Altitude | Section 14.5.25
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Activate Approach Phase | Section 14.5.31A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE P agE A CTIvE - A CTIvaTE A pprOaCh P hasE S ECTION 14.5.31A


TO Page - Preflight
PHASE.
Check TO Data
mode key or line select key other than 6L is Cruise Page - Preflight
occurs.
Next Phase
Activate Appr Phase
the PROG page restores the climb phase. Confirm Appr Phase
Act Mode
Cost Index
Computed Speed
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Activate Approach Phase | Section 14.5.31A
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Confirm Approach Phase | Section 14.5.31B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE P agE A CTIvE - C ONfIrm A pprOaCh P hasE S ECTION 14.5.31B


PHASE.
TO Page - Preflight

pushed, or if a flight phase transition Cruise Page - Preflight

occurs.
If the approach phase is activated Next Phase

Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
Act Mode
Cost Index
Computed Speed
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Confirm Approach Phase | Section 14.5.31B
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Act Mode | Section 14.5.31C

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE P AGE A CTIvE - A CT M ODE S ECTION 14.5.31C

Current speed mode for the cruise Previous Section
computation, either managed or selected. Description
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Next Phase
Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
Act Mode
Cost Index
Computed Speed
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Act Mode | Section 14.5.31C
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Cost Index | Section 14.5.32

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C ruIsE P AGE A CTIvE - C OsT I NDEx S ECTION 14.5.32

Pilot-entered cost index. Typically 0 to 100 Previous Section
cost index is used. Description
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Next Phase
Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
Act Mode
Cost Index
Computed Speed
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Cruise Page Active - Cost Index | Section 14.5.32
MCDU | Descent Page Active - Activate Appr Phase | Section 14.5.36

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT P agE A CTIvE - A CTIvaTE A ppr P hasE S ECTION 14.5.36


TO Page - Preflight
PHASE.
Check TO Data
mode key or line select key other than 6L is Cruise Page - Preflight
occurs.
the PROG page restores the climb phase. Description
Activate Appr Phase

Confirm Appr Phase
Target Altitude
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Descent Page Active - Activate Appr Phase | Section 14.5.36
MCDU | Descent Page Active - Confirm Approach Phase | Section 14.5.37

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT P agE A CTIvE - C ONfIrm A pprOaCh P hasE S ECTION 14.5.37


PHASE.
TO Page - Preflight

pushed, or if a flight phase transition Cruise Page - Preflight

occurs.
If the approach phase is activated Descent Page - Preflight

Description
Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
Target Altitude
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Descent Page Active - Confirm Approach Phase | Section 14.5.37
MCDU | Descent Page Active - Target Altitude | Section 14.5.38

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT P AGE A CTIvE - T ArGET A LTITudE S ECTION 14.5.38

Displays the altitude to which the Previous Section
predictions in lines 3R, 4R, or 5R are Description

referenced.
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Description
Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
Target Altitude
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Descent Page Active - Target Altitude | Section 14.5.38
MCDU | Descent Page Active - Performance Predictions | Section 14.5.39

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
D EsCENT P aGE A CTIvE - P ErFOrmaNCE P rEdICTIONs S ECTION 14.5.39

Displays the predicted ETA and the distance Previous Section
required to reach the altitude shown on line Description

2R. The predictions are paired to the lines
TO Page - Preflight
on the left side of the screen.
Check TO Data
Line 3R displays predicted descent
performance for speed.
Climb Page - Active
performance for selected speed/Mach.
performance for EXP DES.
The line corresponding to the active mode
Description
displays in large font.
Activate Appr Phase
Confirm Appr Phase
Target Altitude
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Descent Page Active - Performance Predictions | Section 14.5.39
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - QNH | Section 14.5.41

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCh P aGE P rEFLIGhT - QNH S ECTION 14.5.41

Displays pilot-entered QNH in either In/Hg Previous Section
or hPa at destination. Beyond 180 NM of Description

the destination, brackets display. Within
TO Page - Preflight
180 NM, amber boxes appear.
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
QNH
Temperature
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Mag Wind
Trans FL
Vapp
F, S, Clean Speeds
Vls
Go Around Page
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - QNH | Section 14.5.41
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Temperature | Section 14.5.42

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCH P aGE P rEFLIGHT - T EMpEraTurE S ECTION 14.5.42

Displays pilot-entered temperature at Previous Section
destination (entered in degrees C). Prior to Description

pilot entry, brackets display. Used to refine
TO Page - Preflight
the computation of the descent profile.
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
QNH
Temperature
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Mag Wind
Trans FL
Vapp
F, S, Clean Speeds
Vls
Go Around Page
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Temperature | Section 14.5.42
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Mag Wind | Section 14.5.43

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCH P aGE P rEFLIGHT - M aG W IND S ECTION 14.5.43

Allows pilots to enter steady-state magnetic Previous Section
winds (ATIS or ATC). Description
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
QNH
Temperature
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Mag Wind
Trans FL
Vapp
F, S, Clean Speeds
Vls
Go Around Page
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Mag Wind | Section 14.5.43
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Trans FL | Section 14.5.44

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCH P aGE P rEFLIGHT - T raNs FL S ECTION 14.5.44

Displays transition altitude based on the Previous Section
destination airport. Can be modified at any Description

time.
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
QNH
Temperature
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Mag Wind
Trans FL
Vapp
F, S, Clean Speeds
Vls
Go Around Page
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Trans FL | Section 14.5.44
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Vapp | Section 14.5.45

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCH P agE P rEfLIgHT - V app S ECTION 14.5.45

Minimum speed the airplane will fly in the Previous Section
approach phase of flight if managed speed Description

is active. It is computed by the FMGC
TO Page - Preflight
based upon predicted landing weight until
approach phase activation. After approach Check TO Data
phase activation, it is based on current Climb Page - Preflight

weight. VAPP appears in small font if
Climb Page - Active
computed by the FMGC. It appears in large
font when modified by the pilot and will not Cruise Page - Preflight
change until modified or cleared by the Cruise Page - Active

pilot.
QNH
Temperature
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Mag Wind
Trans FL
Vapp
F, S, Clean Speeds
Vls
Go Around Page - Active
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Vapp | Section 14.5.45
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - F, S, Clean Speeds | Section 14.5.46

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCH P aGE P rEfLIGHT - F, S, C LEaN S pEEds S ECTION 14.5.46

Displays F speed, S speed, and green dot Previous Section
speed for the predicted landing weight. Description
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
QNH
Temperature
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Mag Wind
Trans FL
Vapp
F, S, Clean Speeds
Vls
Go Around Page
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - F, S, Clean Speeds | Section 14.5.46
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Vls | Section 14.5.47

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCH P agE P rEflIgHT - V ls S ECTION 14.5.47

Computed by the FMGC for the predicted Previous Section
landing weight and the selected landing Description

configuration (3 or FULL). Cannot be
TO Page - Preflight
modified by the pilots. VREF equals VLS for
landing configuration FULL. Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
QNH
Temperature
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Mag Wind
Trans FL
Vapp
F, S, Clean Speeds
Vls
Go Around Page
MCDU | Approach Page Preflight - Vls | Section 14.5.47
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Active - MDA | Section 14.5.49

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCH P aGE A CTIvE - MDA S ECTION 14.5.49

Allows entry of barometric minimums by the Previous Section
pilot for all CAT I ILS/nonprecision Description

approaches.
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Final
MDA
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
DH
Ldg Config 3
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Active - MDA | Section 14.5.49
MCDU | Approach Page Active - DH | Section 14.5.50

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A pprOaCH P aGE A CTIvE - DH S ECTION 14.5.50

Allows entry of radio altitude minimums by Previous Section
the pilot for CAT II/III approaches. Description
TO Page - Preflight
Check TO Data
Climb Page - Active
Final
MDA
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
DH
Ldg Config 3
Go Around Page
Next Section
MCDU | Approach Page Active - DH | Section 14.5.50
MCDU | Position Monitor Page | Section 14.7.2

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P OsITION M ONITOr P agE S ECTION 14.7.2

FMGC 1 - Position computed by FMGC 1. Previous Section
The mode of computation (e.g., 3IRS / Data Index Pages

GPS) indicates the number of IRSs used to
Data Index Page 1
determine the mix position and the type of
updating. Description

FMGC 2 - Position computed by FMGC 2.
Selected NavAids Page
GPIRS - GPS position computed by the
onside FMGC.
IRS Monitor Page
MIX IRS - The weighted mean IRS position
IRS1 Page
computed by the onside FMGC using the
available IRSs. GPS Monitor Page
A/C Status Page

IRS NAV 1, 2, 3 - IRS position deviations in
nautical miles, from the onside FMGC Software Status Page
position, given for each IRS. The IRS mode Closest Airports Page 1
also displays and may be INVAL, ALIGN,
Closest Airports Page 2
NAV, or ATT. Deviation displays only if the
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
IRS is in the NAV mode. Equi-Time Point Page
Data Index Page 2

FREEZE - Line select 6L to freeze display
display for comparison of position or Next Section
navigation information.
SEL NAVAIDS - Line select 6R to access the

SELECTED NAVAIDS page.
MCDU | Position Monitor Page | Section 14.7.2
MCDU | Selected NavAids Page | Section 14.7.2A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S ElECTEd N av A Ids P agE S ECTION 14.7.2A

LINE 1L - Displays the navaid tuned for Previous Section
display purposes with the associated tuning Data Index Pages

mode (AUTO, MAN, or RMP) for the onside
Data Index Page 1
FMGC. Also shown on the RADIO NAV
page. Description

LINE 2L/3L - Indicates navaids auto-tuned
by the onside FMGC for radio position Selected NavAids Page
computation. Blank if NAV is selected on Position Frozen Page

the RMPs.
IRS Monitor Page
LINE 4L - Displays the tuned ILS with the IRS1 Page

associated tuning mode.
GPS Monitor Page
LINE 5L - Manually selects or deselects A/C Status Page

selected radio navigation for position
Software Status Page
computation. Upon transition to done
phase, the prompt returns to DESELECT. Closest Airports Page 1

*GPS - Manually selects or deselects GPS
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
for position computation. Upon transition to Equi-Time Point Page
done phase, the prompt returns to Data Index Page 2

DESELECT.
Next Section
RETURN - Line select 6L will return display

to POSITION MONITOR page.
DESELECT - Deselects entered navaid at

LINE 1R. Once deselected, this navaid can
no longer be manually tuned using the
MCDU | Selected NavAids Page | Section 14.7.2A
ident or auto-tuned for display or position
computation purposes until the deselection
is cleared as follows:
Manually by a CLR action into this

field
Automatically upon transition to done
or preflight phase, or upon
activation of the second database
Up to six stations may be deselected.
MCDU | Position Frozen at Page | Section 14.7.2B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P OsITION F rOzEN aT P aGE S ECTION 14.7.2B

UNFREEZE - Freezes all of the data Previous Section
displayed on the page. Once frozen, the Data Index Pages

title of the page specifies the time at which
Data Index Page 1
the data was frozen. Selecting the
UNFREEZE prompt at 6L or another Description
function key restores active position Position Monitor Page

monitoring.
Selected NavAid Page
SEL NAVAIDS - Line select 6R to access the Position Frozen Page

SELECTED NAVAIDS page.
IRS Monitor Page
IRS1 Page
GPS Monitor Page
A/C Status Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Data Index Page 2
Next Section
MCDU | Position Frozen at Page | Section 14.7.2B
MCDU | IRS Monitor Page | Section 14.7.3

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
IRS M ONITOr P aGE S ECTION 14.7.3

The IRS Monitor page displays available IRS Previous Section
that are navigating. To display expanded Data Index Pages

data for IRS line select desire IRS. For
Data Index Page 1
example, Line select 1L to access expanded
data for IRS1. Description

key. Selected NavAid Page
IRS Monitor Page
IRS1 Page
GPS Monitor Page
A/C Status Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Data Index Page 2
Next Section
MCDU | IRS Monitor Page | Section 14.7.3
MCDU | IRS Page | Section 14.7.3A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
IRS P agE S ECTION 14.7.3A

The IRS page displays expanded data for Previous Section
the selected IRS. Data Index Pages
POSITION - Current computed IRS position. Data Index Page 1
Description
THDG/MHDG - True track, true heading, and
magnetic heading computed by the IRS. Position Monitor Page

WIND - Current wind.
GS - Current ground speed.
IRS Monitor Page
GPIRS ACCUR - Current horizontal GPS - IRS1 Page

IRS accuracy in feet.
GPS Monitor Page
FREEZE - Freezes all of the data displayed A/C Status Page

on the page. Once frozen, the title of the
page specifies the time at which the data
was frozen. Selecting the UNFREEZE Closest Airports Page 1
prompt at 6L or another function key Closest Airports Page 2

restores active IRS monitoring. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
NEXT IRS - Displays next IRS Monitor page. Data Index Page 2
This page is accessed by selecting the DATA Next Section
key.
MCDU | IRS Page | Section 14.7.3A
MCDU | GPS Monitor Page | Section 14.7.4

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
GPS M ONITOr P agE S ECTION 14.7.4

The GPS Monitor page provides GPS 1 and Previous Section
GPS 2 position, true track, position Data Index Pages

accuracy level, GPS altitude, number of
Data Index Page 1
satellites being tracked, current mode of
operation, and groundspeed. Description

GPS POSITION - Current computed GPS
position. Selected NavAid Page

TTRK - True track; UTC time; and GS
ground speed. IRS Monitor Page
IRS1 Page
MERIT - Current horizontal GPS accuracy in
feet and GPS altitude. GPS Monitor Page
A/C Status Page

MODE/SAT - The GPS current MMR mode
and the number of satellites being tracked. Software Status Page

key. Closest Airports Page 2
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Data Index Page 2
Next Section
MCDU | GPS Monitor Page | Section 14.7.4
MCDU | A/C Status Page | Section 14.7.5

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
A/C S TaTus P agE S ECTION 14.7.5

The status page is reviewed during the Previous Section
initial FMGC setup. It displays information Data Index Pages

on database loads and current information.
Data Index Page 1
ENG - Displays engine model; V2527-A5 Description

(A319: V2522-A5).
ACTIVE NAV DATA BASE - Displays the valid Selected NavAid Page
date range for the primary database and
the database load.
IRS Monitor Page
SECOND NAV DATA BASE - Displays the
IRS1 Page
secondary database and the next date
range for the data. GPS Monitor Page
A/C Status Page

CHG CODE - The change code must be
entered to change the performance factor. Software Status Page
The CHG CODE is UAL in this example. Closest Airports Page 1
IDLE/PERF - The performance factor used to Closest Airports Page 2
correct the performance computation to < PREVIOUS NEXT >

actual airplane historical performance.
Data Index Page 2
SOFTWARE STATUS/XLOAD - Allows pilots Next Section

to review the current database and
software loaded in the FMGC. Line select
6R to view SOFTWARE STATUS/XLOAD
page.
MCDU | A/C Status Page | Section 14.7.5
MCDU | Software Status Page | Section 14.7.5A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S OfTwarE S TaTus P agE S ECTION 14.7.5A

The SOFTWARE STATUS/XLOAD page title is Previous Section
P/N XLOAD. It consist of seven pages. LS Data Index Pages

6L PREVOUS PAGE - Allows pilots to review
Data Index Page 1
the current database and software loaded
in the FMGC. Line select 6R to view Description
SOFTWARE STATUS/XLOAD page. Position Monitor Page
This page is accessed by selecting the DATA Selected NavAid Page
key. Position Frozen Page
IRS Monitor Page
IRS1 Page
GPS Monitor Page
A/C Status Page

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Data Index Page 2
Next Section
MCDU | Software Status Page | Section 14.7.5A
MCDU | Closest Airports Page 1 | Section 14.7.6

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lOsEsT A IrpOrTs P aGE S ECTION 14.7.6

The closest airport page will display the Previous Section
nearest four airports and provide bearing, Data Index Pages

distance and ETA information to those
Data Index Page 1
airports. The second page is accessed
through the EFOB/WINDS prompt and Description
provides fuel and wind information. The Position Monitor Page

wind component can be entered by the
pilot.
AIRPORTS - Displays the closest four
IRS Monitor Page
airports with bearing/distances and arrival
time information. IRS1 Page
GPS Monitor Page

BRACKETS - Allow for entry of an airport
not included in the list of four closest A/C Status Page
airports. Software Status Page
EFOB/WIND - Selects a second information Closest Airports Page 1
page and freezes the positional Closest Airports Page 2

information. Line select 6R to view second < PREVIOUS NEXT >
page.
Data Index Page 2
EFOB - Displays estimated arrival fuel at
Next Section
each divert airport.

key.
MCDU | Closest Airports Page 1 | Section 14.7.6
MCDU | Closest Airports Page 2 | Section 14.7.6A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
C lOsEsT A IrpOrTs P aGE 2 S ECTION 14.7.6A

The closest airport page will display the Previous Section
nearest four airports and provide fuel and Data Index Pages
wind information to those airports. The
Data Index Page 1
wind component can be entered by the
pilot. Description

AIRPORTS - Displays the closest four
airports with fuel and wind information. Selected NavAid Page

RETURN - Selects first closest airports page
and unfreezes the positional information. IRS Monitor Page
Line select 6L to view first page. IRS1 Page
EFOB - Displays estimated arrival fuel at GPS Monitor Page
each divert airport. A/C Status Page
EFF WIND - Displays computed Software Status Page
headwind/tailwind component to the divert Closest Airports Page 1

airport. Value can be modified.
This page is accessed by selecting the DATA < PREVIOUS NEXT >
key.
Data Index Page 2
Next Section
MCDU | Closest Airports Page 2 | Section 14.7.6A
MCDU | Equi-Time Point Page | Section 14.7.7

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
E QuI -T IME P OINT P aGE S ECTION 14.7.7

The page allows the pilot to set up a point Previous Section
of equal time using two points along the Data Index Pages
route of flight.
Data Index Page 1
A/C TO LINES - Lines 1 and 3 display the Description

equal time reference points. The default
reference points are the DEP and DEST
airports, however either can be modified to Selected NavAid Page
any database waypoint or airport. Displays Position Frozen Page

bearing/distance and arrival time from
IRS Monitor Page
present position to the reference point.
IRS1 Page
TRU WIND - Displays true wind, which must
GPS Monitor Page
be manually entered, and is used to
compute the equi-time point (ETP) and the A/C Status Page
bearing/distance and arrival time from the Software Status Page

ETP to the reference point.
END POINT FOR ETP - Calculation See Closest Airports Page 2

number 1. < PREVIOUS NEXT >
ETP LOCATION - Location of the ETP from Data Index Page 2

the nearest waypoint on the route of flight.
Next Section
A/C to ETP - Distance and ETA from present

position along the flight plan path to the
ETP.

key.
MCDU | Equi-Time Point Page | Section 14.7.7
MCDU | Waypoint Page | Section 14.7.10

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W aYpOINT P aGE S ECTION 14.7.10

Displays blank waypoint field. When pilot Previous Section
inserts a database defined waypoint Data Index Pages

identifier into 1L field then the Lat/Long
Data Index Page 1
position is displayed. In this example, the
pilot has already typed in HAFNR into the Data Index Page 2
scratch pad. Description
Line Select 1L to insert HAFNR. Waypoint Page
Waypoint HAFNR
New Waypoint Page
Store Waypoint
Pilot Waypoint Page
NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | Waypoint Page | Section 14.7.10
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | Waypoint HAFNR | Section 14.7.10A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
W aYpOINT H aFNr S ECTION 14.7.10A

Displays blank waypoint field. When pilot Previous Section
inserts a database defined waypoint Data Index Pages

identifier into 1L field then the Lat/Long
Data Index Page 1
position is displayed.
Data Index Page 2
Description
Waypoint Page
Waypoint HAFNR
New Waypoint Page
Store Waypoint
Pilot Waypoint Page
NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | Waypoint HAFNR | Section 14.7.10A
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | New Waypoint Page | Section 14.7.11

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
N Ew W aYpOINT P agE S ECTION 14.7.11

When the Pilots Waypoints prompt is Previous Section
selected from Data Index 2/2 page and no Data Index Pages
pilot waypoints have been previously
Data Index Page 1
created then the New Waypoint Page is
displayed. Data Index Page 2
Description
When filling in the box prompts, use the
same format with the dashes (−) and Waypoint Page
slashes (/) in same position. Waypoint HAFNR
Named waypoints selected from the New Waypoint Page
navigation database or waypoints defined Store Waypoint

by LAT/LONG coordinates are significantly
Pilot Waypoint Page
more accurate than PBD or PBX created
waypoints. NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
For example, the next illustration depicts a
new waypoint called FISH. New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | New Waypoint Page | Section 14.7.11
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | Store Waypoint | Section 14.7.11A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S TOrE W aYpOINT S ECTION 14.7.11A

STORE - After entering the desired name Previous Section
and position a STORE prompt appears. The Data Index Pages

FMGC computes the new waypoint
Data Index Page 1
coordinates if inserted as PLACE / BRG /
DIST or PLACE-BRG / PLACE-BRG. Line Data Index Page 2
select 6R to store waypoint Description
RETURN - Will erase the entered data and Waypoint Page
return to Data Index page 2/2. Click here Waypoint HAFNR

to view RETURN function.
New Waypoint Page
Store Waypoint
Pilot Waypoint Page
NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | Store Waypoint | Section 14.7.11A
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | Pilot Waypoint Page | Section 14.7.12

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P IlOT W aypOINT P aGE S ECTION 14.7.12

Stored waypoints are listed by number and Previous Section
is a function of the order of insertion into Data Index Pages

the database. In this example only one
Data Index Page 1
waypoint has been created by the pilot.
Data Index Page 2
Each stored waypoint may be individually
Description
deleted from the database using CLR
function on 1L (ident field). Waypoint Page
Waypoint HAFNR
NEW WAYPOINT - Displays new waypoint
page. New Waypoint Page
Store Waypoint
DELETE ALL - Deletes all waypoints stored
by the pilots except those currently used in Pilot Waypoint Page
the active or secondary flight plan (F-PLN NavAid Page

ELEMENT RETAINED message displays in
NavAid ORD
scratchpad).
New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | Pilot Waypoint Page | Section 14.7.12
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | NavAid Page | Section 14.7.13

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
N Av A Id P AGE S ECTION 14.7.13

Displays blank navaid field. When a pilot Previous Section
inserts a database defined navaid identifier Data Index Pages

into 1L field then the navaid information is
Data Index Page 1
displayed.
Data Index Page 2
Click here to insert the ORD navaid
Description
identifier into 1L.
Waypoint Page
Waypoint HAFNR
New Waypoint Page
Store Waypoint
Pilot Waypoint Page
NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | NavAid Page | Section 14.7.13
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | NavAid ORD | Section 14.7.13A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
N av A Id ORD S ECTION 14.7.13A

CLASS - Available classes include; VOR, Previous Section
DME, VOR DME, VORTAC, NDB, LOC, or Data Index Pages

ILS.
Data Index Page 1
LAT/LONG - Displays LAT/LONG co- Data Index Page 2

ordinates.
Description
FREQ - Displays NAVAID radio frequency. Waypoint Page
ELV - Displays elevation of the navaid in Waypoint HAFNR
feet. Not displayed for NDB. New Waypoint Page
FIG OF MERIT - Defines the maximum Store Waypoint
range the FMGS will auto-tune a VOR DME, Pilot Waypoint Page
VORTAC, or DME for display or position
NavAid Page
computation.
NavAid ORD
0: Up to 40 NM
New NavAid Page
1: Up to 70 NM
2: Up to 130 NM Store NavAid
3: Up to 250 NM < PREVIOUS NEXT >

Pilot NavAid Page
STATION DEC - Displays magnetic variation Runway Page
of the navaid (only for VOR, VOR DME, or KLGA22 Runway

VORTAC).
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | NavAid ORD | Section 14.7.13A
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | New NavAid Page | Section 14.7.14

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
N Ew N Av A Id P AGE S ECTION 14.7.14

When the Pilots Navaids prompt is selected Previous Section
from Data Index 2/2 page and no pilot Data Index Pages
navaids have been created then the New
Data Index Page 1
Navaid Page is displayed.
Data Index Page 2
Click here to insert the SUM navaid
Description
identifier into 1L.
Waypoint Page
RETURN - To return to Data Idex page 2/2
Waypoint HAFNR
LS 5R.
New Waypoint Page
Store Waypoint
Pilot Waypoint Page
NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | New NavAid Page | Section 14.7.14
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | Store NavAid | Section 14.7.14A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S TOrE N av A Id S ECTION 14.7.14A

This page enables definition of up to 20 Previous Section
navaids. The IDENT, CLASS, and LAT/LONG Data Index Pages

fields are required. If applicable, enter
Data Index Page 1
FREQ, ELV, FIG OF MERIT, and STATION
DEC. For ILSs, enter the identifier of the Data Index Page 2
associated runway and the ILS course. Description
Runways and ILSs have a one-to-one Waypoint Page
relationship in the database. If an ILS is Waypoint HAFNR

defined first, inserting the runway identifier
New Waypoint Page
will bring up the NEW RUNWAY page with
the ILS identifier and runway course Store Waypoint
already filled in. The runway course can be Pilot Waypoint Page
modified, if necessary. Once the runway
NavAid Page
has been defined, the NEW NAVAID page
will reappear NavAid ORD
New NavAid Page

RETURN - Will erase the entered data and
return to Data Index page 2/2. Click here Store NavAid
to view RETURN function. < PREVIOUS NEXT >

Pilot NavAid Page
STORE - Appears when all amber boxes are Runway Page
filled. Line select 6R to store waypoint. KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | Store NavAid | Section 14.7.14A
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | Pilots NavAid Page | Section 14.7.15

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P IlOTs N av A Id P aGE S ECTION 14.7.15

Displays or enables deletion of pilot-defined Previous Section
navaids. Each stored navaid may be Data Index Pages

individually deleted from the database
Data Index Page 1
using CLR function on 1L (ident field).
Data Index Page 2
If no pilot navaids have been created then
Description
the New Navaid Page is displayed when the
Pilots Navaids prompt is selected from Data Waypoint Page
Index 2/2 page. Waypoint HAFNR
STORED NAVAIDS - Lists navaids by New Waypoint Page
number in order of insertion. The sequence Store Waypoint

displays in the upper right corner of the
Pilot Waypoint Page
page (e.g., 3/7 indicates the third out of
seven stored). NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
NEW NAVAID - To create a new navaid LS
5R. New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
DELETE ALL - Erases all of the stored
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
navaids except those currently used in the Pilot NavAid Page
active or secondary flight plan - LS 6R. Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | Pilots NavAid Page | Section 14.7.15
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | Runway Page | Section 14.7.16

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
R uNWaY P agE S ECTION 14.7.16

Displays database-defined runway Previous Section
information associated with the identifier Data Index Pages

inserted by the pilot in 1L.
Data Index Page 1
IDENT - Displays the runway identifier. Data Index Page 2

Includes the airport identification and
Description
runway direction using six to seven digits
(e.g., KLGA22). Waypoint Page
Waypoint HAFNR
Click here to insert the KLGA22 identifier
into 1L. New Waypoint Page
Store Waypoint
Pilot Waypoint Page
NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | Runway Page | Section 14.7.16
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | KLGA22 Runway | Section 14.7.16A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
KLGA22 R uNWaY S ECTION 14.7.16A

In this example KLGA runway 22 is Previous Section
displayed. Data Index Pages
IDENT - Displays the runway identifier. Data Index Page 1
Includes the airport identification and Data Index Page 2

runway direction using six to seven digits
Description
(e.g., APRT23L).
Waypoint Page
LAT/LONG - Displays the latitude and
Waypoint HAFNR
longitude of the runway threshold.
New Waypoint Page
LENGTH - Displays the runway length in
Store Waypoint
feet.
Pilot Waypoint Page
ELV - Displays the threshold elevation in
NavAid Page
feet.
NavAid ORD
CRS - Displays the runway course.
New NavAid Page
LS IDENT - Displays the ILS identifier. Store NavAid

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | KLGA22 Runway | Section 14.7.16A
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | New Runway Page | Section 14.7.17

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
N Ew R uNway P aGE S ECTION 14.7.17

When the Pilots Runway prompt is selected Previous Section
from Data Index 2/2 page and no pilot Data Index Pages
runways have been created then the New
Data Index Page 1
Runway Page is displayed.
Data Index Page 2
New Runway page defines runways for
Description
airports that are not in the database. Up to
ten runways may be defined. Because Waypoint Page
these runways are for non-database Waypoint HAFNR

airports, no SIDs or STARs are associated
New Waypoint Page
with the runway. All fields must be filled in
for the STORE prompt to appear. Store Waypoint
Pilot Waypoint Page

Runways and ILSs have a one-to-one
relationship in the database. If the runway NavAid Page
is defined first, the ILS identifier will be NavAid ORD

blank. Inserting the ILS identifier will bring
New NavAid Page
up the NEW NAVAID page with the runway
identifier and ILS course already filled in. Store NavAid
The ILS course can be modified, if < PREVIOUS NEXT >

Pilot NavAid Page
necessary. Once the ILS has been defined,
Runway Page
the NEW RUNWAY page will reappear.
KLGA22 Runway
If the ILS is defined first (on the NEW
New Runway Page
NAVAID page), the NEW RUNWAY page
appears with the ILS identifier and the Store Runway
runway course already filled in. The runway Pilot Runway Page
course can be modified, if necessary. After
New Route Page
a runway is defined, it may be used as a
MCDU | New Runway Page | Section 14.7.17
departure or destination airport by entering Pilots Route Page
the four alpha characters of its identifier. Next Section
MCDU | Store Runway | Section 14.7.17A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
S TOrE R uNWaY S ECTION 14.7.17A

In this example, all runway data has been Previous Section
enetered into the amber boxes. Data Index Pages
STORE - Appears when all amber boxes are Data Index Page 1
filled. Data Index Page 2
Line Select 6R to store the new runway. Description
Waypoint Page
Waypoint HAFNR
New Waypoint Page
Store Waypoint
Pilot Waypoint Page
NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | Store Runway | Section 14.7.17A
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | Pilots Runway Page | Section 14.7.18

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
P IlOTs R uNway P aGE - S TOrEd R uNway P aGE S ECTION 14.7.18

When the Pilots Runway prompt is selected Previous Section
from Data Index 2/2 page and a runway Data Index Pages
has been stored, the STORED RUNWAY
Data Index Page 1
page is then displayed. The STORED
RUNWAY page displays data for the Data Index Page 2
identified stored runway. Description
STORED RUNWAY - Lists the stored runways Waypoint Page
in order of insertion. This number displays Waypoint HAFNR

in the upper right corner of the page (e.g.,
New Waypoint Page
1/10 indicates one out of ten stored
runways). Store Waypoint
Pilot Waypoint Page

NEW RUNWAY - Accesses the NEW RUNWAY
page. NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
DELETE ALL - Erases all of the stored pilot
runways except those currently used in the New NavAid Page
active or secondary flight plan. Store NavAid

< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | Pilots Runway Page | Section 14.7.18
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
MCDU | New Route Page | Section 14.7.19

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
N Ew R OuTE P aGE S ECTION 14.7.19

When the Pilots Route prompt is selected Previous Section
from Data Index 2/2 page and no routes Data Index Pages
are stored, the NEW ROUTE page is
Data Index Page 1
displayed.
Data Index Page 2
ACTIVE F-PLAN - Inserts active flight plan.
Description
Waypoint Page
Waypoint HAFNR
New Waypoint Page
Store Waypoint
Pilot Waypoint Page
NavAid Page
NavAid ORD
New NavAid Page
Store NavAid
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Pilot NavAid Page
Runway Page
KLGA22 Runway
New Runway Page
Store Runway
Pilot Runway Page
New Route Page
MCDU | New Route Page | Section 14.7.19
Pilots Route Page
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT - Captured | Section 13.3.17A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT M ODE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.17A

V ErTICal M ODE - ALT - C apTurED Previous Section
When the FCU altitude is captured the ALT* A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
(capture mode) annunciation is displayed. ALT

Actual airplane vertical speed determines
ALT ARMED
when ALT* annunciates.
ALT CAPTURED
ALT* reverts to V/S (engaged mode) if
ALT ENGAGED
FCU altitude is reset prior to ALT (engaged
mode). ALT CST
V/S -500
When the current altitude and altitude
target (FCU) deviation are less than 20 FPA -3.0
feet, then the ALT (altitude hold) EXP CLB

EXP DES
G/S
OP CLB
OP DES
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
http://www.a320dp.com/A320_DP/nav-autoflight/sys-13.3.17A.html[23.01.2021 23:18:33]
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT - Captured | Section 13.3.17A
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT - Engaged | Section 13.3.17B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT M OdE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.17B

V ErTICal M OdE - ALT - E NGaGEd Previous Section
When engaged, the airplane is at and A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
maintaining the FCU altitude and remains ALT

in ALT if FCU altitude is reset. A/THR, if
ALT ARMED
engaged, is SPEED or MACH.
ALT CAPTURED
When armed, the airplane will level off at
ALT ENGAGED
the FCU altitude in a selected climb or
descent mode. ALT CST
V/S -500
ALT* reverts to V/S (engaged mode) if FCU
altitude is reset prior to ALT (engaged FPA -3.0
mode). EXP CLB
EXP DES
G/S
OP CLB
OP DES
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT - Engaged | Section 13.3.17B
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT CST - Captured | Section 13.3.18A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT M OdE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.18A

V ErTICal M OdE - ALT CST - C apTurEd Previous Section
When a MCDU managed altitude constraint A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
is captured ALT CST* is displayed. ALT

Managed lateral (NAV) and vertical modes
ALT CST
(DES or CLB or FINAL) must be engaged.
Vertical managed modes take into account ALT CST ARMED
altitude and speed constraints. ALT CST CAPTURED
When the current altitude and managed ALT CST ENGAGED
altitude constraint (MCDU) deviation are V/S -500

less than 20 feet, then the ALT CST
FPA -3.0
EXP CLB
EXP DES
G/S
OP CLB
OP DES
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT CST - Captured | Section 13.3.18A
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT CST - Engaged | Section 13.3.18B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal M OdE - ALT CST - E NGaGEd Previous Section
When the current altitude and managed A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
altitude constraint (MCDU) deviation are ALT

less than 20 feet, then the ALT CST
ALT CST
annunciation is displayed, managed lateral
(NAV) and vertical modes (DES or CLB or ALT CST ARMED
FINAL) must be engaged. Vertical managed ALT CST CAPTURED

modes take into account altitude and speed
ALT CST ENGAGED
constraints.
V/S -500
In this example, the ALT CST is engaged
FPA -3.0
and managed DES mode is armed to
continue a descent to the next alitude EXP CLB
constraint. EXP DES
G/S
OP CLB
OP DES
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | ALT CST - Engaged | Section 13.3.18B
Flight Mode Annunciations | G/S - Captured | Section 13.3.23A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT M OdE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.23A

V ErTICal M OdE - G/S - C apTurEd Previous Section
When the glideslope mode is intercepted A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
then the G/S* captured mode annunciation ALT

is displayed, and the green color G/S
ALT CST
engaged mode annunciation is displayed a
few seconds later. V/S -500
FPA -3.0
The glideslope mode may capture prior to
LOC* if glideslope capture conditions are EXP CLB
met. EXP DES
Auto thrust, if engaged, is SPEED. G/S
G/S ARMED
G/S CAPTURED
G/S ENGAGED
OP CLB
OP DES
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | G/S - Captured | Section 13.3.23A
Flight Mode Annunciations | G/S - Engaged | Section 13.3.23B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT M OdE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.23B

V ErTICal M OdE - G/S - E NgagEd Previous Section
When the APPR and ILS/LS buttons are A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
pushed the glideslope mode is armed, and ALT

the armed G/S annunciation (blue color) is
ALT CST
displayed.
V/S -500
When the glideslope is captured the G/S*
FPA -3.0
annunciation is displayed and the green
color G/S engaged mode annunciation is EXP CLB
displayed a few seconds later. EXP DES
The FCU target altitude will not capture G/S
after the glideslope mode is captured. G/S ARMED
Auto thrust, if engaged, is SPEED. G/S CAPTURED
G/S ENGAGED
OP CLB
OP DES
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | G/S - Engaged | Section 13.3.23B
Flight Mode Annunciations | APP NAV | Section 13.3.28A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT M OdE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.28A

L aTEral M OdE - APP NAV Previous Section
SRS

displayed when;
ALT CST

FPA -3.0
EXP CLB
EXP DES

OP DES

DES
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
FINAL
APP NAV
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | APP NAV | Section 13.3.28A
Flight Mode Annunciations | FINAL APP | Section 13.3.28B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS

V ErTICal aNd L aTEral M OdEs - FINAL APP Previous Section
SRS

displayed when;
ALT CST

FPA -3.0
EXP CLB
EXP DES

OP DES

DES
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
FINAL
APP NAV
FINAL APP
LAND
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | FINAL APP | Section 13.3.28B
Flight Mode Annunciations | FLARE | Section 13.3.29A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT M ODE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.29A

V ErTICal aND L aTEral M ODEs - FLARE Previous Section
The FLARE annunciation displays when A/THR VERT LAT APPR STAT
SRS
FLARE mode engages at 40 feet AGL during ALT

an autoland ILS approach. The autopilot
ALT CST
begins the flare maneuver at 30 feet and
the thrust retards to idle. The pilot must V/S -500
manually retard the throttles after landing. FPA -3.0
If the FLARE annunciation is not displayed EXP CLB
by 30 feet, then the airplane cannot EXP DES

autoland and the pilot must execute a go-
G/S
around.
OP CLB
OP DES
CLB
DES
FINAL APP
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
LAND
LAND
FLARE
ROLL OUT
Next Section
Flight Mode Annunciations | FLARE | Section 13.3.29A
Flight Mode Annunciations | LOC - Capture | Section 13.3.33A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT M ODE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.33A

L aTEral M ODE - LOC - C apTurED Previous Section
RWY

TRACK
displayed.
LOC
LOC ARMED
LOC ENGAGED
RWY TRK
GA TRK
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | LOC - Capture | Section 13.3.33A
Flight Mode Annunciations | LOC - Engaged | Section 13.3.33B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIGhT M ODE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.33B

L aTEral M ODE - LOC - E NGaGED Previous Section
RWY

TRACK
displayed.
LOC
LOC ARMED
LOC ENGAGED
RWY TRK
GA TRK
Next Section
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | LOC - Engaged | Section 13.3.33B
Flight Mode Annunciations | NAV - Captured | Section 13.3.34A

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT M OdE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.34A

L aTEral M OdE - NAV - C apTurEd Previous Section
RWY

TRACK

NAV ARMED

NAV ENGAGED
GA TRK
on line 1.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | NAV - Captured | Section 13.3.34A
Flight Mode Annunciations | NAV - Engaged | Section 13.3.34B

TOC
BACK
FWD
INDEX
PANELS
F lIghT M OdE A NNuNCIaTIONs S ECTION 13.3.34B

L aTEral M OdE - NAV - E NgagEd Previous Section
RWY

TRACK

NAV ARMED

NAV ENGAGED
GA TRK
on line 1.
< PREVIOUS NEXT >
Flight Mode Annunciations | NAV - Engaged | Section 13.3.34B

A320 Displays &amp; Panels

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A320 Displays &amp; Panels

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Table of Contents

A320 D ISPLAYS ANd P ANELS

1.0 AIRPLANE GENERAL 9.0 FUEL

2.0 COMMUNICATIONS 10.0 HYDRAULICS

3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING 11.0 ICE AND RAIN

4.0 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT 12.0 LANDING GEAR

5.0 ENGINES AND APU 13.0 NAVIGATION - AUTOFLIGHT

6.0 FIRE PROTECTECTION 14.0 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS 15.0 PNEUMATICS

8.0 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS 16.0 WARNING SYSTEMS

A320 D iSPLAYS AND P ANELS

17.0 I NDEX T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

Index A Index N 2.0 COMMUNICATIONS

Index B Index O 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

4.0 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

Index D Index Q 6.0 FIRE PROTECTECTION

7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

Index G Index T 10.0 HYDRAULICS

11.0 ICE AND RAIN

Index I Index V 13.0 AUTO FLIGHT

Index J Index W 14.0 FLT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Index L Index Y 17.0 INDEX

A320 D iSpLAYS AND P ANELS

I NStRUMENt P ANEL T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

4.0 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

5.0 ENGINES AND APU

6.0 FIRE PROTECTECTION

7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

8.0 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

C ONtROL P EDEStAL O VERHEAD P ANEL 10.0 HYDRAULICS

11.0 ICE AND RAIN

12.0 LANDING GEAR

13.0 AUTO FLIGHT

14.0 FLT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

16.0 WARNING SYSTEMS

Tap on the appropriate picture to view any

the A-320-200 aircraft systems.

A320 D ISPLAYS ANd P ANELS

1.0 A IRPLANE G ENERAL T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

1.2.0 COCKPIT DOOR CONTROLLER PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

4.0 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

1.5.0 SYSTEM LIMITS 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

8.0 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

11.0 ICE AND RAIN

12.0 LANDING GEAR

13.0 AUTO FLIGHT

14.0 FLT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

16.0 WARNING SYSTEMS

A320 D ISPLAYS ANd P ANELS

2.0 C OMMUNIcAtIONS T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

2.2.0 CALLS PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

4.0 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

2.5.0 RECORDER PANEL 7.0 FLIGHT CONTROLS

8.0 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

11.0 ICE AND RAIN

12.0 LANDING GEAR

13.0 AUTO FLIGHT

14.0 FLT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

16.0 WARNING SYSTEMS

A320 D ISPLAYS AND P ANELS

3.0 E LEctRIcAL AND L IGHtING T ABLE OF C ONtENtS

3.2.0 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL 3.0 ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING

A320 Displays & Panels

A320 Displays & Panels